Wagner Solar Technical Handbook 2009 en XXX Technical Handbook TI 101208 1100A500 Web 1

Technical Handbook 2011/2012
Solar Heating. Solar Electricity.

Components, Technology, Installation
Your Contact Persons
English-Speaking Customers
Name / Email Telephone / Fax Function Languages
Alexander.Storek Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-745 Sales Manager

@wagner-solar.com Fax: +49 (0) 6421 8007-845
Emanuelefed.Ostiani Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-787 Technical Support

Max.Werlein Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-714 Technical Support

Julia.Kuhn Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-685 Sales Assistant

Susanne.Boecker Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-759 Sales Assistant,

@wagner-solar.com Fax: +49 (0) 6421 8007-859 Customs Duty
Maren.Thielemann Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-648 Sales Assistant,

@wagner-solar.com Fax: +49 (0) 6421 8007-548 Customer Relations
Nina.Mueller Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-977 Marketing Coordinator

Stefan.Thiesen Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-680 Technical Editor

PV Off-Grid Systems
Name / Email Telephone / Fax Function Languages
Inga.Paetsch Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-392 Sales PV Off-Grid Systems

Peter.Hoenen Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-336 Product Manager and

@wagner-solar.com Fax: +49 (0) 6421 8007-436 Technical Support
PV Off-Grid Systems
Preface
This 2nd edition of the Wagner & Co international technical handbook represents
a solid cross-section of our solar technology products and know how. The last
two years saw the introduction of the newly developed highly economical TRIC A
and F racking systems. The thought out and largely pre-assembled components
allow for exible weather proof and efcient collector installation on any roof.
Another novelty is the new laser welded EURO L collector series, with the high
performance collector EURO L20 AR replacing its predecessor C20 AR. The EURO
L20 AR is the new Wagner & Co gold standard of at-plate collector technology.
Over the last 2 years, many improvements of individual components as well
as ne tuned systems led Wagner&Co to three consecutive victories in major
comparative product tests in Germany. In addition we are proud to have been
nominated for the prestigious German Sustainability Award, so we feel con-
dent that we are steering the right course, with visions also shared by our new
branches in Great Britain and the United States.
Remembering our roots in the environmental and civil rights movements of the
70s, for us solar energy is more than just another technology it is an integral
part of a sustainable lifestyle. Wagner & Co is your one-stop total systems pro-
vider in the eld of solar hot water and heating solutions and a major systems
integrator for solar power installations of any scale.
We hope you will nd the information in this handbook to be useful. Not all
products and components on offer are described here. Please refer to the cur-
rent price list and feel free to inquire with us if you have questions and special
requirements.
How to use this handbook

The information in this handbook is divided into the main section Solar Ther-
mal Energy and an additional section Solar Electricity. Besides that, there are
different categories of documents:
Technical Information
Installation Instructions
Operation Instructions
Planning Documents
Certicates and Records
The table of contents will guide you through the handbook. We strive to keep
the information as complete and up-to-date as possible; however, innovation
often is faster than printed documentation. In order to always make the latest
documents available, we provide a download center in the partner area of our
website at www.wagner-solar.com. Follow the instructions on the website to
log in. There you will nd the latest versions of the documents contained in this
handbook as well as numerous other documents as they become available. In
addition we equipped our distribution centre with a state of the art print-on-
demand (POD) system, thus assuring that always the latest version of technical
documentation will accompany your orders.
If you have any questions or suggestions regarding this handbook: dont hes-
itate to contact the editorial team at editor_int@wagner-solar.com! We always
appreciate your feedback.
We wish you sunny times!
Your team at Wagner & Co, in Fall 2010

Overview
Content 4
Solar Thermal
Solar Collectors 9 1.1
Solar Storage Cylinders 133 1.2
Freshwater Units 201 1.3
Solar Circuit Components 247 1.4
Compact Solar Hot Water Systems 353 1.5
Planning, Start-up, Maintenance 415 1.6
Solar Electricity 469 2
General Business Conditions 517

Content Solar Thermal
1.1 Solar Collectors and Racking Systems

EURO Solar Collector L20 AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
EURO Solar Collector Type C20/C22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Flat Plate Solar Collector EURO L42 HTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
LBM Solar Collector 6 AR / 10 AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
EURO Solar Collector L20 MQ AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
EURO TRIC A On-Roof Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
EURO TRIC F Free Standing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
EURO L20 MQ TRIC A and TRIC F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
EURO C20/L20 In-Roof Installation for Slate and Plain Tile Roongs . . . . . . . . 93
EURO C20/L20 In-Roof Installation for Pantile Roong. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Roof Bracket Kits (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Roof Bracket Kit BS/SF (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Roof Bracket Kit K A2 Hv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Roof Bracket Kit P (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Roof Bracket Kit PM A2 Hv (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
1.2 Solar Storage Cylinders and Components

ECO Solar Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
ECOplus Solar Cylinder Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
ECOplus Solar Cylinder Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
TERMO Combi Cylinder Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
TERMO Combi Cylinder Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
RATIO Buffer Cylinder Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
RATIO Buffer Cylinder Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Convection Brake CONVECTROL III. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Thermostatic Mixing Valve BM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Electrical Immersion Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
4
1.3 Freshwater Units

RATIOfresh 250/400 Freshwater Unit
Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Installation and Operations Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
RATIOfresh 200 Fresh Water Station

1.1
RATIOfresh 200 Freshwater Unit
1.2
1.4 Solar Circuit Components and Accessories
CIRCO 6 Solar Circulation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
1.3
CIRCO 25/80 Solar Circulation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
SUNGOmini Solar Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Solar Controller SUNGO S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

1.4
Solar Controller SUNGO SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Solar Controller SUNGO SXL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Expansion Vessel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 1.5

Heat Meter WMZ for SUNGO SL / SXL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
2/3 Way Electronic Diverter Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Twinex TVA Rapid Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

1.6
Sensor Connection Box SP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Solar Heat Transfer Liquid DC20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
External Heat Exchangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
1.5 Compact Solar Hot Water Systems 2

SECUSOL Solar Compact System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
SECUterm 200 P / 300 P (Free Standing Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
SECUterm 160 I / 200 I / 300 I (On-Roof Installation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
5
1.6 Planning, Start-up, Maintenance

Dimensioning List for Solar Thermal Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Solar Thermal Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Dimensioning of a Solar Installation for Hot Water Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Sun Path Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Solar Installation for Hot Water Preparation

Single Storage Cylinder System
with ECOplus Solar Storage Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

ECOplus Solar Storage Cylinder Upstreamed
of Existing Hot Water Storage Cylinder
with Controlled Storage Cylinder Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Downstreamed ECOplus Solar Storage Cylinder
and Existing Hot Water Storage Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

and Swimming Pool Heating System
with ECOplus Solar Storage Cylinder and Plate Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . 447
Solar Installation for Hot Water Preparation and Heating Support

Single Storage Cylinder System with TERMO Combi Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

System with TERMO Combi Cylinder in Combination
with Pellet Boiler XILO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Single Storage Cylinder System with Freshwater Unit RATIOfresh
and RATIO Buffer Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Solar Installation for Hot Water Preparation and Space Heating Support
Dual Cylinder System with ECOplus Solar Storage Cylinder
and RATIO Buffer Cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Wagner-T*SOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Installation Protocol Solar Heating Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Maintenance Protocol Solar Heating Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Cleaning of AR Solar Glass on EURO-Collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Solar Thermal Functional Guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
6
Content Solar Electricity
2. Solar Electricity
Off Grid Solar Power Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Dimensioning of Photovoltaic Off Grid Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Dimensioning a Grid Connected Solar Electricity Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
On Roof Module Mounting System TRIC A HDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Free Standing Mounting System TRIC F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 1.1

Free Standing Mounting System TRIC F pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Commissioning Protocol for a PV-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Measuring Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
You can nd up-to-date technical information about our solar modules and 2
grid-inverters at the following web addresses:
www.wagner-solar.com
www.bp.com
www.evergreensolar.com
www.recgroup.com
www.sanyo-component.com
www.schottsolar.com
www.sma.de
www.fronius.com
7
Solar Collectors and Racking Systems
Wagner & Co is one of the leading developers and manufacturers of solar coll-
ectors as well as collector racking systems for many different applications. The
following pages offer technical information and installation instructions for solar
collectors, solar collector racking kits and roof xing materials. Racks and roof
brackets are the result of careful structural calculations following the latest EURO-
CODE EN 1992 for wind and snow loads, allowing safe installations on most roof
types and at almost any location. The Wagner & Co construction philosophy for
racking systems features ease of use with pre-assembled components and un-
compromised safety and durability. It includes the new top installation carried
out from above that now is implemented throughout the entire product portfolio 1.1
of the TRIC A on-roof and TRIC F free standing series of collector racking sys-
tems.
EURO Solar Collector L20 AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
EURO Solar Collector Type C20/C22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Flat Plate Solar Collector EURO L42 HTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
LBM Solar Collector 6 AR / 10 AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
EURO Solar Collector L20 MQ AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
EURO TRIC A On-Roof Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
EURO TRIC F Free Standing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
EURO L20 MQ TRIC A and TRIC F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
EURO C20/L20 In-Roof Installation for Slate and Plain Tile Roongs . . . . . . . . 93
EURO C20/L20 In-Roof Installation for Pantile Roong. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Roof Bracket Kits (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Roof Bracket Kit BS/SF (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Roof Bracket Kit K A2 Hv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Roof Bracket Kit P (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Roof Bracket Kit PM A2 Hv (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
9
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
EURO Solar Collector L20 AR
1.1
Solar Keymark
011-7S481 F
Figure 1 EURO L20 AR
Product Features sunarc

anti reflection glass
EPDM rubber sealing
Anodized
Powerful Highly selective aluminium frame
Collector cover with sandy sunarc anti-reection glass vacuum coating
for 96% light transmission Aluminium
Laser fused aluminium absorber for optimized heat absorber
Side
transfer insulation
60 mm back-side insulation
Durable High Quality Materials

Anodized aluminium frame in silver or black
Solid aluminium back
Full-surface aluminium absorber sheet with copper
pipe register
Temperature resistant mineral wool with low binder
Insulation
content, heat conduction group 040
Aluminium back
Sophisticated Construction Details
Seamless all-around side insulation Figure 2 Collector cross-section
Long lasting and safe at sealing connections
UV resistant EPDM glass sealing with vulcanized corner
joints
Flexible Mounting Options

Suitable for on-roof, roof-integrated and at-roof (free
standing) mounting
Serial connection of up to 5 collectors possible
Solar Thermal / Solar Collectors EN-XXX_EURO-L20-AR_TI-100119-11201R00 11

1. Technical Data
Table 1 Characteristic EURO L20 AR
Total area/aperture area (acc. to EN 12975) 2.61 / 2.39 m
Dimensions (L x D x H) 2151 x 1215 x 110 mm
Collector efciency (acc. to EN 12975) o = 84.8 %; k1 = 3.46 W/mK; k2 = 0.0165 W/mK
Incident angle modier (50) kdir = 94.4 %, kdiff = 88 %

Annual collector yield (ITW 5 m) 521 kWh/ma
Silver or black anodized aluminium frame, aluminium back sheet,
Collector encasing
mineral wool insulation WLG 040 for back side and frame
Specic heat capacity 4.7 kJ/(mK)
Glass cover and light transmission 4 mm solar safety glass with sunarc anti reection surface; =96 %
Pipe register absorber:
Absorber
aluminium heat conductor sheet and 12 closely spaced copper pipes, laser fused
Absorber coating Highly selective vacuum coating, = 95 %, = 5 %
Absorber content 1.5 litres
DC20 (propylene glycol with inhibitors),
Heat carrier
mixing ratio according to requirements (local climate)!
Operational pressure max. 10 bar
Stagnation temperature ( acc. to EN 12975) 209 C
Solar sensor Receptacle, 6 mm internal diameter
Collector connections " M threaded connection
Certicate/mark SolarKeymark; CE-mark; Blue Angel RAL UZ 73
Allowable pressure/suction forces 3.4 kN/m
Horizontal and vertical on-roof and free standing setup (10 85);
Mounting options
roof integration with vertical orientation (20 85)
Weight 48 kg
Pressure loss [mbar]

500 5 EURO L20
serial connection
450
4 EURO L20
400 serial connection
350
3 EURO L20
300 serial connection
250
2 EURO L20
serial connection
200
150 1 EURO L20
100
50
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Volume flow [l/h]
Figure 3 Pressure loss curves for several collectors connected in series, depending on volume ow.
Heat carrier: 40 % Glycol / 60 % Water at 30C.
12 EN-XXX_EURO-L20-AR_TI-100119-11201R00
h [%]
90
E = 800 W/m
80
70
60 EURO L20 AR
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Tm - Tu [K]
Figure 4 Collector characteristics acc. to EN 12975 1.1
110
2.151
1.087
1.215
EURO L20 AR
Figure 5 Dimensions (mm)
2. Planning Notes Table 2

Dimensioning Examples for Snow/Wind Load Zones 1-2 1
2.1 Snow and Wind Loads Building Altitude On-roof Free standing, ballast
height (m) installation (kg/m total collector area)
Comply with local regulations and norms related to snow (m) (no. of roof
and wind loads (within the EU to EN 1991-1-4 (Wind ac- brackets per Horizontal Vertical
collector) 2 setup setup
tions) and EN 1991-1-3 (snow loads). The standard in-roof
system originally was designed for the following condi- 10 400 4 140 195
tions: inland continental Europe up to 800 m ASL, unex-
10 800 6 140 195
posed location, maximum building height of 20 m, all wind
zones. Please contact our technical department for infor- 10-20 400 4 185 260
mation about other cases. 10-20 800 6 185 260
Structurally the EURO L20 AR can be treated identically to 1 45 inclination, installation in edge and corner areas of roofs not
the C20 AR. considered; wind speed vref 25 m/s, wind pressure at 10 m
above ground qref 0.39 (kN/m)
2 Roof bracket P STv KF; ridge distance or distance to snow barrier
above < 1 m; roof bracket quantities are guide values round
acc. to eld size and individual situation.
EN-XXX_EURO-L20-AR_TI-100119-11201R00 13
2.2 Free Standing Setup and
Self-Shadowing
The following table applies to a shadowing angle of 25.
Depending on the geographical location the lower col-
lector areas may therefore be affected by self-shadowing
during winter months.
A
Table 3 Shadowing Distances
Distance Collector inclination
in m
Horizontal setup Vertical setup
(s. g. 6)
35 45 50 37 45 50
A 1.49 1.84 2.00 2.78 3.26 3.53 B
C
B 1.00 0.86 0.78 1.72 1.52 1.38
Figure 6 Shadowing distances of collectors mounted one behind the
C 3.49 3.56 3.56 6.21 6.30 6.30
other with collector inclination and shadowing angle
2.3 Connection Options
Solar sensor
Figure 7 Parallel connection of 2 x horizontal EURO L20 at v=35l/mh.

Hereunto a special extension set for on-roof mounting (order no. 190 202
40) and a special connection set (order no. 190 202 30) are available. Solar sensor
Solar sensor Solar sensor
Figure 8 Serial connection of vertically mounted collectors at

v=35l/m2h (serial connection of max. 5 x EURO L20)
Solar sensor
3.66 m
6.10 m
2.15 m
Figure 9 Serial connection of horizontally mounted collectors at Figure 10 Combination of serial and parallel connections of horizon-
v=35l/m2h (serial connection of max. 5 x EURO L20) tally mounted collectors at v=35l/m2h
2.4 Accessories
Table 4 Accessories Order No.
Marten protection for sensor cable 192 040 10 for silver and 192 040 09 for black frame
Collector carrying handles 188 005 02
Subject to modications, errors excepted Wagner & Co, 2010 www.wagner-solar.com

14 WAGNER & CO Zimmermannstrae 12 D-35091 Clbe/Marburg
+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
EURO Solar Collector Type C20/C22
Highly transparent EPDM rubber seal

safety glass or anti with vulcanised corner joints
reflection safety glass
Anodised
aluminium
casing
1.1
Selective coating
Side insulation
without heat bridges
Ultrasound fused
copper absorber
60mm insulation
TV - 0036
Aluminium back
Jur y
U mweltzeichen
Figure 1 The EURO C20/C22 powerful, versatile and rapidly installed
Advantages
High Efciency through Perfect Details Excellent Price/Performance Ratio
Thanks to its highly selective vaccuum coated at plate Tested quality according to European norm EN 12975 and
absorber, a 60 mm back insulation and the seamless side the CE label. Repeated awards from the Independent In-
insulation, the EURO solar collector is characterized by stitute for Consumers Goods Testing Stiftung Warentest.
very low heat losses. In addition it is equipped with highly
transparent safety glass. The EURO C20 AR variation ad- Simple and Fast Installation
ditionally features sunarc anti reection glass increasing Tried and tested installation kits, photo-instructions and
the solar yield by an additional 6-10 % thanks to intelligent weldless connections to the solar circuit.
nano-technology based upon the moth-eye effect.
Variable Mountings and Arrangements
High-Quality Materials On-roof, roof integrated (in-roof) and free standing, verti-
Anodised aluminium proles, aluminium back, high-trans- cally and horizontally.
parency safety glass cover, weather resistant EPDM rubber
seals with vulcanised corner joints and ultrasound-fused,
heat-resistant copper absorber ensure safe operation for
decades.
Solar Thermal / Solar Collectors EN-XXX_EURO-C20-C22_TI-0801xx-11201000 15

1. Technical Data
Feature EURO C20 AR EURO C20 HTF EURO C22 AR EURO C22 HTF
Total area / aperture area 2.61 / 2.39 m 2.24 / 2.02 m
Size W x H x D 2151 x 1215 x 110 mm 1930 x 1160 x 110 mm
ho = 85.4 % ho = 81.8 % ho = 85.4 % ho = 81.8 %
Efciency (DIN 4757- 4) k1 = 3.37 W/mK k1 = 3.47 W/mK k1 = 3.37 W/mK k1 = 3.47 W/mK
k2 = 0.0104 W/mK k2 = 0.0101 W/mK k2 = 0.0104 W/mK k2 = 0.0101 W/mK
kdir = 97 % kdir = 94 % kdir = 97 % kdir = 94 %
Incident angle modier 50
kdiff = 94 % kdiff = 88 % kdiff = 94 % kdiff = 88 %
Annual collector yield
546 kWh/ma 509 kWh/ma 546 kWh/ma 509 kWh/ma
(ITW 5 m *)
Collector housing 60 mm back insulated and frame insulated aluminium casing; specic heat capacity 4.7 kJ/(mK)
4 mm solar safety 4 mm solar safety
4 mm solar 4 mm solar
Glass cover glass with sunarc- glass with sunarc-
safety glass safety glass
antireex-coating antireex-coating
Transmission = 96 % = 91 % = 96 % = 91 %
Absorber Heat conducting sheet and pipes made out of copper, max. pressure 10 bar
Absorber capacity 1.3 litre 1.1 litre
Conductor uid DC20 (Propylenglycol with inhibitors), mixing ratio according to requirements
Working pressure max. 10 bar
Idle temperature
232 C 227 C 232 C 227 C
(according to DIN 4757-3)
Sensor tube 6 mm internal diameter
Connections " male
CE lable TV certicate 0036, EC type test (Module B) in accordance with EU directive 97/23/EC
Max. allowed pressure/suction forces 3.4 kN/m (take wind and snow loads into account! Consider static capacity of roof!)
Inclination range 10 - 85 for on-roof and free standing setup, 27 - 85 for roof integration
Weight 48 kg 43 kg
* Calculated for 4 person household at Wrzburg/Germany with 300 l solar cylinder and 5 m collector area.
Table 1 Technical Data EURO C20 / C22.
Pressure losses (mbar) Pressure losses (mbar)

200 200
180 180
4 EURO in series
160 160
2
0
C2
C2
140 140
O
O
UR
UR
4 EURO in series
xE
xE
120 120 2
C2
20
4
4
O
UR
O
100 100
R
E
EU
x
0 3
x
C2 C2
2
3
80 3 EURO in series 80
R O O
EU 3 EURO in series EUR
2x 2x
60 60
C20 C22
40 URO 40 URO
2 EURO in series 1xE 1xE
2 EURO in series
20 20
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 50 100 150 200 250 300
Flow rate (litre/h) Flow rate (litre/h)
Figure 2 Pressure loss EURO C20 in relation to the volume ow and Figure 3 Pressure loss EURO C22 in relation to the volume ow and
and the number of collectors connected in series and the number of collectors connected in series.
Volume ow v=30 l/mh; heat transfer medium: 40 % glycol, 60 % water Volume ow v=30 l/mh; heat transfer medium: 40 % glycol, 60 % water
at 30 C; examples with v=30l/mh; pressure losses do not account for at 30 C; examples with v=30l/mh; pressure losses do not account for
connections and connection pipes. connections and connection pipes.
16 EN-XXX_EURO-C20-C22_TI-0801xx-11201000
[%]
2. Planning
90
E = 800 W/m
80
2.1 Wind and Snow Loads
EURO C20-AR
70 Snow and wind loads are a signicant factor for structural
60
planning. European norms were established, albeit with-
out specically taking solar installations into account.
50 Wind and snow loads affect the collectors and the instal-
EURO C20/C22-HTF
40 lation system. Depending on the conditions and height of
the installation site as well as the collector inclination, the
30 mechanical loads on the system can vary considerably.
20 Also see guidelines for the planning of structural frame-
works and standards EUROCODE 1, (European guidelines
10
for structural planning). With combined snow and wind
0 loads the maximum strain for the EURO solar collector is
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 2,250 N/m. Note that wind suction spikes may occur on
T = Tm - Tu [K] roof edges! Please read the information in the applicable 1.1
Figure 4 Efciency curves of EURO C20 / C22 HTF and EURO C20 AR guidelines for the planning of structural frameworks.
depending on Tm TU (E = 800 W/m) as measured at the ISFH Hameln It is mandatory to follow best practice rules for static plan-
according to DIN EN 12975.
ning, especially related to snow and wind loads. Different
codes and regulations apply in different countries and re-
gions. For more information refer to our installation manu-
als and the upcoming leaet Notes on Snow and Wind
safe Installation of Solar Collectors.
In case of doubt and/or in absence of exact static calcula-
tions (not recommended!) always allow for additional x-
tures, weight, anchors, and screws, especially in regions
with known weather extremes.
110
2151
1215
1086
EURO C20
110
1930
1035
1160
EURO C22
Figure 5 Dimensions EURO C20/EURO C22.
EN-XXX_EURO-C20-C22_TI-0801xx-11201000 17
2.2 Arrangements and
Installation Types
On-Roof Installation
The collectors can be installed above the roof surface with
rafter brackets and mounting rails, either horizontally or
vertically (horizontal preferred). Even during the installa-
tion, the roong remains almost completely unharmed.
We offer roof-anchors and rafter brackets for almost every
roong type. Up to 4 EURO collectors can be connected
in series. The connection hoses with pre-assembled insula-
tion also signicantly simplify the on-roof pipeworks. Dis-
tribution pipes on the roof are not required.
In-Roof Installation
The attractive in-roof installation is possible for roofs with
a minimum pitch of 27 and any tile cover. In this case the
collectors are installed vertically, with the connections
pointing upwards. The aluminium and corrugated lead
ashing can be joined without requiring soldering work
in the roof.
Free Standing Installation

The free standing setup allows horizontal or vertical instal-
lation with adjustable inclination. Concrete slabs or gravel
covered aluminium trays can be used as foundation.
2.3 Horizontal Collector Arrangement

(On Roof)
Collector sensor Collector sensor Collector sensor Collector sensor Collector sensor
= position of roof brackets
Figure 6 Horizontal collector arrangement: Up to 4 EURO in serial connection. The mounting rails run vertically. Roof brackets must be evenly
distributed (the distances of brackets are approx. values). Combinations of serial and parallel connection are also possible (see right). A EURO
on-roof expansion kit is then required.
2.4 Vertical Collector Arrangement (On Roof and In Roof)

Collector sensor Collector sensor Collector sensor Collector sensor
Figure 7 Vertical collector arrangement: Up to 4 EURO in serial connection. The mounting rails run vertically. More than 4 EUROs are combined
from elds with serial and parallel connections.

18 WAGNER & CO Zimmermannstrae 12 D-35091 Clbe/Marburg +49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
Flat Plate Solar Collector EURO L42 HTF
1.1
Figure 1 EURO L42 HTF
Features at a Glance
Solid and Powerful 3.2 mm solar EPDM rubber
sealing
Collector cover with highly transparent solar-safety saftey glass
glass and 91 % light transmission Aluminum
Single-plate aluminum absorber sheet Selektive frame
coating
30 mm back side insulation
Durable High Quality Materials Side

Aluminum frame insulation
Aluminum single plate absorber with copper pipe re-
gister (harp type), laser welded Aluminum
absorber
Temperature resistant mineral wool with low binder
content, thermal conductivity class 040
Copper
pipes
Sophisticated Design Details
Seamless all around side insulation Thermal
insulation
Durable and safe at sealing connections Aluminum back
UV-resistant EPDM glass sealings with vulcanized cor-
ner joints Figure 2 Collector cross section
Flexible Racking Options

Suitable for on-roof and free standing / at roof setup;
roof integrated option is under preparation
Vertical and horizontal collector orientation is possible
Up to 5 collectors can be connected in series
Solar Thermal / Solar Collectors EN-XXX_EURO-L42-HTF_TI-101122-1WA10123 19

1. Technical Data
Table 1 Characteristic EURO L42 HTF
Gross area / aperture area
2.25 / 2.01 m
(light collecting area acc. to EN 12975)
Dimensions (L x D x H) 1933mm x 1163mm x 80mm
Collector efciency o = 78.0 %; a1 = 3.95W/mK; a2 = 0.0139W/mK
Incident angle modier (50) k (50) = 88 %, kdiff = 82 %,
Annual collector yield (ITW 5 m) Currently in test
Aluminum with seamless side insulation and 30 mm back side insulation,
Collector encasing
frame style: uncoated shiny or anodized black
Specic heat capacity 4.5 kJ/(mK)
Glass cover and light transmissivity 3.2 mm solar safety glass; = 91 %
Single-plate aluminum absorber with 4 and 5 copper pipes (8 x 0.4),
Absorber
laser welded (double harp design)
Absorber volume 1.2 liters
DC20 (propylene glykol with inhibitors),
Heat carrier
mixing ratio according to application and local conditions!
Operational pressure Max. 10 bar
Stagnation temperature (expected) 191 C
Fixing of solar sensor Installation in receptacle, 6 mm internal diameter
Collector connection " external thread
Certicate / Mark Solar Keymark, eligible for state subsidies in Germany, SRCC OG 100 pending
Allowable pressure / suction forces 3.4 kN/m
On-roof and free standing / at roof setup with vertical or horizontal orientation (10 - 85),
Racking options
roof integration system under preparation
Weight 33 kg
Pressure Drop [mbar]
700
650
600 5 EURO L42 HTF

in series
550
500 4 EURO L42 HTF

in series
450
400
3 EURO L42 HTF
350 in series
300
250 2 EURO L42 HTF

in series
200
150
1 EURO L42 HTF
100
50
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Volume ow [l/h]
Figure 3 Pressure drop for several collectors in serial connection, depending on volume ow.
Heat transfer medium: 40 % glycol / 60 % water at 40 C, pressure drop includes connection hoses and collector interconnections.
20 EN-XXX_EURO-L42-HTF_TI-101122-1WA10123
[%]
90
G=800 W/m
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
T = Tm-Ta [K]
Figure 4 Collector characteristic curve
1.1
80
1933
EURO L42 HTF
1163
1035
Figure 5 Dimensions [mm]
2. Planning Notes
2.1 Snow and Wind Loads
Comply with local regulations and norms related to snow Table 2 Dimensioning Examples for Snow/Wind Load Zones 1-2 1)
and wind loads (within the EU to EN 1991-1-4 (Wind Ac-
Building Altitude (m) On-roof Vertical setup
tions) and EN 1991-1-3 (Snow Loads). Please contact our
height (m) installation
technical department for information about other cases. (no. of roof
Structurally the EURO L42AR can be treated identically brackets/
to the C22 or L22. collector ) 2)
10 400 2.8 194
10 800 5.1 194
10-20 400 2.9 257
10-20 800 5.2 257
1) 45 Inclination, installation in edge and corner sections of roofs
not considered. Wind speed vref 25 m/s, wind pressure at
10 m above ground qref 0.39 (kN/m)
2) Roof bracket P STv KF; ridge distance or distance to snow
barrier above < 1 m; numbers of roof brackets are guide
values round acc. to eld size and individual situation.
EN-XXX_EURO-L42-HTF_TI-101122-1WA10123 21
2.2 Avoiding Mutual Shadowing of
Collectors on Free Standing Racks
The following table is valid for a location at 50 latitude
and a shadowing angle of 25. Occasional shadowing of
lower collector sections during winter is acceptable. A
Table 3 Min. Distance to Avoid Mutual Shadowing

Distances Collector inclination
(m), see
Horizontal installation Vertical installation
gure 6
35 45 50 37 45 50
B
A 1.42 1.76 1.91 2.49 2.93 3.17 C
B 0.95 0.82 0.75 1.54 1.36 1.24
Figure 6 Shadowing distance A of collectors installed one behind
C 3.32 3.4 3.41 5.57 5.65 5.65 another, with collector inclination and shadowing angle
2.3 Collector Connection Examples

The shown layouts are based upon a volume ow of
v = 35 l/mh (High-Flow)
Solar sensor
Figure 7 Parallel connection of 2 x EURO L42 HTF, horizontally orien-

ted, at v = l/mh. An extension set for on roof installation is available.
3.49 m
5.82 m
1.93 m
Figure 8 Serial connection with vertical collector arrangement at Figure 9 Serial connection of horizontally oriented collectors
v = 35 l/mh (max. 5 x EURO L42 HTF in series) at v = 35 l/mh (max. 5 x EURO L42 HTF in series)
Solar sensor
Solar sensor
Figure 10 Combination of serial and parallel connection at horizontal orientation at v = 35 l/mh

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
LBM Solar Collector 6 AR / 10 AR
1.1
Figure 1 LBM the large format Solar Keymark

011-7S643 F
Product Features
Ideal for Large Scale Solar Installations
Collectors with a combined area of up to 50 m can be Full surface absorber with
mounted next to each other with hydraulic parallel con- highly selective vacuum coating
nection no additional pipeworks required thanks to Removable
aluminium Highly transparent sunarc
internal manifolds (22mm copper pipes). cover strips anti reflection solar glass
Two sizes for optimized eld layouts.
Suitable for high-ow and low-ow applications. All-around
EPDM sealing
Powerful!
Highly transparent sunarc-anti reection glass with
96 % transmissivity, thanks to the innovative nano sur-
face treatment utilizing the moth-eye effect! As a result
the heat yield increases by 6-10 %.
Laser fused full-surface serpentine absorber made from
high-grade aluminium with highly selective vacuum
coating.
44 mm strong two-layer heat insulation.
Durable High-Grade Materials and Components

Weather proof anodized aluminium frame with alumin-
ium back.
UV-resistant EPDM glass sealing with vulcanized corner
joints. Aluminium frame
All around seamless heat insulation without heat bridges 4 x 22 mm Cu pipe
Seamless Solid
Flexible Mounting Options side insulation aluminium
Crane supported installation without additional trans- back
port crating. 23.5 mm PU foam
Suitable for horizontal on-roof (roof parallel) and at
roof/free-standing installation for practically every roof 20 mm mineral wool
type. Figure 2 Collector cross section
Solar Thermal / Solar Collectors EN-XXX_LBM-6-10-AR_TI-100127-11203500 23

1. Technical Specications
Table 1 Characteristic LBM 6 AR LBM 10 AR
Total area / aperture area
6.75 / 6.1 m 11.1 / 10.1 m
Dimensions (L x D x H, mm) 3468 x 1947 x 110 5762 x 1947 x 110
Collector efciency (acc. to EN12975) 0 = 83.8 %; k1 = 3.77 W/mK; k2 = 0.012 W/mK
Incident angle modier (50) kdir = 97 %, kdiff = 95 %, ktheta = 97 %

Annual collector yield 517 kWh/ma
Aluminium frame and back side;
Collector encasing dual layer heat insulation made from 24 mm PU hard foam and 20 mm high-grade mineral
wool
Specic heat capacity 8,1 kJ/(mK)
Glazing and glass transmissivity 4 mm solar safety glass with sunarc nano anti reection surfaces, =96 %
Absorber Serpentine absorber, aluminium absorber sheets and copper pipes, laser fused
Absorber volume 4.9 l 8.1 l
Heat transfer medium DC20 (propylenglycol with inhibitor), mixing ratio depends on application!
Operational pressure (bar) max. 10 bar
Stagnation temperature (acc. to EN12975) 216.8 C
Solar sensor Sensor sleeve with 7 mm in 22 mm friction ring connection
Collector connection 4 x 22 mm Cu pipe
Certicate / mark SolarKeymark (DIN CERTCO), CE Mark, Blue Angel ECO Label RAL - UZ 73
Maximum pressure / suction loads 3.4 kN/m
Mounting options Horizontal on-roof (roof-parallel) and freee standing setup (inclination 10 85)
Total weight (with empty absorber) 130 kg 200 kg
[%]
90
E = 800 W/m
80
70
60 LBM6 AR and LBM10 AR
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Tm - Tu [K]
Figure 3 Characteristic curve acc. to EN 12975
24 EN-XXX_LBM-6-10-AR_TI-100127-11203500
3468
LBM 6 AR
1836
1947
110
1.1
5762
LBM 10 AR
1836
1947
110
Figure 4 Collector Dimensions (mm), a serpentine absorber between the two traversing manifolds
EN-XXX_LBM-6-10-AR_TI-100127-11203500 25
2. Planning Notes
2.1 Snow and Wind Loads 2.2 Self Shadowing when Free Standing
Comply with local regulations and norms related to snow The following table applies to shadowing angles of
and wind loads (within the EU to EN 1991-1-4 (wind ac- 25. Depending on the location the lower collector might
tions) and EN 1991-1-3 (snow loads). The standard in-roof therefore be shadowed during the winter months.
system originally was designed for the following condi-
tions: inland continental Europe up to 800 m ASL, unex- Table 3 Shadowing Distances
posed location, max. building height of 20 m, all wind Distances in m Collector inclination
zones. Please contact our technical department for infor- (see gure 5)
30 45
mation about other cases. We offer comprehensive plan-
A 2.09 2.95
ning support on a project base. See table 2 for some LBM
related planning samples. B 1.69 1.38
C 5.46 5.71
Table 2 Dimensioning Samples for Snow / Wind Load Zones 1-21
Building Altitude On-roof installation Free standing
height above (No. of rafter brackets / setup, ballast
(m) sea collector) 2 requirements A
level (kg/m coll. area)
(m)
LBM 6 AR LBM 10 AR LBM 6 AR / 10 AR
10 400 8 12 160
10 800 16 24 160
10-20 400 8 12 200
B
10-20 800 16 24 200 C
1 45 inclination, without taking installation in corner and edge
areas into account Figure 5 Shadowing of collectors standing one behind another, with
setup inclination and shadowing angle
2 Rafter bracket P STv KF; distance from roof ridge or from upper
snow stopper < 1 m
26 EN-XXX_LBM-6-10-AR_TI-100127-11203500
The pressure loss information applies under the following In order to avoid unnecessary pressure losses in large
conditions: collector elds beyond 25 m, we recommend plac-
Heat carrier 40 % glycol, 60 % water at 40 C. Individual ing the sensor in the unused connection, replacing the
resistances of required collector connectors are taken plug, opposite of the exit (see upper piping in gure 7).
into account.
Figure 6 Parallel setup with alternating connection
1.1
Table 4 Pressure Losses for Parallel Connections (mbar)
Collector type LBM 6 AR LBM 10 AR
Specic volume ow (l/mH) 15 25 35 15 25 35
1 collector * 27 50 73 29 52 77
2 collectors * 29 54 81 35 67 103
3 collectors * 34 64 96 50 101 163
4 collectors * 41 79 125 75 161 269
5 collectors * 51 104 169 112 252 436
6 collectors * 66 130 231 166 382
7 collectors * 85 184 314 237
8 collectors * 109 243 421
9 collectors * 138 316 555
10 collectors * 174 404
* Number of collectors installed next to each other with diagonal connection (manifold connected at top and bottom, see g. 6)
Figure 7 Parallel setup with connection at one side
Table 5 Pressure Loss for Connection with Single Sided Connection (mbar)
Specic volume ow (l/mH) 15 25 35 15 25 35
1 collector * 30 55 80 (85) 32 57 85
2 collectors * 32 59 89 (113) 39 74 113
3 collectors * 37 70 106 ()
* Number of collectors with single side connection (manifold connected at top and bottom, see g. 7)
EN-XXX_LBM-6-10-AR_TI-100127-11203500 27
Bleeder
Figure 8 Serial connection of two collectors
Bleeder
Figure 9 Two rows with 3 parallel connected collectors in each row
Table 6 Pressure Loss for 2 Rows with Parallel Connected Collectors in Each Row
Specic volume ow (l/mH) 15 25 15 25
1 collector * 124 216 128 230
2 collectors * 134 242 168 325
3 collectors * 160 304 262
4 collectors * 202 410 425
5 collectors * 270
6 collectors * 364
7 collectors * 490
* Number of collectors in parallel connection (diagonal pass through)
Please contact our support for additional connection op-

tions.

EURO Solar Collector L20 MQ AR
1.1
SolarKeymark
011-7S1404F
Figure 1 EURO L20 MQ AR rst choice for long collector strips
Product Features sunarc anti

EPDM
rubber sealings
reective glass
Collector with 4 pipe connectors for the simple setup of Anodized
long collector strips. Serial connection of up to 10 collec- Highly selective vac- aluminum
uum coating frame
tors possible. Collector elds of up to 50 m can be easily
realized by combining groups in parallel and serial con- Side
insulation
nection.
Powerful
Highly transparent low-iron solar glass
Laser fused meander absorber with highly selective
Riser
vacuum coating pipe
60 mm backside insulation Aluminum
absorber
Durable High Quality Material
Anodized aluminum frame in silver or black Back side
Solid aluminum back sheet insulation
Aluminum absorber sheet with copper pipe register Aluminum back sheet
Temperature resistent mineral wool with low content of Figure 2 Collector cross-section
binders and heat conducting group 040
Sophisticated Design Details Heat expansion O-ring connection with

Straight forward connection method with o-ring and compensator clamping ring
clamp
All around seamless side insulation
UV-resistant EPDM glass-sealing with vulcanized cor-
ner joints
Flexible Installation
Suitable for on-roof and at-roof (free standing) setup
Horizontal orientation
Figure 3 Collector connection
Solar Thermal / Solar Collectors EN-XXX_EURO-L20-MQ-AR_TI-101007-1WA10055 29

1. Technische Daten
Table 1 Characteristic EURO L20 MQ AR
Gross area / aperture area
2.61 / 2.37 m
Dimensions (L x D x H) 2151 x 1215 x 110 mm
o = 84.2 %; k1 = 3.62 W/mK;
Collector efciency (expected)
k2 =0.016 W/mK
Incident angle modier (50) kdir = 92.8 %, kdiff = 87 %
Annual collector yield (ITW 5 m) 502 kWh/ma
Anodized aluminium frame, aluminium back, 60 mm back-side insulation,
Collector encasing
all-around seamless side insulation
Specic heat capacity 6.8 kJ/mK
Glass cover and light transmissivity 4 mm anti reective sunarc solar safety glass; = 96 %
Meander absorber made from aluminium heat absorber sheet and copper pipes,
Absorber
LASER fused
Absorber volume 2.3 liter
DC20 (Propylen glycol with inhibitors),
Heat carrier
mixing ratio depends on application and region (climate)
Operational pressure max. 10 bar
Stagnation temperature (expected) 207 C
Solar sensor Receptacle, 6 mm internal diameter
Collector connection Clamp with o-ring and tting 22 mm
Certicate / Mark CE-mark; SolarKeymark No. 011-7S1404F; Blue Angel RAL-UZ73 (application led)
Max. allowable pressure / suction forces 3.4 kN/m
Racking options On-roof and free standing (horizontally, 10 85)
Weight 50 kg
Pressure drop [mbar]
550
497
500
450 10 EURO MQ parallel
400 389
.
350
302 .
300 .
250 231 1 EURO MQ .
200 224 .
164
178 .
150
103 131 .
100
87 .
50 .
0
15 22,5 30 35 37,5 45
Volume ow [l/mh]
Figure 4 Pressure losses for one collector and ten collectors in paral- Figure 5 Efciency characteristics acc. to EN 12975
lel connection, depending on the specic volume ow. Heat carrier:
40 % glycol and 60 % water at 40 C.
30 EN-XXX_EURO-L20-MQ-AR_TI-101007-1WA10055
110
2151
1215
1056
EURO L20 MQ AR
1.1
2162
Figure 6 Dimensions (mm)
2. Planning Notes
2.1 Snow and Wind Loads 2.2 Mutual Shadowing of Free
Standing Collectors
Please make sure to conform to the Eurocode 1, Part 2-4:
Wind actions (ENV 1991-2-4: 1994) and the ISO Draft In- The following table is based upon a solar altitude of 25,
ternational standard 4354, Wind actions on structures as therefore parts of the collector can be shadowed in win-
well as BS EN 1991-1-3 regarding snow loads (also part ter, depending on location.
of EUROCODE 1). Structurally the EURO L20 MQ can be
considered identical to the C20 AR and C20 HTF. Please
contact our technical support in case of doubt.
Table 2 Dimensioning Examples for Snow/Wind Load Zones 1-2 * Table 3 Shadowing Distances
Building Altitude On-roof mounting Free standing Distances (m) Collector inclination
height above sea (no. of rafter- setup
35 55
(m) level (m) brackets / collector) (kg/m collector
area) A 1.49 2.13
10 400 4 140 B 1.0 0.7
10 800 6 140 C 3.49 3.53
10-20 400 4 185
10-20 800 6 185
* 45 inclination, mounting in corner and edge areas of roofs not
considered
B
C
Figure 7 Shadowing distances of collectors set up behind one ano-

ther with inclination and shadowing angle
EN-XXX_EURO-L20-MQ-AR_TI-101007-1WA10055 31
The collector strips consist of max. 10 collectors in parallel connection.
Piping layout and pump dimension must be planned on a project-by-project base.
2151 66
1215
Figure 8 Field dimensions, without considering protruding connec-

tion parts on both outer sides
30
Figure 9 Leave approx. 30 mm space after the sixth collector to allow

for thermal expansion. Hereunto use the longer eld compensator
(part no. 819 102 49); order separately.
max. 10
collectors each
Figure 10 Collector strip diagonally connected at both ends, Figure 11 Connector strip with connections at one side
with V=35l/mh at V=35l/mhh
max. 10 max. 10
collectors each collectors each
Figure 12 Parallel connection of collector strips at V = 35 l/mh Figure 13 Serial connection of 2 collector strips,
only with Low-Flow, V = 15 l/mh!
Solar sensor
max. 5
collectors each
Figure 14 Parallel connection of two collector strips connected at one and the same side (max 5 EURO L20 MQ each)

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
EURO TRIC A On-Roof Installation
1.1
Figure 1 Vertical and horizontal on-roof installation
Content
1. General Safety Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2. Horizontal Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3. Vertical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Installation instructions valid for these collectors:
4. Sensor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5. Collector Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 EURO L20, EURO C20, EURO C30, EURO C22,
EURO L22, EURO C32
6. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Solar Thermal / Solar Collectors EN-XXX_EURO-TRIC-A_MA-11216A00_MA-100119-11216A00 33

1. General Safety Notes 1.3 Qualication of the Installer
1.1 Symbols Setup, installation and proper commissioning of the solar
installation must be carried out by authorized profession-
The following symbols are used throughout these instruc- als. Non-compliance renders the warranty void.
tions and must be adhered to:
1.4 Intended Use and Application

DANGER of possibly serious personal injury Proper Outdoor Storage of Collectors
Remove protective lm, and lay down collectors with glass
pane up. Avoid direct ground contact (e.g. underlay square
timber). Avoid scratches on glass panes by using spacers
WARNING against material damage. between collectors (e.g. wooden laths). When leaning col-
lectors against walls or similar, use a minimum inclination
of 15 and apply spacers. Do not use cardboard as under-
liner. If incorrectly stored, humidity can enter the collec-
NOTE as additional information tors through the air vents. Storing collectors in plastic lm
package can damage the glass surface (see gure 2).
1.2 Norms and Regulations Scope and Limitations of Application

The collector is intended for the application in solar ther-
The standards and regulations applicable at the instal- mal installations for hot water preparation and space heat-
lation location must be adhered to. In absence of other ing support. As operating mediums water (attention risk
regulations we recommend to follow the following norms: of freezing!) or an appropriate water-glycol mixture can
be used in a closed circuit. Operational conditions under-
Thermal Solar Systems and Components running the dew point within the collector for prolonged
EN 12976 and EN V 12977 periods are not permitted! This can occur for example,
when collectors are integrated in the brine circuit of a heat
Electrical Work, Potential Equalization, Lightning pump.
Protection
DIN EN 62305 Overheat Protection
VDE 0185 part 305 For roof heating centrals and when 4 or more EURO col-
DIN VDE 0100 part 540 lectors with anti reective glass are installed vertically, the
VDE 190 Technical Information Solar Thermal Systems Setup,
DIN 18382 Commissioning and Maintenance must be followed to
(Other regulations may apply, depending on your region, avoid damage to the solar circuit.
country or territory.)
Especially the pipes in the lower parts of the building Preventing frost Damage
must be connected electrically conductive, conforming to After pressure testing and ushing, collectors cannot be
standards. The collector installation must be profession- completely emptied. Make sure that no pure water re-
ally integrated with an existing or new lightning protection mains in collector during risk of frost!
system.
Empty Collector on Roof
Snow and Wind Loads After being installed on the roof, unlled collectors should
Comply with local regulations and norms related to snow not be exposed to the sun for more than a few days. Other-
and wind loads, within the EU to EN 1991-1-4 (Wind Ac- wise thermal stress on gaskets can result in damage. Alter-
tions) and EN 1991-1-3 (Snow Loads). If you have ques- natively postpone the installation of gaskets to just before
tions related to structural conditions and planning, please lling the solar circuit.
contact our technical department for information. We offer
comprehensive planning support on a project base. Maintenance
For maintenance notes and additional information about
Work on Roofs setup and operation of the collector eld, please refer to
Make sure to observe country and territory regulations re- the technical information Solar Thermal Systems.
lated to roof works and roof sealing standards as well as
professional codes for plumbing work.
The installation process must reect the on-site condi-
tions as well as applicable rules, regulations and accident
prevention procedures. Installers must be qualied and -
where applicable - licensed to work on roofs.
34 EN-XXX_EURO-TRIC-A_MA-11216A00_MA-100119-11216A00
1.5 Pre Installation Notes
Risk of burns at collector connections as soon as uncov-
ered collector is exposed to the sun (gure 3).
Danger of open injuries when working with sharp
edged metal sheets and components!
Remove protective plastic caps from connections be-
fore collector is exposed to the sun. Risk of melting and
damage to absorber!
Remove glass protection PE-LD lm before commenc-
ing installation work! (gure 4).
1.6 Recycling Note

At the end of the long operational lifetime, the valuable
Figure 2 Do not expose collector covered with protective lm to rain. materials of the installation should be recycled in an en- 1.1
vironmentally sound manner. If recycling is not possible,
Wagner & Co will take the scrap material back.
Figure 3 Collector connections heat up during solar irradiation.
Figure 4 Remove glass protection lm before installing collector!
EN-XXX_EURO-TRIC-A_MA-11216A00_MA-100119-11216A00 35
2. Horizontal Installation
2.1 Scope of Supply
2
1
6
4
3
Figure 5 Basic set for on-roof installation (collectors are not included in delivery)
Table 1 Figure no. Components: Basic Set for On-Roof Installation Quantity
1 Roof bracket 1 (6) 2
Collector supporting rail 1257 mm (EURO L20, C20, C30) or
2 2
1202 mm (EURO L22, C22, C32) incl. 2 collector clamps
3 2
1168 mm (EURO L22, C22, C32) incl. 1 collector clamp
4 Collector supporting rail connector 2
5 Collector interconnection hose, 250 mm length 1
6 Collector connection hose for solar circuit, 900 mm length 2
7 Gasket " 6
8 Adapter tting " 18 mm 2
9 Wire strap 1
The included collector holders are not required for horizontal installation (4)
1 Not included in set; choose according to roong type. 2 Required number depends on structural load calculation.
3
1.1
4
5
2
1
Figure 6 Extension set for on-roof installation (collectors are not included in delivery)
Table 2 Figure no. Components: Extension Set for On-Roof Installation Quantity
1 Roof bracket1 (not included within the set) (2) 2
2 2
5 Gasket " 2
The included collector holders are not required for horizontal installation (2)
1 Not included in set; choose according to roong type. 2 Required quantity depends on structural load calculation.
2.2 Installation of Roof-Brackets

The roof brackets shown in this manual are given as ex-
amples only. The actual type varies and depends on the
roong. For more information refer to the installation in-
structions included with the roof brackets.
Figure 6 Correct xing of roof bracket type P Stv to rafter
2.3 Supporting Rail Installation
B
A
Before commencing roof installation of the rails,

prepare rails on the ground by connecting them
with the included rail connector.
Figure 8 Overview of rail installation (upper image; collector clamps are pre-assembled).
1 supporting rail 1 xed with two roof brackets and holding two collector clamps
2 supporting rail 2 xed with rail connector to upper rail and one roof bracket; rail 2 holds one collector clamp.
Table 3 Section Distance (mm)

EURO L20, C20, C30 EURO L22, C22, C32
A min. 1600 min. 1500
B 1000 1300 900 1200
C 20 200 20 200
2.4 Collector Installation
Mount uppermost collector rst!
1.1
17 Nm
Loosen collector clamp slightly, then push tightly

against collector and tighten (17 Nm).
Badly positioned collectors can lead to insufcient
Figure 9 Installation of rst (uppermost) collector xation!
X

against collector and tighten screw (17 Nm).
Figure 10 Installation of the following collectors
xation!
3. Vertical Installation
3.1 Scope of Supply
8
3
4
5
1
9
2
7
6
1.1
10
Figure 11 Basic Set for on-roof installation (collectors are not included in delivery)
Table 4 Figure no. Components: Basic Set for On-Roof Installation Quantity
1 Roof brackets 1 (6) 2
2 2
1202 mm (EURO L22, C22, C32) incl. 2 collector clamps
3 2
1168 mm (EURO L22, C22, C32) incl. 1 collector rail
6 Collector connection hose for solar circuit, 900 mm length 2
7 Gasket " 6
8 Adapter tting " 18 mm 2
9 Wire strap 1
10 Collector holder 4
1
2
5
4
3
Figure 12 Extension Set for on-roof installation (collector is not included in delivery)
Table 5 Figure no. Components: Extension Set for On-Roof Installation Amount
1 Roof brackets 1 (2) 2
2 2
3 Collector interconnection rail connector 2
4 Collector connecting hose, 250 mm length 1
5 Gasket " 2
3.2 Installation of the Roof-Brackets

The roof brackets shown in this manual are given
as examples only. The actual type varies and de-
pends on the roong. For more information refer
to the installation instructions included with the
roof brackets.
Figure 13 Correct xing of roof bracket type P Stv to rafter
3.3 Supporting Rail Installation
A
2
1
1.1
1
1 2
Before commencing roof installation of the rails,

prepare rails on the ground by connecting them
with the included rail connector.
30 Nm
17 Nm
Figure 14 Overview of rail installation (upper image; collector clamps are pre-assembled).
1 supporting rail 1 xed with two roof brackets and holding two collector clamps
2 supporting rail 2 xed with rail connector to upper rail and one roof bracket; rail 2 holds one collector clamp.
Table 6 Section Distance (mm)

EURO L20, C20, C30 EURO L22, C22, C32
A 1600 1900 min. 1500
B max. 1200 900 1200
C 20 200 20 200
2
X
17 Nm

against collector and tighten (17 Nm).
Figure 15 Installation of rst collector xation!
1.1
Place the second collectors frame ridge under the collector

clamps on the side of the rst collector. Slightly loosen on
other side, push towards collector and fasten the collector
clamps (17 Nm).
Wrong or badly positioned collectors can lead to an
insufcient xation!
Figure 16 Installation of following collectors
4. Sensor Installation
Figure 17 Remove rubber plug from frame. If necessary use screw Figure 18 Pull sensor through rubber plug and insert sensor top into
driver to uncover sensor sleeve. sensor sleeve. Screw in rubber plug again.
5. Collector Connections
1.1
Figure 19 Use counter force to support collector interconnection hose Figure 20 Use counter force to support collector interconnection hose
when tightening to protect connection and hose against damage. when tightening to protect connection and hose against damage.
Figure 21 Connect the collector interconnection hose to the solar cir- Figure 22 2 collectors installed on-roof, horizontal and next to each
cuit inside the roof via adapter tting "-18 mm. other can be connected with a special connection set
(part no. 190 202 30).
6. Accessories
Figure 23 Collector handles for an easy transport Figure 24 Protection of sensor cable against marten bites (part no.
(part no. 188 005 02). 192 040 09 for black collectors, part no. 192 040 10 for aluminium
coloured collectors).
Figure 25 Height adjustable roof brackets P Alu Hv Top for at Figure 26 Roof brackets BS Stv KF Top for slate and plane tiles for
clay tiles for equalising uneven roofs (basic set includes 6 pieces, equalising uneven roofs (basic set incl. 6 items, part no. 192 030 25).
partno.19203032).
Figure 27 EURO connection set, 2x horizontal (part no. 190 202 30) for
connecting two collectors next to each other, horizontal.

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
EURO TRIC F Free Standing
1.1
Figure 1 Horizontal and vertical free standing setup
Content
2. Scope of Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3. Installation of Racking Triangles. . . . . . . . . 56
4. Horizontal Collector Installation . . . . . . . . 63
5. Vertical Collector Installation . . . . . . . . . . 64
Installation instructions valid for these collectors:
7. Collector Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 EURO L20, EURO C20, EURO C30, EURO C22,
EURO L22, EURO C32
8. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Solar Thermal / Solar Collectors EN-XXX_EURO-TRIC-F_MA-100118-11216C00 49


Remove protective lm and lay down collectors with glass
liner. If incorrectly stored, humidity can enter the collectors
NOTE as additional information through the air vents. Storing collectors in foil package can
damage the glass surface (see gure 2).

Protection
system.
The installation process must reect the on-site conditions
as well as applicable rules, regulations and accident pre-
vention procedures. Basic accident prevention principles
are shown in gure 5. Installers must be qualied and
where applicable licensed to work on roofs.
50 EN-XXX_EURO-TRIC-F_MA-100118-11216C00
damage to absorber!
1.6 Recycling Note

You can nd additional information in the Partner Area of

our website at http://www.wagner-solar.com
EN-XXX_EURO-TRIC-F_MA-100118-11216C00 51
fro
m
60

fro
m
45

from 3 m
Figure 5 Accident prevention guidelines for work on roofs.
2. Scope of Supply
2.1 Horizontal
8 1.1
9
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
Figure 6 Basic Set, horizontal, free-standing installation (collector not included in delivery)
Table 1 Figure no. Components: Basic Set, Horizontal Quantity

1 Pre-assembled racking triangle 2
2 Hexagonal screw M8 x 40 2
3 Nut M8 interlocked 2
4 Collector clamp lower side 4
5 Collector clamp top 4
6 Washer 8.4 4
8 Gasket " 2
9 Interconnection (screw to solder) " 18 mm 2
2.2 Vertical
10
9
7
6
5
3
2
8
Figure 7 Basic Set, vertical, free-standing installation (collector not included in delivery)
Table 2 Figure no. Components: Basic Set, Vertical Quantity

4 Collector rail 1257 mm (EURO L20, C20, C30) or 1202 mm (EURO L22, C22, C32) incl. 2 collector clamps 2
5 Clamping angle 4
6 Washer 8,4 4
9 Gasket " 2
10 Interconnection (screw to solder) " 18 mm 2
4
7
6
11 5
10
3
2
1
1.1
9 8
Figure 8 Extension Set, vertical, free-standing installation (collector not included in delivery)
Table 3 Figure no. Components: Extension Set, Vertical Quantity

4 Collector rail 1223 mm (EURO L20, C20, C30) or 1168 mm (EURO L22, C22, C32) incl. 1 collector clamp 2
5 Clamping angle 2
6 Washer 8.4 2
9 Rail connector 2
10 Gasket " 2
11 Collector connection hose, 250 mm length 1
3. Installation of the Racking Triangles
3.1 Possible Inclination Angles
12
57
0
-20
20
14
90
0
-20
20
Figure 9 EURO TRIC F horizontal for 35 50

19
00
22
00
Figure 10 EURO TRIC F vertical for 37 50
3.2 Setting up the Racking Triangle
17 Nm
M8 x 40
17 Nm
1.1
3
Figure 11 Unfold racking triangle and x
3.3 Determining the

Collector Inclination
Table 4 Collector Type [] A [mm] B [mm]
35 863 10
EURO TRIC F 40 940 147
All EURO-
horizontal
collectors 45 1009 311
35 50
50 1070 521
37 1471 0
EURO L20, 40 1553 153
EURO C20 and
EURO C30 45 1679 458
A
EURO TRIC F 50 1782 920
vertical
37 50 37 1338 0
EURO L22, 40 1410 153
EURO C22 and
EURO C32 45 1522 458 B
50 1619 920 Figure 12 Collector inclination and setup dimensions
3.4 Positions of the Ground Fixations
max. 200 max. 200
Figure 13 Max. distance from ground xations (mm)
The number of clamping angles required for xing the

racking triangles depends on the type of surface. If unsure,
please contact our technical support for more information.
3.5 Installation on Steel Beams

10
,5
Figure 14 Fixing the racking triangles on steel beams
3.6 Installation on Concrete Slabs

12
1.1
Figure 15 Fixing the racking triangles on concrete slabs placed on protective underlay.
3.7 Installation on Gravel Board Set
Figure 16 Gravel board basic set for vertical installation (prod. no. 192 020 75). At the supporting prole of the triangle use 4 clamping angles
to encompass the ground rail on both sides (magnifying glass 1). At the front (magnifying glass 2) use one angle on each side.
Provide protective underlay to avoid damage to roong!
1.1
Figure 17 Gravel board basic and extension sets for vertical installation (prod. no. 192 020 76)
Figure 18 Gravel board set for horizontal installation (prod. no. 192 020 74)
1
2 Do not damage the

roong when drilling!
max 30
5 3
2/3
1/3
4
30
max 30
5
max
5,2
Figure 19 Fixing the racking triangles on gravel boards.
4. Horizontal Collector Installation
1.1
For lower xation of EURO L20, C20 and C30

X use lowest rivet nut. Use rivet nut above lowest
for EURO L22, C22 and C32.
Loosely pre-install the collector clamps and then

place collector. Finally push collector clamps to
collector and tighten. Incorrectly positioned
collector clamps may result in insufcient stability!
Figure 20 Connecting collector and racking triangles
5. Vertical Collector Installation
5.1 Installation of the Collector Supporting Rails
2 Table 5
Section Indications
17 Nm A 1700 mm (drilling hole distance)
Position the central supporting
triangle centred under the butt
B
joint of the collector supporting
1 rails.
C 20 200 mm
2
B
A
C
1
3 4
17 Nm
Figure 21 Overview supporting rail installation 1 rail with two collector clamps 2 rail with one collector clamp
1.1
2
X
17 Nm
Place collector, then push collector clamp tightly

against collector and tighten (17 Nm)
Incorrectly positioned collector clamps may result
Figure 22 Installation of the rst collector. in insufcient stability!
X
1
2
X
Position the frame ridge of the 2nd collector under the

xed collector clamps at the side of the rst collector.
On the other side loosen collector clamps slightly,
then push tightly against collector and tighten screw.
Incorrectly positioned collector clamps may result in
Figure 23 Installation of following collectors insufcient stability!
1.1
Figure 24 Remove rubber plug from frame. Possibly use screwdriver Figure 25 Pull sensor through rubber plug and insert sensor tip into
to lay open sensor sleeve. sensor sleeve. Screw in rubber plug again.
0
16 4
24
Figure 26 Counter collector connection hose (vertical, free standing Figure 27 Installation dimensions for connection set prod. no. 190202
set-up) during tightening to protect collector connection and connec- 30; Cut to size for compression or solder connections.
tion hose against damages.
8. Accessories
2x
Figure 28 Connection set prod. no 190 202 30 for 2 horizontal col- Figure 29 Collector handles for easier collector transport (prod. no.
lectors: 2 insulated T-connector pieces with 2 x " swivel nuts and 1 x 188 005 02)
" M thread.
Figure 30 Optional sensor protection against marten bites (part no.

192 040 09 for black collectors, part no. 192 040 10 for aluminum
colored collector frames).

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
EURO L20 MQ TRIC A and TRIC F

Free Standing and On Roof Installation
1.1
Figure 1 EURO L20 MQ TRIC A
Content
Figure 2 EURO L20 MQ TRIC F
2. TRIC A On Roof Installation . . . . . . . . . . 73
3. TRIC F Free Standing Installation . . . . . . . 80
4. Collector Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Solar Thermal / Solar Collectors EN-XXX_EURO-L20-MQ-TRIC-A-TRIC-F_MA-100119-1WA10024 69



Protection
system.
70 EN-XXX_EURO-L20-MQ-TRIC-A-TRIC-F_MA-100119-1WA10024
damage to absorber!
1.6 Recycling Note

EN-XXX_EURO-L20-MQ-TRIC-A-TRIC-F_MA-100119-1WA10024 71
fro
m
60

fro
m
45

from 3 m
Figure 6 Accident prevention rules for working on roofs
2. TRIC A On Roof Installation
2.1 Scope of Supply, Basic Set
1.1
5
Figure 7 Basic set for on roof installation
Table 1
Figure No. Part Quantity
Roof bracket or roof anchors (not included in delivery);
1 4-6
quantity according to structural requirements
2 EURO collector supporting rail, pre assembled, 2215 mm 2
3 EURO collector holder L34 2
4 EURO MQ connection set 1
5 Collector connection set, insulation 900 mm 2
6 Collector (not included in delivery)
The roof bracket is shown as an example the ac-

tual type depends on the roong. Please observe
the instructions accompanying the brackets.
Figure 8 Installation of roof bracket
2.2 TRIC A Scope of Supply, Extension Set
6
5
Figure 9 Extension set for on roof installation
Table 2
Figure No. Part Quantity
Roof bracket or roof anchors (not included in delivery);
1 (4-6)
quantity according to structural requirements
2 EURO collector supporting rail, pre assembled, 2.215 mm 2
3 TRIC A rail connector set 2
4 EURO collector holder L34 2
5 EURO MQ connection set 2
6 Collector (not included in delivery)
2.3 TRIC A Installation of Rails
A
B
1.1
C
1 2
30 Nm
Figure 10 Overview of supporting rail installation with indicated roof

bracket spacings for 4 roof brackets per collector (for structural limits
see table 4. In other cases our technical support provides assistance).
Table 4 Dimensioning Examples for Snow / Wind Load Zones 1-2 1
Building Altitude above On-roof installation (no. of roof
height (m) sea level (m) brackets per collector) 2
10 400 4
10 800 6
Table 3 Section Length [mm] 10-20 400 4
A ca. 1000 10-20 800 6
B 1815 - 2175
1 45 inclination, installation in edge and corner areas of roofs not
considered; wind speed vref 25 m/s, wind pressure at 10 m
C 20 - 200 above ground qref 0.39 (kN/m2)
2 Roof bracket P STv KF; ridge distance or distance to snow barrier
above < 1 m; roof bracket quantities are guide values round
acc. to eld size and individual situation.
2.4 TRIC A Connecting Basic and Extension Sets
30 Nm
17 Nm
Figure 11 Connecting basic and extension set 30
Figure 12 After the 6th collector a spacing of approx. 30 mm is re-

quired to accommodate thermal expansion. For this please order the
additional longer eld compensator (order no. 819 102 49). Take care
that the collector supporting rails are precisely aligned.
2.5 TRIC A Placing of the First Collector
1.1
Figure 13 Warning labels of the rst and last collector must be on inner side (absorber geometry!)
1 X
X
17 Nm
Slightly loosen collector clamp. Then push

towards collector and tighten (17 Nm)
Incorrectly positioned collector clamps may
Figure 14 Installation of the rst collector result in insufcient stability!
2.6 TRIC A Placing of the Next Collector
1.1
2 3 4
Figure 15 Installation of the next collector
3. TRIC F Free Standing Installation
3.1 TRIC F Scope of Delivery, Basic Set
4 5 6
2 3 9
10
1
7
8
Figure 16 Basic set free standing installation
Table 5
Figure No. Part Quantity Figure No. Part Quantity
1 EURO MQ racking triangle 2 6 Screw M8x40, A2 4
EURO collector supporting rail,
2 Screw M8x40, A2 2 7 2
pre-assembled, 2215 mm
3 Nut M8 with locking teeth, A2 2 8 EURO collector holder L34 2
4 Clamping bracket 4 9 EURO MQ connection set 1
5 Washer 8.4 4 10 Collector (not included in delivery)
3.2 TRIC F Scope of Delivery, Extension Set
2 3
7
1.1
1
10
4 5 6
11
9
8
10
Figure 17 Extension set for free standing installation
Table 6
Figure No. Part Quantity Figure No. Part Quantity
EURO collector supporting rail,
1 Racking triangle 1 7 2
pre-assembled, 2215 mm
2 Screw M8x40, A2 1 8 TRIC A rail connector set 2
3 Nut M8 with locking teeth, A2 1 9 EURO collector holder L34 2
4 Clamping bracket 2 10 EURO MQ connection set 1
5 Washer 8.4 2 11 Collector (not included in delivery)
6 Screw M8x40, A2 2
3.3 TRIC F Unfolding of Racking Triangles
M8 x 40
Figure 18 Unfolding and locking racking triangle
3.4 TRIC F Possible Inclinations
A
10
50
Figure 20 Collector inclination and setup dimensions
11
90 Table 7 [] C [mm] A [mm]
35 12 879
40 110 952
Figure 19 Dimensions of racking triangle EURO L20 MQ 35 - 55 45 224 1018

50 360 1077
55 539 1127
3.5 TRIC F Position of Ground Fixations
max. 200 max. 200

1.1
Figure 21 Projecting lengths
3.6 TRIC F Installation on Steel Beams

The number of clamping brackets required to x the tri-
angles depends on the ground conditions. For additional
information, please contact our technical support.

10
,5
Figure 22 Fixing racking triangles on steel beams
3.7 TRIC F Installation on Concrete Slabs

12
Figure 23 Fixing racking triangles on concrete slabs
3.8 TRIC F Installation on Gravel Boards
Figure 24 Overview TRIC F for 2 collectors
1
Do not damage the

roong when drilling!
max 30
5
2
3
5,2
1.1
2/3
1/3
4
3
Figure 25 Fixing of racking triangles

Enclose ground rail at the supporting leg of the triangle with 4 clamping brackets (magnifying glass 3). For the frontal part use 2 brackets (mag.
glass 4)
Table 8
4 Dimensioning Examples for Snow / Wind Load Zones 1-2 1
Building Altitude above Free standing ballast (kg/m
height (m) sea level (m) collector area)
10 400 90
10 800 90
10-20 400 120
10-20 800 120
1 45 inclination, installation in edge and corner areas of roofs not
considered; wind speed vref 25 m/s, wind pressure at 10 m
above ground qref 0.39 (kN/m2)
3.9 TRIC F Connecting Racking Triangles

and Collector Supporting Rails
Table 9 Section Length [mm]

B 1815 - 2175
C 20 - 200
1 2 3
17 Nm
Figure 26 Installation of the rails
3.10 TRIC F Connecting Basic and Extension Sets
17 Nm
17 Nm
1.1
Position the central racking triangle

in the area of the rails butt joint.
Figure 27 Extension of basic set
3.11 TRIC F Placing of the First Collector
X
17 Nm
Slightly loosen collector clamp. Then push

towards collector and tighten (17 Nm)
Incorrectly positioned collector clamps may
Figure 28 Connecting collector and racking triangles result in insufcient stability!
3.12 Placing of the Next Collector
1.1
2 3 4
Figure 29 Installing the next collector
Push cylindrical end of the connection piece with O-ring
into the collector connection. Rotate the clamp into its
proper position on the parts that have to be connected,
and tighten with 4 mm Allen key, until the bracket arms
almost touch each other.
For connections in Figure 30 and 32 make sure that the

connector connection is not twisted when tightening the
friction ring connection.
Sample connection layouts you can nd in the technical

information EURO Solar Collector L20 MQ AR.
2x
Figure 30 Fitting set for connection to the solar circuit (order no. Figure 31 Connection set (order no. 192 040 13)
19204012)
Figure 32 Air bleeder set (order no. 192 040 16) Figure 33 Plug set (order no. 192 040 11)
1.1
Figure 34 Remove rubber plug from frame. If necessary, use screw- Figure 35 Pull sensor through the rubber plug and insert sensor tip
driver to expose sensor sleeve. into the sensor sleeve. Then screw in rubber plug again.
Figure 36 Secure sensor cable at connection hose with a cable binder.
6. Accessories
Figure 37 Sensor protection kit against marten/animal bites optionally Figure 37 Collector handles for easier transport of collectors (order
available (order no. 19204010 for silver coloured frame or order no. no. 188 005 02).
19204009 for black).

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
EURO C20/L20 In-Roof Installation

for Slate and Plain Tile Roongs (straight and round cut)
1.1
Figure 1 EURO-roof integration in plain tile roof (round cut)
Content
For roof pitch > 25 1. General Safety Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Weather proof integration thanks to aluminum cladding 1.1 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
panels and aluminum skirting 1.2 Norms and Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Pipe connections protected under upper cladding 1.3 Qualication of the Installer . . . . . . . . . . 94
1.4 Intended Use and Application . . . . . . . . . 94
1.5 Pre Installation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
The installation is shown for round cut plain tiles. The 1.6 Recycling Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
installation with slates is very similar, but the installer 2. Scope of Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
should have previous experience with slate roong 2.1 Basic Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
work. 2.2 Extension Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3. Installation Field Preparation . . . . . . . . . . 98
4. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Solar Thermal / Solar Collectors EN-XXX_EURO-C20-L20-In-Roof-Slate_MA-100902-1WA10143 93

installation must be carried out by authorized professio-
The following symbols are used throughout these instruc- nals. Non-compliance renders the warranty void.

WARNING against material damage between collectors (e.g. wooden laths). When leaning coll-
ectors against walls or similar, use a minimum inclination of
15 and apply spacers. Do not use cardboard as underli-
ner. If incorrectly stored, humidity can enter the collectors
NOTE as additional information through the air vents. Storing collectors in plastic lm pa-
ckage can damage the glass surface (see gure 2).

The standards and regulations applicable at the installa- mal installations for hot water preparation and space hea-
tion location must be adhered to. In absence of other re- ting support. As operating mediums water (attention risk
gulations we recommend to follow the following norms: of freezing!) or an appropriate water-glycol mixture can
Protection
VDE 0185 part 305 For roof heating centrals and when 4 or more EURO coll-
DIN VDE 0100 part 540 ectors with anti reective glass are installed vertically, the
country or territory).
Especially the pipes in the lower parts of the building must Preventing Frost Damage
be connected electrically conductive, conforming to stan- After pressure testing and ushing, collectors cannot be
dards. The collector installation must be professionally completely emptied. Make sure that no pure water re-
integrated with an existing or new lightning protection mains in collector during risk of frost!
system.
tions) and EN 1991-1-3 (Snow Loads). If you have questi- natively postpone the installation of gaskets to just before
ons related to structural conditions and planning, please lling the solar circuit.
The installation process must reect the on-site conditions
as well as applicable rules, regulations and accident pre-
vention procedures. Installers must be qualied and - whe-
re applicable - licensed to work on roofs.
94 EN-XXX_EURO-C20-L20-In-Roof-Slate_MA-100902-1WA10143
Risk of burns at collector connections as soon as unco-
vered collector is exposed to the sun (gure 3).
Remove protective plastic caps from connections befo-
re collector is exposed to the sun. Risk of melting and
damage to absorber!
Remove glass protection PE-LD lm before commenci-
ng installation work! (gure 4).
1.6 Recycling Note

Figure 3 Risk of burns: Collector connections heat up during solar ir-

radiation.
EN-XXX_EURO-C20-L20-In-Roof-Slate_MA-100902-1WA10143 95
2. Scope of Supply
2.1 Basic Set
5
1
3
4
8
10
9
12
16
14
15
13
Figure 5 Components of basic set 11
Table 1 Scope of Supply, Basic Set (Part. no. 192 010 70) Table 1, continued
Fig. no. Component Qty Part no. Flat gasket " (for no. 4 and 5) 6 190 201 52
1 Flashing sheet, upper left 1 819 721 62 Solder tting "-18 mm
2 801 90
(for no.4)
2 Flashing sheet, upper right 1 819 721 64
Felt nails (for no. 12) 35 188 53
3 Wooden support 2 819 920 46
Self tapping screw 4 x 35
4 Collector connection hose 2 130 26 26 819 501 86
(for no. 3 and 8)
5 Collector interconnection hose 1 130 000 10
4 819 501 88
6 Foam rubber sealing tape 3 819 450 20 (for no. 3)
7 Cellular rubber sealing tape 2 110 101 23 Sheet metal screw with washer,
4 819 501 87
5x25 (for no. 3)
8 Collector xing clip 4 190 102 15
Silicone sealant 1 120 100 20
9 Side panels, plain tile / slate 28 819 720 99
9a Side panels, welsh sl. (not shown) 18 819 721 01
Sets for plain tiles and slates (except welsh slates) are
10 Silicone T-prole 1 819 721 50
delivered with the same number of side panels (no. 9).
Cladding corners, lower left 819 720 95 The actually required number depends on the roong
11 1
(2-parts) 819 721 06
and slate size.
Cladding corners, lower right 819 720 98
12 1
(2-parts) 819 721 07
13 Cladding panel, lower left 1 819 720 96
14 Cladding panel, lower right 1 819 720 97
15 Collector holder, lower side 4 819 721 03
16 Retainer clip, lower side 4 819 721 02
2.2 Extension Set
7
2
6
5
1.1
10
Figure 6 Components of extension set
Table 2 Scope of Supply, Extension Set (Part no. 192 010 72)
Fig. no. Component Qty Part no.
1 Flashing sheet, upper side 1 819 721 63
4 Foam rubber sealing tape 2 819 450 20
5 Cellular rubber sealing tape 1 110 101 23
8 Cladding panel, lower side 1 819 720 96
9 Collector holder, lower side 2 819 721 03
10 Retainer clip, lower side 1 819 721 02
Flat gaskets " (for no. 3) 2 190 201 52
Felt nails 10 188 53
Self tapping screws 4 x 35
12 819 501 86
(for no.s 2 and 6)
Self tapping screws 5 x 120 mm
2 819 501 88
(for no. 2)
Sheet metal screw with washer
2 819 501 87
4.5 x 25 (for no. 2)
3. Installation Field Preparation
To warrant permanence of the installation, various prere- For best results properly utilize the exible space below
quisites have to be fullled: the collector (distance to lower tile row between 60 and
For plain tile (or similar) roongs on laths, a waterproof 100 mm).
and diffusion reducing lm or sarking with at least 24 Leave the existing roof battens in place as supporting
mm counter-lathing must be present to assure proper construction, and afx the additional laths required for the
ventilation. If proper backside ventilation cannot be installation according to the dimensions given in gure 7
provided via ridge and eaves, a venting tile must be in- and 8. All laths that are part of the collector supporting
stalled, approx. 90 cm above and below the collector structure must be solidly screwed onto the rafters (min.
eld (see also gure 8, lower part). screws 4x70).
For roongs with slates on solid wood boards, an unda- The installation eld between the cladding elements (gu-
maged diffusion proof sarking must be placed, and roof re 8 A) has to extend for at least 35 mm above the collector
vents should be integrated approx. every 90 cm. eld. The collector eld should be positioned so that the
Keep a distance of at least 1m between collectors and side claddings can be comfortably cut to size.
roof components or extensions like vents, turrets, chim-
neys or roof windows that emit humid air. Otherwise Table 3 Installation Dimensions [mm]
additional humidity might enter the collector vents at No. of Coll. Width, collector eld Width installation eldA
the collector frame. 1 Collector 1215 1285
There should be at least 2 to 3 rows of roof tiles above
2 Collectors 2435 2505
and below the collector eld (dep. on tile size).
The roof tile row above the collector should extend for 3 Collectors 3655 3725
at least 100 mm over the upper ashing sheets. If requi- 4 Collectors 4875 4945
red, the roof tiles have to be cut to size.
26
33
23
58
21
18
60
-1
00
35
Figure 7 Dimensions for installation eld and position of installation laths. Choose lath strength according to the strength of existing laths.
Additionally required laths are highlighted in grey (5 pieces); Length of lath A (installation eld width).
1.1
1
2
3 6
Figure 8 In-roof installation longitudinal cut (upper image) and cross-ection (lower image).
1 Roof battens; 2 Counter battens; 3 Sarking; 4 Rafter; 5 Diffusion proof lm; 6 Venting space
Solar sensor Solar sensor Solar sensor
Figure 9 Vertical orientation for two, three and max. four collectors in serial connection.
Connection of more than four units by combination of parallel and serial connection.
4. Installation
Figure 10 Tools for installation: folding rule, drilling machine, Phillips- Figure 11 Pipe lead with sarking membrane: make a T-shape cut into
Bit PZ 2 and 3, open spanner sizes 16, 19, 24, hammer, cutter knife, the sarking, lead through the connection hose and close cuts with ap-
silicone gun (where required angle grinder with stone cutter). propriate tape.
2
00
x3
ma
00
x1
ma
Figure 12 Place two collector holders per collector on roof batten and Figure 13 Insert silicone T-prole between collectors. Alternately
x each with 2 self tapping screws 4 x 35 (max. 100 mm dist. from coll- pushing and pulling eases work. Then push collectors towards each
ector edge, and max. 300 mm from rafter) (1). Then place the collectors other until ush.
with approx. 8 mm spacing (2).
Figure 14 Screw on upper collector xing clip at both collector edges Figure 15 Apply thin layer of silicone seal between wings of T-prole
with 2 self tapping screws 4 x 35 each at max. 100 mm distance from and collector frame. Shorten projections of T-prole to approx 2 cm
collector corner and 200 mm from the next rafter. on each side.
1.1
Figure 16 Connect collectors. Use 2nd wrench to secure connection Figure 17 Connect collectors to solar circuit. Later check for leak tight-
and avoid damage. ATTENTION: risk of burns at connections during ness! ATTENTION: risk of burns at connections during solar irradiation!
solar irradiation!
Figure 18 Slip rubber seal over cable, insert solar sensor into sensor Figure 19 Position wooden support along collector and fasten with
sleeve; close opening with rubber seal and lead cable through roof. 4x35 and 5 x 120 self tapping screws.
Figure 20 Cut tiles below collector to size, if required. Ax with self Figure 21 Ax retainer clips for lower cladding panel (1), then fold
tapping screws 4 x 35. onto tile (2) .
2
3 1
Figure 22 Insert the two pieces of the corner wedge into deeper Figure 23 Insert side panel in lower groove of collector frame, place
groove at the collector (1 + 2) and slide together (3). seam between tile and collector and fold vertical sheet at onto roong
(see arrow).
1 2
Figure 24 Attach the corner piece and cut off above batten (1), then Figure 25 Alongside the side panels, the tiles may have to be narro-
x with felt nails (2). wed. Drill holes into very narrow tiles and ax with screws.
Figure 26 Place following panels as in gures 22 and 23, adjust along Figure 27 Cover sheet tting with a tile. Then alternately install panels
upper edge of the next batten and nail on. and tiles from bottom to top in the same way.
1.1
Figure 28 Insert lower cladding panel. Figure 29 Fix lower cladding panel with retainer clips.
Figure 30 Glue cellular rubber tape to upper collector edge. Figure 31 Push upper left ashing sheet to collector. The ashing
sheet must lock into the upper groove of the frame (see details).
Figure 32 Additional ashing sheets are connected by sticking them Figure 33 Push upper ashing sheets to collector corners (1), nail onto
together. battens (2) and adjust standing up sheet section at the corners as de-
scribed before.
Figure 34 Ax black foam rubber strip along the upper edge. Figure 35 Fix every ashing sheet with two sheet metal screws (with
washer).
Figure 36 Completed EURO in-roof installation on plain tile roof with rounded tiles.

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
EURO C20/L20 In-Roof Installation

for Pantile Roong (version 2010)
1.1
Figure 1 EURO roof integration on pantile roof
Content
1. General Safety Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
1.1 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
1.2 Norms and Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . 106
1.3 Qualication of the Installer . . . . . . . . . 106
1.4 Intended Use and Application . . . . . . . . 106
1.5 Pre Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1.6 Recycling Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
2. Scope of Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
For roof pitch > 20 2.1 Basic Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Weather proof integration thanks to aluminum cladding 2.2 Extension Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
panels and aluminum skirting 3. Installation Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Pipe connections protected under upper cladding 4. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Solar Thermal / Solar Collectors EN-XXX_EURO-C20-L20-In-Roof-Pantile_MA-100503-1WA10141 105



Protection
system.
106 EN-XXX_EURO-C20-L20-In-Roof-Pantile_MA-100503-1WA10141
damage to absorber!
1.6 Recycling Note

EN-XXX_EURO-C20-L20-In-Roof-Pantile_MA-100503-1WA10141 107
2. Scope of Supply
2.1 Basic Set
17
5 10
1
7 11
8
12
18
9
14
15
13
Figure 5 Components of basic set
Table 1 Scope of Supply, Basic Set (Order No. 192 010 63) Table 1 continued
Fig. No. Component Qtty Order No. 15 Supporting lath 1205 mm 2 190 102 18
1 Flashing sheet, upper left 1 819 721 43 16 Supporting lath 200 mm 1 190 102 19
2 Flashing sheet, upper right 1 819 721 45 17 Roof tile supporting bar 2 819 721 57
3 Wooden support 2 819 920 53 Flat sealing gasket "
6 190 201 52
(for no. 4 and 5)
4 Collector connection hose 2 130 26
Solder tting "-18 mm (for no. 4) 2 801 90
6 Foam rubber sealing tape 7 819 450 20
Self tapping screws 4 x 35
7 Cellular rubber sealing tape 2 110 101 23 12 819 501 86
(for no. 3 and 8)
10 819 500 55
9 Side panels, left 1 819 721 49 (for no. 15 and 16)
10 Side Panels, right 1 819 721 50 Self tapping screw 5 x 120 (for
4 819 501 88
no. 3)
Sheet metal screw 4.5 x 25
12 Sheet xing clips 10 181 060 00 4 819 501 87
(for no. 1 and 2)
13 Cladding panel, lower left 1 819 721 51 Drilling screw 4.3 x 13 with
4 819 501 85
14 Cladding panel, lower right 1 819 721 53 gasket (for no. 13 u. 14)
2.2 Extension Set
1.1
Figure 6 Components of extension set
Table 2 Scope of Supply, Extension Set (Order No. 192 010 60)
Fig. no. Component Qtty. Order no.
1 Flashing sheet, top 1 819 721 44
4 Foam ruber sealing tape 2 819 450 20
5 Cellular rubber sealing tape 1 110 101 23
6 Collector xing clip, top 2 190 102 15
8 Sheet xing clip 2 181 060 00
9 Cladding panel, lower 1 819 721 52
10 Supporting lath 1205 mm 1 190 102 18
11 Roof tile supporting bar 1 819 721 57
Flat sealing gasket " (for no. 3) 2 190 201 50
Self tapping screws 4 x 35 (for no. 2 u. 6) 8 819 501 86
Self tapping screws 4 x 70 (for no. 10) 5 819 500 55
Self tapping screws 5 x 120 (for no. 2) 2 819 501 88
Sheet metal screw 4.5 x 25 (for no. 1) 2 819 501 87
Drilling screw 4.3 x 13 with gasket (for no. 9) 2 819 501 85
3. Installation Field
To warrant permanence of the installation, various prereq- Leave the existing roof battens in place as supporting
uisites have to be fullled: construction, and afx the additional laths required for the
A waterproof and diffusion reducing foil with at least 24 installation according to the dimensions given in gure 7
mm counter-lathing must be present to assure proper and 8.
ventilation. If proper backside ventilation cannot be Ideally determine the width of the collector eld in such a
provided via ridge and eaves, a venting tile must be in- way that on one side the spacing between collectors and
stalled, approx. 90 cm above and below the collector roong is approx 15 mm. On the other side cut tiles to t.
eld (see also gure 8, lower part).
Keep a distance of at least 1m between collectors and Table 3 Dimensions for Installation [mm]
roof components or extensions like vents, turrets, chim- No. of collectors Width of collector Width of installation
neys or roof windows that emit humid air. Otherwise ad- eld eld (A)
ditional humidity might enter the collector vents at the 1 Collector 1215 1245
collector frame.
There should be at least 2 rows of roof tiles above and 2 Collectors 2435 2465
below the collector eld. 3 Collectors 3655 3685
The roof tile row above the collector should extend for
4 Collectors 4875 4905
at least 100 mm over the upper ashing sheets. If re-
quired, the roof tiles have to be shortened.
For best results properly utilize the exible space below
the collector (distance to lower tile row between 60 and
130 mm).
26
45
24
52
21
11
60
-1
30
15
0
10
Figure 7 Dimensions for installation eld and position of installation laths. Choose lath strength according to the strength of existing laths.
Additionally required laths are highlighted in grey (5 pieces); lath length = A (width of installation eld);
Width of installation eld =n x collector width + (n-1) x 5 mm (collector spacing) + 2 x 15 mm (distance from side).
26
20
-2
69
0
21
51
26
1.1
45 24
52
21
11
60
-13
0
1
2
3 6
Figure 8 In roof installation longitudinal section (upper drawing) and cross section (lower drawing).
1 Roof batten, 2 Counter lathing, 3 Sarking, 4 Rafters, 5 Low diffusion foil, 6 ventilation space
Solar sensor Solar sensor Solar sensor
Figure 9 Vertical orientation for two, three and max. four collectors in serial connection.
Connection of more than four units by combination of parallel and serial connection.
4. Installation
Figure 10 Tools for installation: folding rule, drilling machine, Phillips- Figure 11 Pipe lead with sarking membrane: make a T-shape cut into
Bit PZ 2 and 3, open spanner sizes 16, 19, 24, hammer, cutter knife, the sarking, lead through the connection hose and close cuts with ap-
silicone gun (where required angle grinder with stone cutter). propriate tape.
1
2
Figure 12 1. Afx supporting laths with self tapping screws 4x70, ends Figure 13 Insert silicone T-prole between collectors. Alternately
projecting approx. 100 mm 2. Place Collectors (approx. 8 mm dis- pushing and pulling eases work. Then push collectors at each other
tance between collectors). until ush.
Figure 14 Screw on upper collector xing clip on both collector edges Figure 15 Apply thin layer of silicone seal between wings of T-prole
with 2 self tapping screws 4 x 35 each. and collector frame. Shorten projections of T-Prole to approx 2 cm
on each side.
1.1
Figure 16 Connect collectors. Use 2nd wrench to secure connection Figure 17 Connect collectors to solar circuit. Later check for leak tight-
and avoid damage. ATTENTION: risk of burns at connections during ness!
solar irradiation!
Figure 18 Slip rubber seal over cable, insert solar sensor into sensor Figure 19 Position wooden support along collector and fasten with
sleeve; close opening with rubber seal and lead cable through roof. 4x35 and 5 x 120 self tapping screws.
Figure 20 Insert lower aluminum panels into the deeper rear groove Figure 21 Afx the lower cladding panels with 2 self tapping screws
of the collector frame (see highlighted details). Proceed the same way 4.2 x 16 each (with washer gasket).
with the corner edges.
1
Figure 22 Insert the pushed together side panels into the rear groove Figure 23 Push lower panel section downwards, until it snaps into the
of the frame in such a way that the upper notch (1) snaps into the col- latch of the lower corner.
lector frame. The panel sheet must lay evenly on the battens.
Figure 24 Nail on side panels with 4 xing clips. Figure 25 Afx cellular rubber tape to the upper collector edge.
Figure 26 Push upper left ashing sheet into left side panel. The upper Figure 27 Additional ashing sheets are connected by sticking them
locking bar of the ashing sheet must latch into the outer groove of the together.
collector frame (see highlighted details).
1.1
Figure 28 Fix upper ashing sheets on the batten using 2 xing clips. Figure 29 Position the roof-tile supporting bar by vertically shifting it,
so that later the tile row will be aligned with the tiles on the sides. Then
afx with metal strips to roof battens.
Figure 30 Afx black foam rubber tape along the fold to the upper Figure 31 In storm prone regions secure every ashing sheet with 2
ashing sheet. additional sheet metal screws each.
Figure 32 Afx foam rubber tape along the folds of the side panels Figure 33 Roof tiles above the collectors may have to be cut to size.
as well. Drill holes into the pieces that have to be attached, and screw to bat-
tens.
Figure 34 Along the side panels, the retaining edge of the roong tiles Figure 35 Remove adhesive protection foil from lower aluminum skirt-
may have to be removed; lateral size reduction may be required. Fixa- ing and press to surface of tiles.
tion if necessary via drilling (wire or screw).
Figure 36 Readily installed EURO in roof installation on pantile roof.

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
EN TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Roof Bracket Kits (Top)

ES DOCUMENTATIN TCNICA
Kit de anclajes (Top)

IT INFORMAZIONI TECHNICHE
Kit di ssaggio al tetto (Top)

1.1
P A2 Hv Top 200
86 - 126
41
102
162
140
P Alu Hv Top
60
81- 117
45 45
136 - 192
39-60
98
40 mm
182
Printed on 100 % recycled paper

Mounting systems XB-INT_Roof-bracket-kits-Top_TI-100804-11205Z00 117
P Stv KF Top 220
60
145
40
100
162 40
mm
220
60
145
40
100
162 40
mm
63
BS A2 Hv Top
50 40
78 - 105
120 - 140
11
229
358 mm
BS Stv KF Top
50
BS Stv IRL Top 98

11
229
358
mm
118 XB-INT_Roof-bracket-kits-Top_TI-100804-11205Z00
SF Stv Top
50
88
229
358
mm
PM A2 Hv Top 220 1.1
60
110-140
145-175
22
120
192
40 mm
M A2
40
55 - 95
85
372
232
mm
K A2 Hv
40
55 - 95 85
a b
K A2 Hv 180 180 25-45
b
K A2 Hv 200 200 45-65
12 K A2 Hv 300 300 50-150 mm
XB-INT_Roof-bracket-kits-Top_TI-100804-11205Z00 119
TR
25
t min 0,63
38 35
min 25
mm
KK 55
40
65 65
KS
150
40 55
57 - 72
mm

120 WAGNER & CO Zimmermannstrae 12 D-35091 Clbe/Marburg +49 (0) 6421 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-22
EN INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Roof Bracket Kit BS/SF (Top)

BS A2 Hv / BS Stv KF / BS Stv IRL / SF Stv
ES INSTRUCCINES DE MONTAJE
Kit de anclajes BS/SF (Top)

IT ISTRUZIONI DI MONTAGGIO 1.1
Kit di ssaggio al tetto BS/SF (Top)
EN
DE Important Notes
The dimensioning of the mounting system (number
of mounting triangels) should be specically carried
out for each individual project, following the specied
structural engineering standards and regulations.
Prerequisite for the proper application always is a solid
mounting base that can accommodate the occurring
forces (weight, wind and snow loads).
ES Observaciones importantes
Hay que realizar el dimensionamiento del sistema de
montaje (nmero de anclajes de tejado etc.) orientado
al proyecto y conforme con las normas.
Un subsuelo de jacin adecuado que puede absorber
las fuerzas surgiendas (fuerza de peso, carga elica y
por nieve) es siempre condicin de utilizacin
IT Informazioni importanti
Il dimensionamento del sistema di montaggio (numero
delle staffe di ancoraggio, portata delle guide etc) deve
essere eseguito considerando le norme rispettive.
Deve essere garantita unadeguata sottostruttura per il
montaggio cio di una sottostuttura in grado di sosten-
ere le forze (peso proprio, carico di vento e di neve) che
si verranno a creare

Mounting systems XB-INT_Roof-bracket-kit-BS-SF-Top_MA-100804-1WA20080 121
63
50 40
78 - 105
120 - 140
11
229
358 mm
BS Stv KF Top
50
BS Stv IRL Top 98

11
229
358
mm
SF Stv Top
50
88
229
358
mm
122 XB-INT_Roof-bracket-kit-BS-SF-Top_MA-100804-1WA20080
BS
SF
1.1
BS BS
BS
SF SF
XB-INT_Roof-bracket-kit-BS-SF-Top_MA-100804-1WA20080 123
BS A2 Hv
Dimensions only for module installation

Medidas slo para la montaje de mdulos
Dimensioni per linstallazione dei moduli
a min 900 mm
b max 450 mm

Roof Bracket Kit K A2 Hv

Kit de anclajes K A2 Hv
IT ISTRUZIONI DI MONTAGGIO
Kit di ssaggio al tetto K A2 Hv

1.1
EN
DE Important Notes
ES
FR Observaciones importantes
si verranno a creare.
h
K A2 Hv 180 25-45 mm
K A2 Hv 200 45-65 mm
K A2 Hv 250 90-110 mm
h
K A2 Hv 300 100-150 mm

Mounting systems XB-INT_Roof-bracket-kit-K-A2-Hv_MA-100804-12211A00 125
15 mm
9 mm
m
35m
m in
S9 S15 S19 9 mm 15 mm
S19
45Nm
S9
80 mm
S15
30 Nm

b Dimensioni per linstallazione dei moduli
a min 900 mm
b max 450 mm
a

Roof Bracket Kit P (Top)

P Alu Hv / P A2 Hv / P A2 / P Stv KF / PS Stv
Kit de anclajes P (Top)

IT ISTRUZIONI DI MONTAGGIO 1.1
Kit di ssaggio al tetto P (Top)
EN
DE Important Notes
si verranno a creare

Mounting systems XB-INT_Roof-bracket-kit-P-Top_MA-100804-1WA20079 127
P A2 Top
200
50
134
41
101
161
40
mm
P A2 Hv Top 200
50
86 - 126
145 - 185
41
102
40 mm
162
140
P Alu Hv Top
60
81 - 117
45 45
136 - 192
39 - 60
98
40 mm
182
220
60
145
40
100
162 40
mm
128 XB-INT_Roof-bracket-kit-P-Top_MA-100804-1WA20079
PS Stv Top 220
60
145
40
100
162 40
1.1
5m
m
5m
m
XB-INT_Roof-bracket-kit-P-Top_MA-100804-1WA20079 129
b
a

Dimensioni per linstallazione dei moduli
a min 900 mm
b max 450 mm

Roof Bracket Kit PM A2 Hv (Top)

Kit de anclajes PM A2 Hv (Top)

Kit di ssaggio al tetto PM A2 Hv (Top)

1.1
EN
DE Important Notes
ES
essere eseguito considerando le norme rispettive. 110-140
Deve essere garantita un'adeguata sottostruttura per il 145-175
montaggio cio di una sottostuttura in grado di soste-
nere le forze (peso proprio, carico di vento e di neve)
che si verranno a creare.
22
120
192
mm
220
60
40 mm

Mounting systems XB-INT_Roof-bracket-kit-PM-A2-Hv-Top_MA-100804-1WA20083 131
Tx40
S15
30 Nm
5m
m
5m
m
Dimensions only for Module installation

Dimensioni per l'installazione dei moduli
a min. 900 mm
b max. 450 mm

Solar Storage Cylinders and Components
It is common sense knowledge that a system can only be as good as its indivi-
dual components. Although our collectors are among the worlds most effective
Flat Plate Collectors, they would still be inefcient if the provided energy were
lost in other components of the solar energy system. Wagner & Co therefore
understood early that well designed hydronic components especially efci-
ent solar storage cylinders are a key element for an optimized solar yield. The
storage cylinders designed by Wagner & Co therefore are specically developed
and dimensioned for various applications and system sizes, ranging from highly
effective small-scale single family home hot water systems to large scale resi-
dential installations with heating support and commercial applications (hotels,
campgrounds, car washes, livestock farms etc.). The programme includes fresh-
water cylinders, small single storage solutions, large buffer tanks and tank-in-tank
combi-cylinders, the latter combining the advantages of both worlds in one
compact unit. Special attention is paid to reducing energy loss for example with 1.2
the new high-quality polyester ber eece insulation introduced for some sto-
rage lines in 2010 or the new CONVECTROL III convection brake. Our series of
auxiliary electric immersion heaters and tank-installation kits for freshwater units
and solar circulation units complement the Wagner & Co storage line.
ECO Solar Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
ECOplus Solar Cylinder Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
ECOplus Solar Cylinder Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
TERMO Combi Cylinder Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
TERMO Combi Cylinder Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
RATIO Buffer Cylinder Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
RATIO Buffer Cylinder Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Convection Brake CONVECTROL III. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Thermostatic Mixing Valve BM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Electrical Immersion Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
133
TECHNICAL INFORMATION / INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
ECO Solar Cylinder
1.2
Figure 1 ECO solar cylinder
Content
1. Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 4. Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2. General Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . 141 5. Advice for the User . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 6. Problem-Solving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3.1 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 7. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3.2 Setting Up Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
3.3 Installing Domestic Water Unit . . . . . . . . 142
3.4 Connecting Solar Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . 144
3.5 Connecting Auxiliary Heating Unit . . . . . . 144
3.6 Connecting Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . 145
Solar Thermal / Solar Cylinder EN-XXX_ECObasic-Solar-Cylinder_TI-MA-0810xx-11204500 135

1. Technical Information
Contents of Kit
The ECO solar cylinder is supplied standing and screwed
down on a pallet. The insulation is glued on, xed to the
cylinder and cannot be removed. It is surrounded by a pro-
tective PVC hull with additional soft PU insulation foam.
Before beginning the installation, please check that all
components presented in table 3 are present.
H G
F
M
E
J
C K
L
I
B
A
Figure 2 ECO solar cylinder / installation measurements (drawing not to scale)
136 EN-XXX_ECObasic-Solar-Cylinder_TI-MA-0810xx-11204500
Table 1 Technical Data ECO 200 ECO 300 ECO 400 ECO 500
Part no. 130 140 81 130 140 82 130 140 83 130 140 84
Volume domestic water (litre) 199 286 394 498
Auxiliary heating volume above connection D (litre) 64 99 127 168
Maximal allowed pressure (bar) 10
Maximal allowed temperature (C) 95
Total height including insulation (mm) H 1232 1697 1660 1783
Tilting height including insulation (mm) 1396 1827 1816 1952
Diameter including insulation and PVC hull (mm) D 610 610 710 760
Total weight including insulation (kg) approx. 85 approx. 114 approx. 166 approx. 215
Cold and hot water connections 1" male 3 (mm) A/G 110 / 1257 110 / 1722 127 / 1685 128 / 1808
Circulation return " male 3 (mm) 880 1045 1065 1125
Access ange, opening diameter = 110 mm (mm) l 272 272 278 285
Socket for electric heating coil 1 " female 3 (mm) K 705 770 770 870
Anode 1 " female 3 O Size complies with DIN 4753
Analogue thermometer (mm) N 919 1384 1325 1441
Collector temperature sensor positioning (mm) L 330 380 420 445 1.2
Auxiliary heating temperature sensor pos. (mm) M 930 1146 1166 1225
Performance Data
Insulation material (glued-on PU foam; PVC wrapping with zipper Thickness of insulation, incl. PVC-hull: 55 mm
Heat losses according to DIN EN V 12977 -3 1 W/K < 2.3 < 2.8 < 3.2 < 3.6
Solar heat exchanger (High quality steel St 37-2; welded to the cylinder)
Solar ow / return connections " male 3 (mm) B/C 180 / 630 180 / 580 205 / 635 205 / 685
Heat exchanger surface area (m) 0.8 1.2 1.5 1.8
Maximum allowed pressure (bar) 16
Maximum allowed temperature (C) 110
Volume of water contained in exchanger (litre) 5.7 7.5 9.4 11.3
Recommended collector area (m) up to 5 m up to 7 m up to 9 m up to 13 m
Auxiliary heating heat exchanger (high quality steel St 37-2; welded to the cylinder)
Performance index NL / related boiler output2 -/kW 1.4 (10) 1.8 (14) 2.1 (17) 2.5 (21)
Continuous performance 2 litre/h 460 605 720 830
Aux. heat. ow / return conn. " male 3 (mm) J/F 780 / 990 945 / 1215 965 / 1261 1020 / 1325
Heat exchanger surface area (m) 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
Maximum allowed pressure (bar) 16
Maximum allowed temperature (C) 110
Volume of water contained in exchanger (litre) 3.8 5.0 6.3 7.5
Remarks:
1 Calculations according to DIN EN V 12977 T3: Temperature of entire cylinder = 60 C, ambient temperature = 15 C;
2 Calculations according to DIN 4708, relative to auxiliary heat exchanger, if temperature of the cylinder is set at 60 C,
the supply temperature is 45 C, the boiler ow and return temperatures are 80 C and 60 C;
3 Threads according to DIN ISO 228-1, at tightening
EN-XXX_ECObasic-Solar-Cylinder_TI-MA-0810xx-11204500 137
Table 2 Accessories Part Numbers
ECO connection set combi, 4 x combi tting " x 18, 2 x combi tting 1", cap and seals Part no. 139 000 66
Cylinder safety unit S22 including safety valve 10 bar, one-way valve,
22 mm soldericonnection ttings Part no. 130 100 56
" connection with screw thread Part no. 139 000 35
CORREX-UP anode, maintenance-free corrosion protection, 230V, consumption 2.5 kWh per year Part no. 130 101 26
Circulation pump BW 152, including ball valves and non-return valve, connection " M or solder to 15 Part no. 160 102 14
mm copper pipe
Electric immersion heater
1.5 kW / 230V / 260 mm; 1.5 kW: Part no. 139 001 45
3 kW / 230V / 400V / 360 mm; 3 kW: Part no. 139 001 42
6 kW / 400V / 550 mm; 6 kW: Part no. 139 001 43
9 kW / 400V / 600 mm. 9 kW: Part no. 139 001 44
Check cylinder diameter before ordering!
Thermostatic mixer, up to 55 C
22 mm solder connection ttings Part no. 100 89
" connection with screw thread Part no. 150 300 75
Replacement sensor xing clamp 139 00 118
Recommended System Solutions

Some system solutions including locations of connections
are shown in the following schematics.
P1 : Solar circuit pump Solar collector

P2 : Auxiliary heating pump for cylinder
P3 : Heating pump
BWM : Thermostatic mixing valve
Solar control
SUNGO
Central heating circuit
P1
CIRCO
P3
ECObasic
P2
Oil or gas
boiler
Domestic hot water BWM
Domestic water
Figure 3 Solar thermal system for domestic hot water preparation. Single storage system with ECO cylinder and auxiliary heating by gas or oil
boiler. The SUNGO controls the speed of the solar circuit pump depending on solar irradiation and cylinder temperature. This ensures continuous
operation, optimized yield and reduced electricity consumption.
Solar collector
Solar control
SUNGO
P1 : Solar circuit pump
V1 : 3-Way valve
(auxiliary domestic hot water
heating OR central heating)
Boiler
P1
CIRCO
ECObasic
V1
1.2
Domestic water
Figure 4 Solar thermal system for domestic hot water preparation. Single storage system with ECO storage cylinder and a wall-mounted con-
densing gas boiler. Switching between central heating and auxiliary domestic hot water heating is by means of a 3-way valve in the ow pipe.
The central heating controller is in charge of the control. The SUNGO controller controls solar circuit pump speed depending on solar irradiation
and cylinder temperature. This ensures continuous operation, optimized yield and reduced electricity consumption.
Solar collector
Solar control
SUNGO

ECObasic
P1
CIRCO
Electrical
immersion
heater
Domestic water
Figure 5 Solar thermal system for domestic hot water preparation. Single storage system with ECO cylinder and immersion heater. During
periods of insufcient solar radiation, the upper third of the cylinder can be heated with an electric immersion heater. The integrated thermostat
can be set to the required temperature. The SUNGO controller controls the solar circuit pump speed depending on solar irradiation and cylinder
temperature. This ensures continuous operation, optimized yield and reduced electricity consumption.
Solar collector
P2 : Auxiliary heating pump for cylinder
P3 : Heating pump Solar control
V1 : 3-Way valve
(cylinder heating)
SUNGO
P1
CIRCO
P3
ECObasic
P2
Oil or gas
boiler
V1
Domestic water
Figure 6 Solar thermal system for domestic hot water preparation. Serial connection of the ECObasic cylinder and a single-coil cylinder. The
solar energy is distributed optimally by the SUNGO control. Supply is taken from the priority-heated solar cylinder. Auxiliary heating of the solar
cylinder is done by oil, gas, etc. The single-coil cylinder serves as a buffer storage pre-heating the water. This type of pipe layout can be used in
connection with an existing cylinder.
2. General Safety Instructions
The following safety advice is deemed to protect against System Environment
dangers that can arise from improper handling of devices, Please ensure that
whether knowingly or unknowingly. you comply with local regulations about the connection
We distinguish between general advice which we refer to of the solar cylinder to the local water supply,
on this page and special advice which can be found in the you comply with rules and regulations about electrical
texts of the instructions. Watch out for the symbols! connections,
you comply with installation requirements of the pro-
ducers of auxiliary heating equipment (oil boiler etc.),
you comply with rules about lightning protection as
Danger of personal injury laid-out in EN 60335-1.
Live-threatening electrical shocks, burns, bruising and oth- We recommend connection of solar installations with aux-
er health hazards are possible during installation. iliary heating as shown in system solutions gure 3 to 6
(Chapter 1: Technical Information).
2.3 Standards and Codes

Risk of material damage Please comply with all standards and codes related to the
This symbol indicates that damage may be done to com- integration of the solar storage tank in drinking water and
ponents of the solar circuit or the function of the same may heating circuits as well as the electric connections of con-
be impaired seriously. Please make sure that you follow trollers. If you install auxiliary heating, please ensure com-
the installation procedure step by step as instructed. pliance with the installation requirements of the equip- 1.2
ment manufacturer.
Declaration of compliance with EC rules: The ECO so-
lar cylinder has been designed and produced following
Additional information current EC regulations. The cylinder complies with all
This symbol points to practical advice and tricks of the conditions of DIN 4753-1. Corrosion protection accord-
trade which will make the installation and operation of the ing to DIN 4753-3 / 4753-6 is achieved through enamel-
solar circuit easier. ling and the use of anodes.
Water supply to the cylinder must be done according
2.1 Qualication of the Installer to local regulations
Setting up, installation and commissioning of the ECO The safety valve must be checked regularly to be free of
solar storage cylinder must be carried out by a qualied obstructions and in functioning condition.
installer. If required, water lters must be installed in the supply
Please note that the guarantee is void, if the system has not to the cylinder.
been properly installed and commissioned, as certied by The solar storage cylinder ECO, if installed according
a qualied person in the commissioning protocol. to instructions, does full the requirements of EN 806-1
and prEN 1717:1999.
2.2 Use and Application Electric connections must be carried out according to
Function local codes and standards.
The solar storage tank ECO is a suitable cylinder for the bi-
valent heating of domestic hot water. Water can be heated 2.4 Local Regulations
through the integrated solar heat exchanger. The auxiliary Please note that it is mandatory to observe local and
heating of the upper third of the cylinder can be accom- country regulations and legislation, which may divert
plished by an external heating device via the secondary from current European standards.
coil or an optional electric immersion heater.
Operational Limits
Please note that the ECO storage cylinder must not be
placed outside and must be operated within the limita-
tions specied in table 1. The installation location must
never be exposed to frost and connecting pipes must be
kept as short as possible. The cylinder is only suitable for
the storage of drinking water and must be secured against
pressures above 10 bar by installing a safety valve.
3. Installation 2
3.1 Preparations
The cylinder must be placed in a frost-safe location and
must be connected with short pipe lengths to the taps.
Please ensure that the placement area is dry and has suf-
cient structural carrying capacity.
Required Materials
In order to complete the installation of the ECO solar cyl-
inder the following materials are required:
Pipe connections to t 1" and " male cylinder connec- 8
tions (see table 1) 4
Thermostatic mixer (optional)
Safety valve unit for the cold-water feed (optional).
Required Tools
Tools for pipe connections, pipe wrench, adjustable span-
ner, Phillips screw driver
5
3.2 Setting up Cylinder
Please observe the following when setting up the cylinder:
Start with the removal of the transport protection (4) and
(5) 7 1
Remove lid (2), thermometer (8), 1 " plug (6) and the
ange cover (7) and sensor xing clamps (9); put in a
safe place.
Remove pallet xing and carry cylinder to its nal posi-
tion. There are circular indentations near the top and
bottom of the insulation which can serve as grips.
Caution! Weight up to 120 kg (264 pounds)! Knocks
and banging can cause damage to the enamel coating 3
on the inside!
Turn cylinder until connections face the wall to which 6
the pipes will be xed. Allow enough space for comfort-
9
able working.
Figure 7 Removal of transport packaging
Table 3 Scope of Supply (see g. 7) Quantity
Wooden pallet (3) 700 X 700 mm 1
ECO steel cylinder with foam insulation (1),
1
xed with 3 bolts to pallet
PVC-Cover with zip (wrapped around cylinder) 1
Thermometer (8), supplied loose 1 3.3 Fitting of Domestic Water Unit
Polystyrene cover (7) for ange, in place 1 Hot and Cold Domestic Water
Polystyrene cover (2) for top of cylinder,
Cold and hot water connections must be carried out ac-
1 cording to the rules and regulations of your local water
in place, black
supplier. We recommend the connection as shown in g-
Plug (6), male 1 " galvanized steel,
1 ure 8.
to close immersion heater inlet, xed to pallet
Connect the safety unit (2) to the cold water supply.
Transportation cover, bubble wrap (4) and plastic
1 each The hot water line should be shaped to create a siphon
cover (5)
in order to prevent convection movement inside the
Sensor xing clamp 2 pipe work (length of legs at least 200 mm). If the water
pressure is sufcient, a non-return valve can be used
instead.
Ensure that there is no shut-off valve between cylinder
and safety valve. The safety valve must be designed to
release pressure at the maximum operating pressure. If
supply pressure is likely to be above 10 bar, a pressure
reducer must be installed between water meter and cyl-
inder. When the cylinder is heating up, water may drip
from the safety valve which should be guided to a drain.
Alternatively an expansion vessel suitable for drinking
water can be installed.
It is absolutely necessary to t a thermostatic mixer, as Circulation
temperatures during the summer months can reach If circulation is required (21) then the return should be
up to 95 C on the hot water outlet (5). There is seri- taken from close to the tapping point (22). The circu-
ous danger of scalding! The thermostatic mixer can be lation pump (23) should govern circulation according
connected via a T-connection (3) between safety unit to water temperature at a measuring point (24) at the
and cold-water inlet of the vessel (4). If no thermostatic furthest away tap and with a timer.
mixer is tted, maximum vessel temperature must be
limited to 65 C at the solar controller.
Close the immersion heater inlet (8) with the 1" plug
(7) using hemp and compound. Alternatively you may t
a 1" electrical immersion heater. Please read details in
the section about auxiliary heating.
Retighten bolts around ange cover (9) to ensure leak-
age-free operation, and close off again with cover.
1.2
10
26
26
23 B
6
24
25
22
21 9
23
1
2
Figure 8 Drinking water connections at the ECO cylinder (1) Supply, (2) Safety unit including connectors, (3) T-junction, (4) Supply inlet includ-
ing connectors, (5) Hot water outlet including connectors, (6) Thermostatic mixer, (7) Plug, (8) 1" inlet for electrical immersion heater, (9) Ac-
cess ange, (10) Siphoning of hot water connection, (21) Circulation line, (22) Hot water tap, (23) Circulation pump, (24) Temperature sen-
sor, (25) Copper T-junction, (26) Circulation connection of vessel.
We recommend that the circulation, if required, is car-
ried out as shown in gure 8 and should be returned to
the T-junction (25) in the cold feed to the thermostatic
mixer valve. If, however, the circulation is done by a non-
regulated pump, then the return should be taken to the
circulation inlet (26) of the vessel.
Please note, that circulation can cause signicant loss
of heat.
Pressure Test of Drinking Water Circuit

Please carry out a pressure test after all drinking water
pipes and ttings are connected. Close taps after lling
cylinder with water, and check all connections and joints.
1
3.4 Connecting Solar Circuit 2
Connect ow pipe of solar circuit to the top of the so- 3
lar (lower) coil (4) and the return pipe to the bottom of
same (5).
Push 1" nut (3) over copper pipe, then solder on ange
tting or x screw thread tting (2), then put washer into 4
place (1) and tighten connection.
Warning: On sunny days it is quite possible that storage

temperatures of up to 95 C or higher can be reached in 5
the solar circuit. There is serious danger of scalding!
Figure 9 Connecting solar circuit
3.5 Auxiliary Heating

The auxiliary heating of drinking water can be done in vari-
ous ways. Figure 10 shows the connection options:
If auxiliary heating with the help of an oil, gas, etc. boiler
is required, then this device should be connected to the
auxiliary heating coil in the top of the vessel (5). Against
common practice we recommend the following circuit-
ry: Connect the return pipe of the heating device (1)
with the tting (2, 3, 4) to the top of the auxiliary heating
coil. Connect the ow pipe (7) in the same way to the
bottom of the auxiliary heating coil (8). Please observe 6 5
the instructions of the supplier of your heating device. 4
3
2
As an option, an auxilliary electric heater (9) is avail- 1
able that can be installed in the 1" socket on the side.
8
Please observe instructions supplied with the heating
device.
7
If no immersion heater is tted, the inlet must be closed 10
with the supplied 1" plug (11).
9
11
Figure 10 Connections for auxiliary heating devices.

(1) Flow pipe, (2, 3, 4) Fittings, (6) Auxiliary heating coil, top connec-
tion, (7) Return pipe, (8) Auxiliary heating coil, bottom connec-
tion, (9) Immersion heater, (10) 1" inlet, (11) P lug.
3.6 Installing Temperature Sensors
Please install the temperature sensor of the solar con-
troller (1), as illustrated in gure 11, by inserting it into
the sensor tube (2) at the bottom half of the cylinder. If
auxiliary heating is done by an oil, gas, etc. boiler, then
insert the sensor of the boiler-control device (3) into the
sensor tube (4) at the top half of the cylinder.
Connect the sensor cable (1) of the lower cylinder sen-
sor to the solar controller. Connect the cable (3) of the 4
upper cylinder sensor to the auxiliary heating. Please
5
observe the instructions of the supplier. 3
Temperature checking can be done for the top half of
the cylinder by reading the thermometer (5).
1 2 2
1.2
Figure 11 Connections of the temperature sensors:

(1) Solar control sensor, (2) Sensor tube, lower half, (3) Auxiliary heat-
ing sensor, (4) Sensor tube, upper half, (5) Thermometer.
4. Start Up 5. Advice for the User
Setting up, installation and startup must be carried out by Please note that the storage vessel should be inspected
a qualied installer. and maintained at least every two years by a qualied per-
son. We recommend a service contract.
4.1 Checking the System
After tting all components, please carry out the following
checks: 6. Troubleshooting
Are all components tted correctly?
Are all safety units installed? Is the 10 bar safety valve It is quite possible that problems occur despite careful
tted? If necessary, is a pressure regulator tted and can production methods and installation. Some possibilities
it be closed off from the vessel? are the following:
Are all ttings and connections safe and tight?
If present were all electrical connections made to re- Leaks
quired standards? Leaks can be caused by insufcient pressure on wash-
Are the temperature sensors in the correct positions? ers which are made out of best quality material but may
Do the controllers display reasonable values? change their density during the rst few months of opera-
tion and may lead to dripping. It may be necessary to re-
4.2 Rinsing of the System tighten those ttings after a few weeks.
In spite of careful production methods, some residues of
the processes, including metal slack, may remain inside
the pipes, the vessel and the heat exchangers. These can 7. Maintenance and Care
cause problems during operation of the system and may
lead to damage. Therefore, the system must be rinsed be- The cleaning and maintenance of the solar vessel should
fore permanent operation starts. Also ltering/retaining be carried out every two years.
devices should be installed at convenient points in the sys- If a magnesium anode is tted, this should be checked
tem, as even later some production residues may become and replaced if necessary.
dislodged and may need to be removed. Check for visible leakage of the vessel and ttings.
Check for lime-scale or moisture at the insulation. If nec-
4.3 Setting the Solar and Auxiliary Heating Controller essary retighten ttings.
The temperature limitation of 95 C for the solar storage Release air from the vessel if necessary.
vessel must never be exceeded. Please ensure that the set- Remember to replace the washers if ttings were
tings are correct. opened. Flange washers may not seal properly if re-
used.
4.4 Filling, Air Release and Pressure Check Check safety valves, make sure they are not obstructed.
To avoid water damage, please make sure that before Cleaning of the vessel and checking of the system
lling and startup of the system, all openings are closed, should be carried out every 2 years.
connected or tted with the proper ttings and mountings
(e.g. openings for emptying, venting, circulation, aux. heat- Periodical maintenance must be certied in the Mainte-
ing). nance Protocol by a qualied person in order to render
Carry out a pressure test after the system has been com- the warranty agreement valid.
pletely installed. Be aware that the test pressure must not
exceed 10 bar. In order to release air from the cylinder,
open one hot-water tap until water appears and reaches a
steady ow. While checking pressure is applied, check all
ttings and connections for leaks. If necessary retighten.
Heat the content of the storage cylinder, for example by
switching on the boiler, and keep checking the pressure.
Before reaching maximum allowed level, the safety valve
must come into operation to release pressure.
4.5 Final Check Protocol

The correct startup of the system must be certied by a
qualied person in the Final Check Protocol, in order ren-
der the warranty agreement valid.

ECOplus Solar Cylinder
Minimized Heat Loss

due to convection brakes in the pipe connections, the
new close-tting, 100-mm thick PU soft foam jacket insula-
tion, 150-mm thick and close tting lid insulation and 50-
mm thick oor insulation; with robust polystyrene shell.
Connection option for CONVECTROL III the Effective

Convection Brake
Technically optimized barriers separate the water cooled
in the pipes safely from the hot storage tank water. This
reduces heat losses at the pipe connections by up to 50 %. 1.2
Optional Mounting Kit for Solar Station
to minimize piping effort - time and space saving and neat
appearance.
Double Corrosion Protection

with durable high-quality enamel coating and magne-
sium protection anode.
Quick Installation
with at-sealing screw connections, combi-ttings,
sensor terminal block, removable heat insulation with
hook closure; horizontal attachment of the connection
pipes made possible by CONVECTROL III.
Stable Thermal Stratication

due to slim column design with stabilized cold water inlet
and hot water outlet ows.
Lime-Scaling Resistant Heat Exchanger

made from plain pipe coils for solar and aux. heating cir-
cuit, energetically optimized design, generously sized.
High Quality
Only high-grade and environmentally friendly materials
are used. Manufactured and inspected in accordance with
DIN 4753. Options for circulation pipe and electrical im-
mersion heater. With cleaning ange.
Figure 1 The ECOplus solar cylinder with volumes of 300, 400, 500
and 750 liters.
Solar Thermal / Solar Cylinder EN-XXX_ECOplus-Solar-Cylinder_TI-100126-11204200 147

1. Technical Data
Table 1 Solar Cylinder
Feature 300 l 400 l 500 l 750 l
Part no. 130 140 01 130 140 11 130 140 21 130 140 31
Total volume 313 l 391 l 490 l 755 l
Auxiliary heating volume 135 l 165 l 220 l 310 l
Max. operational pressure 10 bar
Max. operational temperature 95 C
Usable hot water volume with indicated aux.
138 l 162 l 215 l 260 l*2
heating temp. in liter at 50 C *1
Coefcient of performance NL /
1.6 / 10 kW 2.4 / 12.5 kW 3.5 / 13.5 kW 5.7 / 17.5 kW
assoc. boiler output *1
Jacket insulation 100 mm PU soft foam with polystyrene shell,
Thermal insulation
lid 150 mm and oor 50 mm PU soft foam
Heat loss rate acc. to DIN ENV 12977-3 *3, *4 2.59 W/K 2.88 W/K 3.29 W/K 4.38 W/K
Anode, 1" F * 6 Protective magnesium anode CORREX-UP
Tilted dimension, without insulation 1600 mm 1680 mm 1800 mm 2050 mm
Weight, without insulation 130 kg 170 kg 230 kg 295 kg
Solar circuit heat exchanger * 5
Surface area / volume 1.4 m / 8.5 l 1.7 m / 10.0 l 1.9 m / 12.0 l 2.6 m / 15.0 l
Pressure loss at 40 C / volume ow 2 mbar / 200 l/h 3 mbar /280 l/h 5 mbar / 360 l/h 7 mbar / 400 l/h
Max. recommended collector area 8 m 10 m 13 m 18 m
Aux. heating heat exchanger *5
Surface area m / volume 1.0 / 6.0 l 1.2 / 7.0 l 1.3 / 8.0 l 1.7 / 10.0 l
Pressure drop at 60 C / volume ow 4 mbar / 450 l/h 6 mbar / 550 l/h 11 mbar / 700 l/h 26 mbar / 1000 l/h
Max. permissable operational pressure 16 bar
Max. continuous power output *1 10 kW 13 kW 14 kW 18 kW
6 1
Table 2 Cylinder Connections (gures 3 to 6)
No.* Connection type

2 1 Cold water connection 1" M
2 Solar circuit return 1" M
5 3 Solar circuit ow 1" M
3
4 Flange for screw-in immersion heater 1" IG
5 Auxiliary heating ow 1" M (recommended)
6 Circulation connection " M
7 Aux. heating return 1" M (recommended)
8 Hot water connection 1" M
9 Bleeder " IG
4
10 Cleaning ange DN 100
Figure 2 Top view of ECOplus solar cylinder * Numbers for image details from gures 3 to 6.
1 Bleeder " M; 2 Protective anode 1" F; 3 Pipe connections
(compare table 2); 4 Sensor connection terminal; 5 Cleaning ange
DN100; 6 Hoisting lug
148 EN-XXX_ECOplus-Solar-Cylinder_TI-100126-11204200
750
1695
550
1545
3
1370
1270
1050
930
1.2
803
10
675
1
280
205
110
Figure 3 ECOplus 300, vertical section with dimensions; pipe connections are on the right side G 1"; for legend see table 2.
800
600 4
1775
1625
3
1440
1340
1115
1000
845
10
690
1
296
220
120
EN-XXX_ECOplus-Solar-Cylinder_TI-100126-11204200 149
850
1885
650 4
1735
1541
3
1440
1120
1020
863
10
705
1
380
225
130
950
8
7
4
750
2132
3
1982
1763
1663
1373
1223
1092
10
960
1
380
280
157
2. Accessories
Table 3 Accessories Prod. No.
ECOplus connection kit combi STANDARD

139 000 55
with combi ttings
ECOplus connection kit combi CONVECTROL III
139 002 07
with combi ttings
CIRCO 6 cylinder mounting kit 150 302 01
Cylinder height adjustment unit, (up to
139 000 16
500l-cylinder 3pcs., for 750 l 4 pcs. required)
Cylinder safety subassembly, S22 acc. to DIN 1988 130 100 56
CORREX-UP impressed current anode 130 101 26
Protective magnesium anode (for ECOplus 300) 130 101 27
Protective magnesium anode
130 101 65
(for ECOplus 400 u. 500)
Electrical screw-in immersion heater 1.5 kW (230 V) 139 001 45
Electrical screw-in immersion heater 3 kW
139 001 42
(230/400V)
Electrical screw in immersion heater 6 kW (400 V) 139 001 43 1.2
EHK 9 kW (400 V) 139 001 44
DHW mixer with insulation shells 150 303 50
3 way actuator diverter valve (1" M) 160 101 44
Convection Brake CONVECTROL III

The patent protected design of the easy to install com-
ponent separates the water that cooled down in the Figure 8 Storage cylinder with attached cylinder mounting kit and
connection pipes from the hot storage content. The CIRCO 6 solar circulation unit.
CONVECTROL III reduces heat losses at storage connec-
tions by up to 50 %. This results in a reduction of total an-
nual storage heat losses by 10 to 20 %.
Figure 7 CONVECTROL III combined connection set.
3. System Solutions - Examples
Figure 9 Solar installation for hot water preparation. Single storage system with solar hot water cylinder ECOplus and auxiliary heating with oil
or gas boiler. This way a continuous operation of the system can be assured, which reduces the electricity consumption of the pump (principle
representation, see gures 3 to 6 for real position of connections).
Figure 10 Solar installation for DHW preparation. Single storage system with solar hot water storage cylinder ECOplus and auxil-
iary heating by oil or gas boiler. The solar installation does not only take over the larger part of the hot water preparation, it also in-
creases the annual use efciency of the boiler by avoiding the boilers low summer time efciency for hot water production.
1.2
Figure 11 Solar installation for DHW preparation. Serial connection of ECOplus solar cylinder and monovalent hot water storage. The solar en-
ergy is distributed optimally to both cylinders by the SUNGO controller. The solar cylinder is integrated in the form of a draw-off cylinder and is
loaded with priority by the solar controller. The auxiliary heating with oil or gas boiler also is loaded to the solar cylinder. The monovalent cylinder
(only one heat exchanger) serves as preheating tank. This type of layout can be used with an existing hot water cylinder and is characterized by
reduced storage tank and system losses (principle representation, see gures 3 to 6 for real position of connections).
Figure 12 Solar installation for DHW preparation. Single storage system - solar DHW storage cylinder ECOplus and demand regulated auxiliary
heating with oil or gas boiler. The auxiliary domestic water heating is regulated by the boiler controller. The solar controller SUNGO operates the
solar circuit pump speed controlled, depending on solar irradiation and storage tank temperature. This way a continuous operation of the system
can be assured, which reduces the electricity consumption of the pump (principle representation, see gures 3 to 6 for real position of connections).
ECOplus Solar Cylinder
Piping Diagram
Hot water consumer
Optional
Backflow CORREX-UP
Optional preventer impressed
circulation current anode
pump
Protective Sensor
Safety valve, 10 bar magnesium connection
anode strip
Hot water connection, 1.2
OT 5/4"
Convection brake
Optional Optional
safety subassembly thermostatic Outlet
mixing valve
Cold water Odor cap
supply Auxiliary heating
Circulation connection, OT " heat exchanger,
Drain pipe Cap OT 5/4"
Optional
immersion Inlet
heater,
IT 1"
Inlet
Solar
heat exchanger,
OT 5/4"
Plug IT 1 "
Outlet
Optional
Cylinder
Optional Drain valve connection kit
Storage tank CONVECTROL III
connection kit with combi fittings
Cold water connection, OT 1"
Figure 1 ECOplus solar cylinder sample piping diagram. Components with grey background are optional.
Solar Thermal / Solar Cylinder EN-XXX_ECOplus-Solar-Cylinder_MA-100127-11214200 155

1. Assembly
1.1 Preparation
Please install the solar cylinder ECO plus as depicted in Insulation
the illustrations and take note of the following important The solar cylinder insulation consists of PU foam with a
information rst: laminated polystyrene cover layer and hook closure.
The properties of plastics are subject to signicant tem-
Convection Brake CONVECTROL perature uctuations! The higher the ambient tempera-
The convection brakes are included in the CONVEC- ture, the more exible the PU foam, and due to the shrink-
TROLIII solar cylinder connection kit. Please consult the age behavior of the cover layer, these must be applied at
assembly instructions included with the kit. least at room temperature.
As an alternative to the convection brakes, it is also pos- In case of polystyrene, the breakage tendency drops with
sible to use threaded connections (5/4" 1") or solder a rising temperature.
connections (e.g. 5/4" 22 mm) with at gasket seals.
Do not install insulation below 20 C and allow insulation
Cold and Hot Water Line stored at cold temperatures to reach room temperature
Make sure there is no shutoff between the safety valve before installing.
and the solar cylinder.
The valve must be designed for a blow-off pressure that Solar Cylinder Connections
corresponds to the permissible working overpressure of All connections require at seals. If raised seals are used,
the cylinder. In case of 10 bar and higher waterline pres- the potable water connections may be subject to corro-
sure, install a pressure reducer behind the water meter. sion.
Water drips from the safety valve when the cylinder is
heated. Collect this water with a siphon funnel and lead
away. Alternatively use a membrane expansion vessel cer-
tied for for use with drinking water.
Service Water Circulation Line

When a service water circulation line has been installed,
the circulation pump must be controlled with a timer and
a thermostat to reduce heat losses. The timer ensures
the pump is operated only during those times when hot
water is needed. The thermostat switches the pump off
whenever the temperature in the circulation line exceeds
30C, for example. The described functions are already
integrated in the SUNGO controller. The circulation pump
should have a rather low throughput (max. 600 l/h).
We recommend the circulation pump BW152 (Part no.
160 102 14) with integrated shutoff valve and backow
preventer as well as the piping depicted in g.1.
The circulation return should be integrated between safe-
ty subassembly and cold water supply of the thermostatic
mixing valve to realize a circuit.
If the suggested circulation control with thermostat and
timer cannot be realized because of local circumstances,
apply the circulation line to the connection (" M) at the
ange of the drinking water solar cylinder.
156 EN-XXX_ECOplus-Solar-Cylinder_MA-100127-11214200
1.2 Hydraulic Installation
Figure 2 The following tools are required for installing the solar cyl- Figure 3 Open insulation at hook closure, set aside, unscrew solar
inder: Wrench sizes 10, 13, 24, 30, 37, and monkey wrench (or pipe cylinder from pallet, set up at installation location.
wrench).
1.2
Figure 4 Tilt solar cylinder and insert inner section of the oor insula- Figure 5 When installing the convection brakes, insert CONVEC-
tion. If circulation and electrical immersion heater connections are not TROLIII in combined connection so that key and slot t snugly.
utilized, close off with plug or cap.
S 46
S 24
Figure 6 Place gasket between cylinder connection and combined Figure 7 Connect ow and return legs of aux. heating circuit. The inlet
connection. Assure right position when screwing on (TOP marking for the auxiliary heating heat exchanger is at the bottom and the outlet
up!); secure with wrench S24 at the top (recommended).
EN-XXX_ECOplus-Solar-Cylinder_MA-100127-11214200 157
Figure 8 Option: If needed, now install the electrical auxiliary heating. Figure 9 Connect cold water line (with cold water lling and emptying
Please consult the information included with the immersion heater. tap) at the bottom of the solar cylinder.
Figure 10 Option: Install the safety group in the cold water line above Figure 11 Connect hot water line at top of solar cylinder.
the solar cylinder instead of the shutoff, check, and safety valves. No
shutoff between safety subassembly and solar cylinder!
Figure 12 Insert thermostatic mixing valve into hot water line to limit Figure 13 Option: If desired, install hot water circulation pump ac-
temperature. Refer to the markings on the unit for correct connections. cording to the piping diagram and install the pipe sensor as close to
Then insulate pipes. the last hot water tapping point as possible.
Table 1 Height of sensor position from oor (mm)
Temperature
ECOplus ECOplus ECOplus ECOplus
sensor
300 400 500 750
Thermost. solar
cylinder bottom
230 245 250 305
sensor
(solar circuit)
Thermost. solar
cylinder top sensor 1100 1170 1255 1490
(aux. heat)
Figure 14 Screw on the temperature sensor for the solar controller

below the terminal bar at the solar cylinder. Observe the positions
given in Table 1.
1.2
Figure 15 Option: Screw CORREX impressed current anode into Figure 16 Fasten one cable of the CORREX electronics device to the
socket on lid of solar cylinder. Remove an existing magnesium anode grounding screw and plug the other one into the electrode.
rst. No reduction needed with CORREX 5/4" thread.
Figure 17 Option: Install wall socket and plug in CORREX electron-

ics device. Green light signals correct operation. When the light ash-
es red consult the operating manual.
1.3 Cylinder Insulation
After setting up the solar cylinder and before connecting Please do not use tools or tightening straps and do not
the potable water, circulation, and heating lines, the insu- close the hook closure by force. This could damage the
lation must be applied at the installation location. insulation and diminish its effectiveness.
During Installation:
Place insulation loosely around solar cylinder and press
into place opposite the row of connections.
Adjust the insulation by tapping with the at of your
hand, i.e., tap or stroke from the rear in the direction
of the hook closure until the rows of the hook closure
are lined up properly and can be closed by applying
slight pressure.
Make sure the heatinsulation is tightly tted to the wall
of the solar cylinder.
Retighten the hook closure starting at the top until the
heat insulation ts tightly against the cylinder.
Figure 18 Now place the insulation ring around the bottom of the Figure 19 For cylinders from 500 l: use wire hook to lock left side of
solar cylinder. insulation in place for easier handling.
Figure 20 Close insulation with hook closure. First snap into weakest Figure 21 Insert upper circular insulation panel and attach lid.
position, then tighten alternately.
2. Commissioning
Please observe the instructions in the Commissioning
the System manual.
Setup, installation, and proper commissioning as well
as maintenance of the solar cylinder must be carried
out by an accredited company.
The cylinder must be installed in a frost-free room with
short lines to the consumer.
When connecting to water lines, observe and comply
with the corresponding regional and national regula-
tions and guidelines as well as the specications of
your water utility or provider.
Observe regional and national regulations and guide-
lines as well as the specications of your electric utility
company when performing electrical connections.
A corresponding water lter meeting current technol-
ogy standards is to be installed into the cold water sup- Figure 22 For commissioning, ll solar cylinder with cold water using
ply line. the shutoff valve at the safety group in the cold water supply. Open
cock at the hot water side to allow air to escape.
The max. temperature in the solar cylinder must not
exceed 90 C. Make sure the correct settings are set at
the solar controller (max. solar cylinder temperature al- 1.2
ready preset with SUNGO S / SL / SXL) and at the boiler
controller (max. boiler temperature).
Before lling and commissioning make sure, that all
openings (e.g. lling draining tap, vents, circulation
connections, sleeve for aux. electric heater) are tightly
closed!
After the initial startup, check all screw connections and
anges for leaks and retighten as needed.
The correct commissioning must be certied on the ac-

ceptance and inspection record by a technically trained
person to ensure that a warranty claim can be led should
this become necessary.
Figure 23 Thoroughly ush and vent solar and heating circuit. Please
consult the solar installations operating manual especially concern-
ing frost protection within the solar circuit!
Figure 24 After the initial startup, check all connections (including at Figure 25 Insulate pipes connected to the solar cylinder and press
convection brakes), anges, and anode screw connection for leaks down insulating tubes rmly onto the insulation of the solar cylinder.
and retighten as needed.
3. Maintenance
The solar system and the solar cylinder must be ser-
viced every 2 years.
The functionality of the safety valve must be checked
regularly (once or twice a month) by lifting up as out-
lined by DIN 4753 or relevant local regulations. The ex-
haust vent must never be closed or restricted.
The solar cylinder must be cleaned and serviced at
least every 2 years.
The protection anode made from magnesium must
be checked after two years and then at regular inter-
vals and replaced by a qualied service technician if
required.
The regular service and maintenance must be certied

on the acceptance and inspection record by a technically
trained person to ensure that a warranty claim can be led
should this become necessary. Figure 26 Check the factory-installed magnesium protection anode
every two years. Unplug cable and measure current with multimeter.
Inspect and possibly replace if measurement yields less than 0.3 mil-
liampere.

TERMO Combi Cylinder
Tank-In-Tank System
using solar energy for hot water and heating support. For
integration into the heating circuit as return ow booster
or hydraulic compensator.
Available in two sizes 700 l (160 l domestic water storage)
and 1000 l (230 l domestic water storage).
Flow Flue
for effective potable water heating and to reinforce ther-
mal stratication in the buffer storage.
1.2
Minimal Heat Losses
thanks to tightly tting, CFC-free 120-mm polyester ber
eece jacket insulation, tight 150-mm strong cover lid and
50-/30-mm oor insulation with scratch and impact resis-
tant polystyrene shell.
Optional Convection Brake CONVECTROL III

Technically and hydro dynamically optimized barriers
separate the water that cooled in the pipes safely from
the hot storage tank water.
Heat losses at pipe connections thus are reduced by up
to 50 %.
Optional Mounting Kit for Solar Station

Mounting kit for the solar circuit unit with minimized pipe
work. Time and space-saving, clear visual appearance.
Double Corrosion Protection

with high-quality and durable enamel and magnesium
protection anode (option: maintenance free impressed
current anode).
Quick Installation
with at-sealing screw connections, sensor terminal strip,
heat insulation with hook ratchet closure; CONVECTROLIII
and horizontal installation of the connection pipes.
Stable Thermal Stratication

due to stabilized cold water inlet and inow brakes in the
buffer storage.
High Quality
thanks to high-grade and environmentally friendly mate-
rials. Produced and inspected in Germany according to Figure 1 The TERMO combi cylinder
DIN 4753 and DIN ENV 12977-3.
Options for circulation line, electrical immersion heater
and cleaning ange.
Solar Thermal / Solar Cylinder EN-XXX_TERMO-Combi-Cylinder_TI-100126-11204400 163

1. Technical Data
Table 1 Technical Data
Ident. 1) Feature TERMO 700 TERMO 1000
Part No. 130 150 07 130 150 10
h/H Total height (with/without insulation) 1805 mm / 1905 mm 2105 mm / 2205 mm
Tilted dimension (without insulation) 1830 mm 2230 mm
d/D Diameter (without/with insulation) 750 mm / 990 mm 800 mm / 1040 mm
Total weight (with insulation) 230 kg 270 kg
Total capacity (without solar heat exchanger) 698 l 982 l
Coefcient of performance NL / assoc. boiler output 1.6 / 15 kW 3.2 / 20 kW
DHW internal cylinder made from high grade steel with high quality enamel acc. to DIN 4753 T3 (St 37-2)
Permissible working overpressure / perm. operating temperature 10 bar / 95 C
Total capacity / in auxiliary heating area (above P2) 163 l / 108 l 229 l / 161 l
Usable hot water volume 118 l(49 C) 200 liter(49 C)
with indicated aux. heating temp. 2) 152 l(60 C) 256 liter(60 C)
Cold / hot water connections
A 1775 mm 2085 mm
(stainless steel and brass, OT 1" x 45), height 3) 8)
J Cleaning and inspection opening (inner diameter) 115 mm
E Connection for circulation (OT " x 45) 3) 8) Flange
K Brass protection anode acc. to DIN 4753 T6 4) Flange
U Immersion sleeve f. aux. heat. temp. sensor (inner 15 mm, lenght) 550 mm 700 mm
Air vent / " IG x 33 for lling tap or manual bleeder
Buffer part made from high grade steel (St 37-2), primed on outside
Permissible working overpressure / perm. operating temperature 3 bar / 95 C
Net volume (without DHW part and heat exchanger) 535 l 753 l
Auxiliary heating volume (above P2) net 170 l 238 l
Heating buffer volume net (between P2 and P4) net 105 l 162 l
Solar buffer volume (below P4) net 260 l 353 l
O/F Aux. heat ow (P1) / return (P2),(1" M x 45) , height
3) 5) 1525 mm / 1100 mm 1840 mm / 1260 mm
L/N Aux. heat ow (P3) / return (P5),(1" M x 45) 3) 5), height 1020 mm / 315 mm 1140 mm/375 mm
M Heat return (P4), (1" Mx 45) 3) 825 mm 890 mm
Sleeve for electr. immersion heater (1" F x 40) 3) 6)
I 1100 mm 1260 mm
closed with plug, height
S/Q Emptying / bleeding(" F x 33 for lling cock, height) 100 mm / 1680 mm 110 mm/2010 mm
R Flow ue (diameter x height) 500 x 520 mm 540 x 520 mm
T Sensor terminal block, length ca. 1400 mm ca. 1700 mm
Polyester ber eece insulation jacket
Insulation jacket / outside cover (polystyrol) 120 mm / 1,3 mm
Cover lid (two parts) 100 + 60 mm
Bottom (two parts) 50 mm / 30 mm
Heat loss rate acc. to DIN EN V 12977-3 7) 9) 2.87 W/K 3.63 W/K
Solar heat exchanger, smooth pipe, made from high grade steel (St 37-2), welded into buffer cylinder
Heat transfer area 2.2 m 2.4 m
Permissible working overpressure in bar / max. operation temp. 10 bar / 110 C
Pressure loss (with indicated volume ow) 7 mbar (400 l/h) 12 mbar (550 l/h)
C/B Solar ow / solar return (1"M x 45), height 745 mm / 133 mm 765 mm / 150 mm
Fluid volume of solar heat exchanger 12.9 l 14.1 l
164 EN-XXX_TERMO-Combi-Cylinder_TI-100126-11204400
Legend for Table 1
1) Dimension indications and identications from gure 2
2) The volume of hot water that can be drawn from the storage at a temperature of 45 C, when the aux. heating section of the storage was
heated to the indicated aux. heating temperature (at cold water temp. 10 C), measurements based on DIN ENV 12977-3:2001
3) Pipe thread DIN ISO 228-1 (cyl.), at-sealing
4) For union assembly (1" F), electr. insulated installation, removable ground wire
5) Connections P2, P4, and P5 equipped with convection brakes
6) Max. immersion length of immersion heater: 630 mm or 650 mm
7) Measurements acc. to test reports of the ITW Stuttgart based on DIN ENV 12977-3:2001
8) Cold water and circulation connection inside the cylinder are made from plastic approved for potable hot water (test acc. to KTW
recommendations)
9) Calculated acc. to DIN EN 12977-3:2001
D
d
J
1.2
E
P0
K
U
P1
P2
P3
H
P4
h R
A
O
F
L
M
C I
P5
N B P6
S
Figure 2 Cross section of the TERMO combi cylinder with dimensions marked (see table 1)
EN-XXX_TERMO-Combi-Cylinder_TI-100126-11204400 165
10 1
9
2
8
7
3
Figure 3 Top view of the storage:

6 1 cold water connection; 2 hot water connection; 3 connections at
4 cylinder side (see table 1); 4 ange for immersion heater; 5 protec-
tive anode; 6 connection for circulation; 7 venting ange, external
tank; 8 venting ange, internal tank; 9 receptacle for temperature
5 sensor; 10 cleaning ange
2. Accessories
Combined connection set standard, CONVECTROL III 139 002 06
Combined connection set standard 139 000 63
Storage height adjustment units (4 pcs. req.) 139 000 16
Electric immersion heater 3 kW 139 001 42
Cylinder mounting kit CIRCO 6 /6E 150 302 01
CORREX-UP impressed current anode 130 101 18
Protective magnesium anode 130 101 25
Thermostatic water mixer (DHW) with insulation shells 150 303 50
3-way actuator switching valve (1" M) 150 470 13

The patented and easily installed component separates
the water that cooled down in the connection pipes from
the hot water contained in the storage.
The CONVECTROL III can reduce heat losses at the stor-
age connections by up to 50 %. The total annual storage
losses thus can be reduced by 10 % to 20 %. Figure 5 Thermostatic mixer with insulation shell
Figure 4 CONVECTROL III combined connection set. Figure 6 3-way actuator valve
166 EN-XXX_TERMO-Combi-Cylinder_TI-100126-11204400
3. System Solutions Examples
P1: Solar circuit pump

P2: Heating circuit pump
P3: Pump for domestic water aux. heating
V2: 3-way switching valve, return boost Solar controller Collector field
M1: Heating circuit mixer
BWM: Thermostatic mixing valve
(domestic water)
Hot Water
Cold Water
1.2
Oil- or gas boiler
Figure 7 Solar installation for hot water heating and heating support. Single storage system with combi cylinder TERMO and oil or gas boiler and
a mixed heating circuit (hydronic heating system with pipes and radiators). Potable water is heated in the corrosion-resistant inner container of
the combination cylinder. Solar energy for heating is fed to the return pipe of the heating circuit via the 3-way valve Vr.

V2: 3-way switching valve, return boost
V2: 3-way switching valve,
Solar controller Collector field
heating mode aux heating
(domestic water)
(domestic water)
Hot water
Cold water
Gas boiler
Figure 8 Solar installation for hot water heating and heating support. A storage system with combination cylinder TERMO, a gas hot water heater
and hydronic heating circuit. The switching valve V2 for heating mode or hot water heating is located within the ow pipe of the heat source. Solar
energy for heating is fed to the return pipe of the heating circuit via the 3-way valve Vr.
EN-XXX_TERMO-Combi-Cylinder_TI-100126-11204400 167
P2: Boiler circuit pump
P3: Heating circuit pump Solar controller Collector field
Vm: Thermostatic mixing valve
for keeping the min. return temperature
BWM: Thermostatic mixing valve (domestic water)
Hot water
Cold water
Figure 9 Solar installation for hot water heating and heating support. Single storage system with combination cylinder TERMO, a pellet boiler
and a hydronic mixed heating circuit. The combination cylinder is integrated into the heating system like a hydraulic bypass. The buffer volume
of the TERMO reduces partial load operation and irregular clocking of the pellet boiler.

P3: Pump for domestic water aux. heating
V2: 3-way switching valve, return boost
V2: 3-way switching valve for oil/gas boiler bypass
Collector field
during solid fuel operation Solar controller
KAG: Boiler connection group
with return flow temperature increase
BWM: Thermostatic mixing valve (domestic water)
Hot water
Cold water
Relay
Solid fuel boiler Oil- or gas boiler
Figure 10 Solar installation for hot water heating and heating support. Single storage system with combi cylinder TERMO, an oil or gas boiler or
a solid fuel boiler. During solid fuel operation mode, the relay RL is used to switch valve Vr to position AB-A, and the entire combination cylinder
is loaded. The oil/gas boiler is then circumvented via valve V3. During oil/gas operation mode and sufcient solar energy, the heating return is
routed through the combi cylinder. To achieve this, the three-way switching valve Vr switches from position AB-B to AB-A. The oil/gas boiler then
has to supply much less heat or none at all.

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
TERMO Combi Cylinder
Circulation pump
Hot water Top view TERMO Combi Cylinder
Return-ow
Safety valve 10 bar check valve
HW
Cold water
lling-and-
draining tap
CW
1.2
Safety unit Domestic water mixer
Cold water
feed
Cold water
lling-and-draining tap
Drain pipe for venting
Air trap
Circulation,
HW, CW, ET 1"
external thread "
Receptacle
15 mm
P1
Magnesium anode
Convection brakes
P2
P3
Caps,
Socket for
internal thread 1"
electrical heating element
P4
Thermostatic Threaded joints

mixing valve on 22 mm copper pipe
Solar
heat exchanger
P5
Cold water lling-and-draining tap
Figure 1 TERMO Combi Cylinder connection diagram for the system solution example Return-ow temperature boost.
Solar Thermal / Solar Cylinder EN-XXX_TERMO-Combi-Cylinder_MA-100127-11214400 169

1. Installation
1.1 Preparation
To install the cylinder, please follow the pictorial instruc- If it is not possible to set up the proposed circulation con-
tions. Prior to installation, it is essential to note the follow- trol with the thermostat and timer, afx the circulation pipe
ing important information: to the connection (" external thread) on the ange of the
drinking water storage tank.
In order to avoid damage to the inner tank, always trans-
port the TERMO cylinder in an upright position! Controller
The auxiliary heater for the back-up part of the TERMO
CONVECTROL III Convection Brake Combi Cylinder is regulated by the heating controller. For
The convection brakes are contained in the CONVEC- connecting the auxiliary-heating sensor, follow the installa-
TROL III cylinder connection set. When installing them, tion instructions provided by the controller manufacturer.
please follow the instructions included with the connec- An in-tank tube is mounted in the ange of the domestic
tion set. water storage tank for this purpose.
As an alternative to the convection brakes, combi-ttings For regulating the solar-heating system and control of the
5/4" 22mm, at-sealing 5/4" 1" threaded or soldered return-ow temperature boost or for acting as a hydraulic
connections, e.g. 5/4" 22 mm can be used. switch, the SUNGO SL or SXL (not available everywhere)
can be used. Contact our technical ofce on tel. +49 6421
Hot and Cold Water Pipe 8007-0 to nd out which is the ideal type of controller for
Make sure that there is no cutoff between the safety valve your applications.
and the cylinder.
The valve must be congured for a blow-off pressure General Safety Information
matching the permissible excess operating pressure of the Setting-up, installation and correct commissioning of
cylinder. Install a pressure reducer behind the ow meter the cylinder must be carried out by a certied specialist
where water-pipe pressure is 10 bar and above. company.
It is normal that water drips from the safety valve when the The system must be installed in a frost-proof room with
cylinder is heated and no expansion vessel for the domes- short pipe-work runs to the consumer.
tic water circuit is in place. Channel this water away using The heating circuits must be diffusion-proof.
a siphon funnel connected to the drain. For the water connection the relevant regional and
country regulations and recommendations and the
Safety Valve and Expansion Vessel regulations stipulated by your water supplier must be
Make sure that the safety valve in the heating circuit has a complied with.
maximum blow-off pressure of 3 bar. The expansion ves- For electrical connections, the relevant regional and
sel must be large enough to also accommodate the heat country regulations as well as the regulations stipulated
expansion of the cylinders buffer volume (see table 2). by your electricity provider must be adhered to.
During operation, there must be no cutoff between the The safety valve must be checked regularly for proper
expansion vessel and the cylinder. functioning by airing. The vent-valve opening must nev-
er be closed off or constricted.
Temperature Limitation Cleaning of the cylinder and a system check should be
The temperature in the cylinder must not exceed 95 C. carried out every 2 years.
Check that the settings on the solar controller (max. cylin- The sacricial magnesium anode must be checked and
der temperature in the SUNGO S/SL/SXL is set in the fac- renewed if necessary after 2 years and at regular inter-
tory) and the boiler controller (max. boiler temperature) vals after that.
are correct. An appropriate state-of-the-art water lter must be in-
stalled properly commissioned in the cold water feed
Domestic Water Circulation Pipe pipe.
If a domestic water circulation pipe has been installed, the
circulation pump must under all circumstances be con- Insulation
trolled via a timer and a thermostat, in order to reduce heat The cylinder insulation consists of the jacket (polyester
losses. The timer ensures that the pump only runs when eece with polystyrene cover layer and a hook closure),
hot water is required. The thermostat always switches the the ground insulation (insulating ring and ground insula-
pump off when the temperature in the circulation pipe tion disk) and the cover insulation (2 cover insulation disks
exceeds, for example, 30 C. The functions described are and 1 eece strip).
already integrated into the SUNGO SXL controller. The cir-
culation pump should be operated with a ow as low as For polystyrene the tendency to break decreases with in-
possible. creasing temperature.
We recommend the BW152 circulation pump (Article No. Dont install insulations at temperatures below 20 C; insu-
160 102 14) with integrated shut-off valve and return-ow lations stored in cold must be warmed to room tempera-
check valve, connected as in gure1. ture.
The circulation should be integrated between the safety
unit and the domestic hot water mixer in order to achieve
a cycle.
170 EN-XXX_TERMO-Combi-Cylinder_MA-100127-11214400
1.2 Hydraulic Installation
Figure 2 You need the following tools to assemble the solar cylinder: Figure 3 Open insulation at ratchet closing strip, put aside, unscrew
open-ended spanner SW 13, 19, 24, 30, 37; valve wrench (or pipe cylinder from pallet and set up in required location.
wrench) and Phillips screwdriver.
1.2
Figure 4 Slightly tip cylinder and insert bottom insulation disk. Figure 5 Screw the cold water lling-and-draining tap into the bottom
connection.
S 46
S 24
Figure 6 When installing the convection brakes, insert CONVEC- Figure 7 Place gasket between cylinder connection and combined
TROLIII in combined connection so that key and slot t snugly. connection. Assure right position when screwing on (TOP marking up!);
secure with wrench S24.
EN-XXX_TERMO-Combi-Cylinder_MA-100127-11214400 171
Figure 8 Install elbow pieces at sealing, and connect left (red mark- Figure 9 Optional: Install the safety unit in the cold water pipe above
ing) to hot and right (blue marking) to cold water. the cylinder instead of the stop, non-return and safety valves. No shut-
off between the safety unit and the cylinder!
H = hot C = cold
Flow direction
Mix = Mixing temperature
Figure 10 Option: Insert thermostatic mixing valve in the hot water Figure 11 Option: If desired, install drinking water circulation pump
pipe to limit the temperature. See attached notice for connection con- in accordance with the connection diagram and mount the clamp-on
guration. Then insulate the pipe work. pipe temperature sensor as close to the last hot water tapping location
as possible.
Figure 12 Screw the cold water lling-and-draining venting tap onto Figure 13 Option: If necessary, install electric auxiliary heating. For
the cover at the top; slide on hose and secure with a pipe clamp. electric installation refer to the manual included with the heating ele-
ment.
Figure 14 Connect the solar circuit to the inlet and return pipes. The Figure 15 Option: With Return-ow temperature boost system solu-
inlet for the heat exchanger in the solar-heating circuit is at the top and tion install the switch-over valve as per connection diagram (Figure 1).
the outlet at the bottom.
1.2
Figure 16 Depending on which system you have, mount the other Figure 17 Screw the temperature sensor for the solar controller under
connections or screw on the caps. the cylinder clamp bar tight (see table 2 for positions). Insert the sensor
for the auxiliary heater into the in-tank tube on the ange. Make sure
that the contact is good.
Table 1 Position of Temperature Sensor on the Cylinder

Temp. sensor Height of sensor position from the oor in mm
TERMO 700 TERMO 1000
T (bottom) 220 240
T (centre) 900 980
T (top) 1200 1400
Auxiliary heater Receptacle in ange
Table 2 Additional Volume for Expansion Vessel in Heating Circuit

Blow-off pressure Admission TERMO
of heating-circuit pressure (Nominal volume in l)
safety valve (= lling pressure)
700 1000
2.5 bar 1.0 bar 65 l 95 l
2.5 bar 1.5 bar 130 l 185 l
3 bar 1.0 bar 50 l 70 l
Figure 18 Option: CORREX anode. Attach one cable to grounding
screw and plug the other onto the electrode. 3 bar 1.5 bar 80 l 110 l
Observe manual of external anode.
Figure 19 Option: Install electrical socket and plug in the CORREX Figure 20 Please note that in order to accommodate the expansion of
electronic device. If the green light comes on after the cylinder has the contents of the storage tank, a suitably sized expansion vessel must
been lled, everything is OK. If a red light ashes, read the operating be installed in the heating circuit (see table 2).
instructions for further information.
Figure 21 For commissioning, rst ll the drinking water storage tank. Figure 22 For commissioning the buffer storage tank, rst connect the
To do this, rst open the stopcock of the safety unit and then turn on cold water lling-and-draining tap at the bottom of the cylinder to a
the tap on the hot water side so that air can escape. hose and let the water ow in.
Figure 23 Open ll and drain valve on top to remove air. Figure 24 Thoroughly rinse, ll and vent the solar-heating circuit.
Please adhere to the operating instructions for commissioning the
system.
1.3 Storage Cylinder Insulation
After setting up the cylinder, the insulation has to be Make sure that insulation is tted tightly to cylinder wall
mounted at the installation location before installing the Tighten hook closure from top to bottom until the insu-
drinking water, circulation and heating circuits. lation tightly ts the cylinder.
Loosely place insulation jacket around the cylinder, and Please dont use tools or tightening straps and dont close
securely press against cylinder on opposite side of con- the closing strip violently, since this might result in damage
nections. and reduced effectiveness of the insulation.
Adjust insulation jacket by thumping it with your at
hand, thump or stroke from rear to front in the direction
of the hook closure, until the two sides of closing strip
are so close to each other that they can be closed with
slight pressure
1.2
Figure 25 Now position the insulating ring around the bottom of the Figure 26 Lock in the hook closure on the insulation jacket opposite
cylinder. the connections. If necessary, use the mounting accessory (Art. No. 130
00 239) or secure the hooked strip with screws.
Figure 27 Use included wire hook to lock left side of insulation in place Figure 28 Close the insulation with the front hook closure. First slot
for easier handling. into the loosest slot position and then gradually tighten.
Figure 29 Place eece insulation into the space between cover lid and Figure 30 Insert both cover insulation discs and put on the cover. Insu-
insulation jacket, waterproof surface on outside. late all connected pipe work and press insulating hose rmly onto the
storage-tank insulation.
2. Start-Up
First ll the domestic water storage tank If the desired hot water temperature is frequently not
In order to avoid damage caused by excess-pressure (wa- reached during operation, set the required temperature
ter hammer), it is essential to ll the domestic water stor- for the auxiliary heater at a higher level.
age tank rst. Only after lling the drinking water storage Vent the cylinder again
tank you should ll the heating part. Check the hot- and Generally required to remove remaining air from circuit
cold water connections to the cylinder for air and water (s.g. 23). Then replace the insulation lid.
tightness. Complete the acceptance report
Fill the heating circuit Correct commissioning must be certied in the accep-
Open the vent tap on the storage tank (gure 23). If water tance report by an expert, so that in the case of any com-
ows out, close the tap. Depending on the water pressure plaint you can make a claim under the guarantee.
and the size of the storage tank, it can take between half
an hour and two hours to ll the tank.
Commissioning the solar-heatig system 3. Maintenance
Please follow the instructions for commissioning the sys-
tem. Maintenance of the cylinder and the solar-heating system
Check all cylinder screws for tightness! should be carried out at intervals of 2 years.
Check that all connections on the cylinder and ange are Venting the cylinder.
airtight and watertight and tighten where required. See Commissioning for individual steps.
Setting heater control Check the sacricial magnesium anode
Mount the auxiliary-heating temperature sensor in the im- See gure 32 for individual steps.
mersion pocket on the ange of the domestic water stor- Complete the service report
age tank. Set the required auxiliary-heater temperature on Correct servicing must be certied in the servicing report
the heating controls in accordance with the manufacturers by an expert, so that in the case of any complaint you can
instructions. make a claim under the guarantee.
Figure 31 After commissioning the System check all connections (in- Figure 32 Check factory installed sacricial magnesium anode every
cluding convection brakes), anges, anode and screwings for tight- 2years. Remove cable and measure the current with multimeter: Less
ness, and tighten if required. than 0.3 milliampere = check anode and renew if necessary.

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
RATIO Buffer Cylinder
Versatile Applications
Steel storage for space heating and solar thermal in-
stallations.
Optionally with up to 2 plain-pipe heat exchanger coils
Option for electrical immersion heater
Hydronic versatility with many connections
Prepared for installation of a freshwater unit (DHW
preparation by ow-through principle)
Energetically Optimized
Close tting environmentally compatible polyester - 1.2
ber eece jacket insulation
100 or 120 mm thick insulation
Exceptionally low connection losses with the
CONVECTROL III convection brakes (accessory)
With vertical heat conductor sheet and deector plate
to support stable stratication
Simple Installation
Flat sealing 1" connections
Storage connection kit with combined ttings for sol-
der or pressing connections available as accessory
Flexible polyester eece for easy tting of insulation
Sensor connection bar for variable sensor positions
Ratchet hook closure
Storage insulation can be removed
Robust and Durable

Scratch and impact resistant polystyrene shell
Made in Germany acc. to DIN 4753
Figure 1 RATIO buffer cylinder
Solar Thermal / Solar Cylinder EN-XXX_RATIO-Buffer-Cylinder_TI-100722-1WA10090 177

1. Technical Data
Table 1 300-G 1) 500-G 1) 700 / 1000 / 1500 /
Features 700-2G 2) 1000-2G 2) 1500-G 1)
130 102 80 / 130 102 84 / 130 102 86 /
Product no.: 130 102 85 130 102 81
130 102 82 130 102 83 130 102 87
Material High quality steel St 37-2 (inside untreated, outside primed)
1451 mm / 1765 mm / 1655 mm / 2147 mm / 2055 mm /
Total height, without / with Insulation jacket
1506 mm 1840 mm 1730 mm 2222 mm 2130 mm
550 mm / 650 mm / 790 mm / 800 mm / 1000 mm /
Diameter without / with insulation
750 mm 850 mm 1030 mm 1040 mm 1240 mm
Max. tilted height 1550 mm 1810 mm 1720 mm 2210 mm 2160 mm
Weight of tank (without insulation) 91 kg 125 kg 109 kg / 168 kg 153 kg / 237 kg 205 kg / 265 kg
Total net capacity 296 l 513 l 719 l / 690 l 980 l / 939 l 1443 l / 1413 l
Volume fraction, above layer A
138 l 136 l 299 l / 229 l 369 l / 307 l 488 l
(compare gures3 - 7)
Max. operation pressure 3 bar
Max. operation temperature 90 C
Heat insulation Lid and jacket 100 mm Lid and jacket 120 mm
(Polyester ber eece, polystyrene exterior) bottom 50 mm bottom 50 mm
Heat loss rate 3.1 W/K 3.2 W/K 3.3 W/K 3.7 W/K 4.4 W/K
Connection stubs, vertical row 7 - 11 pipe threads DIN ISO 228-1 (cylindrical, at sealing), G 1"
RATIOfresh 200 /
RATIOfresh 200, RATIOfresh 200 RATIOfresh 200
Attachment of freshwater unit (optional) RATIOfresh 200 RATIOfresh 200
and 250/400 and 250/400 and 250/400
and 250/400
Optional Solar Coil Heat Exchanger 300-G 500-G 700-2G 1000-2G 1500-G
Material High quality steel St 37-2
Heat exchanger surface 1.38 m 1.96 m 2.16 m 3.45 m 3.45 m
Liquid volume 8.67 l 12.31 l 13.76 l 21.67 l 21.67 l
1.4 mbar 3.5 mbar 8.2 mbar 17.3 mbar 24 mbar
Pressure drop at 40 C with 40 % DC20
at 250 l/h at 350 l/h at 500 l/h at 600 l/h at 700 l/h
up to up to up to up to up to
Recommended total collector surface
approx. 8 m approx. 11 m approx. 12 m approx. 20 m approx. 20 m
Option Aux. Coil Heat Exchanger 700-2G 1000-2G
Material High quality steel St 37-2
Heat exchanger surface 1.29 m 1.51 m
Liquid volume 8.23 l 9.49 l
Pressure drop at 60 C and 800 l/h 13 mbar 15 mbar
Max. operation pressure 10 bar
Max. continuous thermal power output 14 kW 16 kW
1) G = Model with solar heat exchanger
2) 2G = Model with solar heat exchanger and aux. heat exchanger coil
4
2
Figure 2 RATIO buffer cylinder view from top:

1 Connection stub (row, 7-11 pieces) 1 " M; 2 Sensor connection
bar; 3 Connection stubs top 1 " M; 4 Threaded socket for electri-
6 cal immersion heater; 5 Fixing bolts for storage add-ons; 6 Hoisting
loop
178 EN-XXX_RATIO-Buffer-Cylinder_TI-100722-1WA10090
750
G5/4
550
A
G11/2
1451
1321
1156
1.2
776
650
280
180
95
Figure 3 RATIO 300-G cross-section with dimensions;

A = reference plain in table 1 for aux. heating volume, connection row on right side 1" M.
850
G5/4
650
G11/2
1765
1618
1513
1260
1160
960
880
760
290
210
112
Figure 4 RATIO 500-G cross-section with dimensions;

EN-XXX_RATIO-Buffer-Cylinder_TI-100722-1WA10090 179
1030
G5/4
1653
790
1480
G11/2
1400
1315
1015
935
850
815
700
495
300
220
140
Figure 5 RATIO 700 and 700-2G cross-section with dimensions;

1040
G5/4
800
G11/2
2147
1971
1866
1780
1400
1301
1201
1041
801
331
251
141
Figure 6 RATIO 1000 and 1000-2G cross-section with dimensions;

1240
G5/4
G11/2
1000
2055
1825
1720
1.2
1280
1180
900
780
385
305
195
Figure 7 RATIO 1500 and 1500-G cross-section with dimensions;

Figure 8 Lower storage section (cut) with internal ow guide deec-

tor plate.
2. Accessories
Combined connection set standard
139 002 06
with CONVECTROL III
Combined connection set standard 139 000 63
Storage height adjustment unit (for 300- and 500 l
139 000 16
version 3, for all others 4 are required)
Electrical immersion heater 3 kW 139 001 42
Tank mounting kit for RATIOfresh units 250/400 * 139 000 28
Tank mounting kit for RATIOfresh unit 200 139 002 42
Tank mounting kit for CIRCO 6 / 6E 150 302 01
3 way actuator valve (1" M) with insulation shells 150 303 51
* Cannot be used with RATIO 300-G, 700

The patented and easily installed component separates
the water that cooled down in the connection pipes from
the hot water contained in the storage.
The CONVECTROL III can reduce heat losses at the stor-
age connections by up to 50 %. The total annual storage
losses thus can be reduced by 10 % to 20 %.
Figure 9 RATIO buffer cylinder with attached RATIOfresh 250
Figure 10 CONVECTROL III combined ttings.
P1: Pump, solar circuit

P2: Pump, heating circuit
Output
Inputs
P3: Pump, aux. heating DHW
P4: Pump, RATIOfresh primary circuit
P5: Pump: DHW recirculation
Collector field
M1: Mixer, heating circuit
Oil- or gas
boiler
1.2
Recirculation
Cold water
Hot water
Figure 11 Solar Installation for DHW preparation using the hygienic ow-through heating principle. System solution with RATIO buffer cylinder,
freshwater unit RATIOfresh 250/400 and an oil- or gas boiler. The controller of the freshwater unit assures constant hot-water tapping tempera-
tures and controls the recirculation pump. The performance control of the freshwater unit also assures low temperatures for the buffer storage
return, thus increasing the solar yield.
P1: Pump, solar circuit SUNGO SXL, system 1211

Outputs
Inputs
P3: Pump, aux. heating DHW

P4: Pump, RATIOfresh primary circuit
M1: Mixer, heating circuit Collector field

V1: 3-way actuator valve, storage loading
HW: Hydronic switch
Recirculation
Cold water
Hot water
Figure 12 Solar installation for DHW preparation and space heating support: System solution with RATIO buffer cylinder and freshwater unit
RATIOfresh 250/400 and a gas boiler in a mixed heating circuit. DHW preparation uses the hygienic ow-through heating principle. Solar energy
is utilized for the heating circuit by means of return boost.
P1: Pump, solar circuit SUNGO SXL, system 1221
Outputs
Inputs
P3: Pump, aux. DHW heating via buffer
M1: Mixer, heating circuit Collector field

V1: 3-way actuator valve, storage loading
V2: 3-way actuator valve, return boost
V3: 2-way valve parallel to P3, closed when power off
V4: Thermostatic mixing valve
HW: Hydronic switch
Hot water
Cold water
Figure 13 Solar installation for DHW preparation and space heating support: 2-storage system with ECOplus solar DHW cylinder, RATIO buffer
cylinder, gas boiler and mixed heating circuit. The solar energy is optimally distributed to both storages by the solar controller. It is utilized for the
heating circuit by means of return boost. Additional solar heat from the buffer is available for DHW.
P1: Pump, solar circuit, primary SUNGO SXL, system 1212

P2: Pump, solar circuit, secondary
Outputs
Inputs
P3: Pump, solid fuel boiler circuit

P5: Pump, RATIOfresh primary circuit Collector field
P6: Pump: DHW recirculation

V1: Thermostatic mixing valve
for keeping a minimum return temperature
PWT: Plate heat exchanger Recirculation
Cold water
Hot water
Solid fuel
boiler
PWT
Figure 14 System solution with RATIO buffer cylinder, freshwater unit RATIOfresh 250/400, solid fuel boiler, mixed heating circuit and larger
collector surface. DHW preparation by ow-through heating. Solar energy is loaded to the buffer cylinder via a powerful plate heat exchanger.
The solid fuel boiler utilizes the entire buffer volume. With a built in electrical immersion heater the heating operation can be assured during a
longer absence.

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
1.2
Figure 1 Cross section of RATIO buffer cylinder
Content
1. General Safety Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 4. Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
1.1 Signs and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 4.1 Filling, Venting and Pressure Testing . . . . . 190
1.2 Standards and Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 4.2 Flushing the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
1.3 Qualication of the Installer . . . . . . . . . 186 4.3 Settings at Storage and Solar Controller . . . . 190
1.4 Intended Use and Application . . . . . . . . 186 4.4 Completing the Acceptance Protocol . . . . . 190
1.5 Recycling Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 5. Fitting the Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
2. Scope of Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 6. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
3. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 7. Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 192
3.1 Setting up the Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . 188
3.2 Connecting the Heating Circuit . . . . . . . . 188
3.3 Connecting the Solar Circuit . . . . . . . . . 189
3.4 Connecting Aux. DHW Heating Circuit. . . . . 189
3.5 Installing the Immersion Heater . . . . . . . . 189
Solar Thermal / Solar Cylinder EN-XXX_RATIO-Buffer-Cylinder_MA-100812-1WA10089 185

1.1 Signs and Symbols Setup, installation and startup of the storage must be car-
ried out by a registered professional installer.
The following symbols are used throughout this instruc- Note that in case of a warranty claim the warranty is only
tion manual. They relate to specic safety information and valid if the correct startup was certied in the acceptance
important additional information. Please observe their protocol by a professional and proof of regular mainte-
meaning nance can be presented.

DANGER of possibly serious personal injury
The steel storage tank is designed for use in closed heat-
ing- and solar circuits. It is not suitable for DHW storage.
The storage must only be lled with water and it has to be
CAUTION against possible property damage secured with a 3-bar safety valve without shutoff mecha-
nism.
The heating circuit has to be equipped with a sufciently
sized membrane expansion vessel (see table 1).
NOTE for additional information The storage must be set up in a frost-proof room. The
ground underneath the storage must be dry and have a
sufcient structural carrying capacity!
1.2 Standards and Codes Table 1 Additional Volume Required for Expansion Vessel in
Heating Circuit.
EC Declaration of Conformity: this solar buffer cylinder
was designed and manufactured in accordance with Safety valve Prim. RATIO
existing laws and regulations of the EU countries. in heating pressure (Additional nominal volume of exp.
circuit vessel [l])
Please take care, that the connection to the drinking
water supply is performed in compliance with local 300 500 700 1000 1500
regulations and recommendations and the specica- 2.5 bar 1.0 bar 50 70 105 135 170
tions of your water utility or provider.
2.5 bar 1.5 bar 80 125 200 250 320
Please also make sure that the electric connection is
in accordance to local regulations and specications 3 bar 1.0 bar 40 55 85 105 135
of you electric utility company. The functionality of the 3 bar 1.5 bar 60 80 125 155 200
safety valve must be checked regularly by test-venting
as outlined for example in DIN 4753.The blowing-off The RATIO buffer cylinder offers the following possibili-
vent must never be closed or restricted. ties:
Observe all relevant regulations when connecting the Installation of an electrical immersion heater
storage to the domestic water and heating circuits as Attachment of a RATIOfresh freshwater unit
well as all regulations pertinent to the electric connec- Connection of auxiliary DHW heating via a plain-pipe
tions of a controller. heat exchanger coil (storage types 2G)
When installing an auxiliary heater, please comply with Connection to a solar thermal installation via plain pipe
the information of the device manufacturer. heat exchanger coil (storage types G and 2G)
Please make sure to note the relevant national and inter-

national standards, such as e.g.: 1.5 Recycling Note
DIN 4753: Water heater and water heating systems for
potable and process water. At the end of an installation's operational lifetime the valu-
DIN 1988: Technical rules for installing potable water able materials should be recycled in an environmentally
systems. sound manner. If no recycling option exists, Wagner & Co
DVGW 551/552: Potable water heating and conduits: will take the scrap material back. Please contact us if you
Technical measure to reduce Legionella bacteria have questions.
growth.
EN V 12977-3: Thermal solar installations and compo-
nents - Part 3: Efciency tests of storage tanks for solar
heating systems.
186 EN-XXX_RATIO-Buffer-Cylinder_MA-100812-1WA10089
2. Scope of Supply
1.2
1
11
10
Figure 2 Components of the storage: see table 2 for legend of the position numbers.
Table 2 Scope of Supply Table 2, continued

No. Item Qty. 7 Lid insulation 1
1 Storage with 1"- connection stub row 1 8 Upper insulation ller 1
2 Jacket insulation 1-3 * 9 Outer oor insulation ring 1
3 Hook closure strip 1-3 * 10 inner oor insulation 1
4 Insulation plugs 4 Bottom nish strap (integrated in insulation jacket
11 1-3 *
with some storage types)
5 Insulation installation tools 2
* Different number, depending on storage type
6 Storage lid 1
EN-XXX_RATIO-Buffer-Cylinder_MA-100812-1WA10089 187
3. Installation
Technical information that might be relevant for the instal-
lation of the storage is published in the Technical Infor-
mation Ratio Buffer Cylinder, (le no. 1WA10090). These
include cutaways, technical data and sample schemes of
typical system solutions.
All storage connection stubs are cylindrical and designed
for use with special heat resistant at gaskets. The original
gaskets from our connection sets should be used or alter-
natively gaskets of identical quality. 1
When using the buffer cylinder with a RATIOcompact
System refer to the separate RATIOcompact installation
instructions in place of the chapters 3.2 to 3.4.
3.1 Setting up the Storage

Unscrew the storage from the palette, remove packing
lm and transport to the installation location (weight
5
up to 256 kg!). For hoisting the tank can be lifted at the 4
foot ring and the hoisting ring at the top. 3
Positioning the storage tank for easy piping. 2
To lay in the bottom insulation tilt the tank
Figure 3 Tilt the storage to insert the inner oor insulation Figure 4 Connection example for a solar installation with space heat-
ing support via return boost: 1 Storage; 2 Swivel nut 1"; 3 Com-
bined connection 1"; 4 CONVECTROL III convection brake; 5 Flat
gasket 1"; 6 3-way diverter valve; 7 Filling and emptying
tap; 8 Cap 1".
3.2 Connecting the Heating Circuit

Then make connections using the at gaskets especial-
ly approved for this application. To reduce heat losses
we recommend to use the CONVECTROL III connec-
tion sets ) see gure 4, no.'s 2 to 5) as seen in gures
5 and 6.
Close the unused connections with 1" caps (see g-
ure 4, no. 8).
Installation of a safety valve in the heating circuit with a
max. blowing-off pressure of 3 bar!
Installation of a lling and emptying tap at the lowest
storage connection (see gure 4, no. 7).
Installation of venting device (e.g. a tap) at the 1" con- Figure 5 When installing the convection brakes, make sure that key
nection of the upper rounded head of the storage - for and slot are aligned when inserting the CONVECTROL III into the com-
air release when lling the tank. bined connection.
S 46
150
S 24
Figure 6 Place gasket between storage connection stub and com- Figure 8 Use the sensor connection bar to attach the temperature
bined connection. Assure correct position when tightening (TOP sensor at a storage with integrated solar heat exchanger, approx. 150
marking up!) and secure with open spanner S 24. mm above the solar return
3.4 Connecting the Aux. DHW Heating 1.2

Circuit
Connect the aux. DHW circuit to the storage versions G2
as follows:
Connect aux. heating circuit to upper heat exchanger
coil with at sealing gaskets.
Attach a temperature sensor for the aux. heating con-
trol to the sensor connection bar in appropriate height
(x in the same way as solar sensor in gure 8).
3.5 Connection of Immersion Heater

A series of electrical immersion heaters is optionally avail-
able.
Figure 7 Membrane expansion vessel (MEV) with upstream capped Screw the heater into the 1" socket (see gure 9).
valve for easier checking of the primary pressure. Hereunto observe the additional information in the
heater's instruction.
Laying the mains cable of the electrical heater: a heat
Connection of a sufciently sized membrane expan- resistant cable (min. up to 95 C) must be used when
sion vessel (MEV) that can take up the thermal expan- laying the cable under the insulation jacket.
sion of the storage content (see table 1). For ease of
maintenance we recommend the downstream installa-
tion of a capped valve (see gure 7).
3.3 Connecting the Solar Circuit

Connect the solar circuit to the storage versions G and
G2 as follows:
Connect the solar ow to the upper connection stub
of the solar heat exchanger coil and the return to the
lower. Temperatures of up to 95 C are possible with
connected solar installation. Caution: Risk of scalding!
Attach the temperature sensor 15 cm above the centre
of the solar return. To this end slightly loosen the sensor
connection bar, place sensor and snap in connection
bar again (see gure 8)
Figure 9 Screw in the immersion heater
4. Start-Up 5. Fitting the Insulation
Before beginning with start-up procedures the correct Insulation jacket made of polyester ber eece with
installation according to safety regulations should be scratch and impact resistant polystyrene nish and a
checked again. hook closure strip. Depending on the type, it consists of
1 to 3 sections. The higher the ambient temperature, the
more exible the polystyrene surface, with reduced risk
4.1 Flushing the System of breaking.
Do not therefore install the insulation jacket at temper-
When the system is ushed, appropriate strainers have atures below 20 C. Allow insulation jackets that were
to be inserted to remove remaining particles from the stored in a close place to warm up to room temperature!
piping. Do not use additional tools or tightening straps and do
We recommend to install a dirt retainer at an appropri- not close the hook closure by force. This could damage
ate position within the heating circuit. the insulation and diminish its effectiveness.
If an immersion heater is used, the insulation jacket must

4.2 Filling, Venting and Pressure be prepared for placing the heater's controller case:
Use a cardboard cutter to cut out and remove the poly-
Testing styrene nish along the pre-cut line (gure 10)
Fill the storage with water at the lower lling tap. Max. Also remove the pre-cut insulation underneath (gure
pressure 3 bar (gure 4, no. 7). Release air using the 11)
vent at the upper rounded head.
Afterwards close the vent and heat up the storage, ide-
ally to max. temperature while monitoring the opera-
tional pressure.
Examine all connections and anges for leak tightness,
retighten if required.
Afterwards vent the storage once again, so that all air
trapped in the pipes is allowed to escape.
4.3 Settings at Boiler and Solar

Controller
For settings at the boiler and the solar controller (if ap-
plicable) the max. temperature for storage loading must
nut exceed 95 C.
When a RATIOfresh freshwater unit is used for DHW prep-
aration, the aux. heating of the storage standby-section is
controlled by the boiler controller. For the installation of
the aux. heating sensor the instructions of the controller Figure 10 Remove the pre-cut immersion heater opening from the
manufacturer have to be observed. polystyrene nish of the insulation.
4.4 Completing the Acceptance

Protocol
Note: The correct installation and startup must be certi-
ed in the acceptance protocol by a licensed profession-
al. Non-compliance may render all warranties void.
Figure 11 Remove the pre-cut section of the insulation jacket
2
1
1
2
Figure 12 First slide the cut-out opening of the insulation over the Figure 13 Wire hooks as installation support for the insulation jacket:
immersion heater, then lock hook closure. secure the left section of the insulation at the connection stubs and
then close slide the right insulation section into the hook closure.
1.2
Install the storage insulation as follows (parts depend on
storage type, see gure 2, no.'s 2 to 11):
First, place outer oor insulating ring around the bot-
tom of the buffer cylinder.
If an immersion heater is installed (EHK), the cut-out
section rst has to be slid over the heater (see gure
12)
In case of a one-part insulation jacket, lay insulation
around the cylinder and close hook closure.
In case of insulation jackets consisting of several sec-
tions, connect sections at hook closure, close hooks at
connection row last.*
Depending on the storage type, different installation
tools are supplied (see gures 13 and 14).
Retighten the hook closure starting at the top, until the Figure 14 S-hook with rubber strap as installation tool for the insula-
heat insulation ts tightly against the cylinder. tion jacket: put the rubber strap over the respective S-hook and lock
right insulation section into the hook closure.
Install insulation plugs
Place upper insulation ller and upper lid insulation
Place storage lid.
Fasten the bottom nish with velcro strap (only re-
quired for some cylinder types)
* If a RATIOcompact unit is attached directly to the stor-

age, the hook closure at the connection row is closed rst
in the last (strongest) hook position.
6. Troubleshooting
Flat sealing gaskets tend to settle during the rst months
of operation. Insufciently tightened pipe connections
may result in slight leaking. The connections then must
be re-tightened.
7. Care and Maintenance

The storage should be cleaned and maintained at least
every 2 years, otherwise the warranty is void.
Check for leak-tightness at storage and connections.
Watch out for signs of scaling or moist spots at the in-
sulation, Re-tighten connections, if required.
Check the safety valve by test-venting.
Vent the storage (for individual steps see chapter 4)
Fill in and sign the maintenance protocol.
Renew at sealing gaskets whenever a connection is

opened. Otherwise leak tightness cannot be guaranteed
anymore.

1.2
Figure 1 CONVECTROL III with combi tting set
Benets High heat loss
CONVECTROL III convection brakes reduce heat losses at

cylinder pipe connections by up to 50 %. The protected Without convection brake
barrier design separates water that cooled in the connec-

tion pipes from the hot cylinder content. Total annual cylin-
der heat losses are thus reduced by 10 to 20 %. 60 C
Operational Principle
Without Convection Brake
When the solar cylinder is in stand-by mode, hot water
Storage 100 m Pipe
rises from the storage tank into the upper section of the cylinder soft foam insulation insulation
connection pipe and ows along the pipe wall. There the
water slowly cools to ambient temperature and sinks to Convection brake
the lower pipe section due to its increasing density. From
the lower pipe section, the cold water returns to the cylin- With convection brake
der (single-pipe convection). Energy is continuously with-

drawn from the cylinder.
60 C
With Convection Brake
The offset in- and outlet nozzles create a barrier within the
connection pipes, effectively preventing convection and
the resulting heat losses. Additionally, losses through ther-
mal conduction at the pipe ttings are lowered by the at Low heat loss
seals between the end faces. All in all heat loss at pipe Figure 2 Heat loss at cylinder connections with and without CON-
connections is reduced by up to 50 %. VECTROL III convection brake
Solar Thermal / Solar Cylinder EN-XXX_CONVECTROL-III_TI-100121-11204800 193

Technical Data
Pressure loss p [mbar]
CONVECTROL III
35,0
Outer diameter 30 mm/27 mm f. 5/4" male Solar fluid (40% DC20, 40 C)
Length 30 mm 30,0
Material PPS; 40 % bre glass re-enforced 25,0

Thermal stability
230 C 20,0
acc. to ISO 75, Verf. A+B
Continuous operation 15,0
max. 95 C
temperature
10,0
Temporary max. temperature max. 140 C
5,0 Water (20 C)
Tensile e-modulus ISO 527 14700 MPa
Creep modulus (1000 h) 6000 MPa 0,0
Coefcient 0 200 400 600 800 1000
0.26 x 10-4 K-1
of linear expansion Volume flow V [l/h]
Permits and certicates KTW Figure 3 Pressure loss of CONVECTROL III convection brake with wa-
ter and solar liquid
13010048
11/4"
13900197
81910178
81910178
28
22
Figure 4 Components of the CONVECTROL III convection brake with order numbers and dimensions

Thermostatic Mixing Valve BM
1.2
Figure 1 Thermostatic mixing valve BM with 2nd insulation shell re-

moved
Product Features Scope of Delivery

Thermostatic mixer for the limitation of tapping tem- Thermostatic mixing valve
peratures in systems for hot water preparation. 2 insulation shells
Hand wheel can be locked to avoid unauthorized Cold water brake to be placed in pipe connection
change of the set mixing temperature.
Protection against scaling: the hot water ow is blocked
in case of failing cold water supply.
Accurately tting insulation shells avoid unnecessary
heat loss.
Accessory: Temperature sensor in connection piece
for the control of the mixing temperature.
A dirt retainer is recommended for operation.
Solar Thermal / Solar Cylinder EN-XXX-Thermostatic-Mixing-Valve_TI-100120-1WA10082 195

Technical Data
Table 1BM Thermostatic Mixing Valve Hand Wheel Lock
Adjustable temperature 35 - 50 C, stepless
Max. operating temperature 100 C
Max. pressure difference
between hot and cold water 1 bar
connections
Pressure number PN 10
Max. volume ow 1500 l/h
Flow rate index Kv 1.4
Gun metal Rg5 valve housing;
teon coated inside to avoid
Material scaling; valve taper and guide
components made of limescale
resistant high quality plastic.
Connection 1" M
Figure 4 Thermostatic mixing valve with removed hand wheel. The ad-
justing spindle can be locked with the thin nut. The setting of the mixer
then cannot be accidentally altered.
Table 2 Accessories for BM Thermostatic Mixing Valve

LT 22-1", swivel nut, seal and
Solder connection set solder connection 22 mm, 1 each,
order no. 100 85
Set of threaded connections
GT 1-"" swivel nut 1", seal and
(the included cold water
threaded connector " M, 1 each,
stopper cannot be used;
order no. 139 100 11
provide on site)
Combi tting 1"-22, swivel nut
Combined tting set and copper nozzle,
order no. 819 100 87
Thermometer (63 mm ),
Temperature sensor measuring range 20 - 80 C,
Figure 2 Dimensions in mm connection piece connection with swivel nut G1,
order no. 160 101 35
3
10 5
Pressure loss p [mbar]
Pressure loss p [Pascal]
10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
2
10 10 4
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
10 10 3
2 3
5 6 7 8 910 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 2 3 4 5
Mass ow qm[kg/h]
Figure 3 Pressure loss curve
196 EN-XXX-Thermostatic-Mixing-Valve_TI-100120-1WA10082
Sample Installations
P1: Pump solar circuit

P2: Pump heating circuit
P3: Pump, aux heating drinking water Exit 230 V Low voltage section
RV: Back flow preventer Collector field

Mains
Oil- or gas
boiler 1.2
Hot water
Cold water
Figure 5 Sample installation 1: Thermostatic mixing valve in connection with solar storage without hot water circulation.

P4: DHW circulation pump

Collector field
Mains
Oil- or gas
boiler
Hot water
Cold water
Circulation
Figure 6 Sample installation 2: Thermostatic mixing valve BM in connection with solar storage and hot water circulation. The piping makes sure
that the temperature set at the mixing valve in no case can be exceeded.
EN-XXX-Thermostatic-Mixing-Valve_TI-100120-1WA10082 197
P4: DHW circulation pump

Collector field
Mains
Oil- or gas
boiler
Hot water
Cold water
Circulation
Figure 7 Sample installation 3: Thermostatic mixing valve in combination with hot water circulation. THe circulation return ow leads into the cold
water inlet of the storage, in order to support the temperature stratication.

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
Electrical Immersion Heater
1.2
Figure 1 Electrical immersion heater
Technical Information
For heating of domestic water (only insulated version) Temperature sensor of capillary tube controller is situ-
in enamelled or coated storage tanks with protective ated in protective tube between the heating elements.
anode. Not suitable for use in stainless steel containers! To prevent damage from corrosion, the heating ele-
For heating of heating water in buffer tanks. ments are electrically insulated from the enamelled
With control button for adjusting the target tempera- steel container and partially grounded via resistance
ture and with control LED indicating heating operation bridge. This increases the life of the protective mag-
(automatic switch-off, when max. temperature is ex- nesium anode as well as of the immersion heater itself
ceeded). (only insulated version).
Integrated functions: Target temperature control (ad- Unheated section: 100 mm
justment range: 30-75 C), excess temperature limita- Connection thread 1 "M
tion (94 C +0K/-9K) and frost protection (8 C 6 K). Screw head protection class: IP64
U-shaped heating elements, insulated and protected Product complies with EU regulations 73/23/EWG and
water pressure tight in a brass screw head in accord- 89/336/EWG (EC Conformity).
ance with DIN 44922 (only insulated version).
G 1
PG M 20x1,25 DIN ISO 228-1
2
approx. 130
104
ECO
SW 60 1
16
approx. 145 Immersion depth L
Figure 2 Dimensions of immersion heater in mm, 1 button for adjusting target temperature, 2 Screw plug for unbolting
Table 1 Power (kW) / Current Immersion Depth Surface Load Tube Material Number of
Order no. Application (V) Lmax (mm) (W/cm) Heating Tubes
139 001 46 6,0 / buffer (not insulated) 400 480 ~ 10 1.4571 3
139 001 45 1,5 / enamel and buffer 230 260 ~ 8,4 1.4876 (Incoloy 820) 2
139 001 42 3,0 / enamel and buffer 230/400 360 ~ 7,3 1.4876 (Incoloy 820) 3
Solar Thermal / Solar Cylinder EN-XXX_Electrical-Immersion-Heater_TI-MA-091109-11206300 199

3 ~ 400 V
General Safety Notes
All local regulations and technical standards must be
complied with. Installation should only be carried out
by authorised expert personnel.
The immersion heater must only be commissioned in a
horizontal position in water lled storage!
The heater has an integrated safety temperature limita-
tion for overload protection and the power is switched
off when the water temperature reaches 94 C +0/-9K).
L3 L2 L1 N
Figure 3 Connection to 400 V three phase current

Installation
1 ~ 230 V
Installation Notes
Maximum ambient temperature for the screw head:
80C.
When installing in enamelled storage with corrosion
protection anode, the screw head must have a conduc-
tive connection with the tank.
The included copper gasket is only intended for single
use. Renew the gasket when the heater was unscrewed.
If the total water hardness exceeds 12dH / 9.58e (ap-
L3 L2 L1 N
prox. 0.67 ppm CaCO3), we recommend to annually
descale the heating elements. Figure 4 Connection to 230 V AC
Please note that the risk of lime scale deposits increases
with higher target temperatures. Therefore please avoid
temperatures above 60 C in regions with hard water.
Connecting of the Immersion Heater Operation

to 400 V Three-Phase Current
Types 3 kW to 9 kW are suitable for operation in three Use the control button on the outside to adjust the tar-
phase current (400 V). get temperature (ca. 30-75 C). The immersion heater is
Connect the three phases of the cable to terminal L1, L2 switched off by the thermostat when the target temper-
and L3 on the control and safety thermostat (see gure ature is reached.
3). Please note: The switching temperature difference is 13
Connect the blue neutral cable to terminal N. K 6.5 K.
The tank itself must be connected via min. 6 mm cable We recommend setting the thermostat to the ECO
to the earthing terminal in the cellar. This can be done marking at approx. 50 C. This reduces scaling, saves
by xing a ange cable socket to one of the screws on energy and increases the solar yield.
the cylinder ange. At position * a minimum tank temperature of approx.
7 C 6 K is kept for frost protection.
Connection of 1.5 and 3 kW Immersion Heater
to 230 V AC
The 1.5 kW version must and the 3 kW can be operated Trouble Shooting
on a single phase 230 V connection. Connect the phase
of the connecting cable to terminal L1 on the control If the overheat protection was triggered, eliminate the
and safety thermostat (see gure 4). source of the fault and then manually re-set the tem-
Connect the three phases of the 3 kW heater with the perature limiter by pressing the button next to the
enclosed bridges. Please note: Without bridging only thermostat button. Hereunto separate the immersion
one heating tube will heat up! heater from the grid and wait until the storage tank has
Continue as outlined above. cooled. Then unscrew the plug and unbolt the limiter
with a tool, e.g. insert a screwdriver into the opening
The electrical connection of the heating elements must not and press against the steel contact inside.
be manipulated!
The temperature limitation may also be triggered when
the immersion heater is not in operation but the tempera-
ture exceeds 85 C (e.g. in summer, when a solar energy
system is connected). To avoid this, set the max. storage
temperature to a value below 75 C at the solar controller.

Freshwater Units
The innovative RATIOfresh line of freshwater units for use with the RATIO buffer
cylinders is the modern and hygienic high-tech solution for domestic hot wa-
ter preparation. Hot water is produced by the hygienic ow-through principle
using an adaptive micro controller for optimal results. Only the water required is
heated on-demand and no drinking water storage is required. RATIOfresh units
are available in various sizes, ranging from single family home requirements to
scalable systems for large commercial and industrial applications.




1.3
201

Freshwater Unit for Higher Water Capacities
1.3
Figure 1 Freshwater Unit RATIOfresh 250/400
Product Characteristics Content

Hygienic hot water preparation with continuous-ow 1. Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
heater principle 2. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
High output with a tapping capacity of 25 and 40 l/min, 3. Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
respectively 4. Hydraulic Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 207
High solar yield thanks to very efcient stainless steel 5. Volume Flow and Temperature Specications . . 208
plate heat exchanger and low return ow temperatures 6. Controller RATIOfresh 250/400 . . . . . . . . 208
achieved through precise demand adjustment 7. Mounting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Incl. protection against legionella by thermal disinfec- 8. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
tion of the hot water and circulation pipe networks 9. Sample System Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . 210
With integrated circulation function
Suitable for mounting to wall or storage cylinder
Can be combined with all common heat sources in
connection with a buffer storage
Solar Thermal / Freshwater Units EN-XXX_RATIOfresh-250/400_TI-100106-1WA10059 203

1. Technical Data
Table 1 Technical Data
Features RATIOfresh 250 RATIOfresh 400
Order no. 150 300 65 150 300 66
Nominal tapping capacity
10C 45C (sec.)
60C (prim.) RATIOfresh 250 25 l/min 40 l/min
65C (prim.) RATIOfresh 400
Transmission capacity
10C 45C (sec.) 61 kW 98 kW
10C 60C (sec.) 87 kW 139 kW
Performance coefcient acc. to DIN 4708 T3:
NL = 13 NL = 19,5
10C 45C (sec.), 82C(prim.)
Performance coefcient for other temperature
conditions:
NL = 11 NL = 17
10C 60C (sec.), 75C (prim.)
NL = 7 NL = 11
10C 60C (sec.), 82C (prim.)
Hot water temperature setting range 25 - 70C
Circulation return temperature 5 - 70C
Pressure loss secondary ( p) < 370 mbar for 25 l/min < 490 mbar for 40 l/min
Max. operating temperature Primary 95C, secondary 95C
Max. operating pressure Primary 6 bar, secondary10 bar
Heat exchanger Copper welded stainless steel plate heat exchanger
1.1 l (primary side) / 1.6 l (primary side) /
Water volume of heat exchanger
1.2 l (secondary side) 1.7 l (secondary side)
Primary circuit pump Wilo ST 25/6, 3-steps, 43/61/82W
Controller RATIOfresh domestic water heating controller integrated in unit
4 x KTY
Temperature sensor
Buffer storage sensor with 3.5 m cable length (prolongable)
Sensor for volume ow Volume ow meter Qn 2.5 in cold water ow
Voltage 230 V / 50 Hz
Protection class (controller) IP 44
Max. power input (power consumption of pumps) 2 x 400 W
Power consumption during stand-by modus 0.6 W
Casing material Powder coated steel
Top: light grey RAL 7035
Colour
Bottom: black-grey RAL 7021
Weight 26 kg 28 kg
Dimensions (H x W x D) 940 x 350 x 181 mm
Wall mounting, storage cylinder mounting in connection with the buffer storage
Mounting options
series RATIO (except RATIO 300 G and RATIO 700 without heat exchanger)
Special Variation
For the operation in connection with down streamed galvanised tubes, our special version RATIOfresh Alfanova is
available. It comes without copper-soldered connections in the stainless steel plate heat exchanger.
Table 2 Technical Data RATIOfresh Alfanova 250 and 400

Features RATIOfresh Alfanova 250 RATIOfresh Alfanova 400
Order no. 150 301 77 150 301 78
Heat exchanger Welded stainless steel plate heat exchanger
For further technical data please refer to RATIOfresh 250 or 400.
204 EN-XXX_RATIOfresh-250/400_TI-100106-1WA10059
2. Dimensions
350
80
160
A
57
100
85
80
340
57
B
160
570
940
85 160
Figure 2 External dimensions RATIOfresh 250/400 in mm 1.3
EN-XXX_RATIOfresh-250/400_TI-100106-1WA10059 205
3. Functional Description
Basic Principle 4
The RATIOfresh 250/400 Freshwater Unit heats up dome- 10
stic water via the ow-through principle. When hot wa-
16 7
ter is drawn, the primary circuit pump (3) pumps heating
water from the buffer storage through the stainless steel 11 12
plate heat exchanger (2).
On the other side of the plate heat exchanger (secondary
circuit), the domestic water is heated up to the set tempe- 6
rature (adjustable at controller (1), factory-setting 50 C).
The now cooled heating water ows back to the lower
section of the buffer storage.
Output Regulation
9
With the assistance of temperature sensors in hot water
exit (12) and primary ow (16), the output of the primary
circuit pump is precisely matched to the tapping volume
2 8
ow.
The speed control of the primary circuit pump allows for
a constant tapping temperature and low primary return 13
ow temperatures. The latter helps to improve the tempe-
rature stratication within the buffer storage. 15
Protection against Legionella

The unit allows for thermal disinfection of the hot water
& Co
and circulation pipes with a programmable schedule. If

er
3
gn
Wa
required, aux. heating of the storage cylinder can be re-

quested via a potential-free relay, and then the pipe net-
work can be disinfected with hot water. 5
1
Operating in Stand-by Modus

The stand-by temperature keeping function allows for in-
stant hot water supply, also after long times without tap- 14
ping. This function can also be utilised as frost protection.
17
Switching, Primary Return Flow Figure 3 The most important components of the unit
For long circulation times (e. g. in apartment blocks) it may 1 RATIOfresh controller; 2 heat exchanger; 3 primary circuit
pump; 4 primary circuit ow with cut-off valve (1" male, at seal-
be energetically reasonable, to lead the return ow of the
ing); 5 primary circuit return ow with ball valve and integrated grav-
primary circuit into two different levels of the buffer. This ity brake (ret. ow stopper, 1" male, at sealing); 6 cold water inlet
can be easily realised in combination with a temperature- (1"male, at sealing); 7 hot water outlet (1" male, at sealing); 8 cir-
difference-controller and switching valves (see g.9). culation connection (" female); 9 vol. ow meter; 10 encasing bot-
tom; 11 heat exchanger insulation made from EPP; 12 temperature
sensor hot water outlet; 13 temperature sensor cold water / return
ow; 14 temperature sensor prim. circuit storage cylinder ow (buffer
storage sensor); 15 switch for pump speed level; 16 temperature
sensor, primary circuit ow; 17 mains plug
4. Hydraulic Characteristics
650
600
550
Max. pump speed level
500
Pressure loss / pump head in mbar
Medium pump speed level

450
400
Min. pump speed level
350
300
Pressure loss secondary side RF 250
250
200
150
100
Pressure loss primary side RF 250
50
1.3
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Volume ow primary- / secondary side in l/min

Figure 4 Pressure loss curves and pump characteristics RATIOfresh 250
650
600
Max. pump speed level
550
500
Pressure loss / pump head in mbar
450
400
Medium pump speed level
350
Min. pump speed level
300
250
200
150 Pressure loss primary side RF 400

Pressure loss secondary side RF 400
100
50
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
Volume ow primary / secondary side in l/min

Figure 5 Pressure loss curves and pump characteristics RATIOfresh 400
5. Volume Flow and Temperature Specications
Table 3 Volume Flow- and Temperature Specications of RATIOfresh 250 for Various Hot Water Temperatures
Hot water temperature Tapping volume ow Required temperature Required volume ow Return ow temperature
[C] [l/min] primary side [C] primary side [l/min] prim. circuit
50 13 23
45 10
60 8.1 16
50 21.9 26
45 15
60 12.8 18
60 23.4 22
45 25
70 17.3 18
65 14.5 30
60 10
75 9.4 21
65 24.9 34
60 15
75 15.1 24
75 28.2 29
60 25
80 24 26
Table 4 Volume Flow and Temperature Specications of RATIOfresh 400 for Various Hot Water Temperatures
Hot water temperature Tapping volume ow Required temperature Required volume ow Return ow temperature
[C] [l/min] primary side [C] primary side [l/min] prim. circuit
50 19.1 22
45 15
60 12.1 16
55 26.2 21
45 25
65 18.4 17
65 31.5 20
45 40
75 24.7 17
65 21.2 29
60 15
75 14 20
65 30.4 28
60 25
75 25.2 24
85 33.7 24
60 40
90 30.4 22
6. Controller RATIOfresh 250/400

Controller for domestic hot water preparation with pre-
cise output adjustment
Protection against legionella
Temperature keeping (standby function) for fast hot
water supply
Integrated circulation control
Illuminated display and intuitive menu navigation in 5
languages
Serial interface RS 232 for data readout
Frost protection
For further information please see Operating Manual
Controller RATIOfresh 250/400
Figure 6 Fresh water controller RATIOfresh 250/400
7. Mounting Options 8. Accessories
Wall mounting Table 5 Accessories RATIOfresh 250/400
Mounting to storage cylinder (see g. 7) in connection
Item Order no.
with all types of RATIO buffer tanks, except RATIO 300
G and RATIO 700 (version without heat exchanger) Storage cylinder extension set 139 000 28
Combi tting set 1"-22 mm
819 100 87
for tube connection
3-way-valve 1" for return ow switch 160 101 44
Figure 8 Storage cylinder mounting kit
1.3
Figure 7 Storage cylinder mounting of RATIOfresh 250/400 (with re-

moved top cover) in combination with RATIO buffer storage
Figure 9 Two and three way switching valves
Figure 10 Combi tting 1"
9. Sample System Solutions
P1: Solar circuit pump SUNGO SXL, system 1241

P2: Boiler circuit pump Collector area
Outputs
Inputs
P4: Pump RATIOfresh primary circuit
P5: Circulation pump, hot water

WEZ: Heat generator request (if required via relay)
Vm: Thermal mixing valve for keeping

a min. return flow temperature
Circulation
Cold water
Hot water
Figure 11 System solution with RATIOfresh 250/400, RATIO buffer storage, pellet boiler, mixed heating circuit and solar installation. The pellet
boiler prots partially from the buffer volume for optimising its operating characteristics. During the summer half of the year, the solar installation
meets the hot water demand almost completely and additionally provides space heating support in spring and fall.
P1: Solar circuit pump SUNGO SXL, system 1211

P2: Boiler circuit pump Collector area
Outputs
Inputs
P3: Pump gas boiler

P6: Circulation pump hot water

V1: 3-way-switching valve, return flow boost
V2: Thermal mixing valve for keeping
a min. return flow temperature
V3: Unit internal switching valve, hot water preparation
HW: Hydraulic switch
Circulation
Cold water
Hot water
Figure 12 System solution with RATIOfresh 250/400, RATIO buffer storage, gas boiler, re place with water pockets, mixed heating circuit and
solar installation. Both, open re place and solar installation, can load the buffer storage. The buffer storage heat is supplied to the heating circuit
via return ow boost.

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
INSTALLATION AND OPERATIONS MANUAL

Freshwater Unit for Higher Water Demands
1.3
sh
fre
TIO
RA
Figure 1 Freshwater unit RATIOfresh 250/400
Content
1. Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 3. Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
2. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 3.1 Pump Speed Selection . . . . . . . . . . . 219
2.1 Pre Installation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 3.2 Filling the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
2.2 Correct Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 3.3 Adjusting Controller to Tapping Volume . . . . 222
2.3 Integration into the Hydraulic System . . . . . 214 4. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
2.4 Wall Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 5. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
2.5 Tank Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 5.1 General Recommendations . . . . . . . . . 224
2.6 Primary Circuit Connections . . . . . . . . . 216 5.2 Decalcication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
2.7 Domestic Water Circuit Connections . . . . . 217 5.3 Removing the Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . 225
2.8 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 6. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
2.9 Connecting the Circulation Pump . . . . . . . 218
Solar Thermal / Freshwater Units EN-XXX_RATIOfresh-250-400_MA-BA-100225-1WA10060 211

1. Safety Instructions
1.1 Symbols
DANGER possibility of personal injury
CAUTION possibility of property damage
NOTE important additional information
Figure 2 Install unit in dry and frost free location

1.2 Norms and Standards
Observe current national and regional codes and stand-
ards at installation location. In absence of such rules we Zn
WW
recommend to follow:
IEC 364 or CENELEC HD 384, DIN VDE 0100 and IEC-
Report 664, DIN VDE 0110 and national accident pre-
vention rules and regulations, as well as VDE 0100,
VDE 0160 (EN 50178), VDE 0113 (EN 60204), and local KW
rules and specications of your energy provider or util-
ity company.
Potential equalisation according to VDE 0100-540 part
5-54 Selection and construction earthing, earthed
lead wires and potential equalisation and VDE 0190.
RATIOfresh
1.3 User Qualication

Installation, commissioning, maintenance and reparation Figure 3 Do not use any galvanized pipes downstream, except in
must be realised from authorized specialists. combination with RATIOfresh Alfanova 250 and 400.
1.4 Intended Use

The purpose of the unit is to heat domestic water for pri- SV
vate and commercial applications in combination with KW
buffer storages. For buffer storage temperatures above
60 C, the concentration of chloride within the domestic
water should be limited (see table 1).
Table 1 Maximimum Chloride in Domestic Water

Storage temperature Chloride SV
KW
< 60 C No limit
up to 90 C < 150 ppm
Figure 4 No cut-off valves between safety valve and unit
1.5 Recycling Notes

materials of the installation should be recycled in an en-
212 EN-XXX_RATIOfresh-250-400_MA-BA-100225-1WA10060
2. Installation
2.1 Pre Installation Notes 2.2 Handling
Installation of a safety group is required for the cold 20
water inlet (see g. 13).
For cold water pressure > 10 bar install pressure re-
ducer. 18
Pipeworks in primary circuit (storage-unit) should be as
short as possible.
For domestic water with hardness > 10 dH (7.98 e)
install rinsing valves. (see g. 12).
Unnecessarily high water temperatures increase the 10
energy consumption
For apartments please observe protection against le-
gionella according to DVGW W551 or your local stand-
ards and codes!
Make existing storage pressure-less and empty (see
g.5).
22
1.3
22
21
Figure 6 Correctly attach casing cover:

18 cover; 10 lower aprt of encasing; 20 connecting bar; 21 safety
plug; 22 safety sockets
Figure 5 Make existing storage pressure less and rain
EN-XXX_RATIOfresh-250-400_MA-BA-100225-1WA10060 213
2.3 Integration into the Hydraulic System
Figure 7 Overview hydraulic connection

WW hot water; KW cold water; P1 pump, primary circuit; P2 circulation pump (optional); E bleeder (if required by piping layout); SG safety
group; KFE rinsing valve; 1 RATIOfresh hot water sensor; 2 RATIOfresh cold water inlet sensor; 3 RATIOfresh storage sensor; 4 RATIOfresh
primary circuit ow sensor; 9 RATIOfresh volume ow sensor
2.4 Wall Mounting 2.5 Tank Mounting
With special tank mounting kit for RATIO buffer storage
350 tanks (except RATIO 300 G and RATIO 700 without heat
80 exchanger).
For some storage cylinder types the included corru-
gated tubes must be shortened.
100
340
26
570
940
27
31 30
28
85 160
Figure 8 Dimensions RATIOfresh 250 and 400 1.3
24
23
29
25
254
10
Figure 10 Storage mounting

26 RATIO buffer storage; 27 third connection from top (for RATIO
23 1000 G2 fth connection from top); 28 mounting bracket; 29 at
swivel nut"; 30 Hexagonal bolts; 31 mounting plate
827
Figure 9 Wall mounting with screws

10 lower part of encasing; 23 xing screw; 24 groove for x-
ing; 25 dowel
2.6 Primary Circuit Connections
14
26
36
35
34 32
33
H=max
Figure 11 Connection to primary circuit

14 RATIOfresh storage sensor; 26 RATIO buffer storage; 32 sensor connection bar; 33 at sealing; 34 combi connection 1"-22 mm; 35 swiv-
el nut 1"M 36 bleeder (if required by piping)
The temperature sensor (14) should measure the ow

temperature of the unit as precisely as possible. It must
therefore be set to the highest position (32) of the sen-
sor connection strip. When using a storage from anoth-
er manufacturer use soft foam tape to attach the sensor
to the cylinder wall; assure good surface contact.
Carry out connections at sealing.
Install bleeder (36) if required.
The primary circuit must be hydraulically separated
from other pumps! Multiple congurations of ow and
return ow therefore are not possible.
Keep pipe lengths in primary circuit short to avoid heat
loss and time lags. Besides that high pressure loss can
result in reduced performance.
2.7 Domestic Water Circuit Connections
44
39
38
35
34
33
KW
40
41
1.3
42
Wag
ne
r&
Co
43
Figure 12 Connection to domestic water circuit

33 at gasket; 34 combi connection 1"-22; 35 swivel nut 1"; 38 rinsing valve (if rinsing of heat exchanger is intended); 39 cut off valve; 40 safety
group; 41 " plug for circulation connection; 42 optional circulation pump; 43 non-return valve (if circulation pump is used); 44 hot water tap
Observe applicable codes, standards as well as the

regulations of the local water utility companies.
Carry out connections at sealing, except circulation
connection.
Recommendation: install rinsing tabs, especially when
water hardness > 10 dH (7.98 e).
Do not install shut off valves between safety group and
unit (see g. 4)!
2.8 Controller
Only use the original pump as the primary circuit pump!
As circulation pump use a common speed controlled wet
runner. Don't use a pump with integrated motor protec-
tion or electronic on-off mechanism or controller! The cir-
culation pump must not have its own time or temperature
controller!
For information about thermal disinfection and con-
trol of the auxiliary heating function of the boiler refer
to Mounting and Operating instructions Freshwater
Controller RATIOfresh 250/400.
2.9 Connecting the Circulation Pump

Cut mains connection!
Figure 13 Loosen Phillips screws and remove controller cover
Figure 14 Thread cables of the circulation pumps through a free lead

(open screw of lead) and attach to the connection bar (8 see Mount-
ing and Operating Instructions Freshwater Controller RATIOfresh
250/400).
3. Commissioning
3.1 Pump Speed Selection
To arrive at optimal tapping characteristics and provide
sufcient tapping volume ows, the pump must be set to
the correct speed. It can be determined using the follow-
ing tables. You can nd the hydraulic curves of the unit in
the Technical Information RATIOfresh 250/400
15
1.3
Figure 15 Speed selector 15 for the primary circuit pump
Table 2 Pump Settings RATIOfresh 250 for 45 C or 60 C Tapping Temperature against Tapping Volume Flow,
Primary Side Volume Flow and Primary Side Temperatures
Hot water temperature Tapping volume ow Required temperature prim. side Required volume ow prim. side Required
[C] [l/min] [ C] [l/min] pump speed
50 13 min
45 10
60 8.1 min
50 21.9 med
45 15
60 12.8 min
60 23.4 med
45 25
70 17.3 min
65 14.5 min
60 10
75 9.4 min
65 24.9 max
60 15
75 15.1 min
75 28.2 max
60 25
80 24 med
Table 3 Pump Settings RATIOfresh 400 for 45 C or 60 C against Tapping Volume Flow,
Primary Side Volume Flow and Primary Side Temperatures
Hot water temperature Tapping volume ow Required temperature prim. side Required volume ow prim. side Required
[ C] [l/min] [ C] [l/min] pump speed
50 19.1 min
45 15
60 12.1 min
55 26.2 max
45 25
65 18.4 min
65 31.5 max
45 40
75 24.7 med
65 21.2 med
60 15
75 14 min
65 30.4 max
60 25
75 25.2 med
85 33.7 max
60 40
90 30.4 max
3.2 Filling the System

First check all connections. Then follow the steps below:
Z Z
A A
Figure 17 Functional positions of the gravity brake (non return valve).

Observe black mark next to the screw slot.
Gravity brake operational = Z;
gravity brake open/not operational = A
37
Figure 16 Open ball valve 5 and gravity brake (non return valve) 37.
Figure 18 Filling and venting storage tank Figure 19 Possibly also vent the primary circuit
WW
WW
CW
CW
1.3
Figure 20 Vent Secondary or domestic water circuit, respectively Figure 21 Vent circulation pipe (if in place), hereunto open non return
valve.
Tprim
Figure 22 Vent primary circuit pump when in operation Figure 23 Heat storage tank to the temperature required on the pri-
mary side (see table 2 and 3)
Figure 24 Commence commissioning at the controller (see Mount-
ing and Operation Instructions Freshwater Controller RATIOfresh
250/400)
3.3 Adjusting the Controller to the

Tapping Volumes
Carry out a one-time adjustment of the controller to the
hydraulic conditions of the location. The maximum tapping WW Zirk. NH Des.
volume depends on the unit type and is divided into 11
tapping slots, where an adaptive value is assigned to every 1
tapping slot. The latter can either be entered manually
or they can be determined by the controller by means of Adapt. Value 0
controlled tapping. Here the number of the adaptive value 14C 00 [07]
must always match with the number of the tapping slot. At
2 3 4
least for 3 tapping slots controlled tapping must be car-
ried out. Follow the steps below based upon the operation
instructions Freshwater Controller RATIOfresh 250/400
Set hot water target temperature

Adjust circulation settings
Select Menu Settings Service Figure 25 Display values in Menue Adaptive Values:
Enter service code 008 1 number of adaptive values; 2 hotwater exit values; 3 number of
tapping time slot; 4 determined or set adaptive value
Select menu Adaptive Values
WW Zirk. NH Des. WW Zirk. NH Des.
Adapt. Value 0 Adapt. Value 1

14C 00 [07] 14C 00 [07]
Figure 26 When no tapping occurrs tapping slot 00 and adaptive Figure 27 The number of the adaptive values can be selected using
value no. 0 are displayed. the arrow keys.
WW Zirk. NH Des. WW Zirk. NH Des.
Adapt. Value 2 Adapt. Value 4

46C 02 [x] 46C 04 [x]
Figure 25 Choose no. 2 of the adaptive values. Open hot water tap Figure 29 Repeat action for tapping slot 04
until tapping time slot 2 and the target water temperature are reached
(to approx. plus-minus 1 C). The controller then automatically deter-
mines an appropriate adaptive value (shown as X).
Adapt. Value 0
46C 00 [07]
1.3
WW Zirk. NH Des.
Adapt. Value 1
Adapt. Value 6 46C 01 [10]
46C 06 [x]
Adapt. Value 2
46C 02 [13]
Figure 30 Repeat action for tapping window 06 Figure 31 Enter adaptive values for tapping time slots 01, 03 and 05
manually (here shown for slot 01 as an example), or determine values
by additional controlled tappings.
WW
WW Zirk. NH Des. T = okay?
CW
Adapt. Value 7
46C 07 [x]
Figure 32 Manually enter adaptive values for additional tapping slots. Figure 33 Carry out nal functional test
They must follow an ascending order. The factory settings might pos-
sibly sufce.
4. Operation 5.2 Decalcication
The freshwater unit usually does not require any attention. Signs of Possible Scaling:
Please still observe the following points: Return temperature in primary circuit is too high
Observe messages shown on the controller display Considerably reduced maximum tapping volume
(see controller instructions) Hot water target temperature cannot be reached any-
The set hot water temperature can be changed in the more for high tapping columes
controller menu settings (see controller instructions).
All values are saved in case of power failure. Procedure:
Vacation or longer time of absence: to save electricity Cut off mains connection
simply cut off the unit from the mains connection. Make domestic water pipe (secondary side) pressure
The unit should be regularly checked and maintained less and drain. Hereunto close cut off valve of safety
by a qualied technician. group (40) and cut off valve (39).
In case of defects or malfunctions inform a qualied Connect decalcication unit or rinsing pump (45) to
technician. rinsing valves (38).
Pump cleansing liquid through the circuit
Observe instructions of cleaning liquid manufacturer
5. Maintenance If no rinsing valves are installed, the heat exchanger
should be taken out for cleaning
5.1 General Recommendations Only utilize cleaning liquids approved for use with
drinking water supply systems!
Maintenance interval: annually Neutralise according to instruction
Cut off mains before commencing
Check unit for leaks (threaded and soldered connec-
tions) 39
Check for scaling
40
38
44
Co
r&
ne
Wag
45
Figure 34 Connection of a decalcication unit

2 heat exchanger; 32 cold water rinsing valve; 39 cut off
valve; 40 safety group; 44 cleansing liquid; 45 rinsing pump
5.3 Removing the Heat Exchanger
If no rinsing valves are present the heat exchanger must
be removed.
Procedure: 48
Cut off mains
Make domestic water pipe (secondary side) pressure
46
less and drain.
Cut off primary side and drain. Hereunto close cut off 2
valve (48) and ball valve (5). 47
Loosen swivel nut (46) and drain heat exchanger (2).
To dissassemble heat exchanger, loosen all 4 swivel
nuts (46 and 47)
1.3
10-10
47
Figure 35 Removing heat exchanger

2 heat exchanger; 5 ball valve; 46 swivel nut, primary side; 47 swiv-
el nut, secondary side; 48 cut off
6. Trouble Shooting
Table 4 Trouble Shooting
Problem Possible Cause Action
Cut off valve in cold water feed partly closed Open cut off valve in feed
Tapping volume (hot water)
Heat exchanger scaled Decalcify heat exchanger (see chap. 5.2)
too low
Sifter in cold water feed clogged Clean sifter
Cut off valves in cold water feed or hot water
No hot water output Open valves
pipe closed
Check power lines and fuses, check if controller
Power failure or RATIOfresh without power
display light is on
Buffer storage is cold Check auxiliary heating
Water is not heated Primary circuit pump P1 defunct Check pump in manual operation
Air in primary circuit Vent primary circuit, e.g. at the storage
Check operability, e.g. by acoustic checking of the
Single jet meter does not recognize tapping
impulse exit with a multimeter
Hot water target temperature set incorreclty Increase hot water target temperature
Air in primary circuit Vent primary circuit, e.g. at the storage
Hot water temperature Increase aux. heating temperature at aux. heating
Aux. heating temperature too low
too low device (boiler, electric heater etc.)
Wrong pump speed setting Check pump speed against values in tables 2 and 3.
Controler not yet adapted Carry out controlled tapping (see cap. 3.3)
Target temperature set incorrectly Adjust target temperature
Set pump mode to Auto (seeMounting and
Wrong oump mode set at primary circuit
operation instructions Freshwater Controller
pump P1
RATIOfresh 250/400)
Hot water temperature Set operation to Auto (seeMounting and operation

Wrong setting of disinfection operational
to high instructions Freshwater Controller RATIOfresh
modet
250/400)
Controller not yet adapted Carry out controlled tapping (see cap. 3.3)
Vertical convection in primary circuit Check gravity brake (non return valve) and piping
Air in circulation circuit Vent circulation circuit
Circulation circuit Circulation pump does not open gravity Use gravity brake (non return valve) with lower
does not warm up brake (non return valve) opening pressure or use stronger circulation pump.
Circulation pump defunct Replace pump
Controller not yet adapted Carry out controlled tapping (see cap. 3.3)
Hot water temperature
uctuates
Defunct tap Replace tap
Air in circulation circuit Vent circulation circuit
Check circulation times (seeMounting and operation
Wrong setting of circulation instructions Freshwater Controller RATIOfresh
Hot water temperature takes long 250/400)
time to reach desired value Check aux. heating, increase aux. heating
No circulation and standby function because
temperature and therefore (indirectly) also the
primary circuit temperature too lown
primary circuit temperature
Circulation pump defunct Replace pump
Check disinfection temperature at the controller, start
disinfection manually. LED turns off when disinfection
Red LED is on Disinfection temperature not reached
was successfull, power is cut, or the disinfection
mode is set to off.
Error Display Controller seeMounting and operation instructions Freshwater Controller RATIOfresh 250/400

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596

Fresh Water Station with Solar Controller
1.3
Figure 1 Fresh water station RATIOfresh 200
Product Characteristics Content

Hygienic hot water preparation with a tapping output 1. Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
of up to 20 l/min 2. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Just one controller for domestic water heating and solar 3. Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
installation 4. Hydraulic Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 229
High solar yields due to a very efcient stainless steel 5. Controller RATIOfresh 200 . . . . . . . . . . 231
plate heat exchanger and low return ow temperatures 6. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
thanks to precise demand adjustment 7. System Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Prepared for circulation operation
Easy installation and maintenance
Can be combined with all common heat sources in con-
nection with a buffer storage
Low power consumption thanks to efcient circulation
pump
Solar Thermal / Freshwater Units EN-XXX_RATIOfresh-200_TI-091006-1WA10013 227

1. Technical Data
Table 1 Technical data
Features RATIOfresh 200
Part no. 150 303 39
Nominal tapping capacity
10 C 45 C (sec.) 55 C (prim.) 20 l/min
10 C 60 C (sec.) with addition of 27 l/min
cold water up to 45 C, 70 C (prim.)
Transmission capacity
10 C 45 C (sec.) 49 kW
10 C 60 C (sec.) 70 kW
Performance number acc. to DIN 4708 T3
10 C 60 C (sec.) with the addition of NL = 4
cold water up to 45 C, 82 C (prim.)
10 C 45 C (sec.), 55 C (prim.) NL = 2
Adjustable hot water temperature 20 - 60 C
Circulation return Nominal temperature hot water 5 K
Pressure loss secondary ( p) < 470 mbar for 20 l/min
Max. operating temperature Prim. 95 C, sec. 70 C
Max. operating pressure Prim. 6 bar, sec. 10 bar
Heat exchanger Copper soldered plate heat exchanger made from stainless steel
Water volume capacity 0.87 l (prim.) / 0.93 l (sec.)
Cover and rear insulation shell EPP (expande polypropylene)
Prim. circuit pump Wilo ST 15/6 ECO-1 / 1-step / max. 63 W
Integrated in station: RATIOfresh 200 controller for domestic water heating and
Controller
solar installation. Incl. circulation control and 6 choosable solar systems.
Temperature sensors 2 x Pt1000 installed, within ow; 1 x Pt 1000 for attachment on storage
Sensor for Combined sensor VFS within hot water outlet for
volume ow and temperature -measurements volume ow and temperature -measurements
Voltage 230 V / 50 Hz
Protection class IP 20
Power rating in standby 2.1 - 3.9 W
Weight 12 kg
Dimensions (W x H x D) 356 x 593 x 236 mm
2. Dimensions
Figure 2 Outside dimensions in mm
228 EN-XXX_RATIOfresh-200_TI-091006-1WA10013
3. Functional Description
The RATIOfresh 200 fresh water station heats up domes-
tic water via the ow-through principle. When hot water is 8
drawn, the primary circuit pump (3) pumps heating water 7
from the buffer storage through the stainless steel plate
heat exchanger (2).
9 1
On the other side of the plate heat exchanger (secondary
side) the domestic water is heated up to the set tempera- 5
ture (adjustable at controller (1), pre-setting: 45 C). The 6
now cooled heating water ows back to the lower section
of the buffer storage.
The output of the primary circuit pump is precisely calcu-
lated to match the volume ow resulting from the drawn
quantity. This is achieved with the combined sensor for
ow and temperature (6), the temperature sensors in the
cold water feed (5) and in the primary ow (not in g.!). 2
The precise speed control of the primary circuit pump al-
lows for a constant tapping temperature as well as very low
primary return ow temperatures. Therefore the tempera- 3
ture stratication within the buffer storage is preserved.
4
Figure 3 The main components of the station

1 RATIOfresh controller; 2 heat exchanger; 3 pump, primary cir-
cuit; 4 ball valve, primary circuit return ow " male at sealing incl.
gravity brake (ret. ow stopper); 5 temperature sensor cold water
1.3
feed; 6 combined sensor VFS (vol. ow and temperature) in hot water
leg; 7 hot water outlet " male at sealing; 8 ow primary circuit "
male at sealing; 9 cold water feed " male at sealing
4. Hydraulic Characteristics
600
Characteristics primary circuit pump

500
Pressure loss and pump head in mbar
400
Remaining pump head
300
Pressure loss secondary side

200
100
Pressure loss primary side
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
Volume ow, primary side in l/min

Figure 4 Pressure loss graph and pump characteristics RATIOfresh 200
EN-XXX_RATIOfresh-200_TI-091006-1WA10013 229
40 40
65C
Primary return ow temperature in C

35 35
70C
30 30
50C
75C
25 25
55C
85C
20 60C 20
70C 90C
15 80C 15
90C
10 10
5 5
0 0
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Tapping volume ow in l/min Tapping volume ow in l/min
Figure 5 Prim. return ow temperatures for domestic water heating Figure 6 Prim. return ow temperatures for domestic water heating
from 10 C up to 45 C and ow temperatures from 50 C up to 90 C from 10 C up to 60 C and ow temperatures from 65 C up to 90 C
30 30
50C 65C
25
Req. prim. volume ow in l/min 25 70C
55C
20
75C
20
60C
15 15 85C
70C
90C
80C
10 10
90C
5 5
0 0
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Tapping volume ow in l/min Tapping volume ow in l/min
Figure 7 Required prim. volume ow for domestic water heating from Figure 8 Required prim. volume ow for domestic water heating from
10 C up to 45 C and ow temperatures from 50 C up to 90 C 10 C up to 60 C and ow temperatures from 65 C up to 90 C
5. Controller RATIOfresh 200
Combined controller for domestic hot water prepara-
tion and solar installations
9 temperature inputs, 1 pulse input, 1 voltage input
(combined sensor VFS), 6 switching outputs
Integrated controller function for circulation operation
Optional: Data-stick for saving and displaying meas-
ured data and for software updates
Illuminated display with pictograms and plain text
Operation with common 230 V wet running pumps or
high efciency pumps (ECM-technology) of type Wilo
Stratos ECO possible
For further information please refer to the installation
and instruction manual Freshwater Controller RATIOf-
resh 200 Figure 9 Freshwater and solar controller RATIOfresh 200
6. Accessories
Table 2 Accessories RATIOfresh 200
Item Part no. 1.3
Temperature sensor Pt1000 150 400 39
Combined connection set "-18 mm
819 100 89
for pipe connection
Data logging set
150 400 39
for data recording of the regulation
Sensor set, incl.:
Figure 10 Combi-tting and temperature sensor Pt1000
4 x temperature sensors Pt1000, 150 400 56
6 mm plug-in sensor
with 2.5 m silicone cable (-50 C ... +180 C)
Heat meter set 0.6 m/h
150 400 30
incl. immersion sleeve and sensor Pt1000
150 400 35
150 400 36
Figure 11 Data logging set
Figure 12 Heat meter set
P1: Solar circuit pump RATIOfresh 200, system 1261

Outputs
Inputs
P3: Pump RATIOfresh primary circuit Collector area
Vr: 3-way-switching-valve,
return flow increase
VFS: Combined sensor VFS

HW: Hydraulic switch
RV: Backflow preventer
Hot water
Cold water
Circulation
Figure 13 System solution with RATIO buffer storage and RATIOfresh 200 freshwater station in connection with a gas boiler and a low tempera-
ture heating circuit. Solar energy for room-heating is implemented via return ow boost of the heating circuit.

P2: Pump boiler circuit, solid fuel furnace
Outputs
Inputs

P4: Pump RATIOfresh, primary circuit Collector area
Vu: 3-way-switching-valve, storage switching

Hot water
Cold water
Circulation
Solid fuel
furnace
Figure 14 System solution as a heating-buffer-system incl. RATIOfresh 200 freshwater station and 2 RATIO buffer storages in connection with a
solid wood furnace and a low temperature heating circuit. Boiler as well as solar installation can load both storages.
P1: Solar circuit pump, primary RATIOfresh 200, system 1263 Collector
P2: Solar circuit pump, secondary
Collector area 1 area 2
P3: Pump boiler circuit, solid fuel furnace
Outputs
Inputs
Vr: 3-way-switching-valve return flow increase

Vk1/2: 2-way-valve, collector area 1/2

Tpo: Temperature sensor buffer top, heating
Tpu: Temperature sensor buffer bottom, heating
Hot water
Cold water
Circulation
Oil or gas
boiler
1.3
Figure 15 System solution with oil or gas central heating, fresh water station RATIOfresh 200, a low temperature heating circuit and 2 differently
oriented collector areas. Solar energy for space-heating implemented via return ow boost of the heating circuit.

P2: Heating circuit pump Collector area
Outputs
Inputs
P3: Pump aux. heating, domestic water

Vr: 3-way-switching-valve, return flow increase

Vk1/2: 2-way-valve collector area 1/2
Hot water
Cold water
Circulation
Solid fuel
furnace
Figure 16 System solution as a heating-buffer-system with fresh water station RATIOfresh 200 and a buffer storage RATIO in combination with
a solid wood furnace and a low temperature heating circuit. The buffer storage is loaded with solar energy via an external plate heat exchanger.
INSTALLATION AND OPERATIONS MANUAL

Freshwater Unit with Solar Controller
1.3
Figure 1 Freshwater unit RATIOfresh 200
Content
1. Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
2. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
2.1 Pre Installation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
2.2 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
2.3 Integration into the Hydraulic System . . . . . 238
2.4 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
2.5 Primary Circuit Connections . . . . . . . . . 240
2.6 Domestic Water Circuit Connections . . . . . 241
2.7 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
3. Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
4. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
5. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Solar Thermal / Freshwater Units EN-XXX_RATIOfresh-200_MA-BA-091006-11218M00 235

1. Safety Instructions
1.1 Symbols
DANGER possibility of personal injury
CAUTION possibility of property damage
NOTE important additional information
1.2 Norms and Standards Figure 2 Mount unit in a dry and frost-protected room
Observe current national and regional standards and reg-

ulations at installation location. In absence of such rules we
recommend to follow:
IEC 364 or CENELEC HD 384, DIN VDE 0100 and IEC- Zn
WW
Report 664, DIN VDE 0110 and national accident pre-
vention rules and regulations, as well as VDE 0160 (EN KW
50178), VDE 0113 (EN 60204), and local rules and spec-
ications of your energy provider or utility company.
Potential equalisation according to VDE 0100-540 part
5-54 Selection and construction earthing, earthed
lead wires and potential equalisation and VDE 0190
1.3 User Qualication

Installation, commissioning, maintenance and reparation
must be realised from authorized specialists.
Figure 3 Do not use any galvanised pipes downstream

1.4 Recycling Notes
materials of the installation should be recycled in an en-
SV
Wagner & Co will take the scrap material back. KW
1.5 Intended Use

SV
The purpose of the unit is to heat domestic water for
private and commercial applications. For buffer storage KW
temperatures above 60C, the concentration of chloride
within the domestic water should be limited (see table 1).
Table 1 Max. Chloride Percentage, Domestic Water

Storage temperature Chloride percentage
< 60C No limit
Up to 90C < 150 ppm
Figure 4 No shutoff between safety valve and unit
236 EN-XXX_RATIOfresh-200_MA-BA-091006-11218M00
2. Installation
Installation of a safety group is required for the cold wa-
ter inlet (see g. 13).
For cold water pressure > 10 bar install pressure re-
ducer.
Pipeworks in primary circuit (storage-unit) should be as
short as possible.
Pipe diameter, primary circuit:
18 mm for total length < 6 m
22 mm for total length < 10 m
Tapping output decreases for increasing pipe lengths.
For domestic water with hardness > 10 dH (7.98 e)
install rinsing valves. (see g. 13).
For apartments please observe protection against le-
gionella according to DVGW W551!
Make possibly existing storage pressure-less and empty
(see g. 5). Figure 5 Make existing storage pressure less and then drain
2.2 Handling
1.3
Figure 6 Remove cover shell: reach into the grooves on the sides and Figure 7 Dont hold and carry unit at cover shell. Use heat exchanger
detach from back. Then pull off forwards. as handle instead.
EN-XXX_RATIOfresh-200_MA-BA-091006-11218M00 237
2.3 Integration into the Hydraulic System
Figure 8 Overview hydraulic connection

WW hot water; KW cold water; P1 pump, primary circuit; P2 circulation pump (optional); E ventilation (if required by piping layout); SG safety
group; KFE rinsing valve; T3 RATIOfresh 200 storage sensor; T8 RATIOfresh 200 primary circuit ow sensor; T9 RATIOfresh 200 cold water
inlet sensor; VFS combined sensor VFS (temperature and volume ow)
2.4 Wall Mounting
380
283
Figure 9 Installation at eye level Figure 10 Drilling distances and screw fastening
1.3
53
140 70
Figure 11 Pipe separation distances and distance of the pipes to the

wall
2.5 Primary Circuit Connections
Figure 12 Integration into the primary circuit

1 at gasket; 2 combi-tting "-18 mm; 3 swivel nut "; 4 ventilation (if required by piping layout); 5 buffer storage; 6 RATIOfresh 200 stor-
age sensor T3
Table 2 Sensor Positioning (mm) for Various RATIO Buffer Storage Cylinders
Cylinder RATIO HP 500 Cylinder RATIO HP 800 RATIO HP 1000
T2* 375 401 401
T3 1590 1540 1925
*T2 is the sensor for solar loading
Carry out connections at sealing The primary circuit must be hydraulically separated
If required install bleeder (4) from other pumps!
Storage sensor (6) must measure the max. storage tem- If applicable mount further sensors at storage for solar
peratures. For RATIO buffer cylinders please install ac- controller. Therefore please carefully observe the in-
cording to table 2. stallation and operating manual Freshwater Controller
RATIOfresh 200
2.6 Domestic Water Circuit Connections
10
11 3
12
1.3
KW
Figure 13 Connection within domestic water circuit

1 at gasket; 2 combi-tting "-18 mm; 3 swivel nut "; 7 rinsing valve (if rinsing of heat exchanger is intended); 8 cut-off valve; 9 safety
group; 10 optional circulation pump; 11 non-return valve (eventually integrated in circulation pump); 12 hot water tap
Carry out connections at sealing

Integrate circulation return ow as close to the unit as
possible.
Operate circulation pump with RATIOfresh 200 control-
ler (connection see installation and operating manual
Freshwater Controller RATIOfresh 200).
2.7 Controller
In addition to the freshwater function, the RATIOfresh
200-controller can also control 5 different solar installation
variants and various special functions.
Number and positions of sensors and connection dia-
grams can be found in the installation and operating man-
ual Freshwater Controller RATIOfresh 200, as well as in
chapter2.5 Primary Circuit Connections.
Figure 14 Wiring in cable ducts of the back side Figure 15 Leave groove in side of shell for wiring
3. Commissioning
First check all connections. Then carry out the following
steps:
Figure 16 Open all ball valves Figure 17 Fill storage and bleed
Figure 18 Possibly bleed primary circuit piping separately Figure 19 Bleed primary circuit of unit
HW
HW
CW
1.3
CW
Figure 20 Bleed secondary / domestic water circuit Figure 21 Bleed circulation pipe leg (if existing). If required open non-
return valve.
60C
Figure 22 Heat storage up to 60C Figure 23 Carry out commissioning at controller. See operating man-
ual of controller RATIOfresh 200.
HW
T=okay? CW
Figure 24 Vent primary circuit pump during operation. Figure 25 Make a nal functional check
4. Operation
The freshwater unit usually does not require any attention.
Please still observe the following points:
Observe messages shown on the controller display (see
controller instructions)
The set hot water temperature can be changed in the
controller menu set (see controller instructions)
Selecting lower hot water and/or aux. heating tempera-
tures for the buffer storage reduces the energy demand
and increases the solar yield.
Please inform technical staff about damages and / or
failures
The installation should be subjected to regular mainte-
nance intervals.
5. Maintenance
5.1 General Advice
Maintenance interval: annually
Cut mains connection before commencing mainte-
nance
Check installation for leaks
Check unit for scaling (see chapter 5.2)
5.2 Decalcication
Indications of Possible Scaling: Procedure:
Return ow temperature within primary circuit too high Cut mains connection
Signicantly reduced hot water tapping output Domestic water pipe must be without pressure
Nominal hot water temperature is not reached for high Empty domestic water / secondary side of plate heat
tapping volumes exchanger
For this, shut off safety group (9) and close cut-off valve
(8)
Connect decalcication unit or rinsing pump (13) via
7
the rinsing valves (7)
Pump cleansing liquid through the circuit
Observe instructions of cleansing liquid manufacturer
8 If no rinsing valves are installed, the heat exchanger
should be taken out for cleaning
Utilise only DVGW-approved cleansing liquids (ap- 1.3
proved for use with drinking water supply systems)
Neutralise according to instruction
14
13
Figure 26 Installation of a decalcication unit

7 rinsing valve; 8 on-return valve; 9 safety group;
13 rinsing pump; 14 cleansing liquid
6. Troubleshooting
Table 3 Troubleshooting
Failure Cause Troubleshooting
Shut-off valves in cold water supply partially
Shut-off valves must be opened
closed
Tap volume ow (hot water) too low
Heat exchanger scaled Decalcify heat exchanger (see chapter 5.2)
Filter in cold water supply blocked Clean lter
Closed shut-off valves within cold or hot
Hot water does not ow Open shut-off valves
water pipe
Mains failure or RATIOfresh200 without Power supply lines and fuses; check if
power controller display lights up
No heating of cold water possible Cold buffer storage Check aux. heating
Defunct primary circuit pump P1 Check pump in manual operation
Air in primary circuit Bleed primary circuit, e.g. at storage
Hot water temperature set incorrectly Adjust hot water temperature setting
Air in primary circuit Bleed primary circuit, e.g. at storage tank
Hot water temperature too low
Increase aux. heating temperature at heat
Aux. heating temperature to low
source (boiler, furnace, electric heater)
Hot water temperature too high Hot water temperature set incorrectly Adjust hot water temperature setting
Hot water temperature reaches set value Circulation set incorrectly Check controller settings
only after a long tapping time Circulation pump damaged Replace circulation pump
Error displayed at controller see installation and operating manual Freshwater Controller RATIOfresh 200

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
Solar Circuit Components and Accessories
If solar installations were living beings, our SUNGO series solar controllers could
be regarded as the brains, while the CIRCO solar circulation units are akin to their
hearts. Like all other components the CIRCO and SUNGO families look back onto
a long history of improvement, optimization and diversication. All in all Wagner
& Co currently offers 5 solar controllers to meet the requirements of every possi-
ble project (4 of which are presented in this handbook). Speed controlled pumps
signicantly reduce the electricity consumption and the numerous additional
control and analysis functions of the SUNGO controllers allow optimal control of
a small scale single-collector single-tank solution as well as a multiple collector
multiple tank solution with multiple additional heat sources and extra functions,
e.g. pool heating (with SUNGO SXL). Other system components include expansi-
on vessels, electronic diverter valves, thermostatic mixing valves, heat meters and
more.
CIRCO 6 Solar Circulation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
CIRCO 25/80 Solar Circulation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
SUNGOmini Solar Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Solar Controller SUNGO S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Solar Controller SUNGO SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Solar Controller SUNGO SXL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 1.4

Expansion Vessel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Heat Meter WMZ for SUNGO SL / SXL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
2/3 Way Electronic Diverter Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Twinex TVA Rapid Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Sensor Connection Box SP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Solar Heat Transfer Liquid DC20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
External Heat Exchangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
247
CIRCO 6 Solar Circulation Unit
CIRCO 6 Solar Circulation Unit

in combination with the intelligent
SUNGO controllers, it is the safe
and reliable heart of a solar
installation
Fast Installation
thanks to pre-assembled parts
and compression ttings for the
connection to the solar circuit
Safe Deaeration
by integrated air bleeder
Operation Monitoring
via ow-meter and integrated
thermometer
Controlled Heat Flow

by two temperature resistant
non-return ball valves 1.4
Low Heat Loss
made possible by all-around heat
insulation made from close tting
hard foam shell
Figure 1 CIRCO 6 Solar Circulation Unit

with integrated controller (not included in delivery).
Solar Thermal / Solar Circuit EN-XXX_CIRCO-6_MA-100119-1121Y800 249

1. General Safety Guidelines
Qualication of the Installer
Setting up, installation and commissioning of the CIRCO6
solar circulation unit must be carried out by a qualied in- DANGER of personal injury
staller. Electrical installation of the device can lead to potentially
Please note that in case of a fault report the guarantee ben- fatal electric shocks, scalds, contusions as well as other
ets can only be claimed if the correct commissioning has health hazards. Therefore please ensure to observe all in-
been certied by a qualied person in the commissioning formation in the guidelines marked with this symbol.
report. The warranty period for the station is 2 years.
Use and Application

Function CAUTION against property damage
The CIRCO 6 solar circulation unit is suitable for solar hot This symbol indicates dangers that can result in damage
water systems and solar heating support systems in con- to the components or signicantly degrade the functional-
nection with antifreeze solar liquid as recommended. ity of the solar heating system. Please ensure to carry out
the installation steps described in these guidelines in the
Limitations of Use correct order.
Applications are limited to the hydraulic layout of the
schematics supplied by Wagner and Co.
Some solar installations for space heating and the appli-
cation of vacuum tube collectors do require special pro- NOTE for additional information
visions for overheating protection, like the installation of This symbol indicates practical advice which will be useful
a heat dissipation vessel or alternative positioning of the for installing and operating the device.
safety components (See document Solar Thermal Sys-
tems - Setup, Startup and Maintenance).
The solar circulation unit can be wall-mounted or di-
rectly installed to the storage cylinder using the cylin-
der mounting kits for the ECO, TERMO and RATIO line
solar cylinders
The CIRCO solar circulation unit must not be installed
outdoors.
Norms and Directives

EC conformity declaration
The CIRCO 6 solar circulation unit has been designed and
constructed in accordance with EU regulations. Please re-
gard national and EU regulations and guidelines for instal-
lation work. Especially observe EN 12976 and ENV 12977:
Thermal solar systems and components.
Standards and Codes

The effective standards, codes and regulations at the in-
stallation location must be observed. In Germany espe-
cially:
Electrical installations and device connections must be
carried out according to VDE 0100 und DIN 18381
Setting up potential equalization must follow VDE 0190
DIN 4753 must be observed for installation, start up and
maintenance of system for domestic hot water prepara-
tion and process water heating.
DIN EN V 12977: Thermal solar systems and compo-
nents.
250 EN-XXX_CIRCO-6_MA-100119-1121Y800
2. Technical Information Table 3 CIRCO 6 Solar Circulation Unit
Part no. 150 201 17
Scope of Delivery
The CIRCO solar circulation unit is supplied pre-assem- Insulation EPP two parts
bled. Max. operation pressure 6 bar
SUNGO control and CIRCO expansion kit are not part of
120 C (during start-up phase
the unit. Additional accessories are shown on the last page. Max. operation temperature
temporarily up to 160 C)
Table 1 Maximum Number of Collectors to be Installed 1 Circulation pump ST 25-6 (230 V, 50 Hz)
Coll.-type Serial-/parallel Serial connection Wattage 3-levels, 44/62/81 Watt

connection 2 Max. pump head 6m
18 22 28 18 22 28 Max. ow rate 3.5 m/h
EURO Return ow stoppers 2 x, can be disabled
C20 HTF/AR, 2x3 3x3 4x3 4 4 4
C22 HTF/AR Temperature display 2 dial thermometers
EURO L20 AR 2x3 3x3 4x3 4 5 5 Sockets for temperature In supply and return leg one each
sensors for sensors of max. 6 mm
1 Simple pipe length of solar circuit up to 20 m, heat transfer
medium: antifreezes/water 40/60 Vol % = 35 l/m. Connections Flow meter 2-15 l/min
and connection pipes of collectors are accounted for.
Safety valve 6 bar ",
2 No. of elds with 3 collectors connected in series each Safety group
pressure meter
Filling unit 2 lling valves with cap
Table 2 Volume of Expansion Vessel 1 Connection expansion vessel " M
Sys.- Coll.- Volume (l) for system height (m) Connection bleeder pipe " F
vol. (l) area. (m) 2.5 5 7.5 10 12.5 15 Connection solar circuit 4 compression ttings, 22 mm
18 5 12 12 12 12 18 18 Axial pipe distance for solar
100 mm
circuit
20 7.5 18 18 18 18 18 24
Wall inst. / inst. at cylinder
23 10 24 24 24 24 24 24 Installation type
(with optional kit)
24 12.5 24 24 24 24 24 24
Dimensions (HxBxT), mm 375 x 270 x 195 mm
27 15 35 35 35 35 35 35
1.4
Weight, kg 7.2
32 20 35 35 35 50 50 50
Prepared for integration of
Slot for solar controller
1 These values only apply for collecor volumes of approx. 0.5 l/m SUNGO S / SL / SXL
Pressure loss p [mbar] Pressure loss p [Pascal]

10 105
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
v 3 3
0 0,5 1,0 1,5 2,0 [m/s]
7 2 2
6
10 104
5 9 9
8 8
7 7
III 6 6
4
5 5
H [m]
4 4
3
3 3
2 I 2 2
1
10 10
0 5 6 7 8 910 2 3 4 5 6 78910 2 3 4 5
0 1,0 2,0 3,0 [m3/h] Flow volume V [l/h]
Figure 2 Pump characteristics curves CIRCO 6 Figure 3 Pressure loss diagram CIRCO 6
EN-XXX_CIRCO-6_MA-100119-1121Y800 251
3. Installation
2
5 3
8
11
1
10
9
8
12
14
13
7
Figure 4 1 Pump; 2 Safety group; 3 Connection (") for expansion vessel-set (available as accessory); 4 Filling valve; 5 Rear insulation
shell; 6 Front insulation shell with opening for controller; 7 Cover (when controller not installed); 8 Wall brackets; 9 Bleeder; 10 Flow me-
ter; 11 Controller mounting block; 12 Dry wall anchors; 13 Controller SUNGO; 14 Fixing screw
250
G1 G1
Rp
G
130
375
262
G1 G1
100
Figure 5 Dimensions in mm
252 EN-XXX_CIRCO-6_MA-100119-1121Y800
3.1 Installation Preparations 3.2 Wall Installation
The entire layout of ow and return pipes should be Remove front insulation shell (6).
clear before installing the CIRCO 6 solar circulation unit
(100 mm centres). Make two drilling holes with 262 mm vertical distance
The location of the installation also must take into ac- for the two wall brackets (8) (gure 5). Screw on solar
count sufcient space for the expansion vessel! circulation unit.
If the solar system is installed for heating or if vacuum
tubes are used you must pay attention to the technical Connect safety group (2) to the included " gasket to
documentation Overheat Protection. the return leg.
For the required tools see gure 6 Secure nuts by applying counter force with 2nd wrench
while tightening the connections. Otherwise parts of
seals might come of or the connections could be dam-
aged.
Afx wall bracket for expansion vessel next to the sta-

tion. Take length of the exible connection tube into
account.
Connect expansion vessel to safety group via the con-

nection tube. Dont forget the seals/gaskets! Mainte-
nance can be made easier by installing an additional
capped valve between exible tube and vessel.
Connect venting pipe to safety valve and place an emp-

ty canister underneath to collect possible spills of solar
uid.
Figure 6 Tools for CIRCO 6 installation The solar circuit pipes are connected via compression
ttings 18 mm or 22 mm.
Cut and burr pipes and push into ttings as far as pos-
sible, then tighten nuts. To avoid damage, secure nuts 1.4
by applying counter force with 2nd wrench while tight-
ening.
Rinse solar pump station and solar circuit and check for
leaks. For this purpose ller valves are tted to the safety
unit and to the ow meter.
Install electrical wiring, switching and sensor lines. The

cables must not touch on hot pipe legs. Always discon-
nect mains when working with electrical equipment.
The controllers SUNGO S, SL and SXL can be integrated

into the solar circulation unit. For this purpose screw the
4 included drywall anchors (12) into the drillings of the
controller installation slot. Then set on controller (13)
with lower side. Screw controller into the installation slot
with the 4 xing screws (14 + 15). During wiring use wire
straps at appropriate place for pull relief of the control-
ler terminals.
Re-attach front insulation shell (6).
EN-XXX_CIRCO-6_MA-100119-1121Y800 253
3.3 Installation at Cylinder
The adjustable installation kits can be used with all Wag-
ner solar cylinders with 1" at sealing connections at the
heat exchanger, with a vertical distance between 470 and 1
0
2
4
3
850mm. 40
60
To prevent later obstructions of the pipe work in the area 40

60
20
0
80
of the cylinder, it is recommended to make proper layout

20
80
0
plans before commencing installation.
Connect pipes to cylinder using supplied gaskets, tight-

en hand-screwed.
D = 22 for
compression fitting
Cut off longer return pipe until both pipes are reaching
the same level and have an axial distance of 100 mm.
Return pipe
Then screw tight adjustable pipe.
100
Trim off the insulation of the cut-off return pipe and
place circulation unit on top of the two pipes.
450 mm
Level the unit, afx to cylinder and tighten cylinder con-
nections.
Continue with piping behind the solar circulation unit. 1 union nut Insulation
In order to prevent forces to the cylinder xing because Applicable for 470 to 850 mm
of weight load from the station, pipe xtures should be
installed near the unit at the wall or at the ceiling.
The expansion vessel must not be freely suspended from

the pump station. Apply wall or oor installation, depend-
ing on type of vessel.
Filling valve
Figure 7 Cylinder installation kit (option) consisting of:

1 return pipe with integrated lling valve, incl. insulation; connec-
tions: 1" swivel nut 22 mm pipe socket for compression tting,
1 supply pipe incl. insulation; connections: 1" swivel nut 22 mm
pipe socket for compression tting.
254 EN-XXX_CIRCO-6_MA-100119-1121Y800
4. Operating Advice
The Flow Meter Return Flow Stoppers
The ow meter indicates ow in l/min during pump op- They are integrated into the ball valve components and
eration. The adjustment screw can be used to cut off the prevent unwanted heat distribution in the solar circuit
ow. For operation the adjustment screw must be turned when the pump is turned off. They only open in the ow
fully counterclockwise (max. ow). The adjustment of the direction under pump pressure. The stopper in the feed
volume ow should only be done via the pump settings. leg can be turned off with the ball valve handle, the one in
the return leg with a slotted screw (gure 9 and 10).
Flow open
Return flow stopper in operation
C
Operational position
L/MIN
Flow open
15
Return flow stopper off
C
12
9 Index line
7
5
Flow metering
2
Flow closed
C Return flow stopper without function
Figure 8 Flow meter of CIRCO 6
Setting Up the Pump Figure 9 Functions of ball valve and return ow stoppers in supply leg
Setting up the pump is carried out when the solar instal- (left pipe) 1.4
Return ow stopper adjustable via ball valve!
lation is lled and vented and the pump is operating. First
set pump to lowest level. Then switch on pump via control-
ler menu manual operation, so that speed control is dis-
abled. The recommended volume ow in the solar circuit
Flow open
is 40 l/m collector area and hour. Values between 30 and Return flow stopper in operation (slot horizontal)
50 l/m h are acceptable. Operational position
Higher volumes result in increased power uptake of the C
pump. Choose next higher pump level if the recommend-

ed volume ow is not reached. Example: Collector area
12 m > recommended volume ow = 12 m x 40 l/mh =
480 l/h = 8 l/min.
After setting up the pump assure its automatic operation. Flow open
Return flow stopper off (slot vertical)
C
Flow closed
Return flow stopper without function
C
Figure 10 Functions of the ball valve and the return ow stopper in the
return leg (right pipe)
Return ow stopper adjustable via slotted screw!
EN-XXX_CIRCO-6_MA-100119-1121Y800 255
5. Accessoires
Table 4 Accessories Description Part no.
Compression tting Acessory / spare part: for 18 mm copper pipe 150 301 84
for pipe connection for 22 mm copper pipe 150 301 85
Accessory set solar circuit Accessory parts for solar circuit piping: 190 210 22
2 lling valves and 2 grounding clamps for potential equalization
Air venting kit Automatic air venting kit consisting of 2 automatic air venting valves and 190 210 11
(not normally required heat resistant ball valves (up to 200 C), connection 3/8"
because of included bleeder
Manual air release set consisting of 2 manual air release valves 3/8" and key 190 210 10
pipe)
CIRCO-expansion vessel set Expansion vessel for solar circulation unit, allowed positive operating pressure
10 bar, stainless steel corrugated tube for connecting with CIRCO solar
circulation unit, thread connection " female at sealing
12 l-volume, incl. wall bracket, pre-pressurized: 1.5 bar 150 450 10
35 l-volume, with brackets for wall and oor xing, pre-pressurized: 2.5 bar 150 450 14
Capped valve Check valve " with ller and drain valve and with cap against operation
for expansion vessel mistakes. Suitable for maintenance purposes.
" - version 819 200 27

1" - version 819 200 36
Cylinder mounting kit Cylinder piping 1" M with at seals, insulated; return pipe for cylinder 150 302 01
for CIRCO 6 und 6E connections with 470 to 850 mm vertical distance (can be cut to size),
with 22 mm sleeves to connect to compression ttings of CIRCO 6 and 6E.

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
CIRCO 25/80 Solar Circulation Unit
CIRCO 25/80 Solar Circulation Unit

in combination with the intelligent
SUNGO controllers, it is the safe and
reliable control centre for larger solar
installations
Fast Installation
thanks to pre-assembled parts and
compression ttings for the connection
to the solar circuit
Safe Deaeration
by integrated air bleeder
Operation Monitoring
via ow-meter and integrated thermom-
eter
Controlled Heat Flow

by two temperature resistant non-return 1.4
ball valves
Low Heat Loss

due to wrap-around tightly tting hard foam
encasing
Figure 1 CIRCO 25/80 solar circulation unit
Solar Thermal / Solar Circuit EN-XXX_CIRCO-25-80_MA-100123-11217800 257

1. General Safety Guidelines
Setting up, installation and commissioning of the CIRCO6
solar circulation unit must be carried out by a qualied in- DANGER of personal injury
staller. Electrical installation of the device can lead to potentially
Please note that in case of a fault report the guarantee ben- fatal electric shocks, scalds, contusions as well as other
ets can only be claimed if the correct commissioning has health hazards. Therefore please ensure to observe all in-
been certied by a qualied person in the commissioning formation in the guidelines marked with this symbol.
report. The warranty period for the station is 2 years.
Use and Application

Function CAUTION against property damage
The CIRCO 6 solar circulation unit is suitable for solar hot This symbol indicates dangers that can result in damage
water systems and solar heating support systems in con- to the components or signicantly degrade the functional-
nection with antifreeze solar liquid as recommended. ity of the solar heating system. Please ensure to carry out
the installation steps described in these guidelines in the
Limitations of Use correct order.
Applications are limited to the hydraulic layout of the
schematics supplied by Wagner and Co.
Some solar installations for space heating and the appli-
cation of vacuum tube collectors do require special pro- NOTE for additional information
visions for overheating protection, like the installation This symbol indicates practical advice, which will be useful
of a heat dissipation vessel or alternative positioning of for installing and operating the device.
the safety components (see Solar Thermal Systems
Setup, Commissioning and Maintenance).
The solar circulation unit can be wall-mounted or di-
rectly installed to the storage cylinder.
The CIRCO solar circulation unit must not be installed
outdoors.
Norms and Directives

EC conformity declaration
The CIRCO 6 solar circulation unit has been designed and
constructed in accordance with EU regulations. Please re-
gard national and EU regulations and guidelines for instal-
lation work. Especially observe EN 12976 and ENV 12977:
Thermal solar systems and components.
258 EN-XXX_CIRCO-25-80_MA-100123-11217800
2. Technical Information Table 3 CIRCO 25/80 Solar Circulation Unit
Part no. 150 201 13
Scope of Delivery
The CIRCO solar circulation unit is supplied pre-assem- Insulation EPP three parts with latch
bled. Max. operational pressure 6 bar
SUNGO control and CIRCO expansion kit are not part of
120 C (temporarily up to 160C
the unit. Max. operational temperature
during startup)
Additional accessories are shown on the last page.
Grundfos UPS 25-80 (230V, 50Hz)
Circulation pump
Table 1 Maximum Number of Collectors to be Installed Energy efciency class C.
Coll.- Serial-/parallel connection Serial connection Power rating 3-levels, 110/155/165 Watt
type Max. pump head 8m
18 22 28 18 22 28
EURO 4 x 3* Max. pumping volume 7.5 m/h
2 x 3* 6 x 3* 4 5 5
L20/C22 2 x 4* Return ow stoppers 2x
Parallel connection Temperature indication 2 dial thermometers
LBM 67 4 5 6 2 2 3 Flow meter 7 - 30 l/min
LBM 100 2 3 4 2 2 2 Safety group Safety valve 6 bar ", manometer
* No. of collectors connected in series
Filling unit 2 ller valves with caps
Table 1 Max no. of collectors and pipe diameters for various connec- Connection expansion vessel " M
tion layouts. Not valid for corrugated tubes! Assumptions: solar circuit
length up to 40 m / leg, 40 % glycol content, specic volume ow max. Connection bleeder pipe " F
35 l/mh. Connection solar circuit 4 compression ttings, 22 mm
Axial pipe distance
100 mm
for solar circuit
Table 2 Volume of Expansion Vessel
Mounting type Wall mounting
Sys.- Coll.- Volume (l) for system height (m)
vol. (l) area (m) Dimensions (H x W x D), mm 425 x 250 x 195
2.5 5 7.5 10 12.5 15
Weight, kg 9
18 5 12 12 12 12 18 18
20 7.5 18 18 18 18 18 24
1.4
23 10 24 24 24 24 24 24
24 12.5 24 24 24 24 24 24
27 15 35 35 35 35 35 35
32 20 35 35 35 50 50 50
Table 2 Expansion vessel size depending on circuit volume, collector

area, system height. These gures are only valid for collector volumes
of approx. 0.5 l per m2.
Pressure loss p [mbar] Pressure loss p [Pascal]
10 105
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
10 104
9 9
8 8
7 7
III 6 6
5 5
4 4
II
3 3
I 2 2
10 10
5 6 7 8 910 2 3 4 5 6 78910 2 3 4 5
Flow volume V [l/h]
Figure 2 Pump characteristics curves CIRCO 25/80 Figure 3 Pressure loss diagram CIRCO 25/80
EN-XXX_CIRCO-25-80_MA-100123-11217800 259
3. Installation
Figure 4 CIRCO 25/80 and its components: Figure 5 CIRCO 25/80 dimensions in mm
1 Pump; 2 Safety group; 3 Front insulation shell; 4 Rear insulation
shell (left); 5 Rear insulation shell (right); 6 Wall mount; 7 Connec-
tion (", M) for expansion vessel set (optionally available)
3.1 Installation Preparations 3.2 Wall Mounting

The entire layout of ow and return pipes should be well Take the solar circulation unit out of the insulation. To
planned before mounting the CIRCO 25/80 solar circu- this end remove front shell and pull apart rear insulation
lation unit (100 mm centers). shells (4+5).
Please also refer to the technical information Solar
Thermal Systems Setup, Commissioning and Mainte- Make two drilling holes with 262 mm distance for the
nance. two wall mounts (6). Screw solar circulation unit onto
If the solar system is installed for space heating or if wall mount.
vacuum tubes are used, you must also pay attention to
the technical documentation Overheat Protection. Push the two parts of the rear insulation shell (4+5)
For the required tools see gure 6 tightly together.
Connect safety group (2) to the included " gasket to

the return leg.
Secure nuts by applying counter force with 2nd wrench
while tightening the connections. Otherwise parts of
seals might come off or the connections could be dam-
aged.
Afx wall mount for expansion vessel next to the right

side of the safety group, using the included dowels and
screws. Take length of the " corrugated hose into ac-
count. The 35 l and 50 l expansion vessels are xed with
a special wall clamp.
Connect expansion vessel to safety group via the con-

nection tube. Dont forget the seals/gaskets! Mainte-
nance can be made easier by installing an additional
Figure 6 Tools required for installation capped valve between exible tube and vessel.
260 EN-XXX_CIRCO-25-80_MA-100123-11217800
Connect venting pipe to safety valve and place an emp- Return ow stoppers
ty canister underneath to collect possible spills of solar They are integrated into the ball valve armatures and pre-
uid. vent unwanted heat distribution in the solar circuit when
the pump is turned off. They only open in the ow direction
The solar circuit pipes are connected via compression under pump pressure. The stopper in the feed leg can be
ttings. Cut and burr pipes and push into ttings as far turned off with the ball valve handle, the one in the return
as possible, then tighten nuts with wrenches. leg with a slotted screw.
To avoid damage, secure nuts by applying counter
force with 2nd wrench while tightening. In operation
Rinse solar pump station and solar circuit and after-

wards check for leaks. For this purpose, ller valves are
tted to the safety unit and to the ow meter. Tighten
connections of required.
C C
Install electrical wiring, switching and sensor lines. The
cables must not touch on hot pipe legs. Always discon-
nect mains when working with electrical equipment.
Flow Return
Re-attach front insulation shell (3). Ball valve handle 0, Ball valve handle 0 Slit horizontal
return flow stopper Return flow stopper
in operation in operation
Figure 8 Operational setting
4. Operating Advice Filling the system

(see Solar Thermal Systems Setup, Commissioning
The Flow Meter and Maintenance)
The ow meter indicates ow in l/min during pump opera-
tion. The exact volume ow can be read out at the level
indicator (Fig 7). The adjustment screw can be used to ad-
just the ow to a desired value during pump operation. 1.4
C
The ow is cut off when the screw is turned clockwise to
C
dead stop.
Flow Return
Ball valve handle 45, Ball valve handle 90,
passage open, passage closed
return flow stopper
off
Figure 9 Filling the system

Index line
Flow metering
Draining the system
(see Solar Thermal Systems Setup, Commissioning
and Maintenance)
Figure 7 Flow meter of CIRCO 25/80

C
Flow Return
Ball valve handle 45, Ball valve handle 45, Slit vertical
passage open, passage open Return flow stopper
return flow stopper off
off
Figure 10 Draining the system
EN-XXX_CIRCO-25-80_MA-100123-11217800 261
5. Accessories
Table 4 Accessories Description Part no.
Accessory parts for solar circuit piping:
Accessory set solar circuit 190 210 22
2 lling valves and 2 grounding clamps for potential equalization
Air venting kit Automatic air venting kit consisting of 2 automatic air venting valves and
190 210 11
(not normally required heat resistant ball valves (up to 200 C), connection 3/8"
because of included
bleeder pipe) Manual air release set consisting of 2 manual air release valves 3/8" and key 190 210 10
CIRCO Expansion vessel for solar circulation unit, allows positive operating pressure 10 bar,
expansion vessel set stainless steel corrugated tube for connection to CIRCO solar circulation unit, thread
connection " female at sealing
12 l-volume, incl. wall mounting bracket, pre-pressurized: 1.5 bar 150 450 10
Capped valve for Check valve " with ller and drain valve and with cap against operation mistakes.
expansion vessel Suitable for maintenance purposes.
"-version 819 200 27

1"-version 819 200 36

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, version V2.x
SUNGOmini Solar Controller
1.4
Figure 1 Solar controller SUNGOmini
The Benets at a Glance Content

Display showing temperature, balance values and sys- 1. Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
tem status with clearly visible symbols for easy readabil- 2. General Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . 265
ity. 2.1 Installers Qualications . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Simple and safe setting via push-button on the right 2.2 Operating Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 265
side 2.3 Installation and Operating Information . . . . 265
Diagnostic system for monitoring system functions, e.g. 3. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
sensor cut-off and monitoring of temperature differ- 3.1 Installation of the Controller Encasing . . . . . 266
ence T too high 3.2 Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Integrated security functions and system protection 4. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Solar charging of a 1 cylinder system 4.1 Display and Push-Button . . . . . . . . . . 267
2 temperature inputs PT1000 4.2 Menu Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
1 speed controlled output for pump 4.3 Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Prepared for SECUSOL operation 4.4 Service System Messages . . . . . . . . . 269
4.5 Service Checking Sensors . . . . . . . . . 269
5. Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
5.1 KEYline Standard Single Tank System . . . . . 270
5.2 SECUSOL System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Solar Thermal / Solar Circuit EN-XXX_SUNGOmini_BA-091021-11221Q00 263

1. Technical Description
Table 1 Solar Controller SUNGOmini
Solar Charging
The solar circulation pump is switched on and off by a tem-
100 % recyclable ABS-housing
Material perature difference control. The sensors T1 (collector) and
for wall mounting
T2 (cylinder, bottom) are required as control elements. The
Dimensions (l x w x h, mm) 75 x 93 x 40 on/off conditions and the temperature limitation can be
Protection type IP41 according to VDE 0470 variably set in the settings menu. Note: The temperature
Rate of radio interference N according to VDE 0875
limitation always affects sensor T2 (cylinder, bottom).
230 Volt AC; 50 Hz;

Operating voltage Speed Control
-10 % to +15 %
The solar circuit pump can be operated via speed con-
Diameter of cable max. 2.5 mm trol (in this case impulse packet control). This means that
for 230V connections unilar or nely stranded
individual sine half-waves in the alternate current are
Temperature sensor / Pt1000; 1000 at 0 C; switched on or off, depending on the temperature differ-
temperature range range: -30 C up to +225 C ence. Therefore the speed can be altered within a range
The cable of the sensor must be of 30-100 % which results in longer system run times. The
installed with no tension. The minimum speed can be custom set.
sensor must not be loaded
Sensor load
mechanically when the
System Messages
temperature of the collector is
more than 60 C. The system messages sensor cut-off and sensor short
circuit are indicated with display symbols.
4kV1min
Test voltage
according to VDE 0631
Triac
230V AC The Triac is an electronic switch for switching the 230-V
Switching voltage
1A / approx. 230 VA for
Output power of switches
cos = 0,7-1,0 for each output
outputs on and off, applicable for controllers SUNGOmini,
SUNGO S, SL and SXL.
Microfuse 5 x 20 mm;
Internal mains protection Operational principle: a Triac consists of 2 anti-parallel
2 A/T
switchable diodes (=anti-parallel thyristors). The thyristors
Operating temperature 0 up to +50 C / switch the positive or negative sinus half-wave through, as
(internal) / storage temperature -10 C up to +65 C
long as a switching difference exists. The Triac switches off,
Weight approx. 150 g as soon as the difference falls below the turn-off value.
System Protection
If the collector temperature at sensor T1 rises above
the xed value of 135 C, the solar circulation pump is
switched off, despite operational temperature difference.
This way a destruction or damage of components of the
solar circuit is avoided.
The system protection is deactivated as soon as the tem-
perature at the collector falls below 100 C.
SECUSOL Function
The solar heating system is operated on a drain back prin-
ciple. This means, if the solar circulation pump is not acti-
vated, there is no solar uid in the collectors and risers. See
SECUSOL manual for further details.
264 EN-XXX_SUNGOmini_BA-091021-11221Q00
2. General Safety Guidelines 2.1 Installers Qualications
The following safety advice is designed to protect you Setting up and commissioning of the SUNGO mini must
from dangers that can arise from improper handling of be carried out by a qualied installer.
devices, whether intentional or otherwise. A distinction is All national and local safety regulations need to be com-
made between general advice presented here and spe- plied with.
cic advice presented throughout the guidelines. Please note that in case of a complaint the guarantee is
only valid if correct commissioning has been certied in
a commissioning report.
DANGER for personal injury

Improper electrical installation of the device can lead to 2.2 Operating Requirements
potentially fatal electric shocks as well as other health haz-
ards. Application
Controlling solar thermal systems through the selection
of applicable control patterns and additional functions
to adapt the control for the required operation of the
CAUTION for danger to property hydraulic system.
This symbol indicates dangers that can result in damage to The controller must only be operated in dry rooms.
the components or the function of the controller. The controller can be attached to the solar cylinder or
mounted on the wall.
Limitations of Use
NOTE for additional information When used in other than solar thermal applications, the
This symbol indicates practical advice and tricks of the functionality of the control has to be checked before
trade which will be useful for installing and operating the commissioning. If in doubt contact the controller ser-
controller. vice of Wagner & Co.
If these operating requirements are not observed, any
claims under the warranty will not be accepted.
2.3 Installation and 1.4

Operating Information
Any installation and wiring work has to be carried out
in an idle state as during operation the voltage on the
outside of the triac is 230 V.
Mains power must be connected to the controller from
outside the solar station via an external ON/OFF switch.
Operating temperatures above 50 C are not permitted
for the controller.
The base of the control is divided into a safe low volt-
age section and a 230 V section by a crosspiece. Make
sure that you do not confuse these sections during the
installation process!
The standard operating mode is the automatic mode.
Manual operation is used only for functional testing of
the pump.
Do not operate the system if the controller, the wiring
or the connected 230 V mains or consumer are visibly
damaged.
The control is tted with a mains microfuse.
Collectors and hydraulic pipe work can get extremely
hot during solar irradiation. There is a risk of scalding
when tting the collector temperature sensor.
EN-XXX_SUNGOmini_BA-091021-11221Q00 265
3. Installation
3.1 Installation of the Case 3.2 Connecting Wires
Opening the Case Layout of the SUNGO mini Connections
To open the cover of the casing, use a small screw-driv- All electrical connections are made to the circuit board at
er to gently push from above into the small notch at the the bottom of the control. The sensor connections (safe
front of the cover. low voltage) are located on the right hand side and the
230 V mains connections and the switching output A1 on
Wall Mounting the left hand side.
Mount the controller to the wall.
Do not overtighten the screws to avoid damage to the General Connection Rules
lower part of the housing. If exible wires are used and the controller is wall
mounted, a strain relief must be xed within or outside
Mounting at SECUSOL Solar Cylinder the controller.
Hook the SUNGOmini controller to the desired position In this case you must crimp the wire ends.
into the upper insulation of the storage cylinder.
Finally connect to mains power. 230V Mains Connection
When the control is switched on, the voltage on the tri- Mains power is connected from outside the control via
acs housing is 230 V AC. an ON/OFF switch.
This switch is not required if mains power is with a pro-
tective plug to a socket.
The controller is suitable for mains operation at approxi-
Mains voltage area Safe low voltage area mately 230V/50Hz.
All earth wires are connected to the PE terminals.
Green
The neutral terminals (N) are electrically connected!
Switching output A1 is a 230V normally open contact
which is activated via speed-control.
Fuse
Transformator Display Red
Connecting the Temperature Sensors

The wires of the temperature sensors can be extended:
Triac
Control-IC An up to 15m length / 2x0.5mm cable can be used, up to
Push-
Jumper on = Solar Button 50m a cable with 2x0.75mm is necessary. Shielded ca-
Jumper off = SECUSOL bles should be used for long connections to the collector.
Do not connect the shielding at the sensor end, just trim
and isolate.
on off The polarity of the temperature sensors is irrelevant and
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
they can be connected either way.
Collector sensor, T1
Collector sensor, T1
Storage sensor, T2
Storage sensor, T2
Mains, phase
Solar circuit pump, phase
Mains, neutral
Solar circuit pump, neutral
Mains, potential earth
Solar circuit pump, potential earth
The sensor wires must be installed separately from

230V mains cables.
Lightning Protector Module

The SUNGOmini is tted with spike protection on all sen-
sor terminals. Generally, further protection of the cylinder
sensor is not required.
Sensor T1 (collector) should be tted with the sensor con-
nection box SP2 inclusive an overvoltage protection.
Figure 2 SUNGOmini circuit board components
4. Operation
4.1 Display and Push Button
Tmax = temperature limitation
DT max = switching difference ON
DT min = switching difference OFF
Menu Tmin = min. temperature (solar only)
Information Dmax = max. pump speed (SECUSOL only)
LED green ON = mains ON

LED green flashing = solar circuit pump ON
dT min max
! I LED red on / flashing = error
Push-Button on side activates menu Settings
System Menu Settings

error
Number field
Pump ON temperature
Pump OFF
Measuring point
1 collector
2 storage
Figure 3 Display and functions 1.4
4.2 Menu Information

During standard operation the controller is in the menu
information where the values for the collector tempera-
ture (T1) and the lower storage temperature (T2) are shown
in 5-second-intervals.
When the switching difference is sufcient to switch on
the solar circulation pump, an additional pump symbol is
shown, and the green LED ashes.
Table 2 Menu Information

Symbol Description
Menu Information
I Sensor T1: Collector
2 Sensor T2: Storage, bottom
Solar circuit pump: ON
4.3 Menu Settings
The controller is equipped with a micro push-button that In order to change the selected variables, the button must
can be reached with an appropriate tool via a small drilling be pushed for approx. 2 seconds until the shown value
on the left side of the casing. ashes. By further pushing, you can step through the val-
ues in ascending order to the end of the range, where it
Briey pushing the button switches the controller from the jumps back to the lowest value to start over.
menu Information to the menu Settings, which is indi-
cated by two small arrow points at the right edge of the In order to save a value, you have to push the button for
display. Here the variables shown in tables 3 and 4 can another 2 seconds. The ashing mode is then turned off
be serially selected with single pushes on the button, de- and the new value is saved at the same time.
pending on the jumper position.
Additionally the maximum pump speed dmax can be
adjusted in the SECUSOL system variation.
Table 3 Menu Settings (Solar*)

Name Description Range Standard value
T max Temperature limitation storage, bottom 15 90 C 85 C
Switching difference (ON) between collector and storage /
T max 3 40 K 10 K
set temp. difference affected by the pump speed control.
dT min Switching difference (OFF) between collector and storage. 2 35 K 3K
T min Minimum temperature at which temp. difference is analyzed. 5 90 C 10 C
Minimum speed of solar circulation pump,
d min 30 100 % 30 %
adjustable step size in 5 %-steps
off / on Manual operation of output A1 off, on off
res Resetting to manufacturer values
V2.x Shows the current software version
* Solar = jumper setting on
Table 4 Menu Settings (SECUSOL = in jumper setting off)

Name Description Range Standard value
T max Temperature limitation storage, bottom 15 90 C 85 C
Switching difference (ON) between collector and storage /
dT max 3 40 K 15 K
set temp. difference affected by the pump speed control.
dT min Switching difference (OFF) between collector and storage. 2 35 K 3K
d max Max. speed of the solar circuit pump in system SECUSOL 45 100 % 100 %
Manual operation of output A1
off / on off, on off
(Remains in operation for 1 h when on and then returns to automatic.)
res Resetting to manufacturer values
V2.x Shows the current software version
Fixed Parameters that cannot be changed

Filling time, start For lling the system at 100 % pump speed
Min. pump speed In normal operation the pump speed of the system can be reduced to 45 %
4.4 Service System Messages
The operational state is indicated via two LEDs. Errors are
indicated by the red LED as well as by additional display
symbols. The error-codes are indicated by ashing inter-
vals within a few seconds.
Table 5 System messages in display

Display-/LED Description Action
LED green, ON Mains ON
LED green, ashing Solar circuit pump ON
LED red, 1 x ashing
Collector sensor cable interrupted
LED red, 2 x ashing

Short circuit in collector sensor cable
Check and compare resistance of sensor.
LED red, 3 x ashing Check all contacts.
Storage sensor cable interrupted
LED red, 4 x ashing

Short circuit in storage sensor cable
dT too high active

A value of 20K is added to the switching difference (ON)
between T1 and T2. The message occurs, when the total
difference is not reduced after 30 min. Check pump and wiring.
System protection active Check system for air vent if necessary.
LED red, ON
If the collector temperature at sensor T1 rises above the set Check sensors / sensor cables, replace if
value of 135 C the solar circuit pump is switched off, required.
despite operational temperature difference. The system
protection is deactivated as soon as the temperature at the
collector falls below 100 C.
1.4
4.5 Service Checking Sensors
Table 6 Temperature related resistance values forPt1000-sensor
-20 C -10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C 90 C 100 C 110 C
922 961 1000 1039 1078 1117 1155 1194 1232 1271 1309 1347 1385 1423
Based upon this table the correct function of the temperature sensors can be checked with a multi-meter.
5. Application Examples
5.1 KEYline-System
T1 : Sensor collector Collector field

T2 : Storage sensor, bottom
T1
P1 : Solar circulation pump
P2 : Heating circulation pump
P3 : Storage charging pump
M1 : Heating circuit mixer T2 T1
Ttw : Sensor hot water (boiler controller) A1
Ta
Heating circuit
Tvl
P1
P2
CIRCO
Ttw
M1
ECOplus
P3 T2
Oil or gas
boiler
Hot water BWM
Cold water
Figure 4 KEYline system for SUNGOmini
5.2 SECUSOL-System
T1 : Sensor collector Collector field (EURO C22)

T2 : Storage sensor, bottom
P1 : Solar circulation pump

P2 : Heating circulation pump
P3 : Storage charging pump T1
M1 : Heating circuit mixer T2 T1
Ttw : Sensor hot water (boiler controller) A1
Ta
Heating circuit
Tvl
SECUSOL
P2
M1 Ttw
T2
P3
Oil or gas
boiler
P1
Hot water BWM
Cold Water
Figure 5 SECUSOL-System for SUNGOmini

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, Issue SW1201 / 3.0 / HW3.0
Solar Controller SUNGO S
1.4
Figure 1 Solar Controller SUNGO S
Product Features Contents

Large illuminated display to indicate temperature, bal- 1. Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
ance values and system status with clearly visible sym- 2. General Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . 274
bols for easy readability. 2.1 Installers Qualications . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Easy and safe operation via four buttons for vertical and 2.2 Operating Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 274
horizontal scrolling through the menus. 2.3 Installation and Operating Information . . . . 274
Extensive diagnostics for monitoring system functions, 3. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
eg. sensor cutoff and monitoring of temperature differ- 3.1 Installation of the Case . . . . . . . . . . . 274
ence T too high 3.2 Connecting Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Integrated security functions such as collector cooling, 4. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
tank cooling, system protection and vacuum tube col- 4.1 Display and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
lector function. 4.2 Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Solar charging of 1 tank systems 4.3 Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Current/reset values 4.4 Manual Operation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 279
3temperature inputs Pt1000 4.5 Special Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 279
1 output, speed-controlled 4.6 Service System Messages. . . . . . . . . . 280
4.7 Service Sensor Control . . . . . . . . . . . 280
5. Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
5.1 Single-Tank System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
5.2 Single Tank System with PHE . . . . . . . . . 282
Solar Thermal / Solar Circuit EN-XXX_SUNGO-S_BA-100121-1122P200 271

1. Technical Description Manual Operation
Manual operation allows to manually switch input and
Solar Controller SUNGO S
output channels on or off. On exiting the manual opera-
tion menu, the software returns to automatic operation.
100 % recyclable ABS casing
Material The manual operation menu can be used for a maximum
for wall mounting
of 8hours. After that the software automatically switches
Dimensions (L x H x W in mm) 173 x 138 x 51 back to automatic operation in the information menu.
Protection type IP40 according to VDE 0470
Rate of radio interference N according to VDE 0875
Manual Lag Function
In order to check the temperature values in the information
230 Volt AC; 50 Hz;
Mains supply menu, even when the output channels are set manually,
-10 % to +15 %
a time lag has to be selected in the manual lag function
Max. size of wiring of the manual operation menu. After exiting the manual
2,5 mm stranded / single
for 230 V-connections
operation menu this time span passes once and then is set
Temperature sensor / Pt1000; 1000 at 0 C; back to zero. In this mode a blinking symbol for the manual
Temperature range Range: -30 C to +225 C operation is shown in the information menu.
Ensure that the cable does not
put strain on the sensor; Collector Cooling
Strain on sensor Do not put any mechanical The tank is loaded up to the preset temperature limitation
strain on the sensor if
which affects sensor T2 (tank, bottom). If the preset tem-
temperature is above 60 C.
perature limitation is exceeded output A1 (solar circula-
4 kV for 1 min tion pump) switches off. If the temperature of T1 (collector)
Test voltage
according to VDE 0631
then rises above the selectable standard value of 110 C
Switching voltage 230 Volt AC the solar circulation pump is switched on in order to cool
Output parameters of switches 1A / 230 VA for cos = 0,7-1,0 the collector. It switches off again when the temperature at
Low current fuse 5 x 20 mm; the collector sensor has decreased by 10K.
Fuse, internal
2 A/T (2 Ampere, slow) This type of intermittent operation of the solar circulation
Operating temperature (inside), pump means, that the collector is never or only rarely in
0 to +50 C / -10 to +65 C
storage temp. an idle state. If the preset tank temperature limitation is
Weight ca. 360 g exceeded by 5 K, the collector cooling function is sup-
pressed. The system shuts down completely.
Solar Charging Tank Cooling

The solar circulation pump is switched on and off by Tank cooling means that if necessary the tank temperature
means of a temperature difference control. The sensors can be reduced to a preset lowest switch-off value (e.g.
T1 (collector) und T2 (tank, bottom) are required as con- setting for vacations).
trol elements. The on/off conditions and the temperature When the collector cooling function is activated tank cool-
limitation can be variably set in the settings menu. Note: ing will also become active.
The temperature limitation always affects sensor T2 (tank, In order for tank cooling to become active the following 3
lower half). conditions must be met:
1. Temperature T2 (tank, lower half) must be higher than
Speed Control or equal to the preset tank temperature limitation plus 2K.
The solar circulation pump can be controlled via speed 2. Temperature T2 (tank, lower half) must be higher than
control (in this case impulse packet control). This means the preset switch-off value for tank cooling.
that individual sine half-waves in the alternate current are 3. Temperature T1 (collector) must be lower than tempera-
switched on or off depending on the temperature differ- ture T2 (tank, lower half) minus 10K.
ence. Therefore the speed can be altered within a range
of 30-100% which results in longer system run times. The In order for tank cooling to switch off one of the following
minimum speed can be custom set. 2 conditions must be met:
1. Temperature T2 (tank, lower half) is lower than the
Sensor T3 (tank, upper half) switch-off value for tank cooling.
SensorT3 (tank, upper half) is a measuring sensor which 2. Temperature T1 (collector) must be higher than tem-
indicates the temperature in the upper tank area. It has no perature T2 (tank, lower half) minus 2K.
switch function and is not monitored by the diagnostics
system.
Balance Values
In addition to the actual values of the sensors T1 (collector)
and T2 (tank, lower half) the display also shows balance
values which represent the min. and max. temperature
values for each sensor. When reset the current actual tem-
perature value is displayed.
272 EN-XXX_SUNGO-S_BA-100121-1122P200
Vacuum Tube Collector Function
The vacuum tube collector function allows operation of
the solar heating system even if sensor T1 (collector) is in-
stalled in the connecting pipe of the collector. If the tem-
perature increase at sensor T1 exceeds the preset switch-
on value for the collector temperature increase (standard:
1K) the solar circuit pump is switched on for the duration
of a preset lag time (standard: 15s).
During this time the switch-on difference and the solar
charge between sensor T1 (collector) and sensor T 2 (tank,
lower half) has to be activated, otherwise the solar circula-
tion pump will switch off again.
The rise in temperature at sensor T1 (collector) is measured
again immediately after the last runtime of the pump.
System Messages
The system messages for interrupted or shorted-out sen-
sors are represented by symbols on the display. For better
readability of the system message the display illumination
switches on and off every second as long as the error pre-
vails and no key entry is made.
Triac
The Triac is an electronic on/off switch for the 230 V out-
puts of the SUNGO controllers.
Function: A triac switch consists of 2 diodes which can be
switched anti-parallel (= antiparallel thyristors). The thyris-
tors switch through the positive or negative sine half-wave
as long as a switch-on difference exists. The triac switch
switches off when the temperature falls below the switch-
off difference.
1.4
System Protection
In order to protect system components like solar circula-
tion pump, 2-/3 way valves etc. that are installed in the
solar circuit against excess temperatures, solar charging
is stopped entirely as soon as a set temperature limit is
exceeded at sensor T1 (collector), even when charging
would still be possible due to the temperature difference
between sensor T1 (collector) and sensor T2 (storage cyl-
inder).
The standard temperature value to activate the system

protection is set at 135 C. However, it is possible to set a
variable value between 115 C and 200 C.
EN-XXX_SUNGO-S_BA-100121-1122P200 273
2. General Safety Guidelines 2.3 Guidelines for Installation and
The following safety advice is designed to protect you Operation
from dangers that can arise from improper handling of Because Triacs carry 230 V current at the case, the mains
devices, whether intentional or otherwise. A distinction is must be disconnected while any installation and wiring
made between general advice presented here and spe- work is carried out.
cic advice presented throughout the guidelines. Watch The mains must be connected to the control via an ex-
out for the symbols! ternal ON/OFF switch outside the solar circulation unit.
This is also necessary in order to be able to activate the
Special Function menu through ON and OFF switch-
ing.
DANGER for danger to the person Operating temperatures above 50 C are not permis-
Improper electrical installation of the device can lead to sible for the control.
potentially fatal electric shocks as well as other health haz- LCD display panels are designed in such a way that a
ards. specic reading position is required. When installing
the solar circulation unit be careful to place the display
so that it is at eye level or slightly higher. This way you
can ensure optimal display contrast (for SUNGO S and
CAUTION for danger to property SL).
This symbol indicates dangers that can result in damage to The base of the control is divided into a low voltage
the components or the function of the control. section and a 230 V section by a crosspiece. Make sure
that you do not confuse these.
Automatic mode is the default operation mode of the
control. Manual mode is only used for testing the dif-
NOTE for additional information ferent components like the pump and two/three-way
This symbol indicates practical advice and tricks of the valve.
trade which will be useful for installing and operating the The system must not be operated if damage to the con-
control. trol, the wiring or the mains is detected.
The control is tted with a low-current fuse.
Collectors and pipe work become very hot during sun-
2.1 Installers Qualications ny periods. There is a risk of scalding when tting the
collector temperature sensor.
Setting up, installation and commissioning of the
SUNGO S must be carried out by a qualied installer.
Please ensure that you comply with national and local 3. Installation
regulations.
Please note that if a complaint is made, the guarantee is 3.1 Installation of the Case
only valid if the correct commissioning has been certi-
ed by a qualied person in the commissioning report. Open the Casing
You require no tools to open the control. The lid snaps
into the lower half. You can dislodge and lift up the lid
2.2 Use and Application by pulling gently on the side clips.
The lid arrests automatically when fully opened to allow
Function for comfortable mounting and wiring.
Controlling solar thermal systems through the selection
of applicable control patterns and additional functions Wall Mounting
to adapt the control for the required operation of the Using the supplied drilling template drill out the xing
hydraulic system. holes for the control.
The control is certied for use in dry rooms only. Mount the control to the wall.
The control can either be integrated into the solar circu- Tighten screws only as far as necessary. Over-tightening
lation unit or it can be mounted on the wall. may damage the casing!
Limitations of Use
The controls suitability should be checked before oper-
ation commences if it is used for any other purpose than
for controls suitability solar thermal systems. If you are
unsure you must check with the service of Wagner & Co.
The use of the control for non-specied operation re-
sults in a lapse of the guarantee.
274 EN-XXX_SUNGO-S_BA-100121-1122P200
Installation in the Solar Circulation Unit 230 V Mains Connection
Afx the SUNGO S with the appropriate screws to the Mains power is connected from outside the connector
wall mounting bracket of the solar circulation unit. via an ON/OFF switch.
Open up the cable ducts next to the centre crosspiece If the unit is connected with a plug to a socket, the switch
in the bottom of the control. can be omitted.
Remove outer insulation of the cables in such way that The unit is designed to work with 230 V AC/50Hz. Please
single isolated wires start as they enter the casing from check that your pump has compatible specications.
the bottom. All earth wires are connected to the PE-connectors.
Hold the connectors with one hand while tightening The neutral terminals (N) are connected electrically.
the screws in order to minimise pressure on the circuit Switch output A1 is a 230 V normally open contact
board and to avoid tearing the connectors off. which is activated via speed-control.
Last connection should be to mains.
If power is switched on now, 230 VAC will be present on Connecting the Temperature Sensors
the casing of the triacs. The wires for the temperature sensors can be extended:
Up to 15m length = 2 x 0.5mm cable can be used ; up
to 50m = 2 x 0.75 mm cable is necessary.
3.2 Connecting Wires For long connections it is recommended to use shield-
ed cable.
Layout of the SUNGO S Connections Do not connect the shielding at the sensor
All connections are made to the circuit board at the bot- end, just trim and isolate!
tom of the control. On the right hand side you will nd the Temperature sensors are without polarity and can be
connections for the sensors (low voltage area) while on the connected any way.
left hand side you will nd the connections for mains and Sensor wires must be installed away from mains carry-
switching output A1. ing cables.
General Connection Rules Lightning Protector Module

If exible wires are used and the controller is tted to The SUNGO S is tted with spike protection on all sensor
the wall, wires must be tied externally in such way that terminals. Generally, further protection of the cylinder sen-
strain to the controller is avoided. sors is not required.
In this case you must tin or crimp the wire ends. Sensor T1 (collector) requires installation of sensor con-
If required PG9 screws can be xed at the feed-throughs nection box SP2 with excess voltage protection.
if the control is mounted to the wall. 1.4
Mains microfuse 2A/T Mains voltage area Safety low voltage area Ribbon cable plug
for display circuit
Saf
Earth potential connector Sensors T1-T3 connectors

ety
fus
e
Mains connector
Switch output A1 connector

Transformer
for circuit voltage 12 V
Electronic triac switch Triac control IC
Figure 2 SUNGO S circuit board components
EN-XXX_SUNGO-S_BA-100121-1122P200 275
Mains voltage area Safety low voltage area
Saf
ety
Mains, PE T1, collector sensor
f
Solar circulation pump, PE
use
Mains, phase (L) T2, tank sensor, lower half
Mains, neutral (N)
Solar circulation pump, phase (L1) T3, tank sensor, upper half
Solar circulation pump, zero (N1)
Figure 3 Connections
4. Operation
4.1 Display and Buttons
Settings menu Manual operation menu
Information menu Special functions menu
Temperature difference
Balance or
start / stop values
dT min max start stop
88888
Number display for Units
temp. or sensor errors
C %
Collector temperature
x h Tank temperature,
upper half
R
R
Reset symbol
!
Tank temperature, lower half
ok? Confirm /
save icon
Pump ON
Pump OFF
System error
Output A1
276 EN-XXX_SUNGO-S_BA-100121-1122P200
Horizontal operating level
Settings menu
as an example
T max
__C Temperature limitation tank, bottom

dT max
__K Switch-on difference T1-T2, solar

Vertical dT min
operating level __K Switch-off difference T1-T2, solar
T min
__C Minimum temperature source

dT 1.4
__K Set point temperature difference, speed control, solar
d min
__ Solar circulation pump

d max
__ Maximum speed solar circulation pump (SECUSOL)

T start
__ System filling time (SECUSOL)
Set values
Activate Increase Decrease Activate Save

value value value save function value
EN-XXX_SUNGO-S_BA-100121-1122P200 277
4.2 Information Menu
Information menu
Menu item Description Display
Collector temperature; Current value C

__C
min
Collector temperature; Balance value; minimum,
C
__C resettable
max
Collector temperature; Balance value; maximum,
C
__C resettable
Tank temperature, lower half; Current value C

__C
min
Tank temperature, lower half; Balance value; minimum,
C
__C resettable
max
Tank temperature, lower half; Balance value; maximum,
C
__C resettable
Tank temperature, upper half 1; Current value C

__C
Operating hours, total; Current value h

__h
Reset operating hours, since last reset Balance value, display,

h
R __h resettable;
Pump symbol idle: Function display

Temperature difference between collector and tank
is smaller than switch-on difference (solar circulation pump off).
Pump symbol active: Function display
Temperature difference between collector and tank
is higher than switch-on difference (solar circulation pump on).
1 Sensor T3 (tank, upper half) is simply a measuring sensor, therefore it is not monitored by the sensor control.
4.3 Settings Menu

Settings menu
Menu item Description Range Base value
T max
Temperature limitation tank, lower half 15 - 90 C 85 C
__C
dT max
Switch-on difference between collector and tank 3 - 40 K 10 K
__K
dT min
Switch-off difference between collector and tank 2 - 35 K 3K
__K
T min
Minimum temperature where analysis of switch-on difference starts 5 - 90 C 10 C
__C
dT
Set point temperature difference the speed control adjusts to 2 - 50 K 10 K
__K
d min Minimum speed of the solar circulation pump

30 - 100% 30%
__ 10% increments
d max
Maximum speed of the solar circulation pump
30 - 100% 100%
__ SECUSOL only!
T start Charge time (s) of the solar heating system with speed 100%; in 10 s increments
20 - 360 s 60 s
__ SECUSOL only!
278 EN-XXX_SUNGO-S_BA-100121-1122P200
4.4 Manual Operation Menu
Manual operation menu
Menu item Description Range Base value
Off = 0 / On = 1
0-1 0
Manual on/off via output A1 (solar circulation pump)
T stop
Activation of manual operation lag time in automatic mode 0 - 600 min 0 min
__
4.5 Special Functions Menu
Within the rst minute after switching on the controller, select the Special Functions menu in order to activate it, so that
the individual parameters can be changed.
After leaving it, the menu remains active for one minute. Afterwards the parameters can only be viewed but not changed.
In order to change the functions again, it is necessary to disconnect the controller from the mains again.
Special functions menu

Menu Application Description Range Base value
item
0 - 1: Standard single-tank system
0 System choice 0 - 2: Cannot be selected! 1 or 3 1
0 - 3: SECUSOL system (see SECUSOL instructions for further info)
Off = 0 / On = 1
1 Activation of system protection. 0 or 1 1
System Protection Cannot be activated with SECUSOL!
2 System protection start temperature 115 - 200 C 135 C
Off = 0 / On = 1
3 Activation of collector cooling. 0 or 1 1
1.4
Collector Cooling Cannot be activated with SECUSOL!
4 Collector cooling start temperature 100 - 150 C 110 C
Off = 0 / On = 1
5 Activation of tank cooling. Only possible with collector cooling. 0 or 1 0
Tank Cooling Cannot be activated with SECUSOL!
6 Switch-off temperature 30 - 90 C 60 C
7 - 10 Menu items 7-10 are not available for the SUNGO S controller
Off = 0 / On = 1
11 0 or 1 0
Activation of vacuum tube collector function
Tube collector
12 function Run time of solar circulation pump from reaching the switch-on value 1 - 60 s 15 s
13 Switch-on value for temperature increase at sensor T1 (collector) 1.0 - 5.0 K 1.0 K
Only expert personnel

should edit the special functions menu.
Incorrect settings may adversely affect the solar heating
system.
EN-XXX_SUNGO-S_BA-100121-1122P200 279
Display of system information
Display Description Correction
!
System Messages
All system messages are displayed with a blinking caution symbol.
Blinking In case of sensor errors the sensor in question is also marked with short circuit or interruption symbols.
!
Interruption
C Displayed sensor or line connection interrupted
Blinking / defunct. Check the resistance value of the sensor and compare
to the resistance table.
Short circuit
Check all contact points up to the sensor.
C !
Blinking
There is a short circuit of the sensor on the
display, the line or the sensor input on the
controller.
dT too high
A xed value of 20 K is added to the Check pump/pump connections/wiring.
!
Blinking
temperature difference between collector (T1)
and tank sensor (T2). The message is displayed
Check system for air, and vent if required.
Check sensors/sensor lines and change sensor if
if after 30 minutes the total temperature required.
difference has not been reduced.
4.7 Service Sensor Control

Resistance values for Pt1000-sensors in relation to the temperature
-10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C 90 C 100 C 110 C
961 1000 1039 1078 1117 1155 1194 1232 1271 1309 1347 1385 1423
The working condition of the sensor can be checked with this table and an Ohm meter.
280 EN-XXX_SUNGO-S_BA-100121-1122P200
5. Application examples
5.1 Single-Tank System
P1: Pump, solar circuit
P3: Pump, aux. heating DHW Exit 230 V Low voltage section
M1: Mixing valve, heating circuit

Collector field
Mains
Oil or gas
boiler
Hot water
Cold water 1.4

Figure 4 Single-tank system DHW preparation
Tvl = Temperature, ow; Ta = Temperature, outside; Ttw = Temperature, domestic hot water
EN-XXX_SUNGO-S_BA-100121-1122P200 281
5.2 Single Tank System with PHE
P1: Pump, solar circuit (primary)

P2: Pump, solar circuit (secondary/DHW)
P3: Pump, heating circuit Exit 230 V Low voltage section
M1: Mixing valve, heating cicuit
BWM: Thermostatic mixing valve Collector field

PWT: Plate heat exchanger Mains
Min. speed A1: 100%
Oil or gas
boiler
Hot water
Cold water
Figure 5 Single storage system with external plate heat exchanger (PWT) for DHW preparation
Tvl = Temperature, ow; Ta = Temperature, outside; Ttw = Temperature, domestic hot water

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, Version SW1203/3.00/ HW3.0
Solar Controller SUNGO SL
1.4
Figure 1 Solar Controller SUNGO SL.
Product Features Contents

Large illuminated display to indicate temperature, bal- 1. Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
ance values and system status with clearly visible sym- 2. General Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . 286
bols for easy readability. 2.1 Installers Qualications . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Easy and safe operation via four buttons for vertical and 2.2 Operating Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 286
horizontal scrolling through the menus. 2.3 Installation and Operating Information . . . . 286
Extensive diagnostics for monitoring system functions, 3. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
eg. sensor cutoff and monitoring of temperature differ- 3.1 Installation of the Housing . . . . . . . . . . 286
ence T too high 3.2 Connecting Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Integrated security functions such as collector cooling, 4. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
storage tank cooling, system protection and vacuum 4.1 Display and Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . 288
tube collector function. 4.2 Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Solar charging of 1 and 2 tank systems 4.3 Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Choice of thermostat function or return temperature 4.4 Manual Operation Menu . . . . . . . . . . 292
increase 4.5 Special Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Balance/reset values 4.6 Service System Messages. . . . . . . . . . 293
5 temperature inputs PT1000 4.7 Service Sensor Control . . . . . . . . . . . 293
1 output, speed-controlled 5. Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
The sensor T5 (solar return) and an external volume 5.1 Single Tank System with Return Boost . . . . . 293
measuring device provide energy measurement in kWh. 5.2 Dual Tank System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Solar Thermal / Solar Circuit EN-XXX_SUNGO-SL_BA-100127-1122P300 283

1. Technical Description Balance Values
In addition to the actual values of the sensors T1 (collector)
Solar Controller SUNGO SL and T2 (tank, bottom) the display also shows balance val-
ues which represent the smallest and biggest temperature
100 % recyclable ABS-housing
Material values for each sensor. After reset the actual temperature
for wall mounting
value is displayed.
Dimensions (L x H x W in mm) 173 x 138 x 51
Protection type IP20 according to VDE 0470 Manual Operation
Rate of radio interference N according to VDE 0875 Allows switching inputs and outputs on or off manually. On
230Volt AC; 50 Hz;
exiting the manual operation menu, the software returns
Operating voltage to automatic operation. The manual operation menu can
-10 % to +15 %
be used for a maximum of 8hours. After that the software
Diameter of cable max. 2.5 mm unilar or nely
for 230V connections stranded automatically switches back to automatic operation and to
the information menu.
Temperature sensor / Pt1000; 1000 at 0 C;
Temperature range Range: -30C to +225C
Manual Lag Function
The cable of the sensor must be
In order to check the temperature values in the information
installed with no tension.
The sensor must not be loaded menu even when the outputs are set manually, a time lag
Sensor load has to be selected in the manual lag function in the manual
mechanically when the
temperature of the collector is operation menu. On exiting the manual operation menu,
more than 60C. this time span passes once and then is set back to zero. In
4kV1min this mode a blinking symbol for the manual operation is
Test voltage
according to VDE 0631 shown in the information menu.
230VoltAC
Switching voltage 1A / ca. 230VA Collector Cooling
Output parameters of switches for cos = 0.7-1.0 The tank is loaded up to the preset temperature limita-
for each output tion which affects sensor T2 (tank, bottom). If the preset
Internal mains protection
Microfuse 5 x 20 mm; temperature limitation is exceeded output A1 (solar circuit
2A/T pump) switches off. If the temperature of T1 (collector)
Operating temperature 0 to +50C / then rises above the selectable standard value of 110 C
(internal) / storage temperature -10 to +65C the solar circuit pump is switched on in order to cool the
Weight ca. 360g collector. It switches off again when the temperature at the
collector sensor has decreased by 10K.
This type of intermittent operation of the solar circuit pump
Solar Charging means that the collector is never or only rarely in an idle
The solar circuit pump is switched on and off by means of a state. If the preset tank temperature limitation is exceeded
temperature difference control. The sensors T1 (collector) by 5 K the collector cooling function is suppressed. The
und T2 (tank, bottom) are required as control elements. system shuts down completely.
The on/off conditions and the temperature limitation can
be variably set in the settings menu. Note: The tempera- Storage Tank Cooling
ture limitation always affects sensor T2 (tank, bottom). Storage Tank Cooling means that if necessary the tank
temperature can be reduced down to a preset lowest
Speed Control switching off value (setting for vacations).
The solar circuit pump can be controlled via speed control When the collector cooling function is activated storage
(in this case by half wave control). This means that individ- tank cooling will also become active.
ual sine half-waves in the alternate current are switched on In order for storage tank cooling to become active the fol-
or off depending on the temperature difference. Therefore lowing 3 conditions must be met:
the speed can be altered within a range of 30-100 % which 1. Temperature T2 (tank, bottom) must be higher than or
results in longer system run times. The minimum speed equal to the preset tank temperature limitation plus 2K.
can be custom set. 2. Temperature T2 (tank, bottom) must be higher than the
preset switching off value for storage tank cooling.
Sensor T3 (Tank, Top) 3. Temperature T1 (collector) must be lower than tempera-
Sensor T3 (tank, top) has different functions. By default it is ture T2 (tank, bottom) minus 10K.
the measuring sensor for the top of the tank. In that case In order for storage tank cooling to switch off one of the
it has no switch function and is not monitored by the diag- following 2 conditions must be met:
nostics system. 1. Temperature T2 (tank, bottom) is lower than the switch-
With the return temperature increase function activated ing off value for storage tank cooling.
it functions as a hot sensor (source). With the thermostat 2. Temperature T1 (collector) must be higher than tem-
heating with additional sensor function activated it func- perature T2 (tank, bottom) minus 2K.
tions as an additional sensor. In both cases this sensor is
used in the hot area of the tank and affects switching out-
put A2.
If used in this way the sensor function is monitored as nor-
mal by the diagnostics system.
284 EN-XXX_SUNGO-SL_BA-100127-1122P300
Vacuum Tube Collector Function Thermostat
The vacuum tube collector function allows operation The thermostat function for switching on can be set at a
of the solar heating system even if sensor T1 (collector) range between 0 to 130 C with a variable difference be-
is installed in the connecting pipe of the collector. If the tween 1 to 40 K for switching off. Choose between the op-
temperature increase at sensor T1 exceeds the preset tions heating and cooling.
switching on value for the collector temperature increase With the heating option activated output A2 switches on if
(standard: 1K) the solar circuit pump is switched on for the the current temperature T4 falls below the preset switch-
duration of a preset lag time (standard: 15s). ing on level. Output A2 switches off if the current tempera-
During this time the switching on difference and the solar ture T4 is higher than the switch-on level plus the switch-off
charge between sensor T1 (collector) and sensor T 2 (tank, difference.
bottom) has to be activated, otherwise the solar circuit With the heating option an additional sensor T3 can be acti-
pump will switch off again. vated. If this is the case A2 is only switched on if temperature
The rise in temperature at sensor T1 (collector) is measured T3 is higher than the switching on level plus the switching
again immediately after the last runtime of the pump. off difference plus the additional difference for T3.
With the cooling option activated output A2 switches on
System Messages if the current temperature T4 falls below the preset switch
The system messages for interrupted or shorted-out sen- level. Output A2 switches off if the current temperature T4
sors are represented by symbols on the display. For better is lower than the switch level minus the switching off dif-
recognition of the system message the display illumina- ference.
tion switches on and off every second as long as the error There are 3 independent time windows available for the
prevails and no key entry is made. thermostat. If no time window is activated time window1
has to be set to 0:00 and 23:59.
Triac
The Triac is an electronic on/off switch for the 230 V out- Return Flow Boost
puts of the SUNGO Controller. This is a freely adjustable temperature difference for sim-
Function: A triac switch consists of 2 diodes which can be ple heating support which leads the heating return-ow T4
switched anti-parallel (= antiparallel thyristors). The thyris- (drain) to the heating boiler, either directly or via the solar
tors switch through the positive or negative sine half-wave tank, depending on the preset temperature difference to
as long as a switching on difference exists. The triac switch the tank sensor T3 (source) , by switching the 3way valve
switches off when the temperature falls below the switch- on output A2.
ing-off difference. Note: In addition to the switching phase (black) on out-
put A2, the switching head also requires a constant phase 1.4
System Protection (brown).
In order to protect the system components (solar circuit
pump, 2 or 3 way valves etc.) in the solar heating circuit SECUSOL Function
from extremely high temperatures the solar charge is The solar heating system is operated on a drain back prin-
stopped completely if a temperature limit at the collector ciple. This means if the solar circuit pump is not activated
sensor is exceeded, even if this was permitted on account there is no solar uid in the collectors and risers. See SE-
of a temperature difference between sensor T1 (collector) CUSOL instructions for further details.
and sensor T2 (tank, bottom).
The standard temperature value for activating the system Measuring the Yield
protection function is 135 C. However, this value can be For measurements of the solar yield in kWh. The heat yield
variably set within a range of 115 to 200 C. is measured with a volume ow metre connected to input
T7, an additional sensor T5 (return) and the existing sensor
Dual Tank Operation T1 (collector).
The SUNGO SL is capable of controlling a dual tank system
by using output A2 for switching between tanks with the
help of a 3way valve. Change the menu item 0 1 to 0 2
in order to control a dual tank system.
Note: If the dual tank option is selected menu item 10 can
no longer be activated.
Preference
The SUNGO SL always uses tank 1 as a preference for the
dual tank option. This cannot be changed.
EN-XXX_SUNGO-SL_BA-100127-1122P300 285
2. General Safety Guidelines 2.3 Installation and
The following safety advice is designed to protect you Operating Information
from dangers that can arise from improper handling of Any installation and wiring work has to be carried out
devices, whether intentional or otherwise. A distinction is in an idle state as during operation the voltage on the
made between general advice presented here and spe- outside of the triacs is 230V.
cic advice presented throughout the guidelines. Mains power must be connected to the control from
outside the solar station via an external ON/OFF Switch.
This is also required to activate the special functions
menu through switching the mains power ON/OFF.
DANGER for danger to the person Operating temperatures above 50 C are not permitted
Improper electrical installation of the device can lead to for the control.
potentially fatal electric shocks as well as other health haz- LCD display panels are designed in such a way that a
ards. specic reading position is required. When installing
the control, be careful to place the display so that it is
at eye level or slightly higher. This way you can ensure
optimal display contrast.
CAUTION for danger to property The base of the control is divided into a safety low volt-
This symbol indicates dangers that can result in damage to age section and a 230 V section by a crosspiece. Make
the components or the function of the control. sure that you do not confuse these sections during the
installation process.
The default operating mode is the automatic mode.
Manual operation is used only for functional testing
NOTE for additional information of the different hydraulic components (pump, 2/3way
This symbol indicates practical advice and tricks of the valve). In this operating mode maximum temperatures
trade which will be useful for installing and operating the or sensor functions are not monitored.
control. Do not operate the system if the control, the wiring or
the connected 230 V mains are visibly damaged.
The control is tted with a mains microfuse.
2.1 Installers Qualications Collectors and hydraulic pipework can get extremely
hot during sunny periods. There is a risk of scalding
Setting up and commissioning of the SUNGO SL must when tting the collector temperature sensor.
be carried out by a qualied installer.
All national and local safety regulations need to be com-
plied with. 3. Installation
Please note that in case of a complaint the guarantee is
only valid if correct commissioning has been certied in 3.1 Installation of the Case
a commissioning report.
Opening the Case
No tools are required to open the control case. The lid
2.2 Operating Requirements folds over on top of the lower half. You can dislodge and
lift up the lid by pulling gently on the side clips.
Application When fully opened the lid will not move so that you can
Controlling solar thermal systems through the selection take care of mounting and wiring comfortably.
of applicable control patterns and additional functions
to adapt the control for the required operation of the Wall Mounting
hydraulic system. Use the supplied drilling template to drill the xing
The control must only be operated in dry rooms. holes for the controller.
The control can be integrated into the solar circulation Mount the control to the wall.
unit or mounted on the wall. Do not overtighten the screws to avoid damage to the
lower part of the housing.
Limitations of Use
If used in a non-solar thermal application the functionality
of the control has to be checked before commissioning.
If in doubt contact the control service of Wagner & Co.
If these operating requirements are not observed any
claims under the warranty will not be accepted.
Installation in the Solar Circulation Unit 230 V Mains Connection
With the screws mount the SUNGO SL on the wall hold- Mains power is connected from out-
er of the solar circulation unit. side the control via an ON/OFF Switch.
Break out the cable feeds which are located on the base This switch is not required if mains power is with a pro-
housing next to the crosspiece. tective plug to a socket.
Strip the 230 V cables in a way that the insulated single The control is suitable for mains operation at approx.
cables start directly at the feed to the base housing. 230V/50Hz.
Hold cable clamps steady when screwing tight in order All earth wires are connected to the PE terminals.
to minimise pressure on the circuit board. There is a The neutral terminals (N) are connected electrically.
danger of the terminals to be torn off! Switching output A1 is a 230 V normally open contact
Finally connect to mains power. which is activated via speed-control. Switching output
When the control is switched on the voltage on the tri- A2 is purely a normally open contact.
acs housing is 230V AC.
Connecting the Temperature Sensors
The wires of the temperature sensors can be extended:
3.2 Connecting Wires Up to 15m length, 2 x 0.5mm cable can be used, be-
yond 15 m and up to 50m 2 x 0.75 mm is necessary.
Layout of the SUNGO SL Connections Shielded cables should be used for long connections
All electrical connections are made to the circuit board at to the collector.
the bottom of the control. The sensor connections (safety Do not connect the shielding at the sensor end, just
low voltage) are located on the right hand side and the trim and isolate.
230 V mains connections and the switching outputs A1 The polarity of the temperature sensors is irrelevant and
and A2 on the left hand side. they can be connected either way.
The sensor wires must be installed separately from
General Connection Rules 230V mains cables.
If exible wires are used and the control is wall mount-
ed, a strain relief must be xed within or outside of the Lightning Protector Module
control. The SUNGO SL is tted with spike protection on all sensor
In this case you must crimp the wire ends. terminals. Generally, further protection of the tank sensors
If required PG9 screws can be xed at the feed-throughs is not required.
in case of wall mounting. Sensor T1 (collector) should be tted with the sensor con-
nection box SP2 with an overvoltage protection. 1.4
ControllerIC Plug for Display
FUSE 5X20
Triac
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T7
Trafo
PE-PE A2 A1 L1 M M M M M M
PE-PE N N N
Potential Earth Collector sensor, T1
Switching output Tank sensor, bottom, T2
Solar circuit pump Tank sensor, top /

Additional thermostat sensor /
Mains L1 return flow boost (source)
Thermostat /
return flow boost (sink), T4
Heat meter (yield), return flow sensor, T5
Volume flow meter for yield measurement, T7
Figure 2 SUNGO SL circuit board components.
4. Operation
Settings menu Manual operation menu
Information menu Special functions menu
Temperature difference
Balance or
start / stop values
Numerical display for temp. dT min max start stop
88888
or sensor errors Units
C %
Collector temperature
x KWh Tank temp., top/
thermostat additional sensor
Temperature thermostat/
R
R return flow boost (sink)
Time slot thermostat
Symbol for reset value Tank temp., mid section/
return flow boost (source)
!
Tank temp., bottom
ok? Confirm and
Pump ON/ save symbol
Pump OFF
System error
Output A1
Output A2
Horizontal operating level
Settings menu
as an example
Vertical
operating level
T max
R 2 dT min
Switching off diff. T3 - T4,
return temperature increase __K __C Temperature limitation tank, bottom
R2 dT max dT max
Switching on diff. T3 - T4,
return temperature increase __K __K Switching on difference T1 - T2, solar
R2 T min dT min
Min temp. level,
return temperature increase __C __K Switching off difference T1 - T2, solar
R2 T max T min
Temp. limitation,
return temperature increase __C __C Min. temp. source 1.4
3
stop dT
Stop time window 3, thermostat __:__ __K Design temp. diff. speed control, solar
3
start d min
1
Start time window 3, thermostat __:__ Min. speed, solar circuit pump
d max
2
stop
Stop time window 2, thermostat __:__ __ Max. speed solar circuit pump (SECUSOL)
T start
2
start
Start time window 2, xx thermostat __:__ __ Charge time solar heating system (SECUSOL)
I
stop
Stop time window 1, thermostat __:__ __:__ Current time
Start time window 1, thermostat __:__

start
I 4 __C Switching on temperature, thermostat
4
dT
__K Switching off temperature, thermostat

dT
__K Difference additional sensor T3, thermostat
Set values
Activate Increase Decrease Activate Save

value value value save function value
Information menu
Menu item Description Display
Collector temperature; Current value C

__C
min
Collector temperature; Balance; minimum, resettable C
__C
max
Collector temperature; Balance; maximum, resettable C
__C
Tank temperature, bottom; Current value C

__C
min
Tank temperature, bottom; Balance; minimum, resettable C
__C
max
Tank temperature, bottom; Balance; maximum, resettable C
__C
Tank temperature, top; Current value C

__C
Operating hours, total; Balance h

__h
R operating hours since last reset; Balance, display, resettable h

R __h
1 Tank temperature 1 or 2, bottom;

2
C
__C (if 2 tank system is selected) Current value
min
C
2
__C (if 2 tank system is selected) Balance; minimum, resettable
max
2
C
__C (if 2 tank system is selected) Balance; maximum, resettable
1 Operating hours tank 1 or 2, total;

2
h
__h (if 2 tank system is selected) Balance
1 R operating hours tank 1 or 2

2 h
R __h since last reset; (if 2 tank system is selected) Balance; display, resettable
Thermostat or return temperature increase (drain); Current value C

__C
Heat meter return;

R C
__C (ow value corresponds to collector temperature) Current value
Heat meter total yield; Balance kWh

__kWh
R heat meter since last reset; Balance, display, resettable kWh

R __kWh
1
2
Heat meter, tank 1 or 2, total; Balance kWh
__kWh
1 R heat meter, tank 1 or 2

2 kWh
R __kWh since last reset; Balance, display, resettable
Pump symbol idle: Operating symbol

Temperature difference (collector, tank) is smaller than required
to activate the solar circuit pump. The solar circuit pump is off.
Rotating pump symbol: Operating symbol
Temperature difference (collector, tank) is sufcient to activate
the solar circuit pump. The solar circuit pump is running.
4.3 Settings Menu
Settings menu
Menu item Description Range Default setting
T max
Temperature limitation tank, bottom 15 90 C 85 C
__C
dT max
Switching on difference between collector and tank 3 40 K 5K
__K
dT min
Switching off difference between collector and tank 2 35 K 3K
__K
T min
Min. temp. above which the switching difference is analyzed 5 90 C 10 C
__C
1 T max
Temperature limitation tank 1 or 2, bottom 15 90 C 85 C
2 __C
1 dT max
Switching on difference between collector and tank 1 or 2 3 40 K 10 K
2 __K
1 dT min
Switching off difference between collector and tank 1 or 2 2 35 K 3K
2 __K
dT
Design temperature difference the speed control adjusts to 2 50 K 10 K
__K
d min Minimum speed of the solar circuit pump

30 100% 30%
1 __ 10 % increments
d max Maximum speed of the solar circuit pump

30 100% 100%
__ Only with SECUSOL!
T start
Charge time (s) of the solar heating system with speed 100 %; in 10s increments
20 360 s 60 s
__ Only with SECUSOL! 1.4
__:__ Set current time (keep button pressed for faster run-through) 0:00-23:59 0:00
Switching on temperature thermostat 1 0 130 C 30 C

__C
dT
Switching off difference thermostat 1 1 40 K 5K
__K
dT
Additional sensor difference for tank, top, can be selected in heating function. 1 3 20 K 10 K
__K
start
__:__ I Start time slot1, thermostat 1 0:00-23:59 0:00
stop
__:__ I Stop time slot1, thermostat 1 0:00-23:59 23:59
start
__:__ 2 Start time slot2, thermostat 1 0:00-23:59 0:00
stop
__:__ 2 Stop time slot2, thermostat 1 0:00-23:59 0:00
start
__:__ 3 Start time slot3, thermostat 1 0:00-23:59 0:00
stop
__:__ 3 Stop time slot3, thermostat 1 0:00-23:59 0:00
T max
R2
Temperature limitation return temperature increase 2 15 90 C 85 C
__C
T min
R2
Minimum temperature from which the switching on difference is read 2 15 90 C 20 C
__C
R 2 dT max Switching on difference return temperature increase between temperature

3 40 K 4K
__K measure location T3 and T4 2
R 2 dT min Switching off difference return temperature increase between temperature

2 35 K 2K
__K measure location T3 and T4 2
1 Only available if heating or cooling thermostat is used.
2 Only available if return temperature increase is used.
4.4 Manual Operation Menu
Manual operation menu
Menu item Description Range Default setting
Off = 0 / On = 1
01 0
Switching the solar circuit pump on or off manually (A1)
Off = 0 / On = 1
01 0
Switching output A2 on or off manually (RLA or thermostat)
T stop
Activation of manual operation lag time in automatic mode 0 600 min 0 min
__

During the rst minute after switching on the control
activate the special functions menu by selecting it so that parameters can be altered. The menu stays active for 1minute
after exiting it.
On exiting the menu the parameters can only be viewed but not changed again. Place the control in the idle position
once again if you need to alter any functions.
Special functions menu

Menu Application Description Range Default
item setting
0 1: Standard single tank system
0 System choice 0 2: Standard dual tank system 13 1
0 3: SECUSOL system (see SECUSOL instructions for further info)
Off = 0 / On = 1
1 System Activation of system protection. 0 or 1 1
Protection Cannot be activated with SECUSOL!
2 System protection start temperature 115 200 C 135 C
Off = 0 / On = 1
3 Activation of collector cooling. 0 or 1 1
Collector Cooling Cannot be activated with SECUSOL!
4 Collector cooling start temperature 100 150 C 110 C
Off = 0 / On = 1
5 Storage tank Activation of tank cooling. Only possible with collector cooling. 0 or 1 0
Cooling Cannot be activated with SECUSOL!
6 Switching off temperature 30 90 C 60 C
Off = 0 / On = 1
7 0 or 1 0
Activation of yield measurement
Frost protection type
8 8-1: DC20 for standard systems 1 or 2 1
Measuring
8-2: DC40 for vacuum tube collectors (ready mix)
the Yield
Glycol fraction in %.
0% = No Glycol (pure water)
9 0 100 % 40 %
100 % = Pure Glycol (no water)
Note: Glycol fraction for solar circuit can only be selected with DC20!
10 0: Additional functions off
10 1: Thermostat, heating
Function
10 10 2: Thermostat, heating with additional sensor T3 (tank, top) 04 0
selection
10 3: Thermostat, cooling
10 4: return temperature increase
Off = 0 / On = 1
11 0 or 1 0
Activation of vacuum tube collector function
Vacuum Tube
12 collector function Run time of solar circuit pump from reaching the switching on value 1 60 s 15 s
13 Switching on value for temperature increase at sensor T1 (collector) 1.0 5.0 K 1.0 K
The special functions menus should only be edited by expert personnel. Incorrect settings may adversely affect the solar heating system.
System information with display
Display Description Remedy
!
System messages
All system messages are displayed with a blinking caution symbol. In case of sensor errors the sensor in
Blinking question is also marked with short circuit or interruption symbol.
!
Interruption
C The sensor on the display or the pipe is
Blinking interrupted. Test the resistance value of the sensors and compare with
the tables.
Check all connections to the sensor.
!
Short circuit
C There is a short circuit on the sensor on the
Blinking display, the cable or the output on the control.
dT too high
Check wiring to the pump
!
A value of 20K is added to the switch-on
Check system for air and vent if required
difference between T1 and T2. The message
Check sensors and sensor wiring, replace sensors if
Blinking is displayed if after 30 minutes the total
required
difference has not been reduced.
4.7 Service Sensor Control

Resistance values for Pt1000 sensors in relation to the temperature
-10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C 90 C 100 C 110 C
961 1000 1039 1078 1117 1155 1194 1232 1271 1309 1347 1385 1423
The working condition of the sensor can be checked with this table and an Ohm meter.
5. Application examples 1.4

5.1 Single Tank System with Return Boost
P3: Tank charging pump
Vr: Switch-over valve for return temperature increase Collector field
T1: Collector sensor
T2: Tank sensor, bottom SUNGO SL
T3: Tank sensor, middle
T4: Sensor heating return-flow T3 T2 T4 T1 T1
T5:
T7:
Yield measurement, return flow sensor
Yield measurement, volume flow metre
A2 A1
Version 1 TERMO Combi Cylinder
Hot water
Cold water
Heating circuit
TERMO
Ttw
T3 P3 P2
P1
CIRCO
T2 Vr
A B Oil or gas
boiler
AB
T4
Measuring the yield
Collector field
T1 T5
Solar
T7 return-flow
Figure 3 System solution for DHW preparation and space heating support. The SUNGO SL controller takes charge of storage loading and controls
the 3 way diverter valve for the return ow boost.
5.2 Dual Tank System
P2: Heating circuit pump Collector field
P3: Tank charging pump
Vu: Switch-over valve, tank charging
SUNGO SL T1
T2:
T3:
Tank 1 sensor, bottom
Tank 1 sensor, top
T3 T2 T4 T1
T4: Tank 2 sensor, bottom A2 A1
T5: Yield measurement, return flow sensor
T7: Yield measurement, volume flow metre
Heating circuit
Ttw P1
CIRCO
T3
P2
ECOplus
P3
Oil or gas T2 T4
boiler
AB
A
M B
Vu
Measuring the yield
Collector field
Hot water
T1 T5
Solar
Cold water
T7 return-flow
Figure 4 System solution for DHW preparation. The SUNGO SL controller takes charge of loading a bivalent (2 heat exchangers) storage and the
monovalent (single heat exchanger) storage connected upstream to it.

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Solar Controller SUNGO SXL
Figure 1 Solar controller SUNGO SXL
Large illuminated display to show temperature levels, System for large scale preheating buffers.
check values and system status. With clearly visible sym- Preselection of two thermostat functions, return ow 1.4
bols for easy readability. boost, and temperature difference control.
Easy and safe handling via four buttons. Vertical and Data logging functionality.
horizontal scrolling through menus. Eight temperature inputs Pt1000, one pulse input, and
Various preset hydraulic systems available one sensor for solar irradiation
Extensive diagnostics to check system functions, e.g. Six outputs in total with one speed-controlled to adjust
sensor cutoff or temperature difference dT too high. owrates.
Built in safety functionality such as collector cooling, Possibilty to log the yield in kWh by using an external
storage tank cooling, system protection and vacuum ow meter and sensor T6 (solar return)
tube collector function. Optional DATAstick for updating rmware and logging
Controlled solar heat storage and buffering with up to and transfering data for further investigation and sys-
3 cylinders using up to 2 independent collector elds. tem diagnostics.
System with mixed heating circuit for efcient usage of The menues are provided in six languages.
solar and pellet heating.
Select language,
see page 320
Contents
1. Overview of Preset Hydraulic Systems . . . . . 296 5. Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
2. System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 5.1 Display and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
2.1 Explanation of System Depictions . . . . . . . 298 5.2 Initial Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
2.2 Description of Special Functions . . . . . . . 300 5.3 Special Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 321
2.3 Description of Additional Functions . . . . . . 303 5.4 Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
2.4 System Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 5.5 Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
3. General Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . 314 5.6 Manual Mode Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
3.1 Operator/Installer Qualications . . . . . . . 314 6. Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
3.2 Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 7. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
3.3 Installation and Operating Information . . . . 314 8. Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
4. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 8.1 Service Message Log . . . . . . . . . . . 333
4.1 Attaching Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 8.2 Service System Messages. . . . . . . . . . 334
4.2 Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 8.3 Service Sensor Check . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Solar Thermal / Solar Circuit EN-XXX_SUNGO-SXL_TI-MA-BA-0707xx-1122P400 295

1. System Components Overview
Meaning of the System Codes 12xx = SUNGO SXL software package

The SUNGO SXL system codes consist of 4 digits. The rst xx1x = 1-tank systems
two digits 1 2 designate the SUNGO SXL software. The xx2x = 2-tank systems
third digit identies the possible system types. The fourth xx3x = 3-tank systems
digit is for the numeric sequence of the associated systems xx4x = Heating systems with solar loading
per type. xx5x = Large scale solar installations
Function Systems
1211 (page 304) 1212 (page 305) 1213 (page 306)
1-tank system with one collector 1-tank system with bypass (valve or 1-tank system with two collector
eld plate heat exchanger) and one elds
collector eld
Return ow boost X X X
Thermostat A X X X
Thermostat B X X
Degermination X X X
Def. control X
Yield measurement X X X
Pool protection X X
Function Systems
1221 (page 307) 1222 (page 308) 1223 (page 309)
2-tank system with one collector 2-tank system with bypass (valve or 2-tank system (pool + drinking
eld plate heat exchanger) and one water tank) with one collector eld
collector eld
Return ow boost X X X
Thermostat A X X
Thermostat B X X
Degermination X X
Def. control X
Yield measurement X X X
Pool protection X
296 EN-XXX_SUNGO-SXL_TI-MA-BA-0707xx-1122P400
Function Systems
1224 (page 310) 1231 (page 311)
2-tank system with two collector elds 3-tank system with one collector eld
Return ow boost X
Thermostat A X
Thermostat B
Degermination X X
Def. control X
Yield measurement X X
Pool protection
Function Systems
1.4
1241 (page 312) 1251 (page 313)
Controlled mixed circuit with solar heating support 2-tank system with bypass and a preheating-buffertank-
(1 tank / 1 collector eld) system
Return ow boost
Thermostat A
Thermostat B X
Degermination X
Def. control X X
Yield measurement X X
Pool protection
EN-XXX_SUNGO-SXL_TI-MA-BA-0707xx-1122P400 297
2. Select System
2.1 Explanation of the System Schematics

P2: Heating circuit pump E3 E7 E2 E8 E1
P3: Storage loading pump
Vr: Switching valve for return flow boost A6 A1
Collector field
2
T2: Tank sensor
T3: Tank sensor
T7:
T8:
Ttw:
Return flow boost sensor T7
Return flow boost sensor T8
Boosting sensor
3 T1
Variation 1 TERMO combi tank
Hot water
Cold water
1 Heating circuit
TERMO
T3
Ttw
T7
P3 P2 P1
CIRCO
T2
Vr
A B Oil or gas
heating boiler
AB
4
T8
Standard System (Explained with Example 1211)

Each system available in the controller is shown with the The key explains abbreviations in plain text.
most important hydraulic and electrical components,
making it possible to set up a functional system (de- Use the electrical connection lines to trace the inputs
tailed hydraulic wiring diagrams are available from the (E1-E10) and the outputs (A1 - A6) to the actual sen-
technical customer service department). sors and sensor positions as well as the actual consumer
loads (pumps or valves).
IMPORTANT The systems shown on the following pages
are descriptive diagrams and may not include all com- The 10 systems use 2-/3-way valves 4012/4013 by Hon-
ponents, shut-off and safety devices needed for proper eywell. The electrical wiring is shown for these valves
assembly and installation. Always comply with all corre- (see also datasheet 2-/3-Way Valve).
sponding and applicable standards and guidelines. Electrical connection: Brown = constant phase; black =
switching phase; blue = neutral wire.
Hydraulic connection: Power off, position is AB to B.
Power on Positon is AB to A.
Other hydraulic valves may cause functional problems or

increase hydraulic/electrical effort.
FUSE 5X20
3
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 L1
M M M M M M M M M M
PE-PE-PE N N N N N N N
Potential Ground 2
4
A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 Mains E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10
230 V outputs Sensor inputs
Mains Sensor input /

irradiation sensor
Volume meter
Controller Connection
Hardware position and actual designation of the 230 V In the respective system, inputs are shown with the des-
switching outputs A1 to A6. ignation E1 to E10 and not only with numbers 1 to 10 as
The respective 230 V outputs are then also shown with it is done on the board.
the designation A1 to A6.
Hardware position and actual designation of sensor, ir- The connection lines can be used to trace the input E1 to 1.4
radiation sensor, and volume meter inputs. sensor T1.
Input E1 usually corresponds with sensor T1, etc.
ECOplus RATIO with RATIOfresh
Storage Tank Options

The most common system option is shown in the drawn-in
RATIO-H PG
rectangular window in the standard system (for system T3
1211: here TERMO tank). T3
Of course, the same basic system can also be applied to
alternative storage systems (here: RATIO storage tank,
T7
ECOplus drinking water storage tank). However, certain ECOplus
hydraulic functions are reduced in the basic system (1211,

RATIOfresh
e.g.: return ow boost function is hydraulically not pos- T2

sible with drinking water storage tank. The controller func-
T2
tion on the other hand is available for other applications as
free temperature difference).
Special Functions
Possible options concerning the system selected in System Selection, Special Functions are shown graphically under-
neath the standard system. The required inputs and outputs are labeled. The respective options are described in detail
starting on page 300. They have to be enabled in the Special Functions menu.
Yield
Return flow boost Thermostat A Thermostat B Degermination Control option (def. control) measurement Pool protection
Heating circuit
A4 T7** T1** T5
T3 T4 A5 A2
T8 Boiler Circulation T3** Boiler
Temp. difference Solar flow Solar Pool
T7 T8** or thermostat F
A3 E10 T6
Solar return
A6
Layout of system 1211 Tx** = a sensor (T1 to T8) can be selected here
2.2 Description of the Special Functions
Language
Selection of language for the controller menu and displays
(German, Dutch, Italian, French, Spanish, and English)
System selection
Selection from 10 possible systems
(1211, 1212, 1213, 1221, 1222, 1223, 1224, 1231, 1241, 1251)
Bypass Bypass
For systems with bypass, solar loading of buffers does not take place until the solar circuit
ow (T9) has reached a sufcient temperature. The bypass can be realized with a valve or a
plate heat exchanger (PHE) and a secondary circuit pump. With option Valve and PHE,
CIRCO
ECOplus
output A2 is switched on when the preset temp. difference T9 to either T2, T4 or T5 is
T9 reached. However, with option PHE the solar circuit pump is not speed-controlled but the
T2 secondary circuit pump instead. The speed of the solar circuit pump has to be set to 100%
A2 volume ow if desired (see special function Primary circuit).
Valve PHE
Tube collector
The tube collector function makes it possible to operate the solar system if the collector
sensor is mounted inside of the connection line of the connector. The delta T option is
automatically activated if an irradiation sensor is not connected.
In this case, the solar circuit pump is switched on acc. to a specic temperature increase
which is detected by sensor T1. The solar circuit pump remains switched on for the set
runtime and is switched off if the preset temp. difference between heat sink and solar circuit
is not reached.
It is also possible to select the Irradiation option if the irradiation sensor is connected. This
means the solar circuit pump is switched on for a short time when irradiation exceeds the
threshold value. The irradiation threshold value can be adjusted by the controller auto-
adaptively.
Return flow boost Return ow boost (temperature difference control)

Heating circuit Simple heating support that leads the return ow of the heating circuit (T8) directly to the
heating boiler or to the solar tank by switching the 3-way valve with output A6 in
dependence of the set temperature difference to the tank sensor (T7).
T8 Boiler
T7
A6
Thermostat A Thermostat A (adjustable switching threshold)

Thermostat A offers the options Heating and Cooling by preselecting.
With the option Heating output A3 switches on when the temperature T4 falls below the set
T3 T4 switch-on temperature. The output switches off when the temperature T4 is greater than the
Circulation switch-on temperature plus the switch-off difference.
A3 With the Variation Cooling output A3 switches on when the temperature T4 exceeds a
preset temperature to switch on. The output switches off when the temperature T4 is less
than the switch-on temperature minus the switch-off difference.
An additional sensor can be activated with the Heating Variation. The output is then only
switched on when the temperature T3 is greater than the switch-on temperature plus the
switch-off difference plus the additional sensor switching difference. E.g. that is useful if
circulation shouldnt run in case there is not enough heat stored.
Independent time windows can be specied for thermostat A. The conditions listed above
are only interpreted within the respective time window.
Thermostat B Thermostat B (adjustable switching threshold)

Thermostat B offers the options Heating and Cooling by preselecting.
A4 The temperature sensor to be used for the thermostat function can be freely selected. With
the Heating Variation, output A4 (system 1241: A3) switches on when the temperature at
T3** Boiler
the sensor falls below the set switch-on temperature. The output switches off when the
temperature is greater than the switch-on temperature plus the switch-off difference.
With the Variation Cooling, output A4 switches on when the temperature exceeds the set
switch-on temperature. The output switches off when the temperature is less than the
switch-on temperature minus the switch-off difference.
Three independent time windows can be specied for thermostat B.
Degermination Degermination
To avoid or prevent the spread of legionella bacteria in drinking water, some system setups
(depending on local rules and regulations) require the use this function. Once activated, this
A5 function heats the entire drinking water tank to at least 60 C once a day. The adjustable start
time, heating duration, and switch-off temperature are used to modify this function.
Output A5 is only activated if the set target temperature was not already reached during the
previous 20 hrs, e.g. by solar heating. The reference temperature is measured at the bottom
of the drinking water tank (T2, layout 1251: T8).
Note: The ow temperature of the boiler must be adjusted to the required heating
conditions.
Control option (def. control) Control option (def. control)

(adjustable switching threshold or temperature difference control)
With the control option function, it is possible to select either temperature difference
T7**
A2 control or thermostat function. The temperature sensor can be freely assigned in this case.
Temp. difference The temperature difference control offers a choice of the following options: On and off
T8** or thermostat F switching difference, max. temperature for sink (sensor 2), and min. temperature for source
(sensor 1).
Thermostat F corresponds with thermostat A. Three independent time windows can be
specied for thermostat F or the difference controller.
Yield measurement Yield measurement

Intended to determine the solar yield in kWh. A volume meter and a second measuring
sensor are used to calculate the generated amount of heat. The sensor that is used to
T1** measure the ow temperature can be freely selected (e.g. collector sensor).
Solar Note: Use the option FV instead of the usual HQM to measure the yield without a volume
flow
meter. This option works with a xed volume ow entered into the controller and can
T6
therefore only be used as a function check. The exact determination of the amount of heat is
Solar not possible with the DFM option. The solar circuit pump should also be operated with a
E10 return
xed speed when using this option.
System protection
The solar circuit pump is switched off when the set collector temperature has been
exceeded.
Collector cooling 1.4
The solar circuit pump is switched off when the tank has been heated up to the tank limit
temperature. If the collector temperature rises to the set start temperature, the solar circuit
pump is switched on again until the collector temperature has dropped by the switch-off
difference.
This additional interval loading of the tank ensures that the collector does not stagnate too
often. The system switches off entirely when the tank limit temperature has been exceeded
by 5 K.
Tank cooling
If the tank cooling function is active, the solar circuit pump is switched on if the collector
temperature drops below the tank temperature by 2 K. The excess energy in the tank is
dispersed via the collector until the value drops below the set switch-off temperature. The
tank cooling function can be activated only if the collector cooling function is switched on.
Pool protection Pool protection

The pool protection uses a measuring sensor to monitor the ow temperature of the
secondary circuit for the pool heating. If the temperature at the measuring sensor (T5, layout
T5
1223: T9) exceeds the set switch-off threshold, solar heating is interrupted. The interruption
is saved as a system message (see menu option Special functions, Messages).
Solar Pool
Primary circuit (only for systems with bypass and PHE option)
Setting the (xed) speed of the solar circuit pump.
Details for system 1241 (page 312)
System 1241 with a combinend solar / heating system with storage tank/combi tank as
hydraulic switch and with a heating circuit is able to cover all important control functions:
Solar storage heating (single tank system)
Boiler heating of the permanent buffer part in the tank with thermostat B
Thermostat B is already active with system 1241 (default setting: Option Heating
switch-on temperature 50 C). With system 1241, hot water heating has priority, which
means that the heating circuit pump (output A2) is switched off and the heating circuit
mixing valve will be closed completely if thermostat B switches on boiler demand (A3).
Boiler demand for room heating acc. to heating curve
The heating demand for heating the middle storage zone (T4) is based on the set values
for the heating curve and the desired excess temperature in the buffer storage.
The tank loading pump (e.g. when using the LIGNOplus pellet boiler) can be controlled
with the help of the control option. Just select the temperature difference control option
and mount a sensor to measure the boiler temperature (T7). As soon as the boiler
temperature exceeds the switch-on difference in the middle of the tank,the tank loading
pump is switched on. The control option is not active in the default setting for system 1241.
Mixing valve actuation for a heating circuit acc. to heating curve (see below).
Speed control of the heating circulation pump (see below, correspond with the
CIRcontroller in the function).
Heating curve Heating curve (only for system 1241)

The weather-based control of a mixed heating circuit is carried out by determining the
heating curve here. The heating circuit mixing valve is controlled according to the heating
curve and the measured outdoor temperature. Lowering times as well as the modes Auto,
T5 T9 Summer, Party and Emission (Chimneysweep) can be activated to this purpose in the
menu settings.
The excess temperature in the storage tank (sensor T4) compared with the heating circuit
A4/5 ow can be specied here as well. If values drop below ow temperature plus excess
temperature in the storage tank, output A3 is used to trigger the boiler.
Flow temp. Heating limit: Ta average > Ta, max

Heating
curve
VL. Tmax = 70
Tmax limit flow
60
50 Offset
40 Tmin limit flow
VL. Tmin = 30
20
10 3K
Ambient
-24 -20 -16 -12 -8 -4 0 4 8 12 16 24 temperature
-15 = Ta, min 15 = Ta, max
Heating pump Heat pump (only for system 1241)

The speed of the heating circuit pump can be adjusted to save electricity when operating the
heat pump for low return temperatures. A setpoint for the temperature difference between
ow and return of the heating circuit is set as the default value.
T5 T8 A value below 100% (default setting) must then be selected for the min. speed of the pump.
A2 The bypass valve marked in the diagram between the heating ow and return should allow
for a low ow when the heating appliance valves are closed.
Only step-switchable circulation pumps without integrated electronic control can be
connected to the controller outputs with speed control!
Damage is possible when directly connecting electronically controlled pumps!
Mixed circuit Heating circuit mixing valve (only for system 1241)
The runtime of the mixing valve (datasheet) and the cycle time for actuating the heating
circuit mixing valve are set here.
T5 T9
A4/5
Control time
The control time is used for systems with bypass and multi-tank systems to affect the
switchover behavior of the controller. With systems with long lines or large line volumes, a
longer control time is selected and vice versa.
Factory conguration
All parameters (special functions + settings) are reset to the default settings but the reset
does not apply to the selected system.
Messages
The last 10 system messages together with date and time can be reviewed. Each message is
only listed once per day starting with the rst incidence.
Controller info
This menu option is used to view information about the selected system, its version number,
as well as the number and version of the controller software.
2.3 Description of Additional Functions

Solar circuit operation
The solar circuit pump is switched on/off when the preset start or stop temp. difference has
been reached. It is also possible to specify a limit temperature for the tank. The solar circuit
pump is speed-controlled so that an adjustable temperature difference between collector
and tank can be maintained if possible. The min. speed can be specied (100%: no
speed-control).
2-tank operation
To ensure the selected priority tank is heated up when the collector produces sufciently, the
controller checks the progression of the temperatures in the collector and priority tank and
possibly pauses the solar circuit pump for the duration of the control time. If the collector
temperature then reaches a sufcient value, the system switches to the priority tank.
Priority
The SUNGO SXL controller offers a choice of assigning priority to tank 1 or tank 2.
Tank 3 cannot be a priority tank.
Loading preheat tank Heating of the preheating tank (only system 1251, p. 313)
Serves to shift heat from a storage tank system to a drinking water tank (preheating tank)
1.4
T3 using a temperature difference control with two-point measurement function.
If the temperature in the storage tank top (T3) is larger than the temperature at the upper
Tank 1 Tank 3
measuring point in the preheating tank (T7) by the value of the switch-on difference,, the
A3 T7 loading pump is switched on via A3. If the difference between the temperature in the storage
tank top and the temperature at the lower measuring point in the preheating tank (T8) is
T8 lower than the switch-off difference, the loading pump is switched off.
Storing the preheating tank is stopped once the limit temperature has been reached (at T8).
Additionally, a min. temperature (T3) can be selected for the storage tank, below which a
storage shift is not initiated.
Triac
The triac is an electronic switch to switch the 230 V outputs of the SUNGO S, SL, and SXL
controller on or off.
How it works: A triac consists of 2 antiparallel switchable diodes (= antiparallel thyristors). The
thyristors switch through the positive or negative sine half-wave as long as a switching-on
difference exists. The triac switches off when the value drops below the switch-off difference.
P2: Heating circuit pump E3 E7 E2 E8 E1 Variation 2 RATIO w. RATIOfresh
304
Vr: Switching valve for return flow increase A6 A1
Collector field
T2: Tank sensor
T3: Tank sensor
T7: Return flow boost sensor T7 T1 T3
T8: Return flow boost sensor T8
Ttw: Aux. heating sensor
RATIO-H PG
Variation 1 TERMO combination tank
Hot water
T7
2.4 Systems Details
Cold water
RATIOfresh
Heating circuit
T3 T2
TERMO
Ttw
Variation 3 ECOplus
T7
P3 P2 P1
CIRCO
T2
Vr
A B Oil or gas T3
heating boiler
AB
ECOplus
T8
T2
Return flow boost

(already marked above) Thermostat A Thermostat B Degermination Control option (def. control) Yield measurement Pool protection
Heating circuit
A4 T7** T1** T5
T3 T4 A5 A2
Boiler Circulation Temp. difference
T8 T3** Boiler Solar
T7 flow Solar Pool
A3 T8** or thermostat F T6
Solar
E10 return
A6
Layout of system 1211 Tx** = a sensor (T1 to T8) can be selected freely here
EN-XXX_SUNGO-SXL_TI-MA-BA-0707xx-1122P400
System No. 1211
E3 E7 E2 E8 E9 E1 Variation 2 RATIO w. RATIOfresh
(P4: Secondary solar circuit pump)
A6 A2 A1
Vr: Switching valve for return flow boost Collector field
Vb: switching valve for bypass function
T2: Tank sensor T1
T3: Tank sensor T3
RATIO-H PG
T9: Solar return sensor


T7
Hot water
Cold water
RATIOfresh
Heating circuit T2
T3
TERMO
Ttw
Variation 3 ECOplus
T7
P3 P2 P1
CIRCO
T2 T3
Vr
A B Oil or gas
heating boiler
AB
ECOplus
T9 AB Vb alternative T2
T8 B
A P4
Return flow boost

Heating circuit
A4 T9** T5
T3 T4 A5
T8 Boiler Circulation Solar
T3** Boiler
T7 flow Solar Pool
A3 T6
Solar
E10 return
A6
305
System No. 1212
1.4
E3 E7 E2 E8 E9 E1 Variation 2 RATIO w. RATIOfresh
306
Vr: Switching valve for Return flow boost
A6 A1 A4 A2
Vk1: Collector field 1, 2-way motor valve Collector field Collector field
Vk2: Collector field 2, 2-way motor valve
T1: Collector 1 sensor
T2: Tank sensor T3
T3: Tank sensor
T1 T9
RATIO-H PG
T9: Collector 2 sensor

Ttw: Aux. heating sensor Vc1 Vc2
T7
Hot water
Cold water
RATIOfresh
T2
Heating circuit
T3
TERMO
Ttw
Variation 3 ECOplus
T7
Please note!
P3 P2 If Vk1 and Vk2 are in
return, the safety valve
P1
and expansion vessel
T2 must be aligned in the T3
Vr flow!
A B Oil or gas
CIRCO
heating boiler
AB
ECOplus
T8 T2
Return flow boost

Heating circuit
T3 T4 T5**
A5
Boiler Circulation
T8 Solar
T7 flow
A3 T6
Solar
E10 return
A6
System No. 1213
P2: Pump for secondary
E8 E5 E7 E3 E2 E1
P3: Heating circuit pump Collector field
A6 A2 A1
Vu: Solar flow switching valve
Vr: Switching valve for return flow boost
T1: Collector sensor T1
T2: Tank sensor 1
T3: Tank sensor
T5: Tank sensor 2
Heating circuit
T7
P1
RATIO-H PG
T3
P3 P2 Ttw
CIRCO
ECOplus
T2
T5 AB
T8 Oil or gas
heating boiler B A
AB
Vu
A B
Vr
Hot water
Cold water
Return flow boost
Heating circuit
A4 T7** T1**
A5 A3
Boiler Temp. difference
T7 flow
T8** or thermostat F T6
Solar
E10 return
A6
307
System No. 1221
1.4
P1: Solar circuit pump E8 E5 E7 E3 E2 E9 E1
308
P2: Pump for secondary circuit Collector field
P3: Heating pump A6 A4 A2 A1
Vu: Switching valve for Solar flow
Vr: Switching valve for Return flow boost T1
Vb: Switching valve for Bypass function; alternatively
plate heat exchanger with circulation pump P4

T2: Tank sensor 1
T3: Tank sensor
T5: Tank sensor 2
T9: Solar flow sensor
Heating circuit
T7
P1
RATIO-H PG
T3
P3 P2
Ttw
CIRCO
AB
ECOplus T9 B A alternativ
Vb P4
T2
T5
T8 Oil or gas AB
heating boiler B A
AB
A
Vu
B
Vr
Hot water
Cold water
Return flow boost

Heating circuit
T3 T4 T9**
A5
T8 Boiler Circulation Solar
T7 flow
A3 T6
Solar
E10 return
A6
System No. 1222
P2: Pool pump
E3 E2 E5 E9 E1 Variation 2 RATIO w. RATIOfresh
Collector field
P3: Storage loading pump A5 A2 A1
P4: Heating pump
Vu: Switching valve for solar return
T1
T1 Collector sensor
T3
Relay
T2: Tank sensor 1
T3: Tank sensor
T5: Pool sensor
RATIO-H PG

T9: Pool protection T9 sensor
Ttw: Aux. heating sensor RATIOfresh T7
Variation 1 ECOplus T2
Heating circuit
Variation 3 TERMO combi tank
P1
P4 Ttw
CIRCO
T3
T3
ECOplus
TERMO
Pool
P3 T2
Oil or gas
heating boiler T7
T9
Vu AB
P2
B A T5
T2
Hot water
Cold water
Pool protection
Return flow boost Thermostat A Thermostat B Degermination Control option (def. control) Yield measurement (already marked ab.)
Heating circuit
A4 T1** T9
T3 T4
Boiler Circulation
T7 flow Solar Pool
A3 T6
Solar
E10 return
A6
309
System No. 1223
1.4
E8 E5 E7 E3 E2 E9 E1
310
P2: Storage loading pump Collector field Collector field
P3: Heating pump
A6 A4 A1 A3 A2
Vu: Switching valve for solar return T1 T9
Vr: Switching valve for return flow boost
T1: Collector sensor 1

T2: Tank sensor 1
T3: Tank sensor
Vc1 Vc2
T5: Tank sensor 2
T9: Collector sensor 2
Heating circuit
Please note!
If Vk1 and Vk2 are in return
flow, the safety valve and
T7 expansion vessel must be
P1
aligned in the flow!
RATIO-H PG
T3
P3 P2
Ttw
CIRCO
ECOplus
T5
T8 Oil or gas
T2 AB
heating boiler B A
AB
A
Vu
B
Vr
Hot water
Cold water
Return flow boost
Heating circuit
T4**
A5
Boiler
T8 Solar
T7 flow
T6
Solar
E10 return
A6
System No. 1224
P2: Storage loading pump E8 E5 E7 E4 E3 E2 E1
P3: Heating pump Collector field
Vu1: Switching valve for solar return 1 A6 A3 A2 A1
Vu2: Switching valve for solar return 2
Vr: Switching valve for return flow boost T1
T2: Tank sensor 1
T3: Tank sensor
T4: Tank sensor 3
T5: Tank sensor 2
Heating circuit Tank 1
T7
P1
RATIO-H PG
RATIO-H PG
T3
P3 P2 Ttw
CIRCO
Tank 2 Tank 3
ECOplus
T2
T5 T4 AB
T8 Oil or gas
heating boiler B A
AB
A B
Vu1
Vr
A
AB
Vu2
B
Hot water
Cold water
Control option (def. control)
Return flow boost Thermostat A Thermostat B Degermination (already marked above) Yield measurement Pool protection
T7** T1**
T3 T9 A5 A6
Circulation Temp. difference Solar
flow
A4 T8** or thermostat F T6
If needed,
use additional Solar
control option E10 return
311
System No. 1231
1.4
P3: Storage loading pump E3 E4 E2 E7 E5 E8 E9 E1 Variation 2 RATIO w. RATIOfresh
312
T2: Tank sensor A6 A3 A4 A5 A2 A1 Collector field
T3: Tank sensor
= Thermost.B T3 sensor
T4: Tank sensor
OPEN
= Diff. controller T4 sensor T1
CLOSED
T5: Temp. sensor flow T3
T7: Diff. controller T7 sensor
T8: Temp. sensor return
T9: Temp. sensor outdoor
RATIO-H PG
Variation 1
TERMO combination tank
T4
Hot water T9
Cold water Heating circuit
RATIOfresh
T2
Relay
T3
TERMO
P1
CIRCO
T4
T7
T5 T8
T2
P3 P2
M1
Thermostat B = water heating Control option (def. control;

in basic setting activated as diff. contr. for storage loading
Return flow boost Thermostat A (already marked above) Degermination pump already marked above) Yield measurement Pool protection
A3 T7** T1**
A6
T3** Kessel
Temp. difference Solar
flow
Solar
E10 return
System No. 1241
Collector field E1 E9 E5 E2 E3 E8 E7 T1: Collector sensor Vu: Solar flow/return switching valve
T2: Tank sensor 1 Vm: HW loading circuit limit valve
A1 A2 A4 A3 A5 T3: Tank sensor (Valve / aux. power)
T1 T5: Tank sensor 2 Vl: Legionella protection motor valve
T7: Tank sensor 3
T8: Tank sensor 3 P1: Pump for solar circuit
T9: Solar return sensor P2: Pump for secondary circuit
E10: Volume flow meter P3: Primary pump tank 3
P4: Secondary pump tank 3
P5: Legionella protection circulation pump
P6: Hot water circulation pump
P7: Pump for Hot water boiler
P6 Circulation
Hot water
T3
P1
Vu
A B
P5
CIRCO
AB
Tank 2 Tank 1 Tank 3
Vl Standby tank
(Preheating tank)
T9
T7
P7
P3 P4
T5 T2
Vm T8
A B
P2 AB Vu
Cold water
Degermination
(already marked
Return flow boost Thermostat A Thermostat B above) Control option (def. control) Yield measurement Pool protection
T4** T9**
A5 A6
Temp. difference Solar
flow
T8 Solar
E10 return
313
System No. 1251
1.4
3. General Safety Information 3.3 Installation and
The following safety information is intended to protect you Operating Information
from hazards and dangers that may suddenly occur when All installation and wiring work must be carried out
the device is handled incorrectly, either deliberately or un- while the system is powered off since the voltage on
knowingly. We differentiate between general safety infor- the outside of the triac is 230 V.
mation shown on this page and special safety information The mains power of the controller must be connected
explained over the course of this text. outside of the solar circuit station via an external ON/
OFF switch. This is also necessary to activate the Spe-
cial Functions menu by using the ON/OFF switch of the
mains power.
DANGER Risk of personal injuries Operating temperatures > 50 C are not permitted for
Improper electrical installation of the device can lead to controllers of the S-series (S, SL, SXL).
potentially fatal electric shocks as well as other health haz- Mount the solar circuit station in a way that allows an op-
ards. timal display contrast (looking straight at the controller).
The bottom of the controller is divided into safe low
voltage inputs and 230 V outputs section by a cross-
piece. Make sure not to confuse these sections during
CAUTION Risk of property damage the installation process.
This symbol indicates dangers that can result in damage to Automatic mode is the default operating mode of the
the components or malfunction of the controller. controller. Manual operation is used only for functional
testing of the different hydraulic components (pump,
2/3 way valves). In this operating mode, maximum tem-
peratures or sensor functions are not monitored.
NOTE Additional information Do not operate the system if the controller, the wiring,
This symbol indicates practical advice and useful tricks, or the connected 230 V consumer loads are visibly dam-
which will make installing and operating of the controller aged.
more easy. The controller is equipped with a mains microfuse.
Collectors and hydraulic supply pipes can get extreme-
ly hot during sunny periods. There is a risk of scalding
3.1 Operator/Installer Qualications or burns when tting the collector sensor.
The connection and initial start-up of the SUNGO SXL

solar controller must always be carried out by trained
and authorized personnel.
Compliance with applicable national and local safety
rules and regulations is mandatory.
Please note that, in case of a claim, the warranty is only
valid if the correct initial startup is documented in the
release and approval log by a correspondingly trained
technician.
3.2 Intended Use

Function
Controlling of solar thermal systems by selecting ap-
plicable control patterns and additional functions to
preset the controller for the required operations of the
hydraulic system.
The controller is approved only for use in dry rooms.
The controller can be integrated into the solar station
CIRCO 5/6 or mounted on the wall.
Application Limits
If used in other than solar thermal applications, the
functionality of the controller has to be checked before
initial start-up. If in doubt, contact the controller service
of Wagner & Co.
Usage that is not in compliance with the intended use
description always invalidates the warranty.
4. Installation
4.1 Attaching Case 4.2 Connecting Wires
Opening the Case Layout of the SUNGO SXL Connection Board
Tools are not required to open the controller case. All electrical lines are connected at the bottom of the
The upper part of the case snaps into the bottom part. controller. The sensor connections (safety low voltage)
Slightly pull on the side clips of the upper section of the are located on the right-hand side and the 230 V mains
case to unlatch the case and ip it open. connections and switching outputs A1 to A6 on the left-
The upper section now snaps into place automatical- hand side.
ly. It is now possible to install the controller easily and
quickly. General Connection Rules
If exible wires are used and the controller is wall
Wall mounting mounted, a strain relief must be xed within or outside
Use the supplied drilling template to drill the xing of the controller.
holes for the controller. In this case, the wire ends must be crimped.
Attach the controller to the wall. If required, PG9 screw connections can be mounted at
Do not over tighten the screws to avoid damage to the the feed-throughs in case of wall mounting.
lower part of the case!
230 V Connection
Installation in the Solar Station The mains power is connected from outside the control-
Use the screws to attach the SUNGO SXL controller to ler via an OFF/ON switch. This switch is not required
the wall holder of the solar station. if mains power is connected with a cable and safety
Break out the cable feeds located on the base housing socket.
next to the crosspiece. The controller is designed for mains operation at ap-
Strip the 230 V cables in a way that the insulated single prox. 230 V/50 Hz. Check to make sure the solar circuit
cables start directly at the opening to the bottom sec- pump is rated for this voltage.
tion. All grounding wires are connected to the PE terminals.
Connect the mains power supply last. The neutral terminals (N) are connected electrically!
When the controller is switched on, the voltage on the The switching output A1 (and A2 with systems featuring
triac case is 230 V AC. a bypass and option PHE as well as with system 1241)
is a 230 V, normally open contact actuated via speed- 1.4
control. Switching outputs A2 to A6 are pure NOCs (ex-
ception: A2, see above).
Connecting Temperature Sensors

The wires of the temperature sensors can be extend-
ed as follows: Up to a length of 15 m = 2 x 0.5 mm,
up to 50 m = 2 x 0.75 mm. In case of long connec-
tions to the collector, shielded cables should be used.
Do not connect the shielding at the sensor end, just trim
and isolate!
The temperature sensors can be connected either way.
They do not have any polarity.
The sensor wires must be installed separately from 230
V mains lines.
Lightning Protection Module

The SUNGO SXL is tted with surge protection on all sen-
sor inputs. Generally, further protection of the sensors in
the basement is not required.
Sensor T1 (collector) must be be tted with the sensor con-
nection box SP2 with integrated surge arrestor.
230 V side Low voltage side
Display board connection Data stick port
5 7
9
8
FUSE 5X20
3
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 L1
M M M M M M M M M M
PE-PE-PE N N N N N N N
Potential Ground 2
4
A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 Mains E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10
230 V outputs Sensor inputs
Mains Sensor input /

irradiation sensor
Volume meter
Figure 2 Connection board of the solar controller SUNGO SXL
Connection Board
Hardware position and actual designation of the 230 V Board cutouts for the fastening screws of the controller
switching outputs A1 to A6. case
The corresponding 230 V outputs are also marked with Plug connector for connection cable to display board.
the designation A1 to A6 in the respective system de- Universal interface port for data stick and peripherals.
piction. Mains fuse as microfuse 4 AT.
Hardware position and actual designation of the tem- The 230 V switching outputs are triacs.
perature sensor, irradiation sensor, and volume meter
inputs. IMPORTANT The 230 V AC is applied to the triac case dur-
The corresponding inputs are not identied only with ing operation.
numbers from 1 to 10 in the respective system depiction
but they are also marked with the designation E1 to E10.
Input E1 usually corresponds with sensor T1, etc.
5. Use
Settings Special functions

menu menu
Manual
Information operation
menu
Main menu level

Selected menu
Alphanumeric display 1
Collector Measuring point, variable, selected add. option,
system info, and special functions
o Alphanumeric display 2
72,4 C Measuring value, variable number value,

special functions variation
Alphanumeric display 3
o
72 - C - 126
Selected add. functions, balance values, system
errors, add. info about selected special functions
A B
!
1234 ok? Status indicators
56
Pump OFF, System fault

pump ON 1.4
Confirmation /
Outputs A1 to A6 tank symbol
NOTE
After switching on the controller, the Special functions < 60 s
menu can be activated within 60 seconds.
If you remain in a selected menu without pressing ad-

ditional buttons, the menu Information is displayed
again automatically after 60 minutes.
To make changes later in the Special functions menu,

briey de-energize the controller and open the Special
functions menu within 60 seconds.
Information Information
Exit Information menu Activate Reset balance values
Cancel Balance values activation Save Reset balance values
Settings Settings
Exit Settings menu Select menu, e.g. Tank
Exit selected menu options, e.g. Tank Activate e.g. variable Tank, max.
Cancel activation, e.g. variable Tank, max. Save current value 85 C, e.g. variable Tank, max.
Manual operation mode Manual operation mode

Exit Manual mode menu Activate, e.g. Output 1
Save current value ON, e.g. Output 1
Special functions Special functions

Exit Special functions menu Select menu, e.g. Thermostat A
Exit selected menu option, e.g. Thermostat A Activate, e.g. Addit. sensor
Cancel activation, e.g. variable Heating Save current value ON, e.g. Addit. sensor
Main menu: scroll left Main menu: scroll right
Information Information
Scroll down Scroll up
Settings Settings
Reduce variable value, e.g. 85 C to 80 C Increasing variable value, e.g. 85C to 90C
Manual operation mode Manual operation mode

Special functions Special functions

Reducing variable value, e.g. 17:00 to 16:30 Increasing variable value, e.g. 17:00 to 05:30
(Degermination) (Degermination)
Main menu: selecting the menu, e.g. Settings Main menu: this button is nonfunctional here
Language
[values]
Control info System selection

[values] [off]
Messages Bypass
[values] [values]
Factory configuration Tube collector

[off] [off]
Control time Return flow boost

[values] [off]
Special Functions E.g.
Heating circuit mixing Menu Thermostat A Activate thermostat A [off]
valve [values] [off]
Heating circuit pump Thermostat B 1. Press right button

[values] [off] Open function:
Remove brackets
Heating curve Degermination
[values] [off]
2. Press right button
Primary circuit Control option (def. control) Activate ON/OFF function
[values] [off]
Pool protection Yield measurement 3. Press upper button

[off] [off] Select function variation:
E.g. ON flashes
Tank cooling System protection
[off] [off]
4. Press right button 2x
Collector cooling
[off] Save selected Variation 1.4
E.g. ON
5. Press lower button

Select additional function variation:
E.g. Heating/Cooling
6. Press right button

Tank
[values] Activate Heating/Cooling function:
Preheating Tank 1 Heating flashes
[values] [values]
Pool protection 7. Press upper button

[values] Tank 2
[values] Select function variation:
Time E.g.: Cooling flashes
[values] Settings Tank 3
[values]
Cooling F Menu 8. Press right button 2x
[values] Save selected variation
Priority
[values] E.g. Cooling
Heating F
[values]
Speed
Heating [values] 9. Press left button
[values] Close function
Return flow boost Brackets are shown
Cooling B [values]
[values] Function set to ON
Heating B Heating A
[values] [values]
Cooling A
[values]
5.2 Initial Start-Up
1. Switch Controller On
After switching on the controller, change from the Infor-
mation menu
< 60 s
to the Special Functions menu within 60 seconds.
2. Select Language
Select the language from the Special Functions menu.
Additional information about this menu is listed on pages
321 - 324
1. Switching on
Use the ON/OFF switch to activate the mains power at the controller.
Collector
o
The controller automatically switches to the Information menu.
72,4 C
o
72 - C - 126

2. Press left button 2x

The Main menu opens.
Wagner & Co
The Special functions symbol flashes.
12:00:00

Solar Technology
3. Press bottom button 1x

The Special functions menu opens with the Language option selected.
Language
[Values] GERMAN flashes.
5. Press bottom button 1x
Select from NEDERLANDS, ITALIANO, FRANCAIS, ESPANOL or ENGLISH.

The selected language is activated for the controller and saved.
LANGUAGE
The display switches to the selected language.
ENGLISH
3. Select System
Select the system from the Special functions menu (e.g.
1211).
Afterwards again, change from the Information menu to
the Special Functions menu within 60 seconds if addi-
tional options are required as well (e.g. return ow boost,
thermostat, etc.).
The time and date must be reprogrammed in the Set-
tings menu when selecting a different system.
4. Activate Additional Special Functions

Active and set values depending on requirements and se-
lected system.
5. Adjust Settings
Adjust preset values in the Settings menu as needed.
Additional information about this menu is listed on pages
325 - 327.
Language [values]
Name Description Range Default value Your value
German, Dutch, Italian, French,
Language Select languages German
Spanish, English
System selection [off]
System selection, start Activating system selection off, on Off
1211 1213,
System System selection 1221 1224, 1211
1231, 1241, 1251
Bypass [values]
Name
Activation of the plate heat
Bypass PHE, valve PHE
exchanger or valve variation
Tube collector [off]
Activates the tube collector
Tube coll. off, on off
function
Tube coll., function Selection of the variations delta T, irradiation delta T
Runtime of solar circuit pump
Tube coll., runtime starting when reaching switchon 1 60 s 15 s
value.
1.0 K
Switch-on value temperature rise
Tube coll., delta T 1.0 5.0 K (only with
at T1
delta T)
Tube coll., irradiation
(only of irradiation sensor
Switch-on value of the irradiation
50 500 W
200 W
(only with
1.4
sensor
connected) irradiation)
Return ow boost [off]
Boost return Activates the return ow boost off, on off
Thermostat A [off]
Thermostat A Activates thermostat A off, on off
Thermostat A, function Selection of the variations Heating, cooling Heating
Thermostat A, additional sensor
Activating the additional sensor off, on off
(selectable only with Heating!)
Thermostat B [off]
Thermostat B Activates thermostat B off, on off
Thermostat B, function Selection of the variations Heating, cooling Heating
Thermostat B, sensor Selection of the sensor T1 T8 T3
Degermination [off]
Activates
Degermination off, on off
degermination heating
Start time of
Degermination, time: start 0:00 23:59 17:00
degermination heating
Running time of the circulation
pump
Degermination, duration (lag time after reaching the 0:00 10:00 h 1:00 h
heating temperature internally is
5 minutes)
Heating temperature of the
Degermination, temperature 60 80 C 60 C
degermination
Control option (def. control) [off]
Selection of the variations def.
Control option (def. control) off, def. controller, thermos F off
control or Free thermostat
Def. controller, sensor 1 Selecting the sensor assignment T1 - T8 T7
Selecting the sensor assignment
Def. controller, sensor 2 T1 - T8 T8
(sink)
Thermostat F, function Selection of the variations Heating, cooling Heating
Thermostat F, sensor T1 - T8 T7
(switching threshold)
Thermostat F, additional sensor
Activating the additional sensor off, on off
(selectable only with Heating!)
Thermostat F, additional sensor T1 - T8 T8
(additional sensor)
Yield measurement [off]
Activating the yield
Yield measurement off, on off
measurement
Yield measurement, function Selection of the variations HQM, FV HQM
1.0 l/pulse
Yield measurement, liter/pulse Pulse rate of the volume meter 0.5 - 25.0 liter/pulse (only with
HQM!)
Yield measurement, Dened volume ow of the 5.0 l/minute
0.1 - 75.0 liter/minute
liter/minute system (only with FV!)
Yield measurement , glycole 0 100%
Mixing ratio of glycole/water 40%
(only with DC20!) (in increments of 5%)
Yield measurement, T-ow T1 - T8 T1
(T-ow)
Yield measurement,
Selection of the variations DC 20, DC 40 DC 20
glycole type
System protection [off]
Deactivating the system
System protection on, off ON
protection
Start temperature of the system
System protection, start 115 200 C 1 135 C
protection
1 The smallest possible setpoint depends on the Start Temp., Collector Cooling and is always minimally higher by 15 C.
Collector cooling [off]
Collector cool. Activating collector cooling off, on off
Start temperature of the
Collector cool., start 100 150 C 2 110 C
collector cooling
Switch-off difference of the
Collector cool., dT stop 3 20 K 5K
collector cooling
2 The largest possible setpoint range depends on the Start Temperature, System Protection
Tank cooling [off]3
Tank cool. Activating the tank cooling off, on off
Tank cool., stop Stop temp. tank cooling 30 90 C 60 C
3 This function is only active if the collector cooling function is switched on.
Heating curve [values] (note applies only to system number 1241, p. 312!)
Lower value of outdoor temp. for
Heating curve, outdoor Tmin -20 to +30 C -15 C
heating curve
Desired ow temp. for outdoor
Heating curve, ow Tmax 0 to +80 C 70 C
Tmin
Upper value of outdoor temp.
Heating curve, outdoor Tmax -20 to +30 C 15 C
for heating curve, heating limit
Desired ow temp. for outdoor
Heating curve, ow Tmin 0 to +80 C 30 C
Tmax
Heating curve, offset Parallel shift of heating curve -15 K to +15 K 0K
Heating curve, ow Tmax limit Limit max. ow temp. 0 80 C 70 C
Heating curve,ow Tmin limit Limit min. ow temp. 0 80 C 30 C
Excess temperature storage
1.4
Heating curve, dT storage (center) to ow temperature for 1 20 K 5K
boiler request
Switch-off difference for boiler
Heating curve, dT stop 1 - 20 K 5K
request
Heating circuit pump [values] (note applies only to system number 1241, p. 312!)
Heating circuit pump, min. Heating circuit pump min. speed 30 100% 100%
Heating circuit pump, Setpoint temp. difference ow
1 - 50 K 15 K
dT setpoint and return heating circuit
Heating circuit mixing valve [values] (note applies only to system number 1241, p. 312!)
Time lag between control
Mixing valve, pulse period 10 s - 40 s 15 s
signals for the mixing valve
Gives the reaction value to the
Mixing valve, prop. coefcient control difference between set 0.1 s / K - 5.0 S / K 1.0 s / K s
and actual value.
Pool protection [off]
Pool protection Activating the pool protection off, on off
Primary circuit [values] (note applies only to systems with bypass and option PHE)
Fixed % RPM for solar circuit
Primary circuit, speed 30 100% 100%
pump
Control time [values]
Waiting time with bypass
Control time switching and 2-tank priority 30 480 s 90 s
control
Factory conguration [off]
Name Description Range Default value
Activating the factory
Factory cong. off, on off
conguration
Message log [values] (note corresponding table, see 8.1 Message Log, p. 333!)
Controller info [values]

1211 - 1213,
Display of the selected
Controller info, system no. 1221 - 1224, 1211
system number
1231, 1241, 1251
Display of the selected Current
Controller info, system ver. V 1.00 - V X.xx
system version version: 1.00
Display of the selected
Controller info, software no. 1317SP1201 1317SP1201
software number
Display of the selected Current
Controller info, software ver. V 1.00 - V X.xx
software version version: 1.00
5.4 Settings Menu
Tank [values]
Tank 1, 2 or 3, max. Tank limit temperature 15 90 C 85 C
Tank 1, 2 or 3, dT max. Switch-on difference: Tank collector 3 40 K 10 K
Tank 1, 2 or 3, dT min. Switch-off difference: Tank collector 2 35 K 3K
Priority [values]
Priority, tank Tank 1 or 2 loading priority 1 or 2 1
Speed [values]
Min. speed of the solar circuit pump; increment: in
increments of 5%
%RPM, min. 30 100% 30%
(systems with bypass and option PHE:
min. speed of P2)
%RPM, dT setpoint Setpoint temp. difference to which the speed is adjusting 2 50 K 10 K
Return boost [values]
Boost return, max. Limit temperature, sink (T8) 15 90 C 85 C
Boost return, min. Min. temperature, source (T7) 15 90 C 20 C
Switch-on difference return ow boost
Boost return, dT max. 3 40 K 4K
between source and sink
Switch-off difference return ow boost
Boost return, dT min. 2 35 K 2K
between source and sink
Preheating [values]
Name Description Range Default value Your value 1.4
Preheating, max. Limit temperature, preheating tank (T8) 0 - 95 C 85 C
Preheating, min. Min. temperature top of storage tank (T3) 0 - 95 C 20 C
Switch-on difference storage tank top /
Preheating, dT max. 3 - 40 K 4K
preheating storage tank upper meas. point
Switch-off difference storage tank top /
Preheating, dT min. 2 - 35 K 2K
preheating storage tank lower meas. point
Heating A [values]
Heating A, start Switch-on temperature, thermostat A 0 130 C 30 C
Heating A, dT stop Switch-off temperature, thermostat A 1 40 K 5K
Heating A,
Storage tank, check at top 3 20 K 10 K
additional sensor
Heating A, time 1: Start Time interval 1: start thermostat A 0:00 23:59 0:00
Heating A, time 1: Stop Time interval 1: stop thermostat A 0:00 23:59 23:59
Heating A, time 2/3: Start Time interval 2/3: start thermostat A 0:00 23:59 0:00
Heating A, time 2/3: Stop Time interval 2/3: stop thermostat A 0:00 23:59 0:00
Cooling A [values]
Cooling A, start Switch-on temperature, thermostat A 0 130 C 30 C
Cooling A, dT stop Switch-off temperature, thermostat A 1 40 K 5K
Cooling A, time 1: Start Time interval 1: start thermostat A 0:00 23:59 0:00
Cooling A, time 1: Stop Time interval 1: stop thermostat A 0:00 23:59 23:59
Cooling A, time 2/3: Start Time interval 2/3: start thermostat A 0:00 23:59 0:00
Cooling A, time 2/3: Stop Time interval 2/3: stop thermostat A 0:00 23:59 0:00
Heating B [values]
Heating B, start Switch-on temperature thermostat B 0 130 C 30 C
Heating B, dT stop Switch-off temperature, thermostat B 1 40 K 5K
Heating B, time 1: Start Time interval 1: start thermostat B 0:00 23:59 0:00
Heating B, time 1: Stop Time interval 1: stop thermostat B 0:00 23:59 23:59
Heating B, time 2/3: Start Time interval 2/3: start thermostat B 0:00 23:59 0:00
Heating B, time 2/3: Stop Time interval 2/3: stop thermostat B 0:00 23:59 0:00
Cooling B [values]
Cooling B, start Switch-on temperature thermostat B 0 130 C 30 C
Cooling B, dT stop Switch-off temperature, thermostat B 1 40 K 5K
Cooling B, time 1: Start Time intervall 1: start thermostat B 0:00 23:59 0:00
Cooling B, time 1: Stop Time intervall 1: stop thermostat B 0:00 23:59 23:59
Cooling B, time 2/3: Start Time intervall 2/3: start thermostat B 0:00 23:59 0:00
Cooling B, time 2/3: Stop Time interval 2/3: stop thermostat B 0:00 23:59 0:00
Diff. controller [values]
Differential C, max. Limit temperature, sink 0 120 C 85 C
Differential C, min. Min. temperature, source 0 120 C 20 C
Differential C, dTmax. Switch-on difference between source and sink 3 40 K 4K
Differential C, dTmin. Switch-off difference between source and sink 2 35 K 2K
Differential C, time 1: Start Time intervall 1: Differential controller start 0:00 23:59 0:00
Differential C,, time 1: Stop Time intervall 1: Differential controller stop 0:00 23:59 23:59
Differential C, time 2/3:
Time intervall 2/3: Differential controller start 0:00 23:59 0:00
Start
Differential C, time 2/3:
Time intervall 2/3: Differential controller stop 0:00 23:59 0:00
Stop
Heating F [values]
Heating F, start Switch-on temperature thermostat F 0 130 C 30 C
Heating F, dT stop Switch-off temperature, thermostat F 1 40 K 5K
Heating F,
Check temperature 3 20 K 10 K
additional sensor
Heating F, time 1: Start Time intervall 1: thermostat F start 0:00 23:59 0:00
Heating F, time 1: Stop Time intervall 1: thermostat F stop 0:00 23:59 23:59
Heating F, time 2/3: Start Time intervall 2/3: thermostat F start 0:00 23:59 0:00
Heating F, time 2/3: Stop Time interval 2/3: thermostat F stop 0:00 23:59 0:00
Cooling F [values]
Cooling F, start Switch-on temperature thermostat F 0 130 C 30 C
Cooling F, dT stop Switch-off temperature , thermostat F 1 40 K 5K
Heating F,
Check temperature 3 20 K 10 K
additional sensor
Cooling F, time 1: Start Time interval 1: thermostat F start 0:00 23:59 0:00
Cooling F, time 1: Stop Time interval 1: thermostat F stop 0:00 23:59 23:59
Cooling F, time 2/3: Start Time interval 2/3: thermostat F start 0:00 23:59 0:00
Cooling F, time 2/3: Stop Time interval 2/3: thermostat F stop 0:00 23:59 0:00
Heating [values]
Heating mode
Auto: Automatic mode with hot water priority Auto,
Summer: Only water heating, no heating operation (but Summer,
Heating, mode frost protection) Party, Auto
Party: Delay of the next lowering by 3 hrs Emission,
Emission: Boiler demand for 25 min. Off
Off: No heating operation, no water heating
Heating, weekly plan [values]
Master day [values] 4
Time slot1 [values]
Master day time 1: Start Start time of lowering 1 0:00 - 23:59 23:00
Master day time 1: Stop Stop time of lowering 1 0:00 - 23:59 6:00
Master day lowering Adjustable value of lowering 1 0 - 30 K 0K
Time slot2 [values]
Monday, time 2: Stop Stop time of lowering 2 0:00 - 23:59 0:00
Time slot3 [values]
Time slot4 [values]
1.4
4 All settings made for the master day are automatically applied to the remaining weekdays.
Data logging [value]
1, 2, 5, 10,
Interval Scanning interval for data logging 15, 20, 30 1 min
min
Cyclical,
Record One-time or over-writing recording on data memory stick Cyclical
simple
Reset Resetting to rst data set and display 0% off, on off
The data logging menu option is only shown in the controller when a data stick is plugged in.
Individual Setting of Weekdays
Select the individual days of the week and change the
basic settings, to programme individual settings for the
weekdays that deviate from the master day.
Enter your changes into the table below.
Weekday Time 1 Time 2 Time 3 Time 4

Monday
Start
Stop
Lowering
Tuesday
Start
Stop
Lowering
Wednesday
Start
Stop
Lowering
Thursday
Start
Stop
Lowering
Friday
Start
Stop
Lowering
Saturday
Start
Stop
Lowering
Sunday
Start
Stop
Lowering
Pool protection [values]

Pool protection, start Switch-on temperature of the pool protection 20 70 C 40 C
Time [values]
Time setup Setting the current time 0:00 - 23:59 12:00
Date setup Setting the current date 01.01 31.12. 1.01.
Day of week setup Monday to
Setting the current day of the week Thursday
(only system 1241) Sunday
Description of the displays and indicators
Temperature measured values
Collector Measuring point

o
72,4 C Current temperature (outdoor temperature display with system 1241:
o Sliding average value of last 60 minutes, after brief stop of controller: current value)

72 - C - 126

Min. value / max. value (reset by pressing right button 2x)
Sensor faults display
Storage Tank Measuring point
Grafical display of error (also 8.2 System Messages)
Line Interrupt Clear text error (Short Circuit or Line Interrupt)
Active controller functions display
Active solar circuit function

Storing T13, Pool Tank (or pool) being loaded
Bypass: Bypassing secondary circuit, only solar circuit is active
Tube Solar circuit runs temporarily (acc. to tube collector setting)
Pool protection Solar circuit pump switched off
S Protect System protection switches solar circuit off
C Cool Collector cooling function active
Function active T Cool Tank cooling function active
Storing T1
Waiting Waiting time before tank switching
1.4
Active additional function(s)
Return flow boost (Display changes if several functions are active at once)
A B Return flow incr. Return flow increase active
1234
5678 Heating A, B, F Heating with thermostat A, B, or F
Cooling A, B, F Cooling with thermostat A, B, or F
Diff. controller Temperature diff. controller switches on
Controlling mixing valve Mixing valve is opened or closed
Boiler req. Boiler request switches on for hot water or
to heat up the permanent buffer part of the tank
Mixing valve closed Mixing valve is closed completely
Degermination output Degermination switched on
Display of the active outputs
Balance values
Storage tank (h) Operating hours (separate for each tank or pool with multi-tank systems)
345 h Total running hours (tank loading)
R: 17 h Operating hours (reset by pressing right button 2x)
Yield (T1) Solar yield (separate for each tank or pool with multi-tank systems)
1450 kWh Absolute heat amount
R: 45 kWh Heat amount (reset by pressing right button 2x, flashing point bottom right = count meter)
Additional displays
Solar circ.
100 % Current speed of solar circuit pump
Pump capacity
Solar circ.
12 l/min Current flow in solar circuit (only if yield meas. with heat meter option is activated)
Volume flow
Solar rad.
550 W Current irradiation in W/m

(only if tube collector function with irradiation option is activated and sensor is connected)

0 - W - 930

Min. value / max. value
Pump heat c.
90 % Current speed of heating circuit pump

(only system 1241 if min. speed of heating pump <100%)
Pump capacity
Heating flow
o
38 C Setpoint for heating flow (if no heating operation: -------------, only system 1241)
Setpoint
Message
Message Only displayed if current fault is pending. Error history, see Special functions menu
Error If the display continues to depict Message and the error is eliminated, OK is displayed.
Pool protection Error explanation
DATA Logging Only displayed if data stick in port.
0% Remaining capacity of data stick memory in percent.
5.6 Manual Mode Menu
Outputs
1. T.: Output 1
Manually switching output 1 ON/OFF off, on off
2. T.: off
1. T.: Output 2
2. T.: off
1. T.: Output 3
2. T.: off
1. T.: Output 4
2. T.: off
1. T.: Output 5
2. T.: off
1. T.: Output 6
2. T.: off
Manual lag
Manual lag, duration Lag time of manual control in minutes 1 600 min 0 min
1. T.: Outputs The function of all outputs is tested and assigned a test
2. T.: off result when ON is activated. off, on off
3. T.: Total test The controller then switches automatically to OFF.
1.4
Solar Controller SUNGO SXL
General technical data
Material 100% recyclable ABS case for wall mounting
Dimensions (L x W x D in mm) 173 x 138 x 51
Protection class IP40 acc. to VDE 0470
Rate of radio interference N acc. to VDE 0875
Operating voltage 230 V AC; 50 Hz; -10% to +15%
Diameter of cable max. for 230 V connections 2.5 mm; uniliar/nely stranded
Temperature sensor / temperature range Pt1000; 1000 W at 0 C; range: -25 C to +200 C
The cable of the sensor must be installed without tension. The
Sensor load sensor must not be loaded mechanically when the temperature of
the collector is more than 60 C.
Test voltage 4 kV 1 min acc. to VDE 0631
Switching voltage 230 V AC
Output parameters of the switching outputs 1 A / approx. 230 VA for cosj = 0.7 to 1.0 per output
Internal mains protection Microfuse 5 x 20 mm; 4 A/T (4 ampere, slow)
Operating temperature (internal) / storage temperature 0 C to +50 C / -10 C to +65 C
Total capacity 920 VA
Weight Approx. 360 g
Hardware specications
10
7 standard Pt1000 sensors
Inputs
3 selectable: 3 temperature sensors or
1 irradiation sensor, 1 volume meter and 1 temperature sensor
6 switching outputs 230 V/AC:
Speed-control prepared for all outputs
Outputs
- Depends on selected layout
Visual function check of the 230 V outputs
Illuminated, graphical symbols and plain text,
Display
5 lines (2 for graphic, 3 alphanumerical)
Use Scroll function using two key combinations (vertical, horizontal)
Software specications
Sensor: Short-circuit, cancel, dT too high,
Complex diagnostic system
ow monitor HQM, additional control functions
Displayed text Multilanguage: 6 default languages
Data stick: Data logging, operating software update
Available soon:
Remote control via data stick port
Special functions
Modem-capable via data stick port
Interface for large displays
Error message relay
7. Accessories
Product Description Art. No.
Temperature sensor Pt1000, 6-mm plug-type sensor with 2.5 m silicone cable
Temperature sensor Pt1000 (-50 C +180 C) 150 102 49
(4 Pt1000 sensors included in delivery scope SUNGO SXL)
Pt1000 sensor in plastic enclosure
Outdoor sensor TA1 Dimensions (H x W x D): 68 x 34 x 27 mm 150 400 37
terminal connectors, cable connection
Irradiation sensor, low ohm power output, UV-resistant design, connection cable
Irradiation sensor PSF3 150 400 29
approx. 1.5 m; including fastening brackets
Heat meter set
0.6 m/h Volume meter 0.6/1.5/2.5 m/h with immersion sleeve and Pt1000 sensor incl. brass 150 400 30
1.5 m/h adapter, without screw connectors. 150 400 35
2.5 m/h 150 400 36
Data stick
Multifunctional data memory stick for data logging and conguration. 8-pin plug-in
Data stick 150 400 34
enclosure, 1 MB integrated memory, L=35 mm, D=12 mm. Data security/reliability in
case of power failure
Consisting of data memory stick, PC adapter (USB), USB connection cable, and analysis
Data logging set 150 400 39
software
8. Service
8.1 Service Message Log
Message log [values] (note values are shown in the Special Functions menu under Messages!)
System message Description Range
Time / date T1 = temperature sensor 1 (E1)
T1 TF open = fault, sensor line open, T1 (E1) - T9 (E9) 1.4
TF open Cancellation of function
Time / date T2 = temperature sensor 2 (E2)
T2 TF short = fault, sensor line short-circuited, T1 (E1) - T9 (E9)
TF short Cancellation of function
Time / date
55.0 C 55.0 C = temperature reached during the switch-on duration of the circulation pump.
Error degermination Error degermination = switch-off value was not reached
Time / date In the background, 20 K are added to the default switch-on difference. If the total
difference reaches a value higher than 30 K for a duration of at least 30 minutes, the
dT too high error message dT too high is triggered.
Time / date
If the temperature exceeds the set switching threshold of the pool protection, solar
loading is completely stopped.
3. T.: P protection active
Time / date If heat metering is activated and the solar circuit pump is running, the cyclic pulse of
the volume meter is checked. An error message is displayed if pulses are not counted
HQM: No cyclic pulse within 15 minutes.
Time / date
If the corresponding output malfunctions or fails, the automatic test triggers an error
message. The corresponding function is switched off.
Output defective
Time / date To trigger the message Nighttime Circulation, 4 consecutive intervals of 30 minutes
each must be awed. The individual error is set if the stop temperature at the end of
the interval is higher than the start temperature by 2 K.
Nighttime circulation The Nighttime Circulation check is active from 11:30 pm to 5:30 am.
System information with display
Display text Description Correction
!
System message
All of the triggered system messages are usually indicated with a ashing Attention! symbol. In case of
Flashing sensor faults, the affected sensor is additionally identied with the Short-Circuit/Disconnect symbols.
Disconnect
The affected sensor is indicated in plain text
C
and in the hardware position, if relevant
Cancel
(e.g.: Thermos. A T4). Sensor T4 has been
disconnected from controller input T4. Check resistance value of the sensor and compare with
Short-circuit resistance table.
The affected sensor is indicated in plain text Check all sensor contact points.
C and in the hardware position, if relevant
Short-circuit (e.g.: Thermos. B T3). Sensor T3 or
controller input T3 is the cause of a
short-circuit.
dT too high
A xed value of 20 K is added to the
temperature difference between collector Check pump/pump connection/wires for function
and tank sensor. The message is triggered if Check system for air, deaerate if needed
the total temp. difference has not been Check sensor/sensor line for function, replace sensor if
reduced within 30 min. necessary
Plain text display: dT too high in Information
menu under Message
Volume ow meter disconnected
Check counts at volume meter using multimeter.
kWh The solar circuit pump is running but the
Check system for air, deaerate if necessary.
volume meter does not register any counts.
System information without display

Description Possible Causes Correction
Connect controller.
Mains power of 230 V not available. Switch controller on using the external ON/OFF switch.
Check house fuse for the connection.
No display Check fuse and replace with new 2 A/T if necessary.
Internal fuse defective.
Check solar pump for short-circuit.
Call Wagner & Co Solartechnik at
Entire unit defective.
+ 49 (0) 6421/8007-0.
Manual mode of controller activated. Exit Manual menu.
Controller nonfunctional
Switch-on condition not met. Wait until the switch-on condition has been met.
Pump connection has been severed. Check cable to pump.

Pump symbol is rotating Unjam/unblock pump.
Pump jammed.
but pump is not working. Call Wagner & Co Solartechnik at
No voltage at switching output A1. + 49 (0) 6421/8007-0.
Sensor lines installed in proximity of Install sensor lines differently or shield lines.
Temperature display rapidly 230 V lines. Shield sensor lines.
uctuating Long sensor lines extended without shield. Call Wagner & Co Solartechnik
Unit defective. at + 49 (0) 6421/8007-0.
8.3 Service Sensor Check

Resistance values for Pt1000 sensors in dependence of temperature
-10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C 90 C 100 C 110 C
961 W 1000 W 1039 W 1078 W 1117 W 1155 W 1194 W 1232 W 1271 W 1309 W 1347 W 1385 W 1423 W
The correct function of the temperature sensors can be checked with a multimeter and this table.

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
Expansion Vessel
Installation Steps
1. Mount attachment bracket on wall with dowels and
screws.
2. Slip expansion vessel into bracket opening.
3. Screw lock nut onto threaded connection and tighten.
4. Attach corrugated stainless steel tubes to Expansion
vessel with " gasket.
5. Optionally install capped check valve between expan-
sion vessel and stainless steel tube.
Optional
capped check valve
Corrugated
stainless steel tube
1.4
" Gasket
Lock nut
Expansion vessel
Screws 6x60, hexagonal
Figure 1 Mount and connect expansion vessel.
Solar Thermal / Solar Circuit EN-XXX_Expansion-Vessel_MA-0403xx-1121L900 335

TECHNICAL INFORMATION / INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 1.00
Heat Meter
WMZ for SUNGO SL / SXL
Function
The heat meter for the solar controller SUNGO SL / SXL
consists of a volume ow meter and an additional sen-
sor for the return ow. It allows metering the heat energy
yielded by the system.
The heat quantity is analyzed via the volume ow, the tem-
perature difference and the properties of the heat carrying
medium. The ow temperature is equivalent to the tem-
perature T1 (collector), and the return ow is measured
with the additional sensor. The total yield of the system
in kw/h is then calculated using the heat quantity formula
Q=Vx xcp xT stored in the controller.
Figure 1 Heat meter for SUNGO SL/SXL: Volume ow meter and
1Pt1000 temperature sensor
1.4
Before installing the volume ow meter,

assure tight tting of the thread exten-
sion from " to 1"m with Allen key!
Technical Data
Heat meter for SUNGO SL / SXL
Part Characteristic Type WMZ 0.6 / WMZ 1.5 / WMZ 2.5
Rating Qn = 0.6 m/h; 1.5 m/h; 2.5 m/h
Impulse value 1 Litre/Impulse
Impulse actuator Reed-switch
Wire length, Impulse actuator 1.5 m
Volume ow meter
Overall length, heat meter 130 mm
Connection thread G 1B
Pressure level PN16
Temp., max. 130 C
Type Pt1000
Sensor Tolerance, max. 0.8 C
Application range -50 C up to +180 C
Pipe connection Depending on application, include either solder or threaded connection set or combination tting set in order.
Solar Thermal / Solar Circuit EN-XXX_WMZ-SUNGO-SL-SXL_TI-MA-0807xx-11218400 337

Installation Commissioning
Installation / Hydraulics Before commissioning the solar installation, thoroughly
Install the volume ow meter in the return ow of the so- rinse the solar circuit with water to ush out residues from
lar circuit. Pay attention to the correct ow direction. The cutting and burring.
return ow sensor is inserted into the immersion sleeve of Recommendation: during ushing install a distance piece
the volume ow meter. instead of the volume ow meter, in order to avoid soiling,
damaging or destruction of the propeller.
Installation / SUNGO SL After ushing, insert volume ow meter in the correct ow
On the SL board, the return ow sensor must be connect- direction and ll solar installation with water/glycol mix-
ed to the right terminal at input T5. The Volume meter must ture.
be connected to input T7. The connections are not poled.
Installation / SUNGO SXL System Messages

On the SXL board, the return ow sensor must be connect-
ed to the right terminal at input T6. The volume ow meter The return ow temperature sensor and the impulse exit
must be connected to E10. The connections are not poled. of the volume ow meter are monitored via the diagnos-
tic system of the SUNGO SL and SUNGO SXL controllers.
The respective system messages are described on the last
Operation pages of the controller manuals.
The activation is done in the menu Special Functions. To

enable programming, this menu must be selected within
the rst minute after restarting the controller.
For the required steps for activating heat metering and
the necessary settings please refer to the manuals of the
SUNGO SL or SUNGO SXL controllers.
SL circuit board Plug connector, Display
Fuse
FUSE 5X20
Solar storage
Pi
n
as
sig
nm
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T7
en
tS
Transformer
UN
M M M M M M
G
O
SL
Flow
Yield measuring, return flow sensor T5
Volume flow meter, T7

B Return flow
L
SX
A sensor
SXL circuit board Plug connector, Display
O
NG
Volume Return flow

SU
meter
nt
me
gn
si
as
Fuse
Pin
FUSE 5X20
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Transformer
M M M M M M M M M
Yield measuring, return flow sensor T6
Volume flow meter, E10
Figure 2 Hydraulic and electric connection of heat meter for SUNGO SL/SXL

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
2/3 Way Electronic Diverter Valve
The 2/3 way valve VC 4012 consists of two parts, the

Actuator Actuator
230V actuator head and the hydraulik part (Fig. 1), that head head
is delivered with " or 1" male threaded connection.
After pressing the locking button, the actuator head can
be disconnected from the hydraulic part by moving it
(45) turn counterclockwise. (Fig. 2)
The type VC4012 is wired via a plug. Electrically the actua-

tor head is connected via three cables (without ground): B A B A
brown is connected to L, parallel to the power supply of
the controller and is continuously under power. Black is Hydraulic part AB
2-way-valve
connected to the switching exit of the controller (see op-
eration instructions of controller), and is only under power
when switched. The blue neutral line connects to N.
3-way-valve
The plastic slider on the actuator head optically indicates Figure 1 2- and 3-way-valve consisting of actuator head and hydronic
the switching state of the valve. When the slider is in its valve.
uppermost position, the actuator head is without power.
The hydraulic path then is branching from AB to B (Fig. 3). Plastic slider
If the slider is in its lower position, the actuator head is on.
The hydraulic path is then branching from AB to A. (Fig. 3).
During power failure, the valve freezes in its momentary
position.
Connection
jack
1.4
For correct venting the plastic slider is set to position
manual operation. The manual operation is only pos-
sible, when the slider rst is in its uppermost position. By Locking button Plug
strongly pressing the slider downwards and inwards, the
adjustment head is moved into its middle position.
The hydraulic paths A and B then are simultanously half Blue

B A Brown
opened. By momentarily removing the adjustment head Black
from the hydraulic part, the actuator head is re-set into the AB
standard position.
Figure 2 Press locking button, to remove hydronic valve (left).

VC4012 with separate plug connection (right).
Powerless
state (off)
Manual
Powered position
state (on)
B A B A B A
AB AB AB
Figure 3
Powerless state (off) = AB - B (left), powered state (on) = AB - A (centre), manual position = AB - A + B
Solar Thermal / Solar Circuit EN-XXX_2-3-Way-Valve_TI-MA-0809xx-1121M700 339

Technical Data
Typ Honeywell 2/3 way valve
Actuator head VC4012 separate plug connection
Manipulation time max. 7 s
Operational Voltage 230 V (AC) 10 %, 50/60 Hz
Protection type of case IP 40
Power demand 4 VA (during valve movement)
Mains, L1
Plug connector,
Controller IC display
FUSE 5X20
black A2, phase
Triac Fuse
blue A2, null
A B
AB Transformer
PE-PE A2 A1 L1
PE-PE N N N
Potential Earth, PE Mains, L1
Solar circulation pump, A1
Figure 4 2/3 way valve for return ow boost with connection to SUNGO SL
Plug connector,
Mains, L1 Triacs display
Fuse
FUSE 5X20
black A6, phase
blue A6, null
A B A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 L1 Transformer
AB
PE-PE-PE N6 N N N N N N
PE-PE-PE
A6, return flow boost Solar circulation pump, A1
Figure 5 2/3 way valve with connection to SUNGO SXL e.g. for return ow boost A6/N6

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
Twinex TVA
Rapid Piping System
Product Features
Quickly installable double tube
Flow and return pipe can be easily divided into 2 indi-
vidual tube legs for separate installation (e.g. for collec-
tor connection).
Multiple seperations and reconnections of tube legs
possible.
Robust and tear resistant outer skin
UV- and temperature resistant
Sensor line 2 x 0.50 mm
Figure 1 Twinex TVA rapid piping system incl. double tube and inte-
grated sensor cable
1.4
Pressure loss [mbar/m]
Table 1
Twinex TVA 2-16 2-20 100
Highly exible and insulated stainless steel 90
Tube double ripple tube with integrated 2-wire
sensor cable (2 x 0.75 mm) 80
Separable insulating sleeve, = 0.038 W/mK, 70

Insulating sleeve short term temperature resistant up to
175C, robust and UV-resistant outer skin 60
DN 16
Part no. 150 301 33 150 301 34 50
DN 20
Ext. dimension, 40
double tube 122 x 60 134 x 66
(WxH, mm) 30
External diameter 20
60 x 60 66 x 66
single tube (mm)
10
PN (bar) at 250 C 11.0 6.9
0
Length 15 m reel
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200
Connection set Please order separately Volume flow [l/h]
(see Tab. 2) (4 items per TVA-reel)
Figure 2 Pressure loss of Twinex 2-16/2-20 per m, depending on vol-
ume ow, heat carrier uid DC20-water mix with 40/60 ratio, at operat-
ing pressure 4 bar and operating temperature 40 C
Air-accumulation within the tube dents is possible.

Therefore make sure that tube is installed with continuous-
ly ascending slope, so that complete venting is possible.
Solar Thermal / Solar Circuit EN-XXX_Twinex-TVA_TI-MA-100119-11217700 341

Table 2 Twinex TVA connection sets and accessories
Part Connection Part no.
" ripple tube on 18 mm

DN 16 150 301 37
copper sleeve
Twinex TVA 1" ripple tube on 22 mm

DN 20 150 301 38
solder connection set copper sleeve
1" ripple tube on 28 mm

DN 25 15030190
copper sleeve
" ripple tube on " ripple

DN 16 150 301 35
tube
1" ripple tube on a " male
DN 20 150 301 54
Twinex TVA threaded connection
threaded connection set 1" ripple tube on a "
DN 20 150 301 36
female threaded connection
1" ripple tube on a 1"
DN 25 150 301 89
male threaded connection
" ripple tube on 18 mm
female threaded connection
(like solder sleeve) and
DN 16 150 301 55
22mm male
(e.g. directly connecting the
Twinex TVA CIRCO solar circulation unit)
combi-tting connection set
1" ripple tube on 18 mm
female (like capiliary socket)
DN 20 and 22 mm male 150 301 56
(e.g. directly connecting the
CIRCO solar circulation unit)
" ripple tube on a " IG

DN 16 (e.g. for connection to 150 301 68
EURO collectors)
Twinex TVA
collector connection set
1" ripple tube on " female
DN 20 (e.g. for connection to 150 301 69
EURO collectors)
Extension
DN 16 150 301 39
" ripple tube
Twinex TVA Extension

DN 20 150 301 40
coupling set 1" ripple tube
Extension
DN 25 15030191
1" ripple tube
DN 16 150 301 42
Txinex TVA
oval clamp set DN 20 150 301 41
(4 items)
DN 25 15030191
342 EN-XXX_Twinex-TVA_TI-MA-100119-11217700
Figure 3 Cut the corrugated stainless steel tube with a pipe cutter plain Figure 4 Slide swivel nut onto tube. Then place compression ring into
to the required length. Deburr to protect your hands and the seals. the rst ripple and press together. If using pipe pliers, make sure to not
damage the tubes!
1.4
Figure 5 Now compress ripple at tube end to form a sealing surface. Figure 6 Tighten swivel nut with a spanner and screw in the connect-
For this, place an adequate washer into the swivel nut. ing piece. Then remove connecting piece and washer again.
Figure 7 When the connection is nalized, a gasket must be inserted! Figure 8 Make sure that upon completion of the installation the ripple
tube is insulated completely and insulation tape is applied at abutting
ends of insulation.
To allow complete draining and venting, install corrugated

tube at continuously ascending slope!
EN-XXX_Twinex-TVA_TI-MA-100119-11217700 343
Sensor Connection Box SP2

With Integrated Surge Arrester
Technical Data
Encasing: plastic, grey
Wall mounting ears (outside)
Protection class of encasing: IP 65
Dimensions: 80 x 80 x 50 mm Surge-arrester diode
Ambient temp.: -25 C up to +70 C (suppressor)
Function
The integrated surge arrester lters out a certain fraction
of the excess atmospheric voltage. This allows for a bet-
ter protection of sensor (type PT1000 or KTY) and down-
stream electronics. The connection box also functions as
E1 E2 A1 A2
an extension of the collector sensor cable.
Low voltage is impressed on the senor cables; therefore

Input Output
they must be laid separately from 230 V cables to avoid terminal terminal
interferences. 1.4
Figure 1 Sensor connection box SP2 / Schematics connection board.
Mechanical and Electric Installation
There are outside ears on the bottom of the box for easy
wall mounting.
The collector sensor is connected to the connection board
via the input terminals E1 and E2 (Fig. 1). The sensor ca-
ble extension from connection board to solar controller
SUNGO S/SL/SXL is led on via the output terminals A1 and
A2. The connection of the cables on in- and output is with-
out polarity.
Solar Thermal / Solar Circuit EN-XXX_Sensor-Connection-Box-SP2_TI-MA-0305xx-1121K700 345

Solar Heat Transfer Liquid DC20
1.4
Figure 1 Solar liquid DC20 reliable frost protection for solar thermal energy systems.
Properties
DC20 is an odourless antifreeze composed of non-haz- Reliable Corrosion Protection
ardous propylene glycol and corrosion inhibitors. Dilute Special inhibitors provide reliable corrosion protection for
DC20 with water, depending on the desired grade of frost solar energy systems with mixed installation (various dif-
protection. Use water of domestic water quality with a max. ferent metals). The outstanding corrosion protection was
chloride content of 100 mg/kg or demineralised water. proven in a special solar test by EMPA (Swiss Federal Labo-
The water content of the mixture must be between 25 % ratories for Materials Testing and Research).
and 70 %.
DC20 is suitable as a heat transfer liquid in solar energy Compatible with Plastics
systems as well as heating/cooling systems. DC20 has the Mixtures of DC20 and water are compatible with a large
following properties: number of commercial elastomeres. If in doubt carry out
a compatibility test.
Highly Efcient Heat Transfer
If DC20 is diluted with water it displays excellent heat ca- Non-Hazardous for Persons and the Environment
pacity and good ow capacity (viscosity) even at low tem- According to EU criteria, DC20 is not a hazardous prod-
peratures. This saves energy on pumping and allows for uct. It is easily biodegradable, non-irritant and only a weak
smaller pipe cross sections. water hazard. Nevertheless care is recommended when
handling DC20 avoid contact with skin and eyes.
Pleasefollowtheadviceonpages349and350of thissafetydata
sheet.
Solar Thermal / Solar Circuit EN-XXX_DC20_TI-091110-11207500 347

Physical Properties
Substance Properties DC20 in Volume%
30 40 50 60 70 100
-10C 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.2
Thermal conductivity(W/mK) +20C 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.2
+100C 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.2
-10C 3.8 3.7 3.5 3.3 3.1 2.3
Specic heat capacity(kJ/kgK) +20C 3.9 3.7 3.6 3.4 3.2 2.4
+100C 4.1 4.0 3.9 3.7 3.6 2.9
-10C 13 22 34 55 90 760
Kinematic viscosity (mm/s) +20C 3.1 4.3 6.2 9.0 13.1 70.0
+100C 0.6 0.7 0.9 1.0 1.3 3.3
Boiling point at 1.013 bar(C) 102 103 104 106 108 166
Density at +20C (g/cm) 1028 1036 1043 1048 1052 1055
Freezing point(C) -12 -19 -29 -44 -51 -51
Table 1 Physical values DC20.
Application
Mixing of the Solar Liquid Testing of Frost Protection
First determine the liquid volume of your solar energy Use the special frost protection tester DC20 (see gure2,
system. When identifying the liquid content of the system order no. 150 100 11) or the refractometer R20 (not illus-
allow for any residual water in the collectors. You can nd trated, order no. 150 10 10), as the density of DC20 dif-
help for calculating the system content in the document fers from for example automotive antifreeze. Testing with
Solar Thermal Systems - Setup, Commissioning and Main- frost protection tester DC20: Squeeze the rubber bulb of
tenance. the tester and dip the plastic tip into the solar liquid mix-
Choose the desired frost protection temperature and ture. Then release the rubber bulb and allow liquid to be
check table1 for the respective volume ratio of DC20. For sucked in until the display scale moves freely. You can now
reasons of corrosion protection the percentage of DC20 read the frost protection temperature on the scale. Please
should be 25 % minimum. For frost prone locations we rec- ensure the liquid has a temperature of approx. 20C so
ommend 40 % DC20. Even at temperatures below -19C that the freezing point is displayed correctly.
only an icy mush will form which will not cause the pipes
to burst. If you received 10litres of DC20 in a 25 l canister,
ll up the canister with water to achieve a 40 % volume
ratio of DC20.
Figure 2 Frost protection tester.
348 EN-XXX_DC20_TI-091110-11207500
Safety Data Sheet
1. Substance name, composition and supplier 6. Safety measures in case of accidental release
Trade name DC20 Safety measures

Use protective clothing
for the person
Wagner & Co Solartechnik GmbH,
Zimmermannstr.12, Retain contaminated water/re
Supplier
D-35091 Clbe, Germany, Safety measures for the water. Do not allow liquid to ow
Tel. (49) (0)6421/8007-0 Fax -22 environment into the sewer system/surface
water/ground water.
Information Tel. (49) (0)6421/8007-0
Contain spillages and cover with
As a precaution in case of
large amounts of sand, soil or
intake please contact a health
another absorbent material.
professional, hospital or poison
Emergency advice Briskly brush into a pile to help
centre / hotline nearby.
absorption.
Have this technical information
Fill into containers or plastic sacks
ready.
Procedure for cleaning/ and dispose of.
2. Composition / Details of elements removing Remove small spillages (splashes)
with plenty of water.
1.2 propylene glycol with In case of large spillages: pump
Chemical composition corrosion inhibitors. product off, collect and dispose
CAS-No. 57-55-6 of. If large quantities leak into the
3. Possible dangers drains or watercourses, inform the
local water authorities.
Potential hazards for persons
No known hazards 7. Handling and storage
and the environment
4. First aid measures (as precaution) Good ventilation of storage and
Handling
work areas
General advice Remove contaminated clothing.
Take measures to prevent
If you experience discomfort after electrostatic charging. Electrical
If inhaled inhaling vapour/aerosol: fresh air, operating equipment must be
consult your doctor Protection against re and
suitable for temperature class T2
explosions
On contact with the skin Rinse with soapy water. (VDE 0165) (D).
Use water to cool containers
If no emergency eye rinsing which are at risk of overheating.
bottle is available, hold eyelids 1.4
On contact with the eye open and rinse the eye under Product is hygroscopic. Store in
running water for a minimum of tightly closed container in a dry
15Minutes. Storage location.
Do not use galvanized storage
Rinse your mouth and drink containers.
If swallowed
plenty of water.
8. Limitation of substance exposition / personal protection
Treat symptoms equipment
Advice for the doctor (decontamination, vital functions),
no specic antidote is required Breathing protection
Breathing protection if fumes/
5. Fire-ghting measures aerosols are released
Water spraying, dry powder, Hand protection
Suitable extinguishing agents alcohol resistant foam, carbon Chemical-resistant protective
dioxide (CO2) gloves (EN 374).
Personal protection
Recommended: Nitrile rubber
Hazardous fumes, formation of equipment
(NBR) protection index 6.
smoke/fog. The listed substances Please read the manufacturers
Special hazards
or substance groups may be instructions.
released during a re. Eye protection
Wear safety glasses with side
In case of re make sure to wear a
protection.
Protective equipment breathing apparatus with its own
air supply General measures for Take all usual precautions for
Specic hazards depend on protection and hygiene handling chemicals.
which substances are on re as
well as the ambient conditions.
Further information
Contaminated re water must be
disposed of in compliance with
local regulations.
EN-XXX_DC20_TI-091110-11207500 349
9. Physical and chemical properties in detail The product was not tested. The
statements are derived from the
State Fluid Assessment of aquatic toxicity
properties of the individual
Colour Colourless components.
Odour Nearly odourless Details of elimination test:

Test method OECD301A (new
ph value
6.5 8.0 (ASTM D 1287) version)
(mixing ratio 1:2, 20 C)
Longevity and Method of analysis:
Solidifying temperature < 50C (DIN 51583) biodegradability DOC certication
Level of elimination: > 70%
Boiling temperature > 150C (ASTM D 1120) Assessment: Easily
Flash point > 130C (DIN 51758) biodegradable
2.6 Vol.-% Other eco-toxilogical advice: Do

Lower explosion limit Additional information not discharge into watercourses
(polypropylene glycol)
without pre-treatment.
12.6 Vol.-%
Upper explosion limit 13. Disposal advice
(polypropylene glycol)
Ignition point > 200C (DIN 51794) DC20 has to be disposed of in a suitable waste site or incineration
plant. All local regulations for waste disposal must be complied
Vapour pressure (20C) 4mbar with. For quantities below 100 l contact the sanitation department
Density (20C) 1.056 g/cm of your local council.
Uncleaned packaging: Packaging which is not contaminated can
Solubility in water Completely soluble be reused. Packaging which cannot be cleaned has to be
Solubility in other solvents Soluble in polar solvents disposed of in the same way as the substance.
Viscosity (kinematic, 20C) approx. 70mm/s (DIN 51562) 14. Transport advice
10. Stability and reactivity Not considered a hazardous substance for transport.
(ADRRIDADNRIMDG/GGVSeeICAO/IATA)
Substances to avoid Strong oxidants
15. Regulations
No hazardous reactions if
regulations and instructions for European Union regulations
Hazardous reactions (identication) / National No identication required
storage and handling are
followed. regulations
No hazardous decomposition Water hazard class WGK1: weak

Hazardous products if regulations and Other regulations hazard to water (Germany, VwVwS
decomposition products instructions for storage and dated 17.05.1999)
handling are followed. 16. Other information
11. Toxicology information Previous issues of this safety data sheet are rendered invalid with
LD50/oral/rat > 2000mg/kg this publication.The information in this safety data sheet reects
our knowledge and experience at the date indicated below.
Non-irritant This safety data sheet provides important physical, safety-related,
Primary skin irritation/rabbit
(OECD regulation 404) toxicological and ecological data required for the handling and
preparation of chemical substances. It also provides
Primary mucous membrane Non-irritant
recommendations on safe handling, storage and transport. We
irritation/rabbit (OECD regulation 405)
assume no liability for any damage resulting from the use of this
The product was not tested. The information or the use, application, modication, or processing of
statements are derived from the the products described herein. This does not apply if we are liable
Additional information
properties of the individual due to intent or gross negligence. Indirect liability is expressly
elements. excluded. This information does not imply any assurance of
product properties.
12. Ecological information
17. Date of this publication
Fish toxicity
Oncorhynchus mykiss/LC50 Created at 10.11.2009
(96h): > 100mg/l By Wagner-Solartechnik
Aquatic invertebrates EC50 (48h):
> 100mg/l
Water plants
EC50 (72h): > 100mg/l
Ecological toxicity Micro-organisms/effect on
activated sludge: DEV-L2 >
1000mg/l. If weak concentrations
of the substance are correctly
discharged into specially adapted
biological ltering plants, a
detrimental effect on the
degradation of activated sludge
is not expected.

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
External Heat Exchangers
Plate Heat Exchangers (PHE)

The plate heat exchangers consist of copper brazed stain-
less steel plates (1.4401) with pressed in troughs. The de-
livery includes a tightly tting environmentally compatible
EPP hard foam insulation shell.
The troughs cause a turbulent ow of the heat carrier uid
in the two opposite channels, which results in a very effec-
tive heat exchange process and high power density. Sca-
ling is also considerably reduced.
PHEs can be used for many solar thermal applications. e.g.

DHW preparation or pool heating (max. chlorid content of
the water 100 mg/l) as well as heat generation with con-
densing and low temperature boilers. Our service: specic
size calculation and supply of special custom made sizes.
Accessories
Table 1 Fitting Sets Part No.

Combined tting set 5/4"-22 819 100 88 1.4
Figure 1 Plate Heat Exchanger
Combined tting set 1"-22 819 100 87
Scope of supply: each with 1 tting. union nut and und gasket
Technical Data
Table 2 Plate Heat Exchanger Solar Circuit Condensing Boiler Low Temp. Boiler
Type A30-18H A30-24H A60-20H A30-18H A30-24H A30-18H
Part no. 150 303 77 150 303 78 150 303 71 150 303 77 150 303 78 150 303 77
Thermal power output (kW) 4.2 8.4 12.6 20 30 20
Sizing, max. collector area (m) 10 20 30 - - -
Temperature range primary side (C) 50-40 50-40 50-40 60-50 60-50 70-50
Temperature range secondary side (C) 35-45 35-45 35-45 35-45 35-45 35-45
Pressure drop, primary side (mbar = hPa) 12 27 117 187 238 50
Pressure drop, secondary side (mbar = hPa) 12 25 114 236 283 236
Volume ow, primary side (m/h) 0.40 0.79 1.18 1.76 2.59 0.88
Volume ow, secondary side (m/h) 0.36 0.72 1.09 1.74 2.61 1.74
Liquid volume: primary and secondary (l) 0.53/0.47 0.75/0.65 0.9/0.8 0.53/0.47 0.75/0.65 0.53/0.47
Max. operational pressure (bar) 30 30 30 30 30 30
Max. operational temperature (C) 225 225 225 225 225 225
Length, incl. insulation (mm) 350 350 570 350 350 350
Width, incl. insulation (mm) 152
Height, incl. insulation (mm) 108 108 122 108 108 108
Weight (kg) 3.5 4.3 6.5 3.5 4.3 3.5
Connection: External thread, at sealing 1" / 1" AG
Solar Thermal / Solar Circuit EN-XXX_Heat-Exchangers_TI-101103-11205000 351

Connecting the Plate Heat Exchanger
Primary side (solar or heating circuit): entrance S1 and exit S2,
secondary side (storage circuit): entrance S3 and exit S4
Use pipe clamps to ax the PHE.
S3 S4
S3 S4
50 mm
S2 S1
S2 S1
A30 = 250 mm
A60 = 466 mm
Figure 2 Connections of plate heat exchanger

Compact Solar Hot Water Systems
Specically developed for domestic hot water preparation at lower geographical

latitudes, the compact solar hot water drainback line SECUSOL and the all-in-one
SECUTERM thermosiphon kits offer safe and highly economical opportunities to
utilize the sun and save signicant amounts of energy, especially when electric
water heating is replaced by solar heat. The award winning design of the SECU-
SOL drainback system is strikingly easy to install, reducing required skills and
parts to a minimum while at the same time offering inherent system safety.
The SECUTERM thermosiphon kits come with several design improvements over
conventional thermosiphon systems, combining a powerful collector, operational
safety and ease of use in one compact and installation with excellent cost-benet
ratio.
SECUSOL Solar Compact System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
SECUterm 200 P / 300 P (Free Standing Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
SECUterm 160 I / 200 I / 300 I (On-Roof Installation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
1.5
353
SECUSOL Solar Compact System
Inherent Operational Safety

The design principle guarantees absolute shut-off and
stagnation safety. When the pump is not in operation
there is no solar uid present in the collectors. Therefore
the solar uid and any downstream system components
are safe from overheating. Unwanted gravitational forces
and operational faults due to air pockets are eliminated.
A service intensive membrane expansion vessel is not
required. Operation with common anti-freeze solar uid
prevents potential frost damage.
Powerful Performance
Highly transparent anti-reective glass, single plate ab-
sorber panels and well insulated components guarantee
high yields. Operational safety, excellent workmanship
and ongoing quality control ensure future performance.
Easy Installation
Storage tank, solar controller and the pump assembly in-
cluding all safety equipment are delivered as a pre-assem-
bled unit. Therefore there is no need to install the solar
station, the expansion vessel and the controller. A double
copper pipe with a diameter of only 12 mm allows fast
installation of the pipes. The system is designed for a maxi-
mum installation height of 8.5meters and a collector loop
length of 30meters. 1.5
Quick Startup
The rinsing and lling processes for the system are easy.
Venting of the system and setting of the correct expansion
vessel primary pressure or the ow rate are not required
at all.
Compact and Space-Saving Design Figure 1 SECUSOL System

The system design is compact with integrated compo-
nents. A solar station and an expansion vessel are not re-
quired. The controller is attached to the storage tank cover
and therefore easily accessible. Figure 2 Solar Keymark label Solar Keymark
for SECUSOL 250-1 011-7S020-A
Content
1. Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 3.3 Free Standing Installation . . . . . . . . . . 370
1.1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 3.4 Setting up the Storage Tank . . . . . . . . . 376
1.2 Scope of Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 3.5 Connection to Domestic Water Supply . . . . 377
1.3 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 3.6 Laying the Solar Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . 378
2. General Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 364 3.7 Installing an Auxiliary Heat Source . . . . . . 382
2.1 Installer and Operator Qualications . . . . . 364 3.8 Installing Controller and Insulation . . . . . . 383
2.2 Intended Use and Application . . . . . . . . 364 4. Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
2.3 Standards and Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 5. Advice for the User . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
3. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 6. Maintenance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . 386
3.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 7. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
3.2 On-Roof Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 8. System Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Solar Thermal / Solar Collectors EN-XXX_SECUSOL_TI-MA-100621-1121R800 355

1.1 Technical Data
Table 1 Features SECUSOL SECUSOL SECUSOL SECUSOL
Component 160-1 250-1 250-2 350-2
No. of collectors 1 2 (cannot be extended)
System System performance:

E.g. Messina / Italy: E.g. Rome / Italy: E.G. Rome / Italy: E.G. Rome/Italy:
Solar faction (at indicated hot
84.9 % / (140 l/d) 69.7 % (200 l/d) 92.1 % / (250 l/d) 86 % / (350 l/d)
water tapping amount) 1
Type EURO C22 M10 AR EURO C20 M8 AR EURO C22 M10 AR EURO C20 M8 AR
Gross area / aperture area 2.24 m / 2.02 m 2.61 m / 2.38 m 2.24 m / 2.02 m 2.61 m / 2.38 m
Solar collectors
Collector installation On-roof mounting or free standing
Orientation of collector Mounting in horizontal direction, maximum permitted deviation from horizontal: 2
Collector circuit material (on site) Cu 12mm, see material requirements in table8
Insulation material (accessory) see material requirements in table8
Length of solar circuit
(sum of ow and return legs), Minimum 5 m / maximum 30 m
gure27
Collector loop Maximum operating pressure 6bar
Minimum 1 m (from the bottom of the tank to the bottom of the collector)
Installation height (gure27)
Maximum 8.5 m (from the bottom of the tank to the top of the collector)
Minimum temperature Frost resistant up to -17C if correctly lled
Heat transfer uid in
Water/propylene glycol mix only with 33 % glycol , lling capacity: 7.2 to 7.4 liters
collector loop
Name SUNGOmini, SUNGO SL
Solar controller Pump control Speed controlled
Protected against overheating Maximum temperature limitation for the tank
Nominal content according to
160 liters 250 liters 350 liters
DIN4753
Auxiliary heating volume ca. 50 liters ca. 120 liters ca. 160 liters
Total height (including insulation) 1304 mm 1596 mm 1845 mm
Diameter (including insulation) 750 mm
Permissible operation pressure /
10 bar / 95 C
Permissible operating temperature
Corrosion protection
Enamel coating according to DIN4753T3
of the storage cylinder
Solar cylinder
Cathodic corrosion protection Mg sacricial anode acc. to DIN4753T6
Cold/hot water connections G 1" M, at sealing
Sensor clamp Clip in lower tank area
Solar heat exchanger ca. 1.15m
Auxiliary heating coil Does not apply ca. 0.65 m ca. 0.8 m
Socket for electrical immersion
See gure2 (1" or 2" for SECUSOL 160, respectively)
heater, Position:
Heat insulation Cylinder and cover ca. 75mm
(PU foam, polystyrene jacket) Base 40mm
Tank unit Weight 101.5 kg 128.5 kg 138.5 kg
1 System performance was measured by IZES (Institute for Future Energy Systems) in Saarbrucken (conditions according to DIN EN12976).
Solar faction is the ratio of the energy provided by the solar energy system in relation to the total hot water demand from a hot water
source.
2 In order to achieve higher frost protection the glycol content needs to be increased to beyond 33 %. However, this results in a reduced
maximum installation height and length of solar circuit. If required feel free to consult our technical dept.
356 EN-XXX_SECUSOL_TI-MA-100621-1121R800
110
1930
EURO C22 M10
1160
1026
1
2 G1
SECUSOL 250
G 3/4
G1
SECUSOL 160
G 3/4
G2 G 1
G 3/4 G 3/4
A
1.5
C
C
A
G
G1
F
G 3/4
B
G 3/4
D
I I
J
H H
Figure 3 Dimensions of EURO C22 M10 collector and SECUSOL solar storage cylinders 160/250 (see table 2 for dimensions)
(1) Flange with sacricial anode; (2) " venting socket
Dimensions of cylinders are without insulation.
EN-XXX_SECUSOL_TI-MA-100621-1121R800 357
110
2151
1215
1035
EURO C20 M8
G1
G 3/4
G 3/4
G1
SECUSOL 350
A
C
G 3/4
G
F
B
G1
D
G 3/4
I
J
Figure 4 Dimensions of EURO C20 M8 solar collector and SECUSOL 350 solar cylinder (for dimensions see table 2)
(1) Flange with sacricial anode
Table 2 Storage Dimensions Storage Types
Pos. 1 Dimension SECUSOL 160 SECUSOL 250 SECUSOL 350
A Total height (without insulation) 1120 mm 1387 mm 1767 mm
B Socket (2 or 1 ), height above ground 837 mm 1106 mm
Hot water connection
C 973 mm 1273 mm 1273 mm
(stainless steel and brass, G 1) 2, height above ground
Cold water connection
D 447 mm
(stainless steel and brass, G 1) 2, height above ground
E Solar return (G ) 2, height above ground 787 mm
F Aux. heating ow (G ) , height above ground
2 2 (doesn't apply) 887 mm 1156 mm
G Aux. heating return (G ) 2, height above ground (doesn't apply) 1097 mm 1418 mm
H Diameter (without insulation) 600 mm
I Base ring openings 300 mm
J Solar ow (G ) 2, height above ground 350 mm
Legend:
1 Dimension position letters of storage from gures 3 and 4
2 Pipe thread DIN ISO 228-1 (cyl.), at sealing
1.93 m
On roof
1
1.16 m
2 EURO C22 M10
3
1.5
2.32 m
> 4.06 m
1.16m
Free standing setup
1.93 m > 4.06 m

1.16 m
1.16 m
EURO C22 M10

4
Figure 5 Connection options for the EURO C22 M10 for on-roof and free-standing installation, with sensor positions, dimensions of the collector
eld and mounting system. The absorber connections can point to the left or to the right.
(1) Solar sensor; (2) Rail; (3) Rafter bracket or roof anchor; (4) Racking triangle
2.151 m
On roof
1
1.215 m
2 EURO C20 M8
3
2.433 m
> 4.5 m
1.215m
Free standing setup
2.151 m > 4.5 m

1.215m
1.215m
EURO C20 M8
4
Figure 6 Connection options for the EURO C20 M8 for on-roof and free-standing installation, with sensor positions, dimensions of the collector
eld and mounting system. The absorber connections can point to the left or to the right.
(1) Solar sensor; (2) Rail; (3) Rafter bracket or roof anchor; (4) Racking triangle
System air Solar liquid
Collector
Storage
System
air
Solar liquid Heat exchanger
Pump
System idle System in operation
Figure 7 Design principle of the SECUSOL system.

Left hand side: In an idle state the collector loop and the collector are lled with air (light-coloured lines). The solar uid (darker lines) is located in
the heat exchanger.
Right hand side: During operation of the system the air is pushed into the upper loops of the heat exchanger by the rising solar uid.
1.2 Scope of Supply 1.3 Accessories
The complete system is delivered on a single pallet con- Table 5 Accessories Part no.
taining the following parts:
Carrying-handle for collector 188 005 02
Table 3 Components Qty. Collector circuit piping twin-Cu:
Collector EURO C22 M10 AR insulated double copper pipe including sensor 150 300 67
1 or 2 cable 15m roll, 2 x 12mm
(for SECUSOL 160-1, 250-2 or 250-1) 1
Collector EURO C20 M8 AR or C32 M10 HTF Oval clamp set for twin-Cu pipe 150 301 18
1 or 2
(for SECUSOL 250-1 and 350-2) 1 Insulation material for collector circuit: Single pipe
170 000 38
Solar cylinder, nominal content choice of 160, 250 or insulation (Aeroex), 2m length, 13 x 12mm
350liters including solar controller SUNGOmini or Compression ring connector,
1 819 200 55
SUNGOSL and solar return unit, screw xed to a 12mm - 12mm, straight
pallet
Compression ring connector,
1 plug 1" or 2", xed to pallet, 819 200 81
1 12mm - 10mm, straight
to close the storage socket
90 Compression ring elbow connector,
1 Installation accessories depending on system type 819 200 67
12mm - 10mm
(compare tables 6 and 7)
Compression ring " - 12mm 819 200 82
Table 4 Components in the Box Qty. CORREX

130 101 26
impressed current anode 1 " for 160 l storage
Solar ow sub-assembly 1
CORREX
Customer folder, including operating instructions 1 130 101 21
impressed current anode M8 for hole installation
Sensor connection boxSP2 1 Flange cover sealing
139 001 15
Solar uid DC20 2.5 l in a 5 l canister 2-4 (required for anode inspection)
Compression ttings 4-8 Temperature sensor Pt 1000 150 102 49

Thermostatic mixing valve BM:
solder connection 22mm, 100 89
threaded connector" 150 300 75
Safety sub-assemblyS22:
solder connection 22mm 139 001 48
threaded connector"
Set of ttings LT 18 - ", solder connection 18 mm
150 300 18
on auxiliary heating coil (order two)
Set of ttings LT 22 - 1" solder connection 22 mm
100 85
on cold/hot water nozzle (order two) 1.5
Electrical immersion heater 139 001 45
Tank height adjustment unit (order three) 139 000 16
Circulation pump BW 152 160 102 14
Earthing clamp (order two) 120 100 12
Sensor connection box SP2 150 400 51
5
2
1
Figure 8 Basic set on-roof installation
2 Collectors 2 Collectors
Table 6 Scope of Supply, Basic Set On-Roof Installation Single Collector
One Above the Other Next to Each Other
Position 1 Components Qty.
1 Rafter bracket or roof anchor 4 6 8
Collector rail1257 mm (EURO C30/C20 AR M8) or
2 1202 mm (EURO C32/C22 AR M10), respectively, 2 2 4
with two collector clamps
Collector rail 1223 mm (C30/C20 AR M8) or
3 1168 mm (EURO C32/C22 AR M10) 2
with one collector clamp
4 Rail connector 2
Collector EURO C30/C20 AR M8 or
5 1 2 2
C32/C22 AR M10
6 Wire strap 1 1 1
Connection set, straight (see gure 32) 2
Connection set, elbow (see gures 30-32) 2 4 2
1 Position numbers from gure 8. 2 Not included in set, order separately!
8
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
Figure 9 Basic set for free standing setup 1.5
Table 7 Scope of Supply, Basic Set, Horizontal Single Collector 2 Collectors (Next to Each Other)
Position 1 Components Qty.
1 Pre-assembled racking triangle 2 4
2 Hexagonal head screw M8 x 40 2 4
3 Nut M8 with locking teeth 2 4
4 Collector clamp lower part 4 8
5 Collector clamp upper part 4 8
6 Washer 8.4 4 8
7 Hexagonal head screw M8 x 30 4 8
Collector EURO C30/C20 AR M8 or
8 1 2
C32/C22 AR M10
Connection set, straight (see gure 32) 2
Connection set, elbow (see gures 30-32) 2 2
1 Position numbers from gure 9
The following symbols are used throughout these instruc- By design heat loss from the storage tank due to overnight
tions and have to be observed: recirculation or thermosyphonic ows are impossible.
Thus the installation of check valves is not required. The
installation of venting equipment and a service-intensive
membrane expansion vessel are unnecessary due to the
DANGER of potentially severe personal injury special 2-phase operating system.
Operational limits
Note that the storage tank and solar controller must not be
RISK of property and material damage installed outdoors and that the system may only be operat-
ed within the permitted operating conditions (Chapter1:
Technical Information).
Due to the special system design a maximum of 2 collec-
NOTE as important additional information tors can be integrated. It is not possible to extend the col-
lector area retrospectively.
2.1 Installer and Operator Qualications

2.3 Standards and Codes
Set-up, installation and correct start-up of the SECUSOL
compact solar heating system must be carried out by a Wind- and Snow Loads
certied expert. Please note that in case of a warranty com- Wind and snow loads affect the collectors and the instal-
plaint the warranty is only valid if the correct start-up has lation system. Depending on the conditions and height of
been certied in a commissioning report. the installation site as well as the collector inclination the
mechanical loads on the system can vary considerably.
Also see guidelines for the planning of structural frame-
2.2 Intended Use and Application works and standard EN 1991 (EUROCODE, European
guidelines for structural planning). With combined snow
Function and wind loads the maximum strain for the EURO solar
The SECUSOL solar thermal system is designed for do- collector is 2250 N/m.
mestic hot water preparation. Note that at the roof edges wind suction spikes may oc-
The solar uid is pumped from the solar heat exchanger to cur! Please read the information in the guidelines for the
the solar collector where it is heated. The thermal energy planning of structural frameworks. Some additional infor-
carried by the solar uid is then transferred to the domes- mation can be found in the technical information for the re-
tic water in the storage tank. spective collectors. Please also observe relevant national
Auxiliary heating of domestic water in the upper part of regulations. In case of doubt please contact our technical
the storage tank can be done via a suitable downstream dept.
continuous ow heater, an optional electrical immersion
heater or via the integrated auxiliary heating coil when System Integration
connected to central heating. During integration of the storage tank into the domestic
The included SUNGO solar controller switches the circu- water supply and connection of the solar controller, all
lation pump, depending on the temperature difference national and local safety regulations must be complied
between collector and storage. It also monitors the max. with, including relevant lightning protection regulations.
storage temperature. When installing an auxiliary heating device please follow
If the system is in stagnation, the entire solar uid is moved the manufacturers guidelines.
to the heat exchanger, while collector eld and collector
circuit are lled with system air (gure 7, left hand side). EU Conformity
When the circulation pump is switched on, the collector The solar energy system was designed and manufactured
and the collector circuit are lled with solar uid and the in accordance with current EU laws and regulations.
system air is pushed into the upper coils of the heat ex-
changer (gure7, right hand side). EN806-1 and prEN1717:1999
Once the storage tank is heated up to the maximum tem- Provided the system is installed correctly, the requirements
perature, the controller switches off the circulation pump. of EN806-1 and prEN 1717:1999 are met.
Normally the solar uid automatically ows back to the
heat exchanger. Otherwise if irradiation continues, the so- EN12976 and EN12977
lar uid vaporizes in the collector eld and the system is The entire system was designed and manufactured ac-
emptied this way. As the uid retreats, the air within the cording to the regulations in EN 12976 and EN 12977.
system ows into the collectors. The heat transport to the The corresponding system SECUSOL 250-1 with a collec-
tank stops and the solar uid, which is temperature-sensi- tor area of 2.4 m and a storage tank of 250l was tested ac-
tive, then is safely stored in the storage tank area. cording to DIN EN12976. A testing certicate is available.
Using a solar uid with 33 % glycol content ensures addi- The system is accredited with the Solar Keymark (gure2).
tional permanent protection against frost damage, in ad- Ongoing quality control procedures are an integral part of
dition to corrosion protection. the manufacturing process.
Material Specications 3. Installation
Table8 Component Parameters Conditions 3.1 Preparation
Material Copper only
Pipe material Scope of Supply
Dimension 12mmCu
Before commencing the installation please ensure all com-
Outside UV-resistant
ponents listed in table3 and 4 are present.
No special
Inside
requirements Material Required on Site
Up to 175C in the In order to complete the installation and commissioning
Pipe insulation collector area of the SECUSOL solar energy system the following is re-
Permanent
Up to 110C in the quired on site:
temperature
resistance
collector loop Piping (copper pipe Cu12) for the collector loop pipes
Up to 110C in the Insulation material for the collector loop pipes (for out-
tank area side use, UV-resistant), available as accessory
Electric extension cable for the collector sensors
(2threads with cross section of 0.75mm min.)
Thermostatic mixing valve, available as accessory
Safety unit for cold water connection, available as an
accessory
For reasons of corrosion protection the collector loop
must be made of materials meeting the requirements of
table8. Other materials are not permitted. Suitable con-
necting methods are soldering, press ttings or clamp ring
connectors.
When installing the at sealing connections please only
use the original soft ber sealants included in the delivery.
These sealants have been specially tested for this purpose.
Required Tools
The following tools are required for the installation and
xing of the collector loop system:
16mm open jaw spanner for collector installation
Pipe wrench
Screwdriver
2 water pipes of 2 meters length each, both with "
hose connector on one side 1.5
Water bucket with a minimum capacity of 10liters
Safety Note
Before installing the collectors please read the informa-
tion leaet Safety Precautions for the Installation of Col-
lectors. Note the statutory accident regulations as well as
the technical installation rules described in this leaet.
The SECUSOL system is suitable for on-roof and free
standing installation. The collectors have to be mounted
horizontally to allow them to empty in idle state and dur-
ing stagnation.
3.2 On-Roof Installation

The on-roof mounting system allows fast installation of the
collectors on a pitched roof without having to open larg-
er parts of the roof. This is achieved by positioning rafter
brackets on the roof. Rafter brackets of type P are suitable
for rafter roofs with traditional roof tiles. For concrete roofs
use type M rafter brackets. There are also other bracket
types available. Two vertical mounting rails are xed to the,
rafter brackets and the collector is installed horizontally on
these brackets. All individual components are shown in g-
ure8.
Fixing of Rafter Brackets (gures9 and 10)
Depending on the attachment surface, structural condi-
tions and the used SECUSOL system differing numbers
and types of rafter brackets or roof anchors will be re-
n. 5
quired. Please indicate the required type and quantity (in
mi
case of doubt contact our technical dept.).
The positions of roof anchor under typical conditions can mi
n.
be derived from gures 5, 6 and 13 as well as table 9. 5
The rafter brackets P Stv and PM are xed with the two
self tapping screws to the rafter directly above a purlin,
as shown in gure 10. Observe the minimum distance
to the roof tile underneath. The mounting rails are xed
with a clamping angle (gure 13, detail 2).
If the roof features a sufciently solid concrete plate the
roof anchors type M can be used as an alternative. Ac-
cording to gure 10 rst drill holes (diameter 14 mm)
through tiles and concrete plate, insert dowels (1) and
screw in the stair bolt (2). Then attach the EPDM rubber
seal (4) and washer (3) using the rst nut (6), counter Figure 10 Proper xing of the rafter bracket types PStv and PM
with 2nd nut to seal off the roof. Screw on the holder (5)
with 2 nuts.
The mounting rails are installed on rafter brackets and
roof anchors using T-bolts (see gure 12). Hereunto in-
sert the T-bolt head into the rail (4), turn 90 clockwise
(see detail) and screw with nut (5) to holder (2).
To install two collectors side by side, two on-roof in-
stallation sets have to be installed parallel next to each
other with sufcient spacing to allow the installation of
a straight connection piece between the collectors (see
gure 32).
After completing the installation works, check all screw
connections for tightness.
4
3 3
7
5
90
2 4 3
2
1
5
min. 100 mm
Figure 11 Proper xing of roof anchor type M. Figure 12 Proper connection of collector supporting rails to roof anchor
(1) Dowel; (2) Stair bolt; (3) Washer; (4) EPDM O-ring; (5) Hold- M by wedging the T-bolt inside the rail.
er; (6) Nut; (7) T-bolt (1) Stair bolt with dowel; (2) Holder; (3) T-bolt; (4) Collector support-
ing rail; (5) Nut with washer
Installation of the rails
B
A
B
1.5
Already connect the rails

while still on the ground
Figure 13 Overview of rail installation

(1) Rail with two collector clamps; (2) Rail with single collector clamp (not in case of only one collector or two collectors side by side)
Table 9 Segment Length (mm) For the side by side installation of two collectors the four
supporting rails of type 1 (see gure 13) must be aligned
EURO C20 AR M8 EURO C22 AR M10
at the given distance (see gures 5 and 6).
A min. 1600 min. 1500
B 1000 - 1300 900 - 1200
C 20 - 200 20 - 200
Installation of the Collectors
Install the upper

collector rst
17 Nm
Slightly loosen the collector clamp. Then push it towards

the collector and tighten (17 Nm).
Badly positioned collector clamps can result in insufcient
xation of the collector!
Figure 14 Installation of rst collector
1.5
Slightly loosen the collector clamp. Then push it towards

the collector and tighten (17 Nm).
Figure 15 Installation of the following collector in case of installation of two collectors, with one above the other
3.3 Free Standing Installation
12
57
00
x.2
14 ma
90
0
20
x.
ma
Figure 16 EURO TRIC F, horizontal, for 35 - 50
Determination of the pitch
Table 10 Installation Pitch [] C [mm] A [mm]

35 10 863
40 147 940
EURO TRIC F 35 - 50
45 311 1009
50 521 1070
C
C
A
Figure 17 Installation pitch and setup dimensions for ground- or at-

roof installation (left) or facade installation (right)
Installation of racking triangle
M8 x 40
1.5
Figure 18 Unfold racking triangle, set correct angle and lock in position
Fixing of racking triangles
Fixing the racking triangles on different surfaces is depict-
ed below. Local building standards and codes and struc-
tural guidelines must be observed. Assure sufcient car-
rying capacity of the installation surface. In case of doubt
feel free to consult our technical dept.
max. 200 max. 200
Figure 19 Maximum rail projections

10
,5
Figure 20 Fixing the racking triangles on steel beams.

12
Figure 21 Fixing the racking triangles with concrete-slab installation kit (part no. 192 020 77)
1900
4 1.5
3
1500
2
1
Figure 22 Conguration of prole sheet gravel boards (part no. 192 020 62) with positions of the clamping angles
(1) Ground rail of racking triangle; (2) Clamping angle; (3) Individual board; (4) Column prole of racking triangle
When positioning the gravel boards, allow
them to overlap as required (see gure 22).
Make sure to not damage

the roong when drilling!
max 30
5
2/3
1/3
30
max 30
5
max
5.2
Figure 23 Fixing the racking triangles on gravel boards
Installation of collectors on racking triangles
For the C30 or C20 AR M use the lowest

X rivet nut and for C32 or C22 AR M10 the
one above the lowest.
1.5
Loosely pre-assemble the collector clamp and afterwards

place the collector. Finally push clamp towards collector
and tighten (17 Nm).
Figure 24 Connecting collector and racking triangle
3.4 Setting up the Storage Tank
Please observe the following when setting up the storage
tank (see gure 24):
The tank insulation consists of 3 parts, the tank insulation 4
(1), the lid insulation (2) and the pre-installed ground in-
sulation (3).
Remove the tank insulation, the tank lid with (4) as well
as the lid insulation and put safely aside. 2
Unscrew cylinder (6) from the pallet (11) and carry to its
nal position. Note that the enamel coating of the stor- 5
age tank can be damaged if knocked.
Remove 1" plug (10) from the pallet (11) and put aside.
Set up the cylinder and turn until connections face the
wall. f
During transport a cable binder is used to secure the
pre-wired controller at the cylinders hoisting lug. Cyl- 7
inder temperature sensor and pump control cable also k
are pre-wired. p2
n
1
6
s
3
8
11
10
Figure 25 Setup of the SECUSOL storage cylinder

(1) Insulation jacket; (2) Insulation lid; (3) Floor insulation; (4) Storage
cover; (5) Solar controller (here SUNGO SL); (6) Tank; (7) Flange cov-
er; (8) Solar return sub-assembly; (9) Ventilation opening; (10) 1"-
plug; (11) Pallet; (s) Storage temperature sensor; (p) Pump connec-
tion cable; (p2) 2nd pump connection cable (usually for aux. heating
circuit); (n) mains cable; (f) 2nd sensor
3.5 Connection to Domestic Water
Supply
Hot and Cold Domestic Water Circulation
Cold and hot water connections must be done according The return leg (14) should be led away just before the tap-
to the rules and regulations of your local water supplier. ping point (15). The circulation pump (16) should be con-
We recommend the connection as shown in gure26. trolled according to the hot water temperature at the most
Connect a safety unit (2) with a safety valve and a non- distant tap (sensor 17).
return valve according to DIN 1988 to the cold water We recommend that the circulation should be returned to
inlet of the tank (1). the cold water inlet (25) of the service-water mixer. A check
It is absolutely necessary to install a thermostatic mix- valve should be installed in the circulation pipe.
ing valve (6) since temperatures during the summer Please note that circulation can cause signicant loss of
months can reach up to 95C at the hot water outlet (5). heat. Tip: use a time, temperature or tapping controlled
There is serious danger of scalding! The mixing valve circulation.
can be connected through a T-connection (3) between
the safety subassembly (2) and the cold water inlet of Pressure Test of Domestic Water Circuit
the tank (4). Please carry out a pressure test after all domestic water
Close the 1" or 2" socket (8) with the 1" or 2" plug pipes and ttings are connected. Close hot water taps
(7) and seal thoroughly. Alternatively an electrical im- after lling cylinder with water and check all connections
mersion heater is available which can be installed in the and joints
1" or 2" socket, as outlined in the chapter Auxiliary
Heating.
Re-tighten bolts around ange cover (14) to ensure
12
leakage-free operation.
13
21
5
20 11
13
7
8
6
1.5
10
9
17
18
19
15 4
14
16
Figure 26 Connection of the SECUSOL storage tank to the domestic water supply (1) Cold water supply; (2) Safety unit with pipe connec-
tions; (3) Copper T-connection; (4) Cold water connection; (5) Hot water connection; (6) Thermostatic mixing valve; (7) 1" or 2" plug; (8) 1"
or 2" socket; (9) Cold water inlet; (10) Hot water distribution; (11) Set of ttings; (14) Circulation pipe; (15) DHW tapping point; (16) Circula-
tion pump; (17) Temperature sensor; (18) CU T-connection; (19) Sensor clip; (20) Socket "; (21) Venting plug
3.6 Laying the Solar Circuit
Connecting the Solar Subassemblies (gure 28)
Please note: when the pipes of the solar circuit are sol-
dered, they must be ushed before connecting them to
the storage cylinder (see chapter 4, Start-Up).
Connect the inlet subassembly to the solar inlet of the
storage tank (6) using the locking nut (5). Dont forget L 11
the at seal (2). Align the lling tap horizontally or up-
wards.
The screw ttings of the return and the inlet subassem- H
blies should be re-tightened to ensure leak tightness.
Operational faults can lead to a discharge of uids from
the safety valve (7). To avoid soaking of the cylinder
insulation we recommend discharging the uid with a L 10
Cu22x1 pipe or similar via the back ventilation opening
at the bottom of the insulation (to be provided on site).
Figure 27 Solar circuit and denition of system length/height

L11 = length of the ow pipe; L10 = length of the return pipe; H=sys-
tem height (from the bottom of the tank to the top of the collector)
9 2
5
1
4
3
7
4
3
8 10
Figure 28 Solar circuit with ow and return sub-assemblies (including circulation pump)
(1) CU T-connection; (2) Flat seal; (3) Filling and emptying tap; (4) Coupling, 12 mm; (6) Solar circuit pipe/ow; (7) Safety valve; (8) Solar cir-
cuit pipe / return; (9) Flow sub-assembly; (10) Return sub-assembly
Installation of Solar Circuit (gure27 - 32)
The collector loop pipes (gure27) should be installed Please observe the limitations of use of the SECUSOL
with down-grade slope from the collector connections system regarding system height and length of collector
to allow for fast emptying during times of inactivity. The loop. These dimensions are outlined in gure 27 and
collector loop can be installed without using elbow table1.
pieces (gure29, left). Use a 12 mm coupling (4) to connect the solar circuit
If pipes have to be led through the roong, ventilation return (gure28-8) to the return subassembly. Also use
tiles are required on site (gure29-12). Place the venti- a 12 mm coupling (6) to connect the solar circuit ow
lation tile at the bottom rim of the collector, below the (gure 25-6) to the ow subassembly. Saw off the pipe
collector connection. The upper rim of the elbow pipe ends, deburr the ridges and fully insert into the cou-
under the roof must be installed below the collector pling. Then tighten nuts.
connection (gure29, detailA). When installing a single
collector or two collectors one above the other, the up-
per ventilation tile has to be placed above the upper
edge of the collector (gure29, detail B).
12
1
h B
12
h
A
A
1.5
Figure 29 Connecting solar circuit

Left hand side: piping along the outer wall; right hand side: roof penetration, detail A: lower edge of collector; detail B: upper edge of collector
Connection of Collectors (gure 30-32) Installing the Collector Sensor (gure30-32)
Depending on the piping type the solar circuit pipes (4) Depending on the piping layout, insert the collector
are connected to the collectors via straight and/or elbow sensor (6) into the respective sensor sleeve (5) of the
connection sets with compression ttings (see gures 30- collector (see also gures 5 and 6).
32). The following must be observed: To extend the length of the collector sensor cable to the
The collectors must only be connected in series (gures solar controller, if required, use a cable (min. cross sec-
31 and 32). tion 2 x 0.75mm). Use the sensor connection boxSP2
When 2 collectors are installed, the two adjacent con- to connect the cable (accessory, see table 5).
nections of the collectors (gures 31 and 32) have to be
connected with a straight 12 mm copper pipe (4).
If the collectors are installed next to each other, the 4
fastening clips of one of the collectors must be loos-
ened again, in order to attach the straight compression
ring connectors. Slightly push the collector sideward on
the mounting rails. Move it back to its original position
after placing the compression ring tting. Then tighten
the nut of the tting. In order to prevent deformation
of the absorber ensure no pressure is applied to the
absorber pipe. Finally tighten the nuts of the fastening
clips of the collector in the right position.
Check all screws for tightness after completing the in-
stallation.
5
1
2
6
4
1
2
Figure 30 Connection of the solar circuit to a single collector with a compression ring connectors and installing collector sensor
(1) Collector connection; (2) Elbow connection set; (4) Solar circuit connection pipe (not in delivery); (5) Sensor sleeve; (6) Collector sensor
1 5
2 6
1
4
Figure 31 Connection of two collectors mounted one above the other

1
3
1.5
4
3
5
1
6
2 1
1
4
Figure 32 Connection of two collectors installed side by side

12
3.7 Installing an Auxiliary Heat Source
Auxiliary heating of domestic water can be done in various
ways. Figure33 shows the connection options.
If for SECUSOL 250-2 or 350 auxiliary heating with oil,
gas, etc. burner is required, then this device should
be connected to the auxiliary heating coil in the cylin-
der (3). We recommend connecting the aux. heating
circuit ow (5) to the ow of the auxiliary heating coil
(6) and connecting the return pipe of the heating de- 7
11
vice/aux. heating circuit (1) to the return of the auxil-
iary heating coil (4). With this piping the ow direction
in the heat exchanger is from bottom to top. As pipe
2
connection pieces (2) use accessories (see table 5). 4 3
When installing the auxiliary heating device please fol-
low the manufacturers guidelines. Use a heat resistant
tape to afx the auxiliary heating temperature sensor (7) 1
directly to the cylinder, approx. 10 cm below the upper 6
welding seam.
Optionally an electrical immersion heater (8) is avail-
9
able which can be installed in the 2" socket (in case of 5
180
SECUSOL 160) or the 1" socket (9) respectively (for
SECUSOL 250 and 350). For installation in the 2" socket
a reduction adaptor with 2" M and "F is required. 8
Remove the polystyrene cover and foam plug, screw the 10
heater into the socket and connect the electrics. The in- 8
stallation manual of the heater must be observed!
Solar cylinders equipped with an electrical immersion Figure 33 Auxiliary heating with electrical heating element or integrat-
heater also have to be integrated into the potential ed heat exchanger: (1) Return of the auxiliary heating; (2) Solder tting
set "; (3) Aux. heating coil; (4) Aux. heating coil; (5) Aux. heating
equalizer using a copper cable with 6mm min. In case
ow; (6) Auxiliary heating coil ow; (7) Temperature sensor; (8) Elec-
of insulation fault the earth connection of the heating el- tric immersion heater; (9) 1"-socket; (10) 1"-plug; (11) Hot water
ement alone cannot prevent a voltage leakage through connection; (12) Flange cover
the solar cylinder.
Auxiliary heating of domestic water can also be done
via a downstream continuous ow heater. The pre-heat-
ed water is then rst led from the hot water connection
(11) to the ow-through heater.
3.8 Installing Controller and Insulation
Installing the controller at the storage (gure 34)
To save space, the controller usually is installed at the stor- Place the lid insulation (2) in the tank insulation (1) and
age. loosely place the tank cover (3) on the cylinder.
Only work on the controller when it is not connected The mains connection for the controller is pre-
to mains! assembled. Since the cable is temperature resis-
Do not start-up the system if the controller, the cables or tant, it can be passed between the tank insulation
the connected 230 V consumers are visibly damaged! and the cylinder and led out along the solar return.
Before connecting the solar controller, place the tank Mains power has to be connected from outside the con-
insulation (1) around the cylinder without closing it, as troller via an ON/OFF switch. If a protective connector
shown in gure34. plug is used for mains connection, the switch is not a
To afx the controller, break out one of the half-moon must. If the cable needs to be extended, use a cable
shaped perforated sections at the upper end of the in- with a minimum cross section of 3 x 1.5mm.
sulation mantle; hook controller into the insulation. Local regulations must be complied with.
s
1.5
s2
p2
4
Figure 34 Connecting the sensors: (1) Insulation jacket; (2) Insulation lid; (3) Storage cover; (4) Ventilation opening; (s) Storage temperature
sensor; (p) Pump connection cable; (p2) 2nd pump connection cable (usually for aux. heating circuit); (k) Connection cable for collector sensor
Wall-Installation of Controller
Instead of being installed at the cylinder, all controllers can
also be xed to a wall. To this end the controllers must be s2
unscrewed from their hooks, and sensor as well as mains k
cables may have to be extended. Refer to the controller
manuals for details.
Installing the Sensor (gures 34, 35)

Pass the collector sensor connection cable (k) under the
insulation to the solar ow and connect to sensor cable
via luster terminal. s
Note that only the cables included in the delivery or
cables temperature resistant up to 110C may be used!
The temperature sensor cables must not be bent or
p2
placed under tension, minimum bending radius 50mm.
The SUNGO SL controller features an additional mains
exit (e.g. for controlling an additional pump) as well as n
an additional temperature sensor. It can be used to ac-
cess an aux. heating pump or to measure the tempera- p
ture of the cylinder's standby-section (see gure 35).
Installing the Insulation (gure34)

When being installed or dismantled, the insulation Figure 35 Wall mounting of controller SUNGO SL: (s) storage tempera-
should not have a temperature below 15C in order to ture sensor; (s2) 2nd temperature sensor (here for measuring the stand-
by temperature at the storage); (p) Pump connection cable; (p2) 2nd
avoid damage or spoiling the appearance.
pump connection cable (usually for aux. heating circuit); (k) Connec-
Close tank insulation (1) with the hooked strip. First slot tion cable for collector sensor; (n) Mains connection cable
into the loosest slot position and then gradually tighten
whilst pressing down around the pipe connections. Fully
insert the insulation lid (2) into the top. Then place stor-
age tank cover (3) on the top and adjust in such a way
that the cutout is placed directly above the controller.
The larger holes at the bottom of the insulation (4) serve
as cooling vents for the circulation pump and must not
be covered during system operation!
4. Startup
System Check
After tting all components please carry out the following
checks:
Are all components tted correctly?
Are all ttings and connections safe and tight and tted 1
with the original at seals?
Were the bolts on the ange cover re-tightened?
Are all electrical connections installed correctly and ac- 5
cording to regulations?
Are the temperature sensors in the right position? Does
the controller show plausible values? 4
Rinsing of the System (gure36)

To avoid damage to the system or malfunctions, possible
residues from production or installation have to be ushed
6
out of the system before startup.
Connect a suitable hose (2) to the cold water lling tap
of the solar return sub-assembly (3) and a domestic wa- 3
ter tap (1).
With a second hose (4) connect the cold water lling 2
and emptying tap of the solar ow subassembly (5) to a
waste water discharge or a container (6).
Open domestic water tap (1). Due to the higher pres-
sure loss in the collector loop only the heat exchanger Figure 36 Flushing the solar installation
is rinsed. Continue the rinsing process until the ow- (1) Domestic water connection; (2) and (4) Hose; (3) and (5) Cold-
water lling and emptying cock; (6) Container
ing out liquid is clear, i.e. does not contain any visible
residues.
If the collector loop pipes were soldered, the collector
loop also must be rinsed prior to connecting it to the
storage tank. After rinsing, some unwanted domestic
DC 20
water residues may remain in the system. Therefore
2,5 l
blow forcefully into the end of the hose mounted on the
ow sub assembly to empty the collector loop pipe. To
avoid corrosion, the system must be lled immediately
after rinsing with frost resistant solar uid. Water 1.5
5l
Filling the System (gure37)

To protect the system against frost damage only use the 7,5 l 6
solar uid included in the delivery which contains 33 % gly-

col. Follow the steps mentioned below to ll the system: 5
Remove canister with DC20 (7) from the box and empty
the content (2.5liters) into a container (6) with a mini-
mum capacity of 10liters. Add one full canister (5liters)
of water and stir. 4
Connect hose (2) with a " locking nut to the cold wa-
ter lling and emptying tap at the bottom (3). Place the
other end of the hose into the container (6). Place the
container in a higher position than the solar inlet con-
7
nection (5). A transparent hose is useful to check the
lling level.
Connect the second hose (4) to the ow connector and
briey suck on the hose end. Place the end in the empty 3
canister (7) and place it on the oor. Due to the suction 2
principle the heat exchanger lls up automatically.
After the heat exchanger is lled completely and solar Figure 37 Using the suction principle to ll the solar installation
uid ows into the hose (4), the two lling taps on the (1) Domestic water connection; (2) and (4) Hose; (3) and (5) Cold
water emptying and lling cock; (6) Container; (7) Canister for DC 20
solar return (3) and the solar ow (5) must be closed.
Empty the hoses and remove them. Ventilate the pump
using the octagonal bolt.
Although the liquid is not poisonous, please observe
the enclosed safety regulations when handling the solar
uid.
Setting up the Controller 5. Advice for the User
For the operation of the SECUSOL system special settings
at the controller are required. Please observe the separate During normal operation no further settings are required.
controller manual. Please note the following points:
Switch on the SUNGO S or SL controller and immediately Set hot water temperature
select the menu item System selection (0) in the special You can pre-set the desired hot water temperature on
functions menu. Activate the SECUSOL function by chang- the auxiliary heating device. If a thermostatic mixing
ing the basic value from 0 to 3. In case of the SUNGO- valve is installed, it can be used to set the hot water tem-
mini the activation occurs by changing the jumper setting perature.
from ON to OFF and the base value from 0 to 3. Energy efcient operation
When the temperature difference between collector and Keep the pump level as well as the minimum speed dn-
storage tank bottom is higher than the switch-on tempera- MIN as low as possible. The auxiliary temperature of the
ture (dTmax), the controller output A1 switches the pump electrical immersion heater, the installed continuous
fully on for a dened lling time (Tstart on). ow heater or the heating device should be set as low
After completing the lling time (Tstart) the controller au- as possible. Normally 40 C to 50 C max. is sufcient.
tomatically switches to normal operating mode. The pump Troubleshooting
speed varies within the dened speed interval (dMIN and Please contact expert personnel if the system displays
dMAX) in order to reach the dened set temperature differ- faults or defects!
ence. If the temperature difference between the collector Operation under frost conditions
and the storage tank falls below the specied switch-off The special Drain-Back technology and the use of solar
temperature difference dTMIN, the controller output A1 uid guarantee protection against frost damage. There-
switches off the solar pump. fore the solar energy system can also be operated in
We recommend the specic SECUSOL settings for the so- winter.
lar circulation pump and the controller acc. to table11. All Protection against overheating
other values should remain as in the factory setting. No The solar energy system is absolutely safe during stag-
settings can be changed for the SUNGOmini. nation. There is no risk of damage, even if the sun shines
for longer periods without hot water being tapped. The
Table 11 Controller Settings system switches on automatically as soon as the solar
Length of solar circuit up to 8m up to 15m above 15m cylinder is ready to take in more heat.
Duration of lling time Shutting down the system
45sec. 60sec. 90sec. The system can be temporarily shut down by switching
Tstart
off the electric power supply to the solar controller.
Minimum speed dMIN 30 % 40 % 50 %
The system should be inspected (see following chap-
Switch-on temperature ter6).
15K
difference dTMAX
Maximum tank 85C or 90C 1
temperature bottom,
TMAX 60C 2 (protection from scalding) 6. Maintenance and Care
1 System thermostatic mixing valve Some components of the SECUSOL system are subject to
2 Without thermostatic mixing valve wear and have to be serviced regularly by expert person-
nel and, if required, replaced timely. See table12 for a list
of wear components. For checking the sacricial anode
Settings at the Circulation Pump the ange cover has to be opened. The ange cover seal-
The circulation pump integrated in the return unit is ing (see table5: Accessories) must be renewed after each
equipped with a pump speed switch that allows setting opening.
the output levels. For installation heights up to 2m, levelI Annual servicing is recommended.
is sufcient, for installation heights up to 4m choose lev-
elII and above that levelIII. Table 12 Wear Parts
Component Inspection interval
Starting the System Bi-annual inspection durability is
If the solar heat is sufcient, the controller switches to the Sacricial anode on tank dependent on domestic water quality,
start phase when the switch-on difference is reached. Keep 2 - 10 years
an eye on the collector temperature. If the collector loop Flange cover sealing Renew after each opening
is lled successfully, the collector temperature changes.
Flat seals on pipe
Flow noises in the solar circuit inlet indicate that the lling Renew after each opening
connectors
process was successful. If after the startup time no owing
sounds can be heard in the collector loop/ow sub assem- Bi-annual inspection according to data
sheet DC20: pH value > 6.6 and frost
bly, increase the start up phase on the controller or set the Solar uid
protection up to a minimum of -17C,
pump output to a higher level. otherwise replace
7. Troubleshooting
Despite careful manufacture and installation defects may
occur in your SECUSOL system. Some common defects
are described below.
Table13 Fault Analysis Solution

Table1 shows the length limits for the collector
1.1 Length of collector loop beyond limitations loop. The maximum length may have been
1. Collectors are not lled. of use? exceeded. Set pump to highest level and select
start phase t1 maximum.
1.2 Incorrect lling capacity? Empty the system and rell as specied.
Set maximum speed of the solar circuit pump to
2. Error message dT too high 2.1 Insufcient ow rate?
100 %. Increase minimum speed.
Cavitation noises may occur if the lling quantity
3.1 Incorrect lling capacity? is too low. Empty the system and rell as
specied.
Negative pressure is possible if the system is
3. Cavitation noise * opened for a short time during operation or if
solar uid is let off via the safety valve. Switch off
3.2 Negative pressure in the system? system (controller, manual operation: pump off!),
cool down solar circuit to <20C. Open lling
tap at the solar ow pipe to equalize the
pressure and close lling tap again.
The lling quantity of the solar uid may have
been incorrectly measured. Switch off system
(controller, manual operation: pump OFF) until it
has cooled down. If necessary draw off hot water
4.1 Incorrect lling quantity?
until the tank sensor shows <20C. Then open
lling and emptying tap on the solar ow pipe
4. Safety valve in the solar circuit and collect uid in a container. Close lling and
blows off. emptying tap.
Table1 shows the length limits for the solar
circuit. The minimum length may have been
4.2 Length of solar circuit beyond limitations of
undercut and solar uid was blown off the safety
use?
valve. After equalizing the pressure (proceed as
per 1.2) the system is operational again.
No further measures required. During strong 1.5
5. Pump is in idle state but collector 5.1 Have the collector loop pipes not been solar radiation and idle pump, the collectors will
loop does not empty. installed at a steady down grade slope? empty by themselves as a result of momentary
vapor formation.
During the rst weeks of operation at seals tend
6.1 Is there a leakage on the pipe connections or
to settle, therefore all ttings should be
the ange?
re-tightened.
6. The storage-tank insulation is Proceed with fault search as per 2. Once the
damp at the bottom. leakage has been dealt with, the heat from the
6.2 Safety valve blew off. warmed up storage cylinder will dry the
insulation material. No further measures are
required.
* For a fault-free operation, the circulation pump used in the system requires a specic minimum uid column on the intake side (i.e.
towards the tank). If this height is undercut the so-called cavitation phenomenon occurs. This is a sudden vaporization of minute amounts
of uid which can cause mechanical damage to the pump wheel. Undercutting the gas solubility limitations may also lead to air bubbles
in the wheel area which can reduce the performance of the pump.
Cavitation can be noticed easily the pump then causes audible owing noises during operation, and at the same time the output
pressure drops considerably.
To prevent cavitation, the lling capacity of the system must be observed minutely. Furthermore a build-up of over-pressure must be
possible when the solar uid warms up and expands. For this reason the system must always be hermetically sealed.
8. System Solutions
Collector field
P1 : Solar circuit pump Solar Controller SUNGO SL
P2 : Heating circuit pump
TMV : Thermostatic mixing valve T1
E4 E2 E1
V1 : 3-way actuator valve
A2 A1
The solar controller SUNGO SL opens the three
way valve when the hot water temperature falls
below 38 C (T4 sensor) to set up the function
thermostat heating (10-1).
Gas boiler
Heating circuit
SECUSOL
P2
T4
T2
V1
P1
Hot water TMV
Cold water
Figure 38 SECUSOL System with aux. heating via gas boiler installed downstream of the hot water storage.
Collector field
P1 : Solar circuit pump Solar Controller SUNGO SL T1

P2 : Heating circuit pump
E3 E2 E1
V1 : Three way actuator valve
A1
TMV : Thermostatic mixing valve
Ttw : Hot water sensor (for the boiler controller)

T3 : Storage sensor (optional)
Gas boiler
SECUSOL
Heating circuit
Ttw
P2 T3
V1
T2
P1
Hot water TMV
Cold water
Figure 39 SECUSOL System with aux. heating via boiler, utilizing the upper heat exchanger coil.
Collector field
P1 : Solar circuit pump Solar Controller SUNGO SL T1

EIH : Electric immersion heater
TMV : Thermostatic mixing valve E3 E2 E1
T2 : Storage sensor (optional)
A1
SECUSOL
T3
EIH
T2
P1
Hot water TMV
Cold water
Figure 40 SECUSOL System with aux. heating via electric immersion heater.
1.5
SECUterm 200 P / 300 P

Thermosiphon-System for Free Standing Installation
1.5
Figure 1 SECUterm 200 P
Advantages at a Glance Complete Package

Solar storage cylinder 200 l and 300 l respectively in-
Top Class Solar Collector cluding 1.5 kW electrical immersion heater
Highly selective vacuum coating absorber panel High-performance collector
Highly transparent solar safety glass Complete set for free standing installation
All-around insulation of the collector casing and 40 mm Solar liquid
strong insulation backside insulation Corrugated stainless steel hoses with insulation and
Very durable thanks to high grade materials and manu- thermostatic safety valve
facturing Safety valve for solar circuit
Safety valve with integrated back ow prevention
Return Pipe Integrated in Collector
Simple and fast installation
Minimised heat losses Contents
Compact and pleasant design
Stable and durable conception 1. Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
1.1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Thermostatic Overheating Protection 1.2 Thermostatic Overheating Protection . . . . . 394
Storage temperature limited to max. 80 C 2. General Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 395
Lower maintenance requirements 3. Scope of Delivery and Mounting . . . . . . . 396
No scaling of safety valves 3.1 SECUterm 200 P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
No system shutdown due to loss of solar uid 3.2 SECUterm 300 P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
No drinking water loss resulting from overheating 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Solar Thermal / Solar Collectors EN-XXX_SECUterm-P_TI-MA-100115-11217Y00 391

1.1 Technical Data
Table 1 SECUterm 200 SECUterm 300
Volume (solar circuit) 15 l 20 l
Total weight (empty) 145 kg 192 kg
Collectors 1 x EURO C32 HTF TS 2 x EURO C32 HTF TS
Total area /aperture area
2.24 / 2.02 m 4.48 / 4.04 m
(active solar surface acc. to EN 12975)
Size (W x H x D) 1930 x 1160 x 90 mm
Collector efciency (acc. to EN 12975) o = 77,3 %; k1 = 3,75 W/mK; k2 = 0,0131 W/mK
Incident angle modier (50) kdir = 88 %, kdiff = 83 %
Collector housing Aluminium casing with 40 mm backside insulation and frame insulation
Glass cover 4 mm solar safety glass
Transmission = 91 %
Absorber Heat conduction sheet and pipes made from copper
Working pressure Max. 10 bar
Certicate / Label CE label
Conductor uid DC20 (propylenglycol with inhibitors) mixing ratio according to requirements
Max. allowed pressure / suction forces 3.4 kN/m
Weight 41 kg 82 kg
Storage cylinder Thermosiphon-storage 200 Thermosiphon-storage 300
Freshwater capacity 200 l 300 l
Operating pressure (freshwater circuit) 8 bar
Permissible working over-pressure (solar circuit) 2.5 bar
Max. achievable domestic hot water temperature 80 C
Insulation 50 mm PU-hard foam insulation
Heat exchanger Double jacket heat exchanger
Wall thickness 2.5 mm
Corrosion protection Enamelling
Anode Magnesium sacricial anode
Electrical heating element 1.5 kW (controlled: thermostatic)
Highly transparent EPDM-rubber sealing

safety glass with vulcanised corner joints
Aluminium frame
Highly selective coating
Side insulation
Ultrasonic welded
all-copper absorber
40 mm insulation
Integrated return pipe
Aluminium back
Figure 2 Collector cross-section
392 EN-XXX_SECUterm-P_TI-MA-100115-11217Y00
1250 (SECUterm 200 P)
580 (SECUterm 200 P / 300 P)
1460
38
1670
1870 (SECUterm 300 P)
1.5
2370
Figure 3 Dimensions of SECUterm 200 P & 300 P (mm)
EN-XXX_SECUterm-P_TI-MA-100115-11217Y00 393
1.2 Thermostatic Overheating
Protection
The SECUterm system comes with a unique overheating If the storage cools down (e.g. when water is drawn from
protection device, which limits the storage cylinder tem- it), the thermostatic valve opens, allowing the natural ther-
perature. This thermostatic valve (1) is integrated into the mosiphon effect to start again.
ow of the collector loop. In normal operation, the valve Due to the special construction design, the maximum tap-
stays open and allows the solar liquid of the collector (2), ping temperature is limited to 80C. At the same time this
that was heated by the sun, to rise to the upper part of prevents the scaling of safety valves. This way the typically
the storage cylinder (3). There the liquid cools down and occurring leaks at the safety valves can be avoided and
returns to the collector via the return pipe (4). This force maintenance effort is minimized.
known as the thermosiphon effect is simply based upon Since opening of the DHW blowoff device is prevented,
the density differences at different temperatures (convec- there will be no unnecessary losses of drinking water.
tion) and hence requires no pump.
Whenever the temperature at the thermostatic safety
valve rises above 95 C, the valve will close immediately.
At 100C or above, the evaporating solar liquid in the col-
lector pushes the solar liquid via the return pipe into the
storage. The air volume (5) inside the storage cylinder is
compressed and therefore functions as an expansion ves-
sel. There will be only steam left inside the collector. Even
during longer periods of stagnation no solar liquid or
drinking water is lost.
Figure 4 Illustration of the functional principle at up to 95 C (left) and at about 100 C (right):
1 Thermostatic valve; 2 collector; 3 storage cylinder; 4 integrated return pipe; 5 air volume inside storage cylinder functioning as expansion
vessel
2.1 Symbols
The following symbols are used throughout the instruc-
tions and are to be observed:
CAUTION against material damage.
NOTE as additional information
2.2 Pre-Installation Notes

Risk of scalding at collector connections: connections
may get extremely hot when exposed to sunlight!
Risk of injury from sharp metal sheets and edges
2.3 Operator Qualications

Setting-up, installation and correct commissioning of the
solar installation must be carried out by a certied expert.
Please note that in case of a complaint the warranty is only
valid if correct commissioning has been certied.
2.4 Operating Requirements

1.5
The system is designed for domestic hot water prepa-
ration. Use a water-glycol mixture as solar liquid for the
closed collector loop (for both: freezing and corrosion
protection). If the solar circuit is operated with pure water,
the system can be damaged irreversibly in the event of
freezing. In this case and in periods with a higher frost risk,
make sure to completely drain the parts potentially sensi-
tive to freezing in the solar circuit as well as in the drinking
water circuit.
The recommended water-glycol mixture assures freeze
protection in the solar circuit down to -10 C. If necessary,
please increase the fraction of solar liquid (glycol with
moderators) as required. See technical information DC 20.
3. Scope of Delivery and Mounting
3.1 SECUterm 200 P
8 21
20
14
24
10
11 18
22
17
12
19
15 13
23
16
10
11
Figure 5 Scope of delivery and mounting of SECUterm 200 P as well as mounting frame (number 1 4) for SECUterm 300 P (see index number
explanation in table 2)
Table 2 Components Quantity 2
Index number 1
1 Storage supporting frame including 2 xings (screw M10, screw nut and washer) 2
2 Angle prole 2
3 Ground prole including xings (screw M10, screw nut and washer) also 4 screws 8x80 and dowels 2
4 Stabiliser bars including 4 xings (screw M10, screw nut and washer) 1
5 Collector 1
6 Collector clamp (upper and lower part) including washer and nut 4
7 Screw M8x30 A2 4
8 Storage cylinder 1
9 Storage cylinder holder (2)
10 Threaded bolt (4)
11 Screw nut M8 including washer to x the storage cylinder 4
12 Connection piece for cold water inlet
13 Safety valve with integrated back ow prevention (check valve) (6 bar) 1
14 Connection piece for hot water outlet
15 Gasket (" or ") 4
16 Corrugated steel tube 320 mm DN 20 (" F and " F) with insulation 2
17 Thermostatic valve with insulation 1
18 Solar circuit ow
19 Solar circuit return
20 Blowoff valve (2,5 bar) 1
21 Closing plug 1
22 Storage cylinder cap including two cross-head screws
23 Cable feedthrough
24 Electric heating element including sacricial anode
1 Referring to gure 5
2 Specication only for separately delivered parts. In case of combined parts the quantity will be stated in brackets.
1.5
Assembling the Frame Mounting the Storage Cylinder
Connect the two storage cylinder supporting frames (1), Place the storage cylinder (8) onto the storage cylinder
the angle prole (2) and the ground prole (3). Then carrier (9) using the four threaded bolts (10). The drink-
install the stabiliser bars (4). Please respect European ing water connections have to be on the right hand side
guideline EN1991 concerning permitted wind load! of the storage cylinder (gure 5).
Afx the ground proles (3) on the ground, using dow- Afx the storage cylinder on both sides using two nuts
els and screws. Make sure to mind the structural carry- and washers (11) on each side.
ing capacity of the building.
Installation of the Freshwater Connection
Mounting of the Collector Install the safety valve including non return valve (13)
First prepare the lower collector clamps. Herunto take at cold water connection (12). Use appropriate sealing.
clamp (6), washer, screw nut and screw (7), and afx it Connect cold-water connection tubes with safety valve
loosely to the angle proles (2). Do not tighten so that (13) and hot water connection pipe to connection piece
the upper part of the clamp still can be adjusted (see (18). The utilized pipes must be temperature resistant to
magnier glass, gure 5, bottom). Make sure that the at least 85C.
edge bars of the clamps lower part point towards the
collector to press the collector down onto the frame! Installation of Solar Circuit Connections
Attach collector (5) onto the frame and make sure that Connect both corrugated steel hoses (16) to the col-
the collector is properly centered. lector connections, using at gaskets (15). Use second
Install upper clamps the same way as described above. spanner to apply counterforce when tightening the col-
Then push clamp with the edge bar to the collector and lector connection to avoid damage to the absorber.
afx.
Connect the thermostatic valve (17) in the ow (18) to 3.2 SECUterm 300 P
the storage cylinder. Use appropriate sealing material.
Connect corrugated steel tubes (16) with at gasket Mounting of the Frame
to the thermostatic valve (17) and to the storage cylin- Connect the two storage cylinder supporting frames (1),
der connection (19) respectively. The corrugated steel the angle prole (2) and the ground prole (3). Then
tubes have to have a constant inclination and must not install the stabiliser bars (4). Please respect European
have sharp bends! guideline EN1991 concerning permitted wind load!
Afx the ground proles (3) on the ground using dowels
Filling the Storage Cylinder and screws. Make sure to mind the structural carrying
First ll the standby part of the cylinder via the cold wa- capacity of the building.
ter inlet. Slide the Collector holder (9) from the side into the C-
For the solar circuit ll 10 l water into a canister together prole as shown in gure 6 and move to nal position
with 5l solar liquid (glycol). Funnel mixture into the inlet (gure 7).
on top of the cylinder. Open second inlet so that the air Afx the C-proles (5) on the angle prole (2) by using
can escape from the storage while lling the unit. Only the hammerhead bolt and nut (6) (gure 6). Make sure
ll in the amount of solar liquid specied in this manual. that the hammer bolt is twisted 90 inside the C-prole
A certain air volume must remain in the upper part of and jammed properly (You can tell by looking at the slot
the storage cylinder. This volume will function as an ex- at the rear part of the bolt)!
pansion vessel in case of stagnation and is therefore
highly important. Mounting the Collector
Install blowoff valve (20) and closing plug (21) using ap- First prepare the lower collector clamps. Therefore take
propriate sealing material. clamp, washer, screw nut and hammerhead bolt (8) and
afx it loosely on the C-proles (5). Do not tighten, so
Electrical Installation that the upper part of the clamp still can be adjusted
The electrical installation must be carried out by a trained (see magnier glass gure 7). Make sure that the edge
and authorized person. bar of the clamp points downwards and that the ham-
Remove the cover located on the side of the storage merhead bolt is twisted by 90 and jammed inside the
(22) by unscrewing both screws. C-prole, when nally xing the clamps. (You can tell by
Thread three-conductor cable through opening (23) at looking at the slot at the rear part of the bolt)!
the lower part of the storage unit. Afx earth cable with Place left collector (7), pushing it from the left hand
screw joint at the side (symbol says earth). side against the clamp, then let it slide into the collec-
Equip remaining cable with standard wire connectors. tor holder. Please note that collector holders are only
Connect cable to plug connection of the heating ele- for mounting support purpose. They are of no structural
ment (24). Attach storage cylinder cover (22) again. relevance.
Before connecting the cable to the power supply, switch Install the other two clamps the same way. Then position
off and secure the mains connection. the upper part of the clamps against the collector and
x all four clamps.
Slide the second collector coming from the right hand
side against the central collector clamps, then let it slide
into the collector holders (see magnier glass gure7).
Install the remaining collector clamps the same way as
described above.
Mounting the Storage Cylinder

Place the storage cylinder (10) onto the storage cylin-
der carrier (11) using the four threaded bolts (12). The
drinking water connections have to be on the right hand
side of the storage cylinder (gure 7).
Afx the storage cylinder on both sides using two nuts
and washers (13) on each side.
Installation of the Freshwater Connection

Install the safety valve including non-return valve (14)
at cold water connection (15). Use appropriate sealing.
Connect cold-water connection tubes with safety valve
(15) and hot water connection pipe to connection piece
(16). The utilized pipes must be temperature resistant to
at least 85C.
Installation of Solar Circuit Connections

Connect all four corrugated steel hoses (18, 19) using
at gaskets with the collector connection. The longer
corrugated steel pipes (19) are to be installed at the
outer side (gure 7). Use at gaskets (17) for this pur-
5
2 4
1.5
Figure 6 Scope of delivery for the frame and the frame extensions of SECUterm 300 P (see index number explanation in table 3)
pose. Use second spanner to apply counterforce when upper part of the storage cylinder. This volume will func-
tighten the collector connection to avoid damage to the tion as an expansion vessel in case of stagnation and
absorber! is therefore of high importance.
Connect the thermostatic valve (20) in the ow (21) to Install blowoff valve (23) and closing plug (24) using ap-
the storage cylinder. Use appropriate sealing material propriate sealing material.
and ax insulation to the thermostatic valve.
Connect all corrugated steel hoses (18, 19) with at gas- Electrical Installation
kets to the thermostatic valve (20) and to the storage The electrical installation must be carried out by a trained
cylinder connection (22) respectively.The corrugated and authorized person.
steel hoses have to have a constant inclination and must Remove the cover located on the side of the storage
not have sharp bends! (25) by unscrewing both screws.
Thread three-conductor cable through opening (26) at
Filling the Storage Cylinder the lower part of the storage unit. Afx earth cable with
First ll the standby part of the cylinder via cold water screw joint at the side (symbol says Earth).
inlet. Equip remaining phases with standard wire connectors,
For the solar circuit ll 15 l water into the canister that push onto plug connections of the heating element
contains 5 l solar liquid (e.g. glycol). Funnel the mixture (27). Re-attach storage cylinder cap (25).
into the inlet on top of the cylinder.Open the second Before connecting cable to the power supply, switch off
inlet so that the air can escape while lling the unit. Do and secure the mains connection.
only ll in the amount of solar liquid specied in this
manual. There must be a certain air volume left in the
10
24
23
21
20
12
19 13
22 16
27
21
7 25
18 14
22
15
17
26
12
13
11
Figure 7 Complete system and scope of delivery as well as mounting of collector, storage cylinder and connection sets of SECUterm 300 P (for
index number see table 3)
Table 3 Components Quantity 2
Index number 1
1 Storage supporting frame including 2 xings (screw M10, screw nut and washer) 2
2 Angle prole 2
3 Ground prole including xings (screw M10, screw nut and washer) also 4 screws 8x60 and dowels 2
4 Stabiliser bars including 4 xings (screw M10, screw nut and washer) 1
5 C-prole 2
6 Hammerhead bolt M10x30 A2 including screw nut 4
7 Collector 2
Collector clamp (upper and lower part)
8 6
including hammer head bolt (M8x30 A2) washer and screw nut
11 Storage cylinder holder (2)
12 Threaded bolt (4)
13 Screw nut M8 including washer for storage cylinder xation 4
14 Connection piece for cold water inlet
15 Safety valve with integrated back ow prevention (check valve) 1
16 Connection piece for hot water outlet
17 Gasket (" or ") 8
20 Thermostatic valve with insulation 2
21 Solar circuit ow (2)
22 Solar circuit return (2)
23 Blowoff valve (2,5 bar) 1
24 Closing plug 1
25 Storage cylinder cap including two cross-head screws
26 Cable feedthrough 1.5
27 Electrical heating element including sacricial anode
1 Referring to gure 5
2 Specication only for separately delivered parts. In case of combined parts the quantity will be stated in brackets.
4. Maintenance
The system must be checked by a trained and authorized
person every two years. Following actions are essen-
tial; therst number within the bracket refers to gure 5
(SECUterm 200 P) the second number refers to gure 7
(SECUterm 300P):
Checking the Solar Liquid

Open the closing plug (21/24) and take out some drops
of the solar liquid using a clean stick or a pipette. Apply
those drops to litmus paper to measure the pH-value of
the solar liquid. If the liquid falls below the 7.5 pH-value,
a corrosion protection can not be provided any longer.
You will have to exchange the solar liquid in order to
prevent corrosion.
Measure the freezing protection ability by using a re-
fractometer or an equivalent density meter. Replace
solar liquid if needed.
Checking the Anode

Disconnect power supply of the heating element
(24/27). Thoroughly drain the freshwater part.
Then remove the side cap (22/25). Unscrew xing
screws of the heating element and remove it in order to
check the sacricing anode. Replace anode if it has an
average diameter of less than 7 mm (SECUterm 200P)
or 11 mm (SECUterm 300 P) respectively. Reinstall heat-
ing element.
Reattach the side cap, ll freshwater section again and
reconnect the heating element to the power supply.

SECUterm 160 I / 200 I / 300 I

Thermosiphon System for On-Roof Mounting
Figure 1 SECUterm 200 I 1.5
Advantages at a Glance Complete Package

Solar storage cylinder 160 l, 200 l and 300 l respectively,
Top Class Solar Collector including 1.5 kW electrical immersion heater
Absorber panel with highly selective vacuum coating High-performance collector
Highly transparent solar safety glass Complete set for on-roof mounting
All-around insulation of the collector casing and 40 mm Solar liquid
strong backside insulation Corrugated stainless steel hoses with insulation and
Very durable thanks to high grade materials and manu- thermostatic safety valve
facturing Safety valves for solar and domestic water circuits
Return Pipe Integrated in Collector

Simple and fast installation Content
Minimised heat losses
Compact and pleasant design 1. Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Stable and durable conception 1.1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
1.2 Thermostatic Overheating Protection . . . . . 406
Thermostatic Overheating Protection 2. General Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 407
Storage temperature limited to max. 80 C 2.1 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Lower maintenance requirements 2.2 Pre-Installation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
No scaling of safety valves 2.3 Operator Qualication . . . . . . . . . . . 407
No system shutdown due to loss of solar uid 2.4 Operating Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 407
No drinking water loss resulting from overheating 3. Scope of Delivery and Mounting . . . . . . . 407
3.1 SECUterm 160 l 200 l . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
3.2 SECUterm 300 P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Solar Thermal / Solar Collectors EN-XXX_SECUterm-I_TI-MA-091210-11217Z00 403

1.1 Technical Data
Table 1 SECUterm 160 I SECUterm 200 I SECUterm 300 I
Solar circuit volume 11 l 15 l 20 l
Total weight (empty) 129 kg 145 kg 192 kg
Collector 1 x EURO C32 HTF TS 1 x EURO C32 HTF TS 2 x EURO C32 HTF TS
Gross / aperture area
2.24 / 2.02 m 2.24 / 2.02 m 4.48 / 4.04 m
(light incidence area, according to EN 12975)
Dimensions (L x W x H) 1930 x 1160 x 90 mm
Collector efciency (according to EN 12975) o = 76,5 %; k1 = 3,89 W/mK; k2 = 0,0133 W/mK
Incident angle modier (50) kdir = 87 %, kdiff = 79,5 %
Collector casing Made from aluminium incl. frame insulation and 40 mm back insulation
Glass cover 4 mm solar safety glass
Transmission = 91 %
Absorber Heat conductor sheet and tubes made from copper
Operating pressure Max. 10 bar
CE-label TV-certicate 0036, EC type test (module B) according to directive 97/23/EG
Heat transfer liquid Dened mix of DC20 (propylen glycol with inhibitors) and water
Allowable pressure/suction loads 3.4 kN/m
Weight 41 kg 41 kg 82 kg
Storage cylinder Storage cylinder Storage cylinder Storage cylinder
Thermosiphon160 Thermosiphon 200 Thermosiphon 300
Domestic water capacity 160 l 200 l 300 l
Max. operating pressure (domestic water circuit) 8 bar
Max. operating pressure (solar circuit) 2.5 bar
Max. available domestic water temperature 80 C
Insulation 50 mm PU-hard foam
Heat exchanger Double jacket heat exchanger
Wall thickness 2.5 mm
Corrosion protection Enamelling
Protection anode Sacricial magnesium anode
Electrical immersion heater 1.5 kW (thermostatic control)
Highly transparent EPDM-rubber seal

safety glass with vulcanised edges
Aluminium frame
Selective coating
Side insulation
Ultrasonic welded
copper absorber
40 mm
heat insulation Integrated
return pipe
Aluminium back
Figure 2 Collector cross section
404 EN-XXX_SECUterm-I_TI-MA-091210-11217Z00
1250 (SECUterm 160 I / 200 I) 500 (SECUterm 160 I)
580 (SECUterm 200 I / 300 I)
25
00
12,5

25 12,
5 |
25
37,5 | 37
,5
940
1500
1870 (SECUterm 300 I)
1.5
940
2370
Figure 3 Dimensions SECUterm 160 I, 200 I and 300 I (mm)
EN-XXX_SECUterm-I_TI-MA-091210-11217Z00 405
1.2 Thermostatic Overheating
Protection
The SECUterm system comes with a unique overheating When the storage cools down (e.g. when water is drawn
protection device, which limits the storage cylinder tem- from it), the thermostatic valve opens, allowing the natural
perature. This thermostatic valve (1) is integrated into the thermosiphon effect to start again.
ow of the collector loop. In normal operation, the valve Due to the special construction design, the maximum tap-
stays open and allows the solar liquid of the collector (2), ping temperature is limited to 80 C. At the same time this
that was heated by the sun, to rise to the upper part of prevents the scaling of safety valves. This way the typically
the storage cylinder (3). There the liquid cools down and occurring leaks at the safety valves can be avoided and
returns to the collector via the return pipe (4). This force maintenance effort is minimised.
known as the thermosiphon effect is simply based upon Since opening of the DHW blow off device is prevented,
the density differences at different temperatures (convec- there will be no unnecessary loss of drinking water.
tion) and hence requires no pump.
Whenever the temperature at the thermostatic safety
valve rises above 95 C, the valve will close immediately.
At 100C or above, the evaporating solar liquid in the col-
lector pushes the solar liquid via the return pipe into the
storage. The air volume (5) inside the storage cylinder is
compressed and therefore functions as an expansion ves-
sel. There will be only steam left inside the collector. Even
during longer periods of stagnation no solar liquid or
drinking water is lost, and the system remains operational.
Figure 4 Schematic representation of functional principle below 95 C (left) and at approx. 100 C (right):
1 thermostatic valve; 2 collector; 3 storage cylinder; 4 integrated return ow pipe within the collector; 5 air volume in storage cylinder as
expansion vessel
2. General Safety Instructions 3. Scope of Delivery and Installation
2.1 Symbols 3.1 SECUterm 160 l / 200 l
The following symbols are used throughout the instruc- Table 2
tions and are to be observed: Number 1 Components Quantity 2
1 Horizontal mounting rails 2
Vertical mounting rails, incl. 2 xations
2 2
(screw M10, nut and washer)
Stabilisation incl. xation
3 2
Roof bracket set incl. hanger bolt,
4 dowel, rubber seal as well as 3 nuts and 4
CAUTION against material damage.
3 washers
5 Collector 1
Collector clamp (upper and lower part),
6 4
NOTE as additional information washer and nut
7 Screw M10x30 A2 4
2.2 Pre-Installation Notes 9 Storage cylinder mounting support (2)
Risk of scalding at collector connections: connections 10 Threaded bolt (4)
may get extremely hot when the collector is exposed 11 Nut M8 incl. washer for cylinder xation 4
to sunlight!
12 Connection for cold water
Risk of injury from sharp metal sheets and edges
Safety valve
13 1
with backow preventer (6 bar)
2.3 Operator Qualications 14 Connection for hot water

15 Sealing (" and ") 4
Setting-up, installation and correct commissioning of the
Corrugated tube made from stainless
solar installation must be carried out by a certied expert.
16 steel 320 mm DN 20 (IG " and IG ") 2
Please note that in case of a complaint the warranty is only incl. insulation
valid if correct commissioning has been certied.
17 Thermostatic valve incl. insulation 1
18 Solar circuit ow
2.4 Operating Requirements 19 Solar circuit return ow
1.5
20 Blow off valve (2.5 bar) 1
The system is designed for domestic hot water prepa-
ration. Use a water-glycol mixture as solar liquid for the 21 Closing plug 1
closed collector loop (for both: freezing and corrosion Storage cylinder top cover
22
protection). If the solar circuit is operated with pure water, incl. 2 recessed head screws
the system can be damaged irreversibly in the event of 23 Cable feed through
freezing.
Electrical immersion heater
In this case and in periods with a higher frost risk, make 24
incl. protection anode
1
sure to completely drain the parts potentially sensitive to
1 From gure 5 and 6
freezing in the solar circuit as well as in the drinking water
circuit.
2 Indications only for separately delivered components, for
integrated components the quantity is in brackets
The recommended water-glycol mixture assures freeze
protection in the solar circuit down to -10 C. If necessary,
please increase the fraction of solar liquid (glycol with
moderators) as required. See technical information DC20. Mount Setup
Pre-assemble the supporting-frame on ground (gure
5): Connect both horizontal mounting rails (1) to the
vertical rails (2) with a distance of 94 cm to the prepared
drillings. Then also connect to stabilisers (3).
On-roof mounting (gure 5):
Place the pre-assembled frame on the desired roof-
position to determine the proper drilling positions for
xing the roof brackets (4) on the roof. In the stand-
ard case 4 hanger bolts incl. dowels are required.
(cont. on page 410)
3
4
max. 10
100
Figure 5 Scope of delivery of mount and mount setup of SECUterm 160 I, 200 I and 300 I (numberes explained in table 2)
8 21
20
14
24
19
22
17
12
16 18
15 13
6
23
3
1
2
1.5
1 7
10
11
4
9
Figure 6 Scope of delivery and installation of collectors and storage cylinder of SECUterm 160 I and 200 I (numberes explained in table 2)
For high wind loads (see EN 1991) one additional roof Installation of the Solar Circuit Connections
bracket must be installed at the centre of each horizon- Connect both corrugated steel tubes (16) to the col-
tal rail (1)! The required roof drillings must be placed lector connections, using at gaskets (15). Use second
on top of the roof undulations (see magnifying glass spanner to apply counterforce when tightening the col-
with cross-section), and each must match with one drill- lector connection to avoid damage to the absorber.
ing in the respective horizontal rail (see 5 large drillings Connect the thermostatic valve (17) in the ow (18) to
on both sides of the horizontal rails and a central drill- the storage cylinder. Use appropriate sealing material.
ing). Make sure that the structural carrying capacity of Connect corrugated steel tubes (16) with at sealing
the roof sufces, and the indicated dimensions are ob- connections to the thermostatic valve (17) and to the
served! If required, shorten the dowel inserted in the storage cylinder connection (19) respectively. The cor-
drilling directly above tile. After screwing the hanger rugated steel tubes must have a constant inclination
bolt into the dowel, the rubber seal must be xed on and must not show any sharp bends!
the tile with a washer and nut, and the horizontal rail (1)
must be fastened with the specied spacing. Filling the Storage Cylinder
Calculate the angle of the storage cylinder support in First ll the standby part of the cylinder via the cold wa-
such a way that, for a given roof inclination, the solar ter inlet.
circuit connections of the storage are oriented verti- For the solar circuit mix 2.5 l solar liquid (glycol) with
cally (see gure 3 side view). For this purpose choose 7.5 l (SECUterm 160 I) or 10 l (SECUterm 200 I) water
adequate drillings on both sides of the storage cylin- within the solar liquid canister. Funnel mixture into the
der support, to lock it in place using the pre-assembled inlet on top of the cylinder. Open second inlet so that
screw. the air can escape from the storage while lling the unit.
Only ll in the amount of solar liquid specied in this
Collector Installation manual. A certain air volume must remain in the upper
First prepare the lower collector clamps. Hereunto take part of the storage cylinder. This volume will function as
clamp (6), washer, nut and screw (7), and afx loosely an expansion vessel in case of stagnation and is there-
to the vertical mounting rails (2). Do not tighten, so that fore highly important.
the upper part of the clamp still can be adjusted (see Install blow off valve (20) and closing plug (21) using
magnier glass, gure 5, bottom). Make sure that the appropriate sealing material.
edge bars of the clamps lower part point towards the
collector to press the collector down onto the frame! Electrical Installation
Attach collector (5) onto the frame and make sure that The electrical installation must be carried out by a trained
the collector is properly centred. and authorized person.
Install upper clamps the same way as described above. Remove the cover located on the side of the storage
Then push clamp with the edge bar to the collector and (22) by unscrewing both screws.
afx. Thread three-conductor cable through opening (23) at
the lower part of the storage unit. Afx earth cable with
Storage Cylinder Installation screw joint at the side (symbol says earth).
Place the storage cylinder (8) onto the storage cylinder Equip remaining cable with standard wire connectors.
carrier (9) using the four threaded bolts (10). The drink- Connect cable to plug connection of the heating ele-
ing water connections have to be on the right hand side ment (24). Re-attach storage cylinder cover (22) again.
of the storage cylinder (gure 6). Before connecting the cable to the power supply, tem-
Afx the storage cylinder on both sides using two nuts porarily switch off and secure the mains connection.
and washers (11) on each side.
Installation of the Domestic Water Connections

Install the safety valve including non return valve (13)
at cold water connection (12). Use appropriate sealing.
Connect cold-water connection with safety valve (13)
and hot water pipe to connection piece (14). The uti-
lized pipes must be temperature resistant to at least
85C.
3.2 SECUterm 300 I
8
1.5
9
1
Figure 7 Scope of delivery of mount and mount extension for SECUterm 300 I (numbers explained in table 3)
10
24
23
21
20
19
16
13
27
22
21 25
7 18
14
22
15
17
26
11
12
13
11
Figure 8 Complete system as well as scope of delivery and instal-

lation of collector, storage cylinder and connecting components
ofSECUterm300I (numbers explained in table 3)
Table 3 be installed at the centre of each horizontal rail! The re-
Components Quantity 2 quired roof drillings must be placed on top of the roof
Number 1
undulations (see magnifying glass with cross-section in
1 Horizontal mounting rail 2
gure 5), and each must match with one drilling in the
Vertical mounting rail incl. 2 xations respective horizontal rail (see 5 large drillings on both
2 2
sides of the horizontal rails and a central drilling). Make
Stabilisation incl. xation sure that the structural carrying capacity of the roof
3 2
(screw M8, nut and washer) sufces and the indicated dimensions are observed! If
Roof bracket set incl. stair bolt, required, shorten the dowel inserted in the drilling di-
4 dowel, rubber seal as well as 3 nuts and 4 rectly above tile. After screwing the hanger bolt into the
3 washers dowel, the rubber seal must be xed on the tile with a
5 C-prole mounting rail 2 washer and nut, and the horizontal rail must be fastened
6 T-bolt incl. nut M10 4 with the specied spacing.
Set the angle of the storage cylinder support in such
7 Collector 2
a way that for a given roof inclination, the solar circuit
Collector clamp incl. T-bolt M8, connections of the storage are oriented vertically (see
8 6
upper and lower part, washer and nut gure 3 side view). For this purpose choose adequate
9 Collector fastener 4 drillings on both sides of the storage cylinder support
10 Storage cylinder 1 to lock it in place using the pre-assembled screw.
Slide collector fastener (9) laterally into the C-prole
11 Storage cylinder mounting support (2)
of the rail (gure7) and move into the correct position
12 Threaded bolt (4) (gure8).
Nut M8 with disc Pre-assemble all collector clamps (8) on C-prole rails
13 4
for xation of storage cylinder (5) (gure 7). Hereunto take clamp, washer, nut and T-
14 Cold water connection bolt, and afx loosely to the C-prole rails. Make sure
that the edge bars of the clamps lower part point down-
Safety valve
15 1 wards and encompass the C-prole rail! The T-bolt head
with backow preventer (6 bar)
must turn within the prole by 90 and lock itself when
16 Hot water connection fastened (indicated by a groove located on the foot of
17 Sealing (" and ") 8 the screw)!
Corrugated tube made from stainless Fasten C-prole rails (5) with T-bolts and nuts (6) on ver-
18 steel 320 mm DN 20 (IG " and IG ") 2 tical mounting rails (2) (gure 7). Ensure that the T-bolt
incl. insulation within the C-prole turns by 90 and locks in place (in-
Corrugated tube made from stainless dicated by a groove located on the foot of the screw)!
19 steel 620 mm DN 20 (IG " and IG ") 2
incl. insulation Mounting the Collector
20 Thermostatic valve incl. insulation 2 Move collector (7) from the right side against collec- 1.5
tor clamps, which are located at the left outer side, and
21 Solar circuit ow (2)
slide it into the collector holder.
22 Solar circuit return ow (2) Position the 4 upper parts of the clamps directly at the
23 Pressure relief valve (2.5 bar) 1 side of the rst collector and x.
Move the second collector from the right hand side
24 Closing plug 1
against the central collector clamp and let it slide into
Top cover for storage cylinder the collector holders. (see gure 8 picture magnier
25
incl. 2 cross-drive screws
below).
26 Cable feed through Push the two remaining upper collector clamps right
Electrical immersion heater hand side (outside) against the second collector and x.
27 1
incl. protection anode
1 From gure 7 and 8 Mounting the Storage Cylinder
2 Indications only for separately delivered components, if
Place the storage cylinder (10) onto the storage cylin-
components integrated the amount is in brackets der carrier (11) using the four threaded bolts (12). The
drinking water connections have to be on the right hand
side of the storage cylinder (gure 8).
Mount Setup Afx the storage cylinder on both sides using two nuts
Pre-assemble the supporting-frame on ground (gure and washers (13) on each side.
5): Connect both horizontal mounting rails (1) to the
vertical rails (2) with a distance of 94 cm to the prepared Installation of Domestic Water Connections
drillings. Then also connect with stabilisers (3). Install the safety valve including non return valve (14)
On-roof mounting (gure 5): at cold water connection (15). Use appropriate sealing.
Place the pre-mounted frame on the desired roof-posi- Connect cold-water connection with safety valve (15)
tion to determine the proper drilling positions for xing and hot water pipe to connection piece (16). The uti-
the roof brackets (4) on the roof. In the standard case 6 lized pipes must be temperature resistant to at least
hanger bolts incl. dowels are required. For high wind 85C.
loads (see EN 1991) one additional roof bracket must
Installation of Solar Circuit Connections 4. Maintenance
Connect the 4 corrugated stainless steel tubes (18 and 19)
to the collector connections " male at sealing, so that The solar installation must be checked every two years by
the longer corrugated steal tubes (19) are located at the a qualied technician. The following steps must be ob-
outer side (gure 8). Connect at sealing connections (17) served; of the two indicator numbers in brackets the rst
and use 2nd spanner to apply counterforce when tight- always refers to gure 6 (SECUterm 160 I / 200 I) and the
ening the connection, to avoid damage to the absorber. second refers to gure 8 (SECUterm 300 I), respectively:
At the cylinder, connect both thermostatic valves (20) to
the respective connection of the solar circuit ow (21). Checking of Solar Liquid Mixture
Hereunto apply appropriate sealing agent. Then install Open the closing plug (21/24) and take out some drops
insulations of thermostatic valves. of the solar liquid via using a clean stick or a pipette.
Connect all corrugated steel tubes (18 and 19) with at Apply those drops to litmus paper to measure the pH-
sealing connection to the thermostatic valve (20) and to value of the solar liquid. If the pH-value of the liquid falls
the storage cylinder connection (22) respectively. The below 7.5, proper corrosion protection is not anymore
corrugated steel tubes must have a constant inclination provided, and the solar liquid must be exchanged.
and must not have sharp bends! The reliability of the frost protection can be determined
by measuring the density or the refraction of the solar
Filling the Storage Cylinder liquid, using a frost protection tester or a refractometer.
Fill the standby part of the cylinder via cold water inlet.
For the solar circuit mix 5 l solar liquid (glycol) with 15 l Checking of the Magnesium Anode
water within the solar liquid canister. Funnel mixture into Disconnect power supply of the immersion heater
the inlet on top of the cylinder. Open second inlet so that (24/27) and empty domestic water part of storage.
the air can escape from the storage while lling the unit. Then remove the side cap (22/25), unscrew xation
Only ll in the amount of solar liquid specied in this screw of immersion heater and remove heater in or-
manual. A certain air volume must remain in the upper der to check the protection anode. Replace anode if it
part of the storage cylinder. This volume will function as has an average diameter of less than 7 mm (SECUterm
an expansion vessel in case of stagnation and is there- 160 I / 200 I) or 11 mm, respectively (SECUterm 300)
fore highly important. and then reinstall immersion heater.
Install blow off valve (23) and closing plug (24) using Re-attach the side cap, ll domestic water section again
appropriate sealing material. and reconnect the heating element to power supply.
Electrical Installation
The electrical installation must be carried out by a trained
and authorized person.
Remove the cover located on the side of the storage
(25) by unscrewing both screws.
Thread three-conductor cable through opening (26) at
the lower part of the storage unit. Afx earth cable with
screw joint at the side (symbol says earth).
Equip remaining cable with standard wire connectors.
Connect cable to plug connection of the heating ele-
ment (27). Re-attach storage cylinder cover (22) again.
Before connecting the cable to the power supply, tem-
porarily switch off and secure the mains connection.

Planning, Start-up, Maintenance
The following chapter provides you with some tools, tips and guidelines relevant
for planning, start-up and maintenance of a solar thermal installation. We recom-
mend that you take the time and browse through the sample systems. We also in-
cluded a description of the planning software T*SOL, a very reliable and practical
tool for solar heating installing and planning professionals. A special company
version optimized for our components is available for our customers - please
inquire for more information.
Dimensioning List for Solar Thermal Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Solar Thermal Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Dimensioning of a Solar Installation for Hot Water Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Sun Path Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Single Storage Cylinder System
with ECOplus Solar Storage Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

ECOplus Solar Storage Cylinder Upstreamed
of Existing Hot Water Storage Cylinder
with Controlled Storage Cylinder Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Downstreamed ECOplus Solar Storage Cylinder
and Existing Hot Water Storage Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

and Swimming Pool Heating System
with ECOplus Solar Storage Cylinder and Plate Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . 447

Single Storage Cylinder System with TERMO Combi Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 1.6
System with TERMO Combi Cylinder in Combination
with Pellet Boiler XILO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Single Storage Cylinder System with Freshwater Unit RATIOfresh
and RATIO Buffer Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Solar Installation for Hot Water Preparation and Space Heating Support
Dual Cylinder System with ECOplus Solar Storage Cylinder
and RATIO Buffer Cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Wagner-T*SOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Installation Protocol Solar Heating Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Maintenance Protocol Solar Heating Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Cleaning of AR Solar Glass on EURO-Collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Solar Thermal Functional Guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
415
DIMENSIONING
Dimensioning List
for Solar Thermal Installations
Project Data
Project name: Street:
Postcode / city: Customer no.:
Building
Roof Shape and Roong Type
l Gable roof l Flat roof l Shed roof l Other
l Pantile l Slate l Plain tile l Corrugated ber cement l Metal sheet *
l Concrete roong tile, type l Other
* In this case please indicate the characteristics of the individual metal sheet and the conguration and material of the under-construction.
Type of Installation
l On roof l Roof integrated l Flat roof l Building front l Free standing l Other
Building Data
Ridge height (H) m
Eaves length (T) m O
Vergeboard length (O) m
Building width (B) m

D
H
1.6
Roof pitch (D)
S
No. of rafters Rafter dimensions (H x W) mm

T B
Axial rafter spacing (S) m

Roof layout with rafters
Altitude m above sea level
Other geographical features (e.g. wind, snow) N

345 15
0 30
33
Please indicate the compass orientation of the planned installation
45
5
31
0
60
30
Max. available roof area, dimensions: _______ x ________ m (length x width)

285
75
Ceiling height at mounting place of storage cylinder: ________ m W E

5
105
0 25
12
24
Door width of solar cylinder mounting place: ________ cm

0
13
5
22
0 15
21 0
Installation space for solar storage cylinder: ________________________ m 195 165
(length x width x height in metres) S

Pipe length of solar circuit (one way): ________ m
l Domestic use with or without swimming pool: Please ll chapter 1

l Commercial use: Please ll chapter 2
Solar Thermal / Planning EN-XXX_Dimensioning-List_PL-101021-1125H500 417

1. Domestic Use
Hot Water Demand
________ persons with l 25 l (low demand) or l 40 l (medium demand) or l 60 l (high demand)

per day and person
or ________ total l/day at ________C of ow temperature
l Hot water also for washing machine
l Recirculation exists, operating time _________ hours/day, recirculation pipe length: _______ m
Materials of Cold and Hot Water Piping:
l Copper l Zinc plated stainless steel l Plastic l Other, specify
Storage Cylinder / Supplementary Heating
Is a hot water storage cylinder already at hand?

If yes, what type? l Domestic hot water cylinder l Buffer Cylinder l Combined cylinder
Capacity: ________ Thickness of insulation _______ cm
l Combined with heating boiler l Separate
Auxiliary heating system with l Gas l Oil l Solid fuel l Pellet l Electrical l Heat pump
Type/year of manufacture: _____________________ Ceiling height at mounting place of storage cylinder: ________ m
l Additional space heating support (for hydronic systems)
Living area to be heated: ________ m Annual specic primary energy use acc. to EN 832*: ________ [kwh/(ma)]
Total energy/fuel consumption for l space heating only, or

l space heating and domestic hot water is:
l ______ m gas l ______ liters heating oil
l ______ kilowatt hours electricity l ______ kg wood/pellets
Peak heating load: _______ kW
Type of heating system
l Radiators _______ % of heating system Flow temperature: _______ C Return temperature: _______ C
l Underoor _______ % of heating system Flow temperature: _______ C Return temperature: _______ C
l Others, specify:
_______ % of heating system Flow temperature: _______ C Return temperature: _______ C
l Solar swimming pool heating
l Outdoor l Indoor If pool is indoor: room temperature _________ C
Is the pool covered at night? l Yes l No Desired pool temperature: _________ C
Pool area: ________ m Average pool depth: ________ m Supplementary heating of the pool? l Yes l No
Yearly use: from _______________ to _______________ Is the pool protected against wind? l Yes l No
* Please note that this is only the actually required heating energy and does not refer to the type of primary energy.
418 EN-XXX_Dimensioning-List_PL-101021-1125H500
2. Commercial Installation
Information about the Existing Water and Heating Installations
Materials of cold and hot water pipeworks:

l Copper l Zinc plated stainless steel l Plastic l Others, specify:
l Hot water recirculation existing
Length and diameter of recirculation line: ________ m ________ mm
Thickness of pipe insulation: ________ mm
Desired hot water temperature in recirculation pipe: ________ C
Operating time of recirculation pump: ________ hours/day
Heating boiler type: manufacturer / classication:
l Low temperature boiler l Condensing boiler l Others, specify:
Energy source: l Gas l Oil l Others, specify:
l Hot water storage cylinder in heating boiler l Separate hot water storage
Existing storage cylinder volume: ________ Thickness of insulation ________ cm
Existing storage cylinder type: l Monovalent (only one heat exchanger installed in storage cylinder)
l Bivalent (two heat exchangers installed in storage cylinder)
If bivalent: Lower heat exchanger in storage cylinder already connected?

l Yes l No
Recirculation: l Recirculation connection at storage cylinder exists

Year of installation of: Boiler ________ Cylinder ________
l Sport facilities: Please ll chapter 2.1

l Kindergarten / day care centre / schools: Please ll chapter 2.2
l Hotels, restaurants and conference facilities: Please ll chapter 2.3
2.1 Solar Installations for Sports Facilities 1.6

Weekday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday
Water demand (liters) *
or number of athletes **
based upon: * 38C shower temperature, ** only athletes, which take a shower regularly
What is the consumption reduction (%) during vacations?

Vacations (number of weeks) e.g. Easter 3 weeks
reduced demand (in %) e.g. 50 %
Max. demand e.g. during sporting events: ________ liters/h
Number of showers heads: ________ Shower head performance: _______ liters/min.
l Self-closing taps l Different types of taps
Special sport events: Peak demand e.g _______ liters/h and total amount of water used _______ liters
during sport event!
Current hot water consumption (acc. to bill or estimate): ________ liters/year at ________ C
EN-XXX_Dimensioning-List_PL-101021-1125H500 419
2.2 Solar Installations for Kindergarten / Day Care Centers / Schools
Number of children: ________ Number of half-day places: ________ Number of full-time places: _________
Working hours: l Monday to Friday l Saturday l Sunday
l Dish washer Number of rinse cycles per day: ______ Consumption of hot water per rinse cycle in liters: _______
l Janitor apartment, number of inhabitants: _______
Existing hot water consumption bill or calculation: ________ liters/year at ________ C
Vacation or holiday closing times:
from ________ to ________ from ________ to ________ from ________ to ________
2.3 Solar Installations for Hotels, Restaurants and Conference Facilities

Information for the Calculation of Hot Water Consumption
Comfort: l Low l Standard l High
Booking
l All season, average occupation ________ % ________ beds/night
l Winter, from ________ to ________ persons per week
l Summer, from ________ to ________ persons per week
l Permanent demand by concierge etc., number of persons: ________
________ breakfasts per week ________ lunches per week ________ dinners per week
Existing hot water consumption bill or calculation: ________ liters/year
Data for Hotels
________ single rooms ________ double rooms
________ washing-basins ________ showers ________ bath tubs
________ restrooms with ________ hot water wash basin
Existing hot water consumption bill or calculation: ________ liters/year
Room for Comments / Drawings / Additional Data:

Solar Thermal Systems

Setup, Startup and Maintenance
Content
18
1. General Safety Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
2. Solar Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
3. Solar Installations
with Special Overheating Protection . . . . . 425 17
4. Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
5. Trouble Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
6. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
10
11
bar
1 2
C C
12
3 4
19 13
HW 5
20 7 6
8
14
1.6
15
22 24
bar
16
CW
23 25 26 28 30
21 27
29
Figure 1 Solar Circuit of a Standard Installation

1 Thermometer, ow; 2 Thermometer, return; 3 Ball valves with
backow preventer, ow; 4 Ball valve with return ow stopper, re-
turn; 5 Solar circulation pump; 6 Shut off; 7 Air bleeder; 8 Filler
valve; 9 Flow meter; 10 Safety valve; 11 Manometer; 12 Filler
valve, safety group; 13 Cap valve; 14 Membrane expansion ves-
sel; 15 Receptacle, temp. resistant; 16 Filler valve, solar circuit
(at deepest point if possible); 17 Collector; 18 Bleeder with shut-
off if bleeder (7) not in place or insufcient; 19 Thermostatic Passage open Passage open Passage closed
mixing valve; 20 Stop valve; 21 Filler valve, domestic water cir-
Non-return valve Non-return valve Non-return valve
cuit; 22 Safety valve; 23 Shut-off valve; 24 Manometer; 25 Non- disabled in operation without function
return valve; 26 Shut-off valve; 27 Dirt lter; 28 Shut-off valve,
pressure side of lling pump; 29 Shut-off valve, suction side of lling Figure 2 Function of ball valves and non-return valves in solar circula-
pump; 30 Filling pump tion unit CIRCO
Solar Thermal / Solar Circuit EN-XXX_Solar-Thermal-Systems_TI-100127-11209000 421

1. Safety Symbols
The following symbols are used throughout these instruc-
WARNING against material damage
NOTE as additional information Figure 3 Mineral wool pipe insulation
2. Solar Circuit
Components
Pipe work
Pipe connections
(Screw joints, solder/press ttings, etc.)
Piping insulation
Built-in components (CIRCO solar circulation unit, heat
meter, de-aerator etc.)
The solar circuit must always be composed of material ap-
propriate to the temperature and pressure as well as the
heat transfer medium (propylene glycol with inhibitors).
Pipe Work and Connections

Hard or soft copper piping. Figure 4 Twinex TVA rapid piping system
Twinex TVA stainless steel corrugated tube (g. 4).
Hard soldering, press ttings with approved sealing ma-
terial, soft soldering with SnCu3 (not for vacuum tube
collectors or collector areas > 30 m2.
Use approved sealants, e.g. hemp or a pipe-sealing
compound (e.g. Fermit). Teon tape is not suitable.
Insulating Material
Temperature resistant EPDM insulation hose.
Mineral wool shells for dry areas (g. 3).
Insulation used outdoors must be UV resistant or pro-
tected against UV radiation (e.g. by metal cover).
Components for the Solar Circuit

Automatic bleeder (g. 6) with a temperature resistant
shut-off valve (max. 200 C). This is not necessary when
a deaerator and an efcient lling pump are used. Figure 5 Cap valve for expansion vessel allows for in-operation pres-
Deaeration pipe for vertical installation in pipes (g. 7). sure checks and expansion vessel exchange.
We strongly recommend installing a cap valve (g. 5)
before the expansion vessel. It allows for convenient
regular checks of the proper pre-pressure.

Setup, installation and proper startup of the solar instal-
lation must be carried out by a qualied and certied in-
staller based upon the installation instructions. Failure to
comply will render the warranty void.
422 EN-XXX_Solar-Thermal-Systems_TI-100127-11209000
2.1 Safety Components
Safety Components of the Solar Circulation Unit
The installation must be equipped with a safety group con-
sisting of safety valve, pressure-meter and solar expansion
vessel (g. 8). There must be no shut-off between safety
valve and collectors! For ease of maintenance the expan-
sion vessel should be connected via a cap valve, also al-
lowing for replacement without draining the pipes.
Connect blow off pipe (1) to the safety valve (2) and place
temperature resistant container underneath. When using
a plastic container (e.g. empty DC20 canister), ll with sev-
eral liters of cold water as temperature buffer. The end of
the blow off pipe should be submerged.
Figure 6 Automatic bleeder with shut off
Figure 7 Deaeration pipe
1.6
Figure 8 Solar circulation unit with safety components. In the shown

case the circulation unit is installed directly to the cylinder, using the
optional storage installation kit. 1 Blow off pipe; 2 Safety valve; 3 Re-
ceptacle; 4 Solar expansion vessel; 5 Cap valve
EN-XXX_Solar-Thermal-Systems_TI-100127-11209000 423
Protection Against Scalding and Burning
The temperatures within the solar storage cylinders can
rise signicantly beyond 60 C. In order to avoid scalding
at taps, the following technical measures can be taken:
Installation of a thermostatic mixer (g. 9), e.g. the Wag-
ner thermostatic mixing valve BM. For detailed installa-
tion procedures please see the technical information.
Set the solar controller to a limiting storage tempera- Figure 9 High hot water temperatures from the solar storage are regu-
ture below critical values (e.g. 60 C). Note: this can related down to a set temperature between 35 C and 55 C.
duce the solar yield to some extend.
Use thermostatic taps at all outlets.
Scalding at taps is no issue in systems with properly pro-
grammed RATIOfresh freshwater stations.
Potential Equalization and Lightning Protection

The collector installation must be professionally integrated
with an existing or new lightning protection system. The
entire solar circuit must be equipped with potential equal-
ization! We offer suitable earthing clamps as part of our
accessories (g. 10). Flow and return pipes must be con-
nected to the potential equalization of the building.
Figure 10 For potential equalization attach earthing clamps at both

solar circuit pipe legs and connect to grounding bar with cable of min.
6 mm cross section.
Surge Arrestor Sensor Connection Box

In order to reduce surge related damages to the solar con-
troller during thunderstorms and possibly resulting dam-
age to other electrical components, we strongly recom-
mend using our sensor connection box with built in surge
arrestor. It is connected parallel to the collector-sensor.
Figure 11 The sensor connection box SP2 protects the collector sen-
sor and the other connected components against power surges. Water
resistant version.
3. Solar Installations
with Special Overheating Protection
For some solar installations with vertically installed collec-
tors of the types EURO L20 AR and C20 AR, special mea-
sures should be taken to avoid overheating. Otherwise
excessive steam forming during stagnation might reach
the solar circulation unit, where it potentially can damage
components. The affected installation variations and rec-
ommended measures are described in table 1.
Dangerously high temperatures can occur in pre-vessel
and expansion vessel in case of stagnation!
Figure 12 Heat dissipation pre-vessel set. Figure 13 Electromotive shut-off valve
Table 1 The Systems Concerned and the Respective Overheating Protection Measures
System Type Collector Type / Number Action
Installations for hot water preparation for Install heat dissipation vessel and expansion
sports arenas/gyms with summer break vessel, and place the expansion vessel
From 4 x EURO L20 AR / EURO C20 AR
and comparable settings and installations above the solar circulation unit via T-piece
with space heating support (see g. 14).
Installations for hot water preparation and Install heat dissipation vessel and expansion
space heating support in the context of roof/ vessel, and place the expansion vessel
attic heating centrals (short piping distances, From 4 x EURO L20 AR / EURO C20 AR above the solar circulation unit via T-piece;
small height differences between solar exp. place additional electromotive shut-off valve
vessel and collectors) in solar ow (see g. 15). 1.6
Install heat dissipation vessel and expansion
Installations designed for space heating
From 4 x EURO L20 AR / EURO C20 AR vessel, and place the expansion vessel
support
above the solar circulation unit via T-piece.
17
10
> 30 cm
11
bar
1 2 27
C C
12
3 4 31
5 13
7 6
8
14
9
16
Figure 14 Solar installation with additional pre-vessel for heat dissipation (31).
17
10
> 30 cm
11
bar
1 2 27
C C
12
3 4 31
5 13
7 6
8
32 M 14
9
16
Figure 15 Solar installation with additional pre-vessel and electromotive shut-off valve (32)
Installation Steps for Solar Installation with Additional
Pre-Vessel and Electromotoric Shut-Off Valve (Fig. 15).
Install heat dissipation pre-vessel (31) in the return of Install automatic air vents so that they can be cut-off
the system, approx. 30 cm above the solar circulation from the solar circuit. It is even better to do without them
unit. and instead install special air separators at accessible
Install membrane expansion vessel (14) behind pre- points of the circuit. One of those for example is inte-
vessel. grated in the CIRCO solar circulation units.
Install shut-off valve in ow, downstream of the solar Additionally added accessories should be recorded in
circulation unit. This way it can be avoided that during the schematics or the system documentation.
stagnation (steam formation in collectors) hot steam can
ow through that unit and adversely affect components.
The shut-off valve is actuated parallel to the solar circu-
lation pump. Set solar controllers with speed control to
100 % or use additional relay (relay S-SXL with switching
delay). The electromotive 2-way shut-off valve VMR was
designed for this purpose. This valve is characterized by
excellent temperature resistance, and electricity is only
consumed during switching.
Relais S-SXL with switching delay SUNGO SL

OUT 2 MAINS OUT 1 IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Plug connection
Control IC
for display
A1, null, SUNGO S (bzw. SL/SXL)
FUSE 5X20
A1, phase, SUNGO S (bzw. SL/SXL)
Triacs
PE, SUNGO S (resp. SL/SXL)
Solar circulation pump

Mains, PE Transformer
Mains, N PE-PE A2 A1 L1
Mains, phase PE-PE N N N

blue
black brown Mains, phase Potential Earth, PE Mains, L1

Shut-off valve
VC 4012 1.6
SUNGO SXL
Plug connection
Triacs for display
FUSE 5X20
A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 L1 Transformer
PE-PE-PE N6 N N N N N N
PE-PE-PE
Figure 16 Connection for additional relay box S-SXL with switching delay and electromotive shut-off valve at the controllers SUNGO SL and
SXL, parallel to solar circulation pump.
4. Startup
Never ll the system when collector temperatures are
very high! During exposure to solar radiation cover col-
lectors with material resistant to high temperatures, and
let them cool down! Risk of scalding during high tem-
peratures in solar circuit (collectors > 60C)! Possibility
of steam formation during high solar irradiation.
Check for correct pre-pressure of expansion vessel (see
chapter 4.6).
4.1 Flushing the Solar Circuit

17
Flat plate collector systems: Flushing with water
Flow direction: From collector to storage
Do not dry run the lling pump!
Use strainer (27)!
Procedure
Open lling valve (12) and (8)
10
Open return ow stopper (gravity brake) at combined
valve. (3)
11
Close ball valve (4)
Close cap valve (13). Otherwise debris might enter the 1 2 C
bar
expansion vessel (14) and for example lead to corro-

sion. Debris can be ushed out by opening the empty-
12
3 4
ing cock at the cap valve for a short moment. 13
Start pump.
Open cap valve after ushing.
5
7 6 8 14
16 28 30
27
29
Figure 17 Rinse solar circuit 15
Filling Pump KS
The lling pump is suited for ushing and lling solar instal-
lations with water or water-glycol mixtures. It helps speed-
ing up the startup process and is strongly recommended
when air venting only takes place via one air separator in
the circuit.
List of Parts:
Filling pump
Suction hose (")
Pressure hose (")
Draining hose (")
Filter with strainer (bayonet coupling)
Figure 18 Filling pump KS
Mobile Filling Station

The mobile lling station (MOBS) allows for fast and clean
ushing and lling of solar thermal installations. The com-
pact unit is mounted on a sturdy pushcart and easily trans-
portable. It consists of pump, container for solar liquid and
hose holder. Further characteristics:
Connection piece for transport without leaking remain-
ing liquid
Closing tap at canister exit
Fine strainer on feeding side of pump
Removable canister with large, closable lling mouth
Draining valve behind the pump allows draining of
pressure hose after usage
Container with volume scale for correct mixing ratios
1.6
Figure 19 Mobile lling station
4.2 Checking for Leak Tightness
Carry out visual inspection of all connection parts 17
Pressure test up to 5 bar
Pressure uctuations can occur due to changing solar
irradiation
Procedure
Close ller valve (8) 10
After reaching the test pressure close ller valve (12)
Set ball valves and return ow stoppers (gravity brakes) 11
(3) and (4) as shown in g. 20. 4-5
1 2 C
bar
bar
C
12
3 4
13
5
7 6 14
8
28 30
16
27
29
Figure 20 Check for tightness 15
4.3 Draining 17
Not necessary when pressure test was carried out with
solar liquid
Even after draining the system, some liquid remains in
the collectors. If it was lled with water, it is mandatory
to ll the system with solar liquid. Otherwise the absorb-
ers are damaged in case of frost! 10
Procedure 11
Filling pump (30) must be turned off
Set ball valves and return ow stoppers (gravity brakes) 1 2 C
bar
(3) and (4) as shown in g. 21. 12

Disconnect suction hose from ller valve (8) and con- 3 4
nect to ller valve (16) 13
Open ller valve (16) 5
Open ller valve (12)
7 6 14
8
28 off
16
27
29
30
Figure 21 Draining 15
4.4 Mixing the Solar Liquid
Depending on the possible frost level of differing loca-
tions, the nal heat transfer mixture should contain at least
25 % DC20 solar liquid. Mix with water and stir well. Ob-
serve notes in DC20 data sheet.
Table 2 Mixing Ratios for DC20 Concentrate

Ratio of DC20 [%] Frost protection level [C]
60% H2O
30 -12
40 -19
50 -29 40%
DC 20
70 -51
100 -51
Figure 22 Mixing ratio for frost protection up to -19 C
Figure 23 For precise determination of the frost protection using the Figure 24 Antifreeze tester
refractometer only a few drops of readily mixed solar liquid are required.
Table 3 Volumes of Various System Components for Estimating Required Filling Volume*
Collectors [liter] Cylinders / heat exchangers [liter] Pipes [liter/metre]
EURO L20 1.5 ECOplus 300 8.5 Cu 28x1 mm 0.52
EURO L20 MQ 2.2 ECOplus 400 10 Cu 22x1 mm 0.31
EURO C20 1.3 ECOplus 500 12 Cu 18x1 mm 0.20
EURO C22 / C32 1.1 ECOplus 750 15 Cu 15x1 mm 0.13
LBM 6 4.9 TERMO 700 12.9 Twinex TVA DN 16 0.28
LBM 10 8.1 TERMO 1000 14.1 Twinex TVA DN 20 0.44
ECObasic 300 7.5 1.6
ECObasic 400 9.4
ECObasic 500 11.3
* without water reserve of expansion vessel
4.5 Filling and Venting
Procedure 17
Disconnect suction hose from ller valve (16) and con-
nect to ller valve (8)
Close ller valve (16)
Open ller valves (8) and (12)
Set ball valves and return ow stoppers (gravity brakes)
(3) and (4) as shown in g. 25.
10
Start lling pump (30)
Operate lling pump until no more air bubbles can be
11
observed in the liquid container (15)
Vent pump line and solar circulation pump, if required
bar
1 2
C C
Close ller valve (8)

12
Close ller valve (12) when the desired system pressure 3 4
is reached (see chapter 4.6). 13
5
Tip
At startup begin with low pressure or ow rate, respec- 7 6
8 14
tively, to avoid fragmenting air bubbles into micro-bub-
bles.
9
16 28 30
27
29
Figure 25 15
Filling and venting
17
Venting the Pump Line
Set ball valves and return ow stoppers (gravity brakes)
(3) and (4) as shown in g. 26.
Run lling pump (39) for approx. 20 s
Close ball valves (8) and (12) and turn off lling pump
(30) 10
Vent Solar Circulation Pump 11

Briey switch on solar circulation pump (5), choosing the
maximum speed. Deaerate with brass screw on front. 1 2 C
bar
Observe notes of the pump manufacturer. 12

Deaeration follow-up: 3 4
Allow air to escape at the CIRCO solar circulation unit 13
(9) after a few days. 5
7 6 14
8
Tips and Tricks

Fill with high pressure of
approx. 3-4 bar. 28
16 30
Turn pump on and off several times to speed up deara-
27
tion, if required.
To remove air pockets, close lling valve (8) for a mo- 29
ment, and quickly re-open again.
It may also help to change the ow direction, in order to Figure 26
completely vent the heat exchanger. Venting pump leg 15
4.6 Setting the System Pressure Table 4 Recommended System Pressures
System height Pre-pressure exp. vessel. System pressure*
Prerequisite: correct pre-pressure of the expansion ves-
[m] [bar] [bar]
sel at time of installation. When the system is lled the
pre-pressure can only be determined when exp. vessel 5 0.6 - 0.7 0.8 - 0.9
is cut off and pressureless. 8 0.9 - 1 1.1 - 1.2
As a result of air bleeding, the system pressure can drop 10 1.2 1.3 - 1.4
within a few days after lling.
15 1.7 1.8 - 1.9
Tip 20 2.3 2.4 - 2.6

When lling, set system pressure to 0.1 - 0.2 bar above * at ambient temperature of heat transfer liquid (approx. 20 C)
table value, to compensate the expected pressure drop.
17
4.7 Operational State

Set position of valves as described in gure 27.
Place a temperature resistant receptacle below the
blow off pipe of the safety valve (10). If the solar liq-
uid canister (15) or similar plastic container is used, ll
partly with water and partly submerge blow off pipe. 10
If an automatic bleeder is installed, it must be cut off
from the solar circuit during operation. Otherwise hot 11
steam can escape in case of stagnation. 1 2
bar
C C
12
3 4
13
5
7 6
8 14
15
1.6
16
Figure 27 Operational condition
4.8 Setting the Volume Flow

Set ow meter in solar circulation station to max. value.
To this end the slit-screw must be oriented vertically.
Set pump to lowest speed.
Start pump via the controller menu Manual Operation,
so that speed control is disabled.
Recommended volume ow (with exception of low-ow 20
Example 15
systems): 35-40 l/m collector area and h. Lower volume
L/MIN
12 l/min 13 30
25
10
ows reduce the solar yield, higher volume ows result 7
20
15
13
in unnecessarily high power consumption of the pump. 10

7
Example
Collector area 18 m > volume ow [l/min]
= 40 l/mh x 18 m: 60 min/h = 12 l/min
Set the pump speed so that the recommended ow rate
is matched. Figure 28 Volume ow meter with adjustment screw
5. Trouble Shooting
Table 5 Fault Cause Solution
No power supply Check the electric connections
The temperature difference set at the controller
Pump not running, Check controller settings
is not reached
no sound, no vibration
The maximum tank temperature has been
If permitted: increase the maximum tank temperature
reached
Set the maximum pump level (at the pump) and
The pump is not running but pump speed (at the controller)
The pump shaft might be stuck
sound is present Loosen the ventilation screw and carefully move the
pump shaft with a screw driver
There is an engaged shut-off in the solar circuit:
Flow meter Open shut-off valve
The pump is running but Ball valve in the solar circulation unit
there is no circulation
Remove air with the deaeration components or ll again
Air in the solar circuit
with lling pump, if necessary add more solar liquid
The pump has not been properly bled Bleed the pump
Very noisy pump
Air in the solar circuit See The pump is running but there is no circulation
Flow and return ow pipes of the solar circuit
Change connections
Pump clocking have been confused
Delta T is set too low at the control Increase Delta T
Check the cable connections
The pump keeps running The sensor might be faulty Compare the resistance of the sensor to the table
value
The temperature difference Pump speed is too low Increase pump speed
between ow and return is
too high Air in the solar circuit See The pump is running but there is no circulation
Non-return valve is open Set the correct operational position

Operate pump at maximum speed and switch the
Non-return valve is clogged
non-return valve on and off several times.
Non-return valve is faulty Replace the non-return valve
The storage tank is cooling
down Convective circulation in the hot water circuit Install stop valve or check existing one
Long running times of the hot water circulation Reduce the operating time or adjust the time and
pump temperature settings
The storage tank sensor position of the solar Correct the position of the sensor between the lower
controller is too low third and the mid section of the heat exchanger
Air was released by air separator or release
Add solar liquid
Pressure drop at manometer valves
Solar circuit not leak tight Check all connections for tightness
6. Maintenance
Table 6 Components Actions
Not required under normal conditions. In case of signicantly increased
dirt accumulation (e.g. from industrial emissions or chimney smoke and
Cleaning of glass cover
dust from pollen etc.) clean with clear water, alcohol or ordinary glass
Collector cleaner and soft tissue. Note: Observe safety rules for working on roofs!
Check collector mounting for damage and stability
Visual inspection of collector
Check insulation at connection hoses and sensor cable for damage
Observe the safety notes in the
Magnesium-anode
documentation of the storage
Protective current > 0.3 mA, check at least every 2 years
Storage cylinders cylinders, especially control correct
Impressed current anode,
corrosion protection (sacricial or
observe control light
impressed current anode).
Recommended min. frost protection temperature -19 C
Frost protection of solar liquid
Check after startup, then every 2 years.
pH-value > 6.6 otherwise exchange solar liquid
Check ph value every 2 years
Black looking solar liquid must be exchanged
Corrosion protection of solar liquid
Unusual smell: exchange solar liquid, clean solar circuit
Solar liquid remaining in an emptied system may cause corrosion in
Solar circuit
combination with air
Observe system pressure
System pressure For correct value see chapter 4.6
Check frost protection after adding water more than once
Volume ow in solar circuit Recommended volume ow per m collector area = 0.5-0.8 l/min
Expansion vessel Check for correct pre-pressure
1.6
PLANNING
Dimensioning of a Solar Installation

for Hot Water Preparation
To plan a solar thermal installation the following system

compenents must be determined:
Collector area, storage cylinder size, pipe diameters,
pump type, size of expansion vessels and antifreeze con-
centration.
The specications below are intended to provide rule of
thumb planning dimensions. The may divert from ideal di-
mensions in some cases.
2.19 kWh/m
2.47 kWh/m
2.74 kWh/m
2.90 kWh/m
3.29 kWh/m
Fig. 1 Approximate indication of global irradiation in the British Isles (source: British Solar Trade Association) 1.6
The Collector Area Daily global Orientation Colleltor area / person

irradiation at roof tilt of solar fraction
Use the map to determine the global radiation for your in kWh/m2
25 60 50% 55% 60% 65%
location. With this value and the collector orientation you
can determin the required collector area (m2) per person. SW S SO 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5
3.0 3.4
W/O 0.4 1.6 1.9
The area is sufcient for a hot water consumption of 50l
per person and day. A solar fraction of 60 % covers nearly SW S SO 0.9 1.1 1.5 1.8
2.7 3.0
the entire hot water demand outside the heating period. W/O 1.4 2.0
SW S SO 1.1 1.3 1.7 2.1
2.3 2.7
W/O 1.9
The Storage Cylinder Volume Example: 4 Person household in Portsmouth

(ca. 2.9 KWh/m2),
The volume of the solar or hot water storage cylinder Roof orientation South-West
desired solar fraction: 65 %
should be equivalent to 1.5 to 2 times of the average daily
water consumption. The average consumption is 40l per Approx. required
person and day. Therefore storage volume of 240 to 320l collector area F = 4 Persons x 1.8 = 7.2 m2
should be planned for a 4 person household. This does
not take the possible connection of dishwasher or wash-
ing machine to the hot water system into account.
Solar Thermal / Planning EN-XXX_Hot-Water_PL-0809xx-1125A600 437

Determining Pipe Diameters and Pump Selection1
Collector area, (m2) Pipe diameter solar circuit (mm) und pump type
Depending on total piping length (m) (1) Pump = 25/40; (2) = Pump 25/60
10 20 30 40
4.78 18 (1) 18 (1) 18 (1) 18 (1)
7.17 18 (1) 18 (1) 18 (1) 18 (1)
9.56 (2x2 collectors, serial) 18 (1) 18 (1) 18 (1) 18 (1)
9.56 (4 collectors, serial) 18 (2) 18 (2) 22 (2)
1) The table applies to EURO C20 and C30 collectors.
For other EURO collector types take the differing surface areas and technical informations into account.
Collectors of the LBM type have lower pressure losses, therefore smaller pipe diameters and smaller pump types might be selected.
Selection of an Expansion Vessel

Collector area (m2) Volume of the expansion vessel for a total installation height of:
(Vessel installed in cellar, safety valve 6 bar, total piping length approx. 40 m)
5m 10 m 15 m
4.78 12 l 12 l 12 l
7.17 12 l 12 l 12 l
9.56 18 l 18 l 18 l
14.43 18 l 24 l 24 l
21.51 24 l 35 l 35 l
Volume of Solar Heat Exchangers of the ECOplus Storage cylinders

Storage Type ECOplus 300 ECOplus 400 ECOplus 500 ECOplus 750
Volume in litres 8.5 10.0 12.0 15.0
Pipe Volumes
Diameter of CU pipes (mm) 15 18 22 28
Volume in litres
0.18 0.20 0.31 0.50
per metre pipe length
Antifreeze Concentrations
To protect the installation against frost damage, we recom-
mend a mixing ratio of 40 % solar liquid DC20 and 60 %
water, guaranteeing frost protection to -19 C.

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
Sun Path Indicator
Function
This device allows examining whether trees, buildings etc,
will cast shadows on planned module or collector surfaces.
Shadowing can result in reduced effectiveness of a solar
energy system.
The transparent sun path sheet displays the relevant an-
nual irradiation curves with respect to the daily sunshine
hours.
If you look through the device after aligning it south using
the compass, you will be able to identify objects which will
obstruct the path of the sun at a given time and therefore
cast a shadow.
The installation location for solar collectors or solar mod-
ules is optimally chosen when no shadowing occurs or
shadowing only occurs very early or late during the day.
Especially during the transition periods in autumn and
spring a solar system with combined hot water and space
heating support should not be subject to shadowing. A
system mounted on a roof with Western orientation natu-
rally must not be shadowed during the afternoon.
Figure 1: The sun path indicator is a clever device for determining pos-
sible shadowing at the collector site.
Astronomical Remarks
In northern latitudes December 21 is the shortest day or Negligible Deviations:
the day with the least sunshine time, and the sun follows In mid latitudes the magnetic north-south direction mea-
its lowest path. Depending on the latitude different sun sured with a compass deviates from the geographical 1.6
paths can be determined. For central and western Europe north-south direction by up to 2 (technical expression:
the sun path diagram of the 51st latitude in most cases is magnetic declination). Deviations from the solar South
sufciently precise. result from the elliptic orbit of the earth around the sun
(max.+/-10) and the deviation from the 15th geographic
You get the precise time of the suns highest position by longitude: (15 -x) x 4.
simply adding the ofcial sun-rising and sun-setting times
and then dividing them by 2. Of for example the sun-rising Please keep in mind the one hour summer-time / daylight
time is 07:08 and the sun sets at 17:10, the sun will reach its saving time adjustment during your measurements.
highest position exactly at 12:09. The sun-rising and set-
ting times can be obtained from many daily newspapers. The foils for the 51st and 53rd latitude are included.
Various computer-simulations such as PVsol or SunPlot3D Never look through the eyepiece into the sun!
allow for entering the shadowing and hence a precise cal-
culation of the solar fraction. Please observe the safety guidelines when using the sun
path indicator on roofs!
Solar Thermal / Planning EN-XXX_Sun-Path-Indicator_BA-0701xx-1122G000 439

Figure 2: Select the correct sun path foil (e.g. 51 lat. = D, NL, B, South- Figure 3: Go to the future location of the solar energy system.
ern UK; 48 lat. = AU, CH etc., 53 lat. = IE, Northern UK), cut out the
correct foil for your region along the thin markings and insert it into the
stainless steel holder.
21
ril
Ap
21
rch
Ma
21
er 1200
tob 1100 13 00
Oc 14 00
00
10
21 Wagner& Co
ber 0 15 00
ce m 90
0 De Sun Path Indicator 53rd latitude 17 00
70 0 16 00
80
Figure 4: Use the compass to align the sun path indicator south, level- Figure 5: You can trace the outlines of trees and buildings onto the sun
ling it horizontally. path indicator sheet or a second overlaying transparent sheet using a
non-permanent OH pen.

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
DIMENSIONING / SYSTEM SOLUTION 1

Single Storage Cylinder System with ECOplus Solar Storage Cylinder
Collector area
Solar controller
SUNGO
Heating circuit
P1
P2
CIRCO
M
ECOplus
P3
Oil or gas
boiler
Hot water
1.6
Cold water
Solar Installation Description Auxiliary Heating

The heat transfer liquid that was heated up by the sun If the temperature set for the domestic hot water area of
within the collectors transfers its energy to the domestic the storage cylinder is not reached (e.g. due to insufcient
water through the heat exchanger in the lower half of the solar irradiation), the solar storage cylinder is heated addi-
storage cylinder. tionally by the boiler. A second heat exchanger for auxiliary
The solar controller switches on the circulation pump only heating is integrated in the upper half of the storage cylin-
when the collector temperature is higher than the tem- der. For this auxiliary heating, oil or gas boilers, thermes or
perature in the lower storage cylinder section. Because special electric heaters can be utilized. The boiler control-
a speed-controlled circulation pump is used, the storage ler regulates most of the supplementary heating for the
cylinder can be continuously loaded with a constant tem- storage cylinder water. The required temperature sensor
perature-difference, reducing energy consumption and can be easily installed at the ECOplus sensor terminal.
pump-cycles.
Domestic Water Mixer
To avoid scalding, the adjustable domestic water mixer
reduces the possibly occurring high temperatures in the
storage cylinder (up to 95 C!) to the required tapping
temperature of 35 to 55C.
Solar Thermal / Planning EN-XXX_SA-SYS-1-Hot-Water_PL-0901xx-1125A900 441


ECOplus Solar Storage Cylinder Upstreamed of Existing Hot Water
Storage Cylinder with Controlled Storage Cylinder Circulation
Collector area
Solar controller
SUNGO
Heating circuit
P2 P1
CIRCO
M
P4
ECOplus
P3
Oil or gas
boiler
Hot water
1.6
Cold water
For existing hot water preparation systems supplemented Solar Installation Description
with a solar thermal installation, it generally is advisable to The solar storage cylinder must be integrated into the do-
remove the existing monovalent (single heat exchanger) mestic water circuit and installed upstream of the existing
cylinder. If however the existing hot water storage is to be hot water cylinder. The collector eld heats only the so-
integrated and to minimise at the same time the construc- lar storage cylinder. During hot water extraction, the solar
tion work, the above hydraulic connection scheme can heated water ows from the ECOplus into the existing hot
be chosen. The existing cylinder should have an excellent water cylinder.
heat insulation. If the hot water temperature provided by the collectors is
not high enough, the boiler is used for additional heating.
The existing heating pipe layout between boiler and exist-
ing hot water storage remains unchanged, therefore the
installation effort is signicantly reduced. The solar control-
ler assures a speed-controlled loading of the solar stor-
age cylinder and controls the circulation pump P2, which
transfers the solar heat into the existing hot water storage
cylinder.
Solar Thermal / Planning EN-XXX_SA-SYS-2-Hot-Water_PL-0901xx-1125B200 443


Downstreamed ECOplus Solar Storage Cylinder and
Existing Hot Water Storage Cylinder
Collector area
Solar controller
SUNGO
Heating circuit
P2
P1
CIRCO
M
ECOplus
P3
Oil or gas
boiler
V1
Hot water
Cold water
1.6
For existing hot water preparation systems with a supple- Solar Installation Description
mentary solar thermal installation, it is generally advisable The solar storage cylinder must be installed downstream
to remove the existing monovalent (single heat exchang- of (behind) the existing hot water cylinder and integrated
er) cylinder. However, for mounting and integrating the into the domestic water circuit. Both storage cylinders are
existing storage cylinder, the scheme shown above is the loaded with solar heat. During extraction, solar heated wa-
energetically most favourable possibility: ter from the existing storage cylinder ows into the ECO-
The new, well insulated solar storage cylinder is the plus storage cylinder.
hot extraction cylinder (on stand-by temperature). A boiler ensures auxiliary heating at the upper section
There are two solar heat exchangers: both storage cyl- of the storage cylinder, if the hot water temperature pro-
inders are charged with solar heat, possibly at different duced by solar energy is insufcient.
temperature levels. This ensures an optimal utilization
of the solar heat.
For this connection variation, no circulation pump is re-
quired between the two storage cylinders.
Solar Thermal / Planning EN-XXX_SA-SYS-3-Hot-Water_PL-0901xx-1125S700 445


and Swimming Pool Heating
System with ECOplus Solar Storage Cylinder and Plate Heat Exchanger
Collector area
Solar controller
SUNGO
Heating circuit
P2
P1
CIRCO
M
ECOplus
P3
Oil or gas Swimming pool
boiler
Hot water
V1
Cold water
Systems for hot water and swimming pool heating utilize 1.6
a very high fraction of the energy supplied by the solar
installation and hence are among the most efcient solar
heating systems.
Solar Installation Description

Priority in this solar installation is loading the solar storage
cylinder. When reaching the max. storage cylinder tempe-
rature, or during low solar radiation, the swimming pool
water is heated. For this the solar controller regulates an
electronic 3 way valve (V1) in the solar circuit. The heat
transfer to the swimming pool is realised via a highly efci-
ent stainless steel plate heat exchanger properly dimensi-
oned to match the collector area and pool size.
Heat transfer to the solar cylinder is via an internal plain
pipe heat exchanger. For installations with larger collector
areas an external plate heat exchanger may be required
instead.
Solar Thermal / Planning EN-XXX_SA-SYS-4-Hot-Water-Pool-Heating_PL-0901xx-1125B400 447


and Heating Support
Single Storage Cylinder System with TERMO Combi Cylinder
Collector area
Hot water Solar controller
SUNGO
Cold water
TERMO
P3 P2
P1
Heating circuit
CIRCO
V1
Oil or gas
boiler
1.6
The combined storage cylinder TERMO combines solar Heating Support
hot water preparation and space heating support in an el- An easy way to transfer solar heat to the heating circuit is to
egant and economical way. increase the return ow temperature of the heating circuit.
When the temperature in the TERMO-cylinder is higher
Hot Water Preparation than that of the heating circuit return ow, the return ow
The TERMO cylinder features a corrosion resistant inner of the heating circuit is directed through the TERMO cylin-
container, where cold domestic water entering at the bot- der via an electronic 3 way valve with actuator. The boiler
tom gets heated up until its extraction from the upper then only needs to supply some additional heat or even
section. During the summer season water heating almost none at all.
entirely is covered by the solar installation. To this end the
storage cylinder is equipped with a well-dimensioned so- Energy Efciency
lar heat exchanger in its lower section. The inner storage container for domestic water ranges al-
During low solar radiation periods, the boiler ensures the most from top to bottom of the storage cylinder. On the
hot water supply. one hand this ensures pre-heating of the entering domes-
tic water and on the other favourable working tempera-
tures of the solar heat exchanger. A convection chimney
additionally supports the stratication during solar load-
ing. Heat loss is reduced due to high quality insulation and
the patented CONVECTROL connections.
Solar Thermal / Planning EN-XXX_SA-SYS-5-Hot-Water-Heating-Sup_PL-0901xx-1125B500 449

DIMENSIONING / SYSTEM SOLUTION 6b

and Heating Support
System with TERMO Combi-Cylinder in Combination with
Pellet Boiler XILO
Solar controller
Collector
area
Hot water
Cold water
Circulation
Solar Installation Description Buffer-Heating Operation

Over the last years the popularity of biomass energy in- The pellet boiler heats up an additional part of the combi-
creased signicantly. Wood pellet technology merges ec- cylinder volume during heating operation. Even when lit-
ological benets with modern heating comfort. In addition tle heating is required, partial load operation and the con- 1.6
the combination with a solar thermal installation greatly nected higher emissions are avoided.
reduces the pellet consumption as well as emissions.
Solar Space Heating Support
Domestic Hot Water Preparation If the solar collectors can charge the storage cylinder to a
The TERMO-cylinder is equipped with a corrosion-resist- temperature level above that of the heating circuits return
ant inner container, where cold domestic water entering ow, the solar heat can be directly utilized by the space
at the bottom gets heated up, until its extraction from the heating system. When the solar yield is sufciently high,
upper section. During the summer season, water heating the pellet boiler is not in operation at all (zero emissions,
is almost entirely done by the solar installation. During pe- zero fuel consumption).
riods or seasons with insufcient solar irradiation, heating
of the upper storage section via the XILO pellet boiler or a
similar system ensures hot water availability.
Solar Thermal / Planning EN-XXX_SA-SYS-6b-Hot-Water-Heating-Sup_PL-100127-1WA10071 451


and Heating Support
Single Storage Cylinder System with
Freshwater Unit RATIOfresh and RATIO Buffer Storage
Collector area
Solar controller
SUNGO
Heating circuit
P1
RATIO-H PG
CIRCO
P2 P3
M
RATIOfresh
Oil or gas
boiler
V1
Circulation
P4 1.6
Hot water
Cold water
Solar thermal installations with sustainable and hygienic tion of the buffer cylinder ows through the stainless steel
hot domestic water preparation based upon electronically heat exchanger of the RATIOfresh. The RATIOfresh heat
controlled ow-through freshwater units with built in heat exchanger then heats the domestic water to a constant
exchanger are an interesting and modern alternative to the tapping temperature.
classical tank-in-tank solar storage cylinders. An eventu- Due to a load-dependent speed control of the buffer un-
ally required heating of the cylinder according to hygienic loading pump, the freshwater unit controller ensures a
norms and regulations is not necessary, and the RATIOfesh minimized return ow temperature to the buffer cylinder.
controller regulates the heat-disinfection of the piping (ex- Thanks to the low return ow temperature,no high tem-
cept for RATIOfresh 200). perature water is returned to the storage cylinder. There-
fore even during low solar radiation, the system can sup-
Solar Installation Description ply solar heat to the lower section of the buffer cylinder.
This system includes a solar buffer cylinder RATIO-H The solar controller continuously compares the heating
PG with plain pipe heat exchanger and freshwater unit circuit return ow temperature and the buffer cylinder
RATIOfresh. During solar radiation the collector eld heats temperature. If the buffer cylinder reaches a higher tem-
the solar buffer cylinder. During low solar radiation peri- perature level, the heating circuit return ow is directed
ods, a conventional heating system supplies the required through the cylinder. Therefore an oil or gas boiler needs
heat to the upper section of the buffer cylinder. to supply less additional heat. A connection to the boiler
During hot water extraction, hot water from the upper sec- controller is not necessary.
Solar Thermal / Planning EN-XXX_SA-SYS-7-Hot-Water-Heating-Sup_PL-100127-1125E000 453


and Space Heating Support
Dual Cylinder System with ECOplus Solar Storage Cylinder and
Collector area
Solar controller
Heating circuit
P4 P1
P2 P3
CIRCO
RATIO-H PG
ECOplus
V3
Oil or gas
boiler
V1
V2
Warm water
Cold water
1.6
Solar Installation Description

Domestic hot water preparation and solar heating in To this end, the heating circuit return ow is directed via
this case occur in two separate solar cylinders. The solar the electronic 3 way valve V2 through the buffer cylinder.
energy is distributed to both cylinders but with priority As before, the boiler controller regulates the supply tem-
given to the hot water storage cylinder. If the hot water perature of the heating circuit, and during transition peri-
cylinder reaches its required temperature, or if the solar ir- ods in spring and autumn the boiler will need to supply
radiation is too low for further heating, solar charging is au- less heat.
tomatically switched to the buffer tank. The upper section The solar heat from the buffer tank can also be utilized to
of the hot water cylinder can be additionally heated by the supply additional heat to the solar hot water cylinder. For
boiler, if required. The heating buffer cylinder RATIO can this the pump P4 is required, which is regulated by the
be easily integrated into the heating circuit. As soon as the solar controller.
temperature in the heating circuit return ow is lower than
the temperature in the buffer cylinder, solar pre-heated
buffer water will be directed to the boiler.
Solar Thermal / Planning EN-XXX_SA-SYS-8-Hot-Water-Heating-Sup_PL-100127-1125B300 455

Wagner-T*SOL
the Versatile Simulation Software
Advantages at a Glance
Special company version of the professional dimension-
ing programme T*SOL 4.5 from Dr. Valentin; for solar
thermal installations for hot water preparation, heating
support and swimming pool heating.
Choice of 13 different solar systems. 2 new variations
with RATIOfresh freshwater station.
5 languages: English, German, Italian, French and Span-
ish
Sophisticated gathering of project data with the param-
eters: Climate le, hot water requirement, space heat-
ing requirement, pool heating requirement and system
components.
International climate le
The standard outside temperature for the calculation of
the heating energy demand can be entered individually
for each location.
Simulations over the year on a minute by minute base,
with daily recording interval step by step to the opti-
mal solar yield. Figure 1 T*SOL the standard simulation software, now as Wagner &
Takes speed controlled pump in solar circuit into ac- Co version 4.5
count.
All results are summarized in a three page project re-
port (PDF): solar energy yield, solar faction, system ef-
ciency, max. collector temperatures, savings of conven-
tional energy as well as CO2 emission reductions. System Components
Choose the system components from the product line:
Collector (type, mounting, piping), collector loop connec-
Input tion, storage, heating circuit and boiler, speed controlled
circulation pump. 1.6
Set up a project and calculate the ideal solar installation
for your customer based upon the following parameters: Pre Setting
We recommend the following settings:
System Selection Volume ow in collector circuit 35-40 l/hm
Choose from 13 system variants, e.g. single-storage DHW, Control setting for combination storage: 0-5 C set point
space heating support or swimming pool heating. See temperature for switch on temperature and 5-10C for
overview on next page (g. 2-14) switch off temperature.
These pre-set values can be adjusted any time.
Climate File
A weather data base contains the data for many cities in
Europe, extendible if required, e.g. with the Meteonorm Output
CD ver. 6.1.
Based upon the gathered project data T*SOL now simu-
Hot Water Requirement lates the most relevant parameters: Solar energy yield, so-
Precisely dened by desired temperature, consumption lar faction, system efciency, conventional energy savings
prole (e.g. detached house with morning peak) and and CO2 reduction.
operational time over the course of the year. A three page project report summarizes all results: System
diagrams with basic data of the system components, re-
Space Heating Requirement sults of the annual simulation, graphical illustration of the
Enter the corresponding values using the tabs for heat- solar faction, daily maximum temperatures in collector,
ing requirement, heat gains, heating operation over the project data and selected system components.
course of year. The project reports are generated as compact PDF les.
Solar Thermal / Planning EN-XXX_Wagner-T-SOL_TI-091002-1125A700 457

Installing T*SOL Wagner Starting T*SOL Wagner
Wagner & Co will provide you with a link to download When after the download the Icon T*SOL Wagner ap-
a demo-version from the Valentin Energy Software pears on the desktop, double click it, and the programme
Homepage. You can unlock the demo version with a serial will start. Otherwise go to Start and Programmes and
number available from Wagner & Co. select T*SOL Wagner 4.5.
System Layout
13 system layouts are available for DHW preparation, heat-
ing support and pool heating.
Figure 2 Single storage system / storage with 2 heat exchangers / aux. Figure 3 Solar installation for DHW and heating with combined stor-
heating via boiler age / aux. heating via boiler
Figure 4 Single storage system / storage with 1 heat exchanger / aux Figure 5 Solar installation for DHW with combined storage / aux. heat-
heating via electrical immersion heater ing via boiler
Figure 6 Two storage system for DHW, aux heating via boiler Figure 7 Solar installation for DHW and pool heating with combined
storage
458 EN-XXX_Wagner-T-SOL_TI-091002-1125A700
Figure 8 Two storage installation / domestic water storage and heating Figure 9 Solar installation for hot water and pool heating with bivalent
buffer storage with internal heat exchanger domestic water storage
Figure 10 Two storage system / drinking water and heating buffer stor- Figure 11 Solar installation for hot water, heating and pool heating,
age with external heat exchanger with combination storage
1.6
Figure 12 Wagner combined storage system, certied company sys- Figure 13 Solar installation with buffer storage and freshwater station
tem with combined storage TERMO 700 RATIOfresh for DHW and heating
Figure 14 Solar installation with buffer storage and freshwater station

RATIOfresh for DHW, space heating and pool heating
EN-XXX_Wagner-T-SOL_TI-091002-1125A700 459
Project Report
Figure 15 The 3 page project report with all results, in PDF format
System Requirements
Processor: 1 GHz Pentium PC
RAM: 512 MB
Free hard disk space: 400 MB
Monitor resolution: min. 1024 x 768 Pixel
Operating system: Windows 2000, XP, Vista
Acrobat-Reader or other PDF reader
How to Get Support

The programme is straight forward and generally self ex-
planatory. You can nd additional help in the Help menu
or with the F1 key. The short instructions we recommend
in any case.

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
CERTIFICATE
Installation Protocol Solar Heating Installation
For system owner
1. MOUNTING O.K. Notes, Comments

Storm-proof installation of collectors assured
Solar circuit connected to potential equalization
Connection box for solar sensors installed
Blow-off pipe with collecting vessel installed at safety valve of the solar circuit
Blow-off pipe installed at safety valve on drinking water side
Anti corrosion anode installed in storage cylinder and made operational:
protective current: .................. mA
Thermostatic mixing valve installed, it delivers the desired set temperature of .................. C
2. COMMISSIONING
Solar circuit ushed
Pressure testing with test pressure of .................. bar successfully completed
Installation lled with solar liquid and antifreeze protection to - .................. C
Primary pressure in expansion vessel (check before lling!) .................. bar
System pressure .................. bar at .................. C
Pump, storage heat exchanger and collector vented
Automatic air vents and ball valves below are closed
Non-return valves (back-ow preventers) at the ball valves of the solar circulation unit are enabled
Filling and draining tap caps are screwed on
3. CONTROLLER SYSTEMS
Temperature sensors show realistic values
Tcollector = .................. C, Tstorage = .................. C, Tstorage = .................. C, T..... = .................. C
Solar circulation pump runs, volume ow .................. l/min
During full irradiation: temperature difference between collector and storage between 10 - 18 C
Option: Circulation pump running time from .................. oclock until .................. oclock 1.6
Option: Circulation pump runs only when return ow temperature lower than .................. C
4. BRIEFING OF SYSTEM OWNER / OPERATOR
Basic functions and operation of the solar controller in combination with the circulation pump
Functions and operation of auxiliary heating
Operation of air vents
Function of the protective anode for the storage cylinder
Maintenance intervalls
Handing over the documentation, optionally including customized schematics
Filling in the system documentation
5. SERVICE TIME
Name of installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . time from-to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no. of hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes, Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
............................................................................................................................
Properly commissioned / Date Signature of installer / contractor Signature of owner

Several testing steps do not apply for the SECUSOL System
Solar Thermal / Service Protocol EN-XXX_Installation-Protocol-ST_ZT-090810-1123C100 461

CERTIFICATE
Maintenance Protocol
Solar Heating Installation
For system owner
1. SOLAR CIRCUIT O.K. Actions in case of defect / date

System pressure .................. bar at solar circuit temp. .................. C
Leak tightness of solar circuit tested (if possible)
Safety valve did not blow off / collecting vessel dry
pH-value of solar liquid .................. (minimum 7.0)
Frost protection of solar liquid to - .................. C
Air in system (rushing noise in pump)
Non-return valves functional
Thermostatic mixing valve delivers set temperature value of .................. C
Circulation pump in solar circuit runs in all three speeds
2. SOLAR COLLECTOR Type: Serial number:
Visual inspection of collector for properties and condition
Visual inspection of collector xture
Inspect proper condition of piping insulation
3. SOLAR STORAGE CYLINDER (ENAMELED)
Protective current of magnesium anode .................. mA(minimum 0.3 mA)
Green control light indicates that the the impressed current anode is in operation
4. SOLAR CONTROLLER
Pump functions tested in the positions on / off / automatic
Controller shows .................. operational hours in the time from .................. to ..................
Balance value: ..................
Temperature display of all temperature sensors tested, current sensor values
(see controller manual):
Tcollector = .................. C, Tstorage = .................. C, Tstorage = .................. C, T..... = .................. C
Collector temperature: Tcollector = .................. C, Tcollector/max = .................. C
1.6
Storage temperatures, balance values: Tstorage/min = .................. C, Tstorage/max = .................. C
5. AUXILIARY HEATING
Desired set temperature .................. C is held
6. VOLUME FLOW
Volume meter operates correctly
with .................. l/h ow temp. .................. C / return-ow temp. .................. C
Heat meter shows .................. kWh, ow meter .................. l/min
7. OPTIONAL CIRCULATION PIPE
Circulation pump operates
Timer set correctly, running from .................. to ..................
8. SERVICE TIME
Name of installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . time from-to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no. of hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Material / Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
............................................................................................................................
Date Signature of installer / contractor Signature of owner

Several testing steps do not apply for the SECUSOL System
Solar Thermal / Service Protocol EN-XXX_Maintenance-Protocol-ST_ZT-090810-1123C200 463

Cleaning of AR Solar Glass on

EURO-Collectors
Staining and contamination of the anti reective (AR) so- Always pay attention to the safety data sheet and safety
lar glazing can occurr during transportation and installa- information on the package of the cleaning agent be-
tion of EURO collectors. We recommend the following fore beginning the cleaning process!
cleaning approach:
The cleaning agent should be applied with a ne glass
First use clear water to remove coarse dirt and dust, cleaning cloth (e.g. scrim or Vileda cloths, as available
since the AR surface is sensitive to mechanical abbrasi- in most Supermarkets).
on. Even small dust particles could leave visible scrat-
ches behind when wiping. Avoid continuous circular movements with strong pres-
sure on one spot. The special AR glass surface could be
The best results can be achieved when acetone is used damaged.
as a cleaning agent. Alternatively you can also use the
following cleaning agents: Ethanol, Isopropanol, Delo- Caution:
then NK1, Delothen EP. This approach is not recommended for cleaning PV mo-
dules!
Figure 1 Collector with anti reective solar glass

Figure 2 Not recommended for cleaning PV modules!
1.6
Solar Thermal / Solar Collectors EN-XXX_EURO-Cleaning-AR-Solar-Glass_TI-100316-1WA10094 465

CERTIFICATE
Solar Thermal
Functional Guarantee
We conde in the quality of our products and therefore

for the following products offer you a functional guaran-
tee beyond the statutory EU two year requirement:
Flat plate collectors: 10 years
Solar storage tanks: 5 years
This voluntary guarantee includes:

For solar collectors all deciencies decreasing perform-
ance or compromising structural stability and integrity.
For solar storage tanks deciencies of the enamel layer
or the tank material itself that result from the produc-
tion process.
The guarantee period begins with the date of production

as noted on the type label.
In case of a guarantee claim, we will deliver, at our option,
a replacement device or we will eliminate the deciency.
Compensation delivery will take place without accept-
ance of transport or travel expenses or labour costs.
Prerequisites for the guarantee to take effect are that the
deciency is announced immediately after occurrence,
that all information necessary for evaluation of the fail-
ure is conveyed and that devices are only uninstalled in
agreement with us.
The guarantee requires that:

components are installed according to our installation
instructions and the current technical standards,
commissioning and maintenance have been carried
out by professional experts, corresponding with manu-
facturer instructions and have been documented in 1.6
suitable protocols,
a back side ventilation of the roof according to current
building codes exists,
neither glass breakage nor frost have caused the dam-
age,
the installation has not been exposed to aggressive
media,
and the deciencies have not been caused by a third
party or force majeure.
With sunny regards
Wagner & Co Team

Clbe, February 2008
Solar Thermal / Certicate EN-XXX_Functional-Guarantee-ST_ZT-0803xx-1127G900 467

Solar Electricity
A typical answer to the question what can you do with Photovoltaic Systems
is: Everything. The last two decades have seen a dramatic success story of
Photovoltaic applications on any scale, ranging from small handheld appliances
to large-scale grid connected power plants. Many governments support grid
connected solar electricity installations with generous feed in tariffs, turning grid
connected PV projects into safe and veritable investments. Off grid systems on
the other hand have seen tremendous growth rates as well, mainly due to their
versatility and exibility. Power supply of any sort at remote locations often makes
modern reliable off grid technology the technology of choice. Sample applica-
tions are cell-phone relays stations, street signs and lamps, electricity for yachts,
remote health stations, solar irrigation and more. In addition to our high-quality
modules, inverters and other components we can provide ready solutions and
planning expertise for any type of solar power project, grid connected or off
grid.
Off Grid Solar Power Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Dimensioning of Photovoltaic Off Grid Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Dimensioning a Grid Connected Solar Electricity Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
On Roof Module Mounting System TRIC A HDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Free Standing Mounting System TRIC F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Free Standing Mounting System TRIC F pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Commissioning Protocol for a PV-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Measuring Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
469
Off Grid Solar Power Systems
Solar modules
Charge
controller
Battery Distributor
Load
Figure 1 Mountain hut with off grid solar power supply Figure 2 Schematic of an off grid system
Description
Off grid (stand-alone) systems are independently oper-
ated power supply systems without any connection to the
public grid. They are mainly used for the seasonal supply
of electricity to small loads.
The basic stand-alone system comprises an energy source 2
(solar module), an energy store (battery), a charge control-
ler, a distributor (optional) and the loads. The layout is de-
picted in gure2.
FREE Line Systems

The FREE line systems from Wagner & Co serve as basic
solar power units used in the design of individual solu-
tions. It is important that all components complement one
another. The system conguration must therefore be de-
signed to meet the respective site requirements and other
specications. FREE line systems are designed for a DC
system voltage of 12 V.
Photovoltaic / Off Grid EN-XXX_Off-Grid-PV-Systems_TI-MA-0804xx-12213300 471

Scope of Delivery and Technical Data
Table 1 System Solar Total Battery, Battery Charge Load Accessories
FREE line voltage module, power type capacity controller, current
Systems type type
6 m solar cable
FREEline 20 1 x BP 320 20 Wc 41 Ah PR 1010 1 x 2,5 mm;
Pole terminal pair
max. 6 A
10 m solar cable
FREEline 30 1 x BP 330 30 Wc 41 Ah PR 1010 1 x 2,5 mm;
Pole terminal pair
15 m solar cable
FREEline 50 1 x BP 350 50 Wc 85 Ah PR 1010 1 x 4 mm;
Solar gel Pole terminal pair
12 V battery/ max. 10 A
Dryt Solar 15 m solar cable
FREEline 65 1 x BP 365 65 Wc 85 Ah PR 1010 1 x 4 mm;
Pole terminal pair
15 m solar cable
FREEline 80 1 x BP 380 80 Wc 130 Ah PR1515 max. 15 A 1 x 4 mm;
Pole terminal pair
15 m solar cable
FREEline 125 1 x BP 3125 125 Wc 130 Ah PR2020 max. 20 A 1 x 6 mm;
Pole terminal pair
Exclusion of Liability
All stand-alone sets consist of electrical components
which are connected together in situ to form a complete
system. Wagner & Co cannot monitor compliance with the
instructions given in this manual or the safety regulations.
We do not accept responsibility or liability for damages,
losses and costs to the system itself or third parties result-
ing from, or related to, the improper installation, opera-
tion, and incorrect design and use of the system.
Safety Information
During system assembly and installation it is imperative Stand-alone systems are DC-systems carrying high elec-
that the technical information and manuals for individu- trical currents. Cable cross sections must be adequate
al components are taken into consideration. in terms of the current load, cable laying and cable
All potential hazards to humans, animals and material length requirements to prevent any excessive heating
goods should be minimised by applying utmost care (re hazard).
and attention when performing installation and assem- When working on a stand-alone system, always ensure
bly work. it is not under voltage to prevent short-circuits.
Particular attention should be paid to ensure the solar The batteries are supplied pre-charged and can dis-
modules are solidly and securely mounted. Ensure com- charge high currents through short circuits. This could
pliance with the relevant safety regulations. result in re.
The electrical installation of the system must full the
country specic guidelines and safety requirements.
472 EN-XXX_Off-Grid-PV-Systems_TI-MA-0804xx-12213300
Installation Instructions
Solar Modules Charge Controller
The modules in stand-alone systems can be installed in a The installation location selected for the charge controller
number of different ways, depending on the application, should allow good heat dissipation.
in order to achieve optimum orientation. It is therefore
not possible to give universal installation instructions for Protection
all possible congurations. Installation is dependent on Apart from the protection of individual loads, it is highly
the particular application and must take into account the recommended that the main feed near the battery is also
safety instructions. protected. The battery will deliver a high current during
All modules for stand-alone sets are equipped with robust, short-circuit conditions, which could cause cables to glow
anodized aluminium frames, which are mounted in various or burn, and result in a re.
ways. The electrical connections are established by means Table 2 indicates the required fuse ratings for a particular
of screw terminals in the weatherproof connection box. cross-section and laying method.
Stand-alone sets containing several modules must be con-
nected in parallel (see gure3) so that the system voltage Table 2
Current carrying capacity and protection for insulated
does not exceed 12 V!
copper cables
One or more cables Multi-core cables
Cable laid in pipe (sheathed cables,
cross- conduit wires,
section tape conduits)
[mm]
Load Fuse Load Fuse
[A] [A] [A] [A]
1.5 15 10 18 10
2.5 20 16 26 20
4 25 20 34 25
6 33 25 44 35
10 45 35 61 50
16 61 50 82 63
12V 25 83 63 108 80
Figure 3 Modules connected in parallel
35 103 80 135 100
50 132 100 168 125
Battery Cables
The battery acts as the central storage device and should Only install double-insulated, UV- and ozone- resistant so-
be placed as close as possible to the centre. This avoids lar cables between the solar modules and the charge con-
long cable routes. The installation site should be cool, troller or the module connection box. This type of cable is
frost-free, dry and well ventilated. Easy accessibility and also recommended for the connection of the battery and
a solid sub-structure are essential. When mounted in ve- the charge controller.
hicles, secure the batteries against slipping. The required cable cross-section is dependent on the sys-
The following should also be observed: The battery solely tem voltage, the transferred power and the cable length. It
serves to store electrical charge and has a limited capac- can be deduced from the diagram (gure 4) or calculated
ity. Its performance and service life are dependent on using the following formula:
the number of charge/discharge cycles and the extent to LxP LxP
which it is discharged (discharge depth). Both these pa- A= =
x fk x U 242
rameters are dependent on the energy consumption and 2
the number of connected loads. The higher the amount
of extracted energy, the faster the discharge rate of the A = Cable cross-section (in mm)
battery. Frequent charging will reduce the service life. Ob- L = Cable length of plus/minus conductors (in m)
serve the following hints to ensure a long service life: P = transferred power (in W)
m
Avoid deep discharges (due to loads that are not = elect. conductivity of copper (Kappa = 56 )
mm
switched off)! Even light loads requiring little current
can fully discharge a battery! fK = Cable loss factor (usually 3 % = 0.03)
In principle, the battery should be recharged after every U = System voltage (12 V)
discharge, even if it is not used for long periods!
Battery charge is a resource that should be used in a
careful and sparing manner.
EN-XXX_Off-Grid-PV-Systems_TI-MA-0804xx-12213300 473
Loads Commissioning
Special care must be taken to observe the correct polar-
ity when connecting the loads. Installed protection and A standard measurement device (multimeter) is recom-
distribution devices must comply with the technical stan- mended for commissioning and checking the system. Ba-
dards. We recommend the use of energy-saving loads for sic multimeters only cost a few Euros.
ecological reasons and to allow the optimum use of the The individual components are connected in the follow-
generated energy. ing order: The charge controller is rst connected to the
The total power of all connected loads must not exceed battery (observe polarity!). Then, the solar modules are
the output power of the charge controller. If a load ex- connected to the charge controller after verifying the cor-
ceeds the output power of the charge controller, it must rect connection and polarity. Measure the applied system
be directly connected to the battery. Caution! In this case, voltage.
the battery is no longer protected against deep discharge. The nal step is to connect the loads to the load output on
The Steca PR capacity indicator for the charge controller is the charge controller.
also not supported.
Maintenance
Stand-alone systems require very little maintenance. An
annual visual inspection is recommended to check all
components and module cables for signs of damage. Also
check the xings for the solar modules. Check whether the
cable connections on the charge controller and batteries
have become loose.
The gel batteries in the stand-alone sets are maintenance-
free (observe the instructions given in the chapter Bat-
tery).
Power (W) 12V system, cable losses 3%

10000
1000
Cable cross
100 section (mm)
25
16
10
6
10 4
2.5
1.5
1
0.75
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Cable length of plus/minus conductors (m)
Figure 4 Required cable cross-section as a function of the cable length and transferred power

PLANNING LIST
Dimensioning of
Photovoltaic Off Grid Systems
This planning list helps you calculating your daily energy demand, so we can provide you with a well dimensioned sys-
tem that caters your needs perfectly.
You will nd information on the energy demand of some typical electric devices in the chart on page 2. These speci-
cations can also be found in the manual or on the identication plate of your device. Essential is your indication of the
operating time (in hours) of every device.
Alternatively you can tell us your whole daily energy demand.
General data
Name
Streetaddress
Town and postcode
Phone
Email
Address / Assembly site
System Design
Available surface area for modules ___________ m

Module orientation (in compass degrees) _______________
Recommended: true south (northern Hemisphere), true north (southern hemisphere)
Module inclination (recommended 45 - 50 in Central Europe) ___________
Type of mounting: l Rooftop l Flat roof l Freestanding l Other
System Operation
All year round: l yes l no

If no, please indicate operating months:
l Jan l Feb l Mar l Apr l May l Jun l Jul l Aug l Sep l Oct l Nov l Dec
No. of operating days per week _____________
Required reserve days in case of bad weather _______________
2
Photovoltaic / Off Grid EN-XXX_Dimensioning-Off-Grid_PL-100621-12269900 475

Loads
Electrical appliances Quantity Voltage [V] Power [W] Daily operating time [h] Comments
Electrical appliances Power [W]
Energy-saving lamp 10- 25
Halogen uplight 300
TV 80 - 300
Hi- system 100
Laptop 60
Computer 180
Ventilator 25
Air conditioner 5000
Radiant heater 3000
Mikrowave 2000
Kettle 2000
Coffee machine 1500
Toaster 1500
Fridge 90
Freezer 250
Electrical shaver 15
Hair drier 1500
Electric iron 1500
Vacuum cleaner 1500
Washing machine 2500
Tumble drier 2500
Dish washer 2500
Other Information
Which level of supply security would you like? l high l medium l low
Is a motor or wind generator available? l yes l no
Planned budget: ___________________ EUR
It is recommended that an AC-coupled system is applied for continuously operating off grid installations with 230V
system voltage. Please request our AC- coupled system planning list.

PLANNING LIST
Dimensioning a Grid Connected

Solar Electricity Installation
General Data
Name
Street
Postal code / City
Customer ID
Address / Installation location
Lightning protection class
Grid operator
Geographical Data
Height above sea level m Wind and snow load kN/m
Special geographical features
Is the building subject to special archaeological or conservation legislation? l Yes l No
Please enclose blueprints (oor plans, sectional views etc.) and photographs (roof, view of building, shadow situation).
Installation Design
Mounting type l On-roof l Flat roof l Other
Module type l Mono-crystalline l Poly-crystalline l Other
Nominal power rating kWp Expected energy yield kWh/year
Max. surface m
Max. investment amount 2

Optional extension possible? l Yes l No
Other
Photovoltaic / Planning List EN-XXX_Dimensioning-Grid-Connected_PL-100318-12269800 477

Building Specications F
O
Highest point of roof with PV installation (H) . m
Eaves length (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m
Vergeboard length (O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m D

H
Width of building (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m S
Roof pitch (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m T B
Roof construction
No. of rafters rafter dimensions (h x w) mm with rafters
Axial rafter spacing (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

F
No. of purlins purlin dimension (h x w) mm
O
Axial purlin spacing (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m
P
Distance of installation to roof ridge (F) . . . . m
D
H
T B
Roof construction
with purlins
If external lightning protection in place

Sketch dimension/position of arrestor in the drawing.
Please contact a lightning protection expert, and let us
know the requirements for proper integration of the PV
plant into the lightning protection system.
Number of arrestors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eaves height (h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

h
Lightning protection
Roof shape l Saddleback roof l Flat roof l Shed roof l Hip roof l Pavillion roof
l Kerb roof l Saddleback roof with partial hip l Other
Roong type l Slate l Irish slate l Plain tile l Pantile l Concrete roof tile, type
l Bitumen l Roong cardboard l Gravel l Corrugated bre cement or Asbestos
l Proled metal sheeting / sandwich (sheet strength _____ mm) l Other
Roof elements l Chimney l Roof windows l Dormer l Antenna l Lightning rod

l Other (e.g. overhead power lines)
Thermal insulation? l Yes l No
Roof supporting construction
Accessibility l Crane necessary l Scaffolding necessary Driveway access: l Yes l No
Roof openings for cable feed-through l Venting tiles l Other roof penetrations l Not existing
Are roof refurbishments to be expected? l Yes l No
478 EN-XXX_Dimensioning-Grid-Connected_PL-100318-12269800
Shadow Situation
Please plot in coordinate diagram:
Roof area with correct orientation
Roof area that can be utilized for solar installation (place centre of installation in point of origin).
Roof elements (chimney, dorm, antennas etc. indicate height)
Nearby buildings and trees (approx. distance and height)
Overhead lines (power, telephone)
Other shadow sources (protruding construction elements etc.)
To take all possible shadow sources into account, it is advisable to request information
about future planting or construction projects in the direct neighbourhood.
NORTH
0
WEST EAST
270 90
0 5 10 SOUTH
180
EN-XXX_Dimensioning-Grid-Connected_PL-100318-12269800 479
Installation Design Lines
Module orientation l Vertical l Horizontal Single line length DC cable
Modules Grid Inverter (variation A) m
Module direction
from 90 East over 180 South to 270 West Modules surge arresting device /
(in northern hemisphere) branch connection (variation B) m
Module inclination Surge arresting device / branch connection

(from 0 = horizontal to 90 = vertical) Grid Inverter (variation B) m
Module eld Solar module field

Total no. of modules
No. of modules next to each other
No. of modules above each other
No. of mounting rails per row

Variation A Variation B
No. of installation rails per row
Mounting rail type Surge arresting device

or branch connection
Rafter bracket type DC cable
Cross re-enforcement planned l Yes l No

Grid Inverter
Grid Inverter (no multistring!)
Location for module connection box (if existing)
AC cable
Where can the module mounting system be grounded? Sub distrib. board
AC cable
Location of electricity meter

l Cellar l Corridor Main distrib. board
l Living space l Storage room
l Outside of building distance
Individual line lengths AC cables
l Other location Grid inverter sub distrib. board m
Free meter slot? l Yes l No Sub distrib. Board main distrib. Board m
(according to the connection conditions
of the grid operating utility company) What kind of protection does
the grid operator require
Location for the Grid Inverter for the main distrib. Board?
l At electricity meter
l Other location Cable laying location and type
Of main DC line
Location for external DC disconnector (if existing)
Of AC connection line
Are wall breaks required? l Yes l No

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
On Roof Module Mounting System TRIC A HDC

Sistema de montaje de mdulos TRIC A HDC

Sistema di montaggio moduli sul tetto TRIC A HDC

Photovoltaic / Mounting System XB-INT_TRIC-A-HDC_MA-100804-12219H00 481
EN Important Notes
The dimensioning of the mounting system (number of
roof anker etc.) should be specically carried out for
each individual project, following the specied struc-
tural engineering standards and regulations.
las fuerzas surgiendas (fuerzade peso,carga elica y por
nieve) es siempre condicin de utilizacin
Deve essere garantita un'adeguata sottostruttura per il
montaggio cio di una sottostuttura ingrado di sostene-
re le forze (peso proprio, carico di vento e di neve) che
si verranno a creare.
S13
17Nm
482 XB-INT_TRIC-A-HDC_MA-100804-12219H00
0
45
x.
ma
m
in.
90
0
S15
30Nm
2
XB-INT_TRIC-A-HDC_MA-100804-12219H00 483
S8
17Nm
m x. 4
m
in. 5
a
15 0
0
5
m x. 4
m
in. 5
a
15 0
0
mm
.5
min
Cross Bonding (Only When Required) / Montaje en cruz (slo en caso necesario) / Connessione ad incrocio (solo se
necessario)
Equipotential Bonding / Equilibrio del potencial / Potenziale di equalizzazione
488 WAGNER & CO Zimmermannstrae 12 D-35091 Clbe/Marburg (06421) 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-22
Free Standing Mounting System TRIC F

Estructura de montaje para tejado plano TRIC F

Struttura di supporto per piano TRIC F
EN
DE Important Notes TRIC F
The dimensioning of the mounting system (number of
mounting triangels) should be specically carried out for
each individual project, following the specied structural
engineering standards and regulations.
ES
montaje (nmero de tringulos) segn cada proyecto y
conforme con la normativa vigente.
Comprobar las condiciones de suelo o tejado que va a
soportar las fuerzas de nieve y viento.
Il dimensionamento del sistema di montaggio (Numero
dei triangoli di supporto) deve essere eseguito conside-
rando le norme rispettive.
montaggio cio di una sottostuttura in grado di sostene-
re le forze (peso proprio, carico di vento e di neve) che si
verranno a creare.
TRIC F Quer

Photovoltaic / Mounting System XB-INT_TRIC-F_MA-100930-12212F00 489
TRIC F TRIC F Quer
10
00
16
70
10 00
ax
50
.1
0
19
90
11
90
TRIC F 1
TRIC F Quer 2
TRIC F 15 15-22
18 - 43
TRIC F 30 22-38
TRIC F 45 38-60
490 XB-INT_TRIC-F_MA-100930-12212F00
0
00
x 12
ma
ax
Am
ax
Am
ax
Am B = Amax/4
ax
Am
Amax --->
B
EN ES IT
vref [m/s] H= H= H= H=
0 - 300 m 300 - 500 m 500 - 700 m 700 - 900 m
S0 [kN/m] Amax [mm] S0 [kN/m] Amax [mm] S0 [kN/m] Amax [mm] S0 [kN/m] Amax [mm]
22,5 0,81 1.720 1,04 1.500 1,63 1.200 2,37 920
25,0 0,89 1.500 1,60 1.090 2,58 860 3,83 630
30,0 0,89 1.090 1,60 920 2,58 710 3,83 550
25,0 1,11 1.330 2,00 1.000 3,23 710 4,78 520
25,0 1,29 1.200 2,37 860 3,86 630 5,76 460
30,0 1,29 1.000 2,37 750 3,86 570 5,76 410
TRIC F 30 / <10m
H = meters above sea level / metros sobre el nivel del mar / metri sul livello del mare
S0 = ground snow load / carga de nieve en suelo / Carico di neve al suolo
vref = reference wind speed / velocidad del viento de referencia / Velocit vento di riferimento
XB-INT_TRIC-F_MA-100930-12212F00 491
S13
17Nm
M8 x 40
1 [] C [mm] A [mm]
10 168 500
TRIC F 15 15 271 670
20 464 820
25 105 970
Modul
TRIC F 30 30 278 1.120 Module
Module
35 525 1.250
40 89 1.378
45 274 1.493
TRIC F 45 50 486 1.597
55 734 1.689
60 1.071 1.768
2 [] C [mm] A [mm]
20 16 470
25 79 550 A
TRIC F
30 159 620 2
Quer
35 261 690
40 403 760
C
492 XB-INT_TRIC-F_MA-100930-12212F00
max 200 max 200
Mounting on steal beams / Montaje en vigas de acero /Installazione su portanti in acciaio

10
,5
S13
17Nm
XB-INT_TRIC-F_MA-100930-12212F00 493
Mounting on pan tiles / Montaje en tejados de tejas / Installazione su coperture a tegole
S17
30Nm
Mounting concrete bricks / Montaje en losas de hormign / Installazione su blocchi di cemento

12
S13
17Nm
494 XB-INT_TRIC-F_MA-100930-12212F00
Mounting on gravel base plate set / Montaje en chapa de grava / Installazione su piastre portaghiaia
max 30
G2
/3
ma G1
x. 5 /3

max 30
5,2 Use protective underlay 2

Ponga debajo una estera de
proteccin
Mettere sotto la stuoia per la

protezione della costruzione
XB-INT_TRIC-F_MA-100930-12212F00 495
EN ES IT Gravel load / Carga de grava / Zavorra necessaria G [kg]
vref [m/s]
22,5 105 172,5 232,5

25,0 135 217,5 285
27,5 172,5 270 352,5
30,0 210 330 427,5
TRIC F 30 / <10m / < 800m (inland / interior / interno)
vref = reference wind speed / velocidad del viento de referencia / Velocit vento di riferimento
G = Gravel load in kg per m module surface, incl. safety factor acc. to DIN 1055-100
Carga de grava en kg por m supercie de mdulo incl. coeciente de seguridad segn DIN 1055-100
Zavorra necessaria in kg per m di supercie moduli, considerati i coeff. di sicurezza secondo la Norma DIN 1055-100
Installation across the roof pitch / Instalacin transversal a la inclinacin del techo / Installazione perpendicolare alla
pendenza della falda
496 XB-INT_TRIC-F_MA-100930-12212F00
TRIC F Module installation / Montaje de mdulos / Montaggio moduli
S13
17Nm
M8 x 30
XB-INT_TRIC-F_MA-100930-12212F00 497
0
20
x.1
ma
> 10
1x
S13
17Nm
2
1
498 XB-INT_TRIC-F_MA-100930-12212F00
S8
17Nm
2
m x. 3
m
in. 0
a
1
15 0
0
m x. 4
m
in. 0
a
1 2
15 0
0
2
!
XB-INT_TRIC-F_MA-100930-12212F00 499
TRIC F Quer Module installation / Montaje de mdulos / Montaggio moduli
0
15 00
n.
mi ax. 3
m
0
15 00
n.
mi ax. 3
m
M8 x 40
S13
17Nm
S8
17Nm

Free Standing Mounting System TRIC F pro

Estructura de montaje para tejado plano TRIC F pro

Sistema di montaggio per tetti piani TRIC F pro

Photovoltaic / Mounting System XB-INT_TRIC-F-pro_MA-100804-1WA20020 501
DE
EN Important Notes
The dimensioning of the mounting system (roof utili-
zation and loads per module) should be specically
carried out for each individual project, following the
specied structural engineering standards and regula-
tions.
forces (weight, wind and snow loads). Water run-off
and run-off directions must be considered.
The roong must be suitable for placing protective un-
derlays. The compatibility of protective underlays and
the roong material has to be assured before begin-
ning with the installation. Especially for soft-PVC roo-
ngs additional measures are required to avoid the
migration of plasticizers. Placing the underlays on PE
or EPDM roong usually is uncritical. In case of doubt
the sarking manufacturer can give advice..
Hay que realizar el dimensionado del sistema de mon-
taje (carga y supercie utilizada de tejado por mdulo
segn el proyecto y conforme a la normativa vigente.
Para una aplicacin correcta es necesario una base s-
lida de jacin que pueda soportar las cargas de vien-
to, nieve y el propio peso de la estructura de montaje..
La cubierta tiene que ser apta para la colocacin de
esteras de proteccin. (con EPDM se requiere una
membrana de separacion, con PVC se usan bandas de
SGMA soldadas, las bandas de betn se pueden apli-
car directamente).
Il dimensionamento del sistema di montaggio (carico
di zavorra per modulo e disposizione sul tetto) deve
montaggio cio di una sottostuttura ingrado di soste-
nere le forze (peso proprio, carico di vento e di neve)
che si verranno a creare. Accertarsi del corretto deus-
so dellacqua piovana e della sua direzione.
Assicurarsi che la supercie del tetto sia idonea alla
posa di strisce di guaina per copertura. Accertarsi pri-
ma dellinstallazione della compatibilit tra le strisce di
guaina e la copertura del tetto. Coperture con teli in
PVC richiedono in particolare appositi accorgimenti,
atti a prevenire la cosiddetta migrazione del plasti-
cante. Lapplicazione su teli in PE o EPDM non compor-
ta generalmente criticit. Rivolgersi in questo caso al
produttore della guaina di copertura.
502 XB-INT_TRIC-F-pro_MA-100804-1WA20020
max. 1700
A: 790-865
B: 940-1000
max. 490
A/B
25 19
2000 (max. 2400)
2
max. 6
XB-INT_TRIC-F-pro_MA-100804-1WA20020 503
Mounting / Montaje / Installazione
L+
22
Modul
Module
Module
A
A
The roong must be suitable for placing protective un-

derlays!
La cubierta tiene que ser apta para la colocacin de este-

ras de proteccin!
Assicurarsi che la supercie del tetto sia idonea alla posa

di strisce di guaina per copertura!
20
00
20
.1
ax
m
40
S13
17Nm
2
M6/M8
M10
M10
M6/M8
S10/6Nm
S13/17Nm
5
B+100
S15
30Nm
10
5,5x19
80
10
80
S8
max. 12000
20 - 30
min. 50 30
0
<5
00
.3
m ax 400
.
A: max 5,5x19
0 B:
100
Kerbstone
Losa
m
ax
.5
Zavorra laterale
0
Required Load / Carga necesaria / Zavorra necessaria
Load per module / Carga por mdulo / Zavorra necessa-

ria per modulo
kg
140
X Edge area 2 module rows at front/back,
120
3 module rows at the side
100 X rea del borde 2 las de mdulos adelante/atrs
X
3 las laterales de mdulos
80 X Margini del tetto 2 le di moduli davanti/dietro
3 le di moduli sui lati
60
Standard area
40 rea estndar
Y Y
Area centrale del
20 tetto
0
0 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 h
EN EN
kg
ES IT ES IT
vref [m/s] GK
kg
___________ 25,0 2 m
22,5 2
_._._._._ 25,0 3
_ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. 22,5 3 [kg] [kN] <---> [kg/m] [kN]
.................... 22,5 - 25,0 2+3 10 0,10 <---> 11,9 0,12
vref = reference wind speed 20 0,20 <---> 15,0 0,15
velocidad de viento de referencia
Velocit vento di riferimento 30 0,29 <---> 18,1 0,18
GK = Terrain type 40 0,39 <---> 21,3 0,21
Tipo de terreno
tipologia terreno 50 0,49 <---> 24,4 0,24
60 0,59 <---> 27,5 0,27
70 0,69 <---> 30,6 0,30
80 0,78 <---> 33,8 0,33
90 0,88 <---> 36,9 0,3
100 0,98 <---> 40,0 0,39
GK 2 GK 3
2
Equipotential Bonding / Unin equipotencial / Potenziale di equalizzazione
S13
17Nm

CERTIFICATE
Commissioning Protocol for a PV-Installation
General Data
Operator of installation Last name, First name
Street
Postal code / City
Telephone, private and work
Location of installation Street

(if not identical with address of operator)
Postal code / City
Contractor Name
Street
Postal code / City
Telephone
Commissioning person Name
Company
Technical Data of the Installation
Solar wattage (kWp)
Module
(manufacturer / type / no. / connection type, serial x parallel)
Grid inverter (no. / type)
Total wattage (kW)
Surge arrester integrated in inverter l yes l no

External surge arrester
(if in place) manufacturer / type / voltage rating
DC circuit ground connection l yes l no

galvanic separation l yes l no
protection class II l yes l no
Mounting racks ground connected l yes l no
if yes, type of ground connector
Reverse current diode, when in place (manufacturer / type / V / A)

2
Module connection line (manufacturer / type (cross section)
DC mains power line, if in place (manufacturer / type / )
DC side, emergency shut-off switch (manufacturer / type)
Cutoff switch (manufacturer / type)
Operation switch (manufacturer / type)
AC side, emergency shut-off switch (manufacturer / type)
Signature, Date
Photovoltaic / Certicate EN-XXX_Commissioning-Protocol-PV_ZT-0304xx-12232700 513

SERVICE PROTOCOL
Measuring Protocol Sheet no.____ of ____
Photovoltaic Installation
Operator and location
Measured values, electrical installation of the building

Resistance of building grounding (W) Loop resistance at grid connection point (W)
Inverter, AC side
No. Type Serial no. Connection Loop resistance Insulator resistance AC line RISO-AC (MW)
L1; L2; L3 Rloop (W)
L PE LN N PE
Weather conditions on location during measurements
Date ___________ Time ___________ Temperature (C) ___________

l sunshine l partially clouded l overcast l rain
Inverter, DC side
No. String Open circuit voltage Short circuit string current Operational current Insulator resistance
no. Uoc (V) Isc (A) Ic (A) RISO-DC (MW)
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2 2
3
4
5
Measurements within tolerance: l yes l no, adjustments necessary l failure values marked
Date, signature (technician in charge) Date, signature (test engineer in charge)
Photovoltaic / Service Protocol EN-XXX_Measuring-Protocol_SP-0711xx-12232800 515

Notes About the Measurements
This is a principle description of the measurements ad-
dressed at the installer. Please refer to the manufacturers
manuals for precise procedures.
Resistance of the building surge arrestor

Measure with multi-meter or installation tester at ground
rod.
Loop resistance at grid-connection point
Measure impedance, feeding phase(s) and PEN at ter-
minal clamp in LVS in the unmeteredd area of the utility.
Insulator resistance RISO-AC of AC line
Cut off inverter, measure L1 and N against potential
equalization.
Loop resistance Rloop of AC line
Cut-off AC plug from inverter and measure impedance
between L and N.
Open circuit voltage (UoC) Uoc
Unloaded PV-generator at plus and minus line with DC
voltmeter.
Short-circuit string current Isc
With short circuit switch and clamp-on ammeter.
Operational current Ic
DC measurement of string currents with DC clamp-on
ammeter during operation of inverter and with tuned
MPP.
Insulator resistance RISO of DC line
Cut off surge arrestor, short-circuit DC line using a short-
circuit switch, measure between a conductor and po-
tential equalization. Figure 1 Installation tester
For the measurements a standard installation meter,

(Fig.1), a multi-meter (Fig. 2) and a short-circuit switch with
high switching power (Fig. 3) are required.
Figure 2 Multi-meter with DC current measuring range Figure 3 Short-circuit switch

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
CORRESPONDENCE
General Business Conditions

of Wagner & Co Solartechnik Germany
General Business Conditions of Wagner & Co. Solartechnik GmbH (hereinafter 4.6. Should the Buyer default or justiable doubts regarding the Buyers solven-
referred to as Seller) applicable in business relationships with corporations cy or creditworthiness arise, then the Seller shall have the right -without waiving
(hereinafter referred to as Buyer). any other rights the Seller may have - to demand payment in advance or securi-
Dated: January 2011 ties for deliveries or services not yet performed or to demand that all claims
are payable upon receipt in this business relationship. The Sellers obligation to
1.General deliver or perform is put on hold for the duration of the Buyers default.
1.1. The following terms are exclusively applicable to all deliveries and services 4.7. If an annual bonus was agreed upon, the bonus calculation is based upon
of the Seller for the duration of the business relationship. Any conicting conr- the net amounts for each invoice for deliveries of that business year, perhaps off-
mations given by the Buyer referring to their own business terms and conditions set by credits of any kind from that same business year.
are hereby objected to.
1.2. The Business Conditions apply only to contractors and legal entities operat- 5. Passing of the Risk
ing under public law or public special funds. The risk passes from the Seller to the Buyer at the time the goods are transferred
at the factory or storage facility, if the goods are being shipped the risk passes
2. Offers and Orders as soon as the shipment is handed over to the person responsible for the ship-
2.1. A legally binding agreement exists only after a written or e-mailed order ment or as soon as the shipment leaves the factory or storage facility for the
conrmation from the Seller. purpose of shipment. If the shipment is delayed due to the Buyers request or
2.2. The Seller reserves the right to technical modications regarding the con- at the Buyers fault, then the risk passes from the time of the notication that the
struction, form and material up to and including the period of delivery, provided shipment was ready.
they are reasonable for the Buyer.
6. Default of Acceptance, Damages due to Default of Acceptance
3. Delivery, Shipment, Period of Delivery, Default The Seller has the right to demand 25% of the purchase price of any goods not
3.1. Save any other agreement, deliveries are conducted Ex Works (EXW) (In- accepted should the Buyer not accept the goods even after a demand to and
coterms 2000). The goods are covered by transport insurance. Within Germany a reasonable extension of time without having the right to refuse acceptance.
transportation is free of charge for a net value of more than 1 000 for solar ther- The demand of compensation for higher damages, as well as the introduction
mal goods and more than 5 000 for PV goods (except for delivery of concrete of proof regarding the lack of any damages or of signicantly lesser damages
tanks or to the German Islands). Additional costs for express shipping are to be remains open to both parties.
paid by the Buyer.
3.2. The time of delivery indicated by the Seller are only binding if explicitly 7. Cancellation
agreed upon in writing. The conditions under which contracts may be cancelled must be agreed upon
3.3. Should the Seller be in default with services and/or the delivery of goods, in writing.
the Buyer must allow a reasonable respite of at least 20 work days. The Buyer
may withdraw from the contract should the Seller fail to deliver or perform the 8. Condition, Quality and Measurements
service within the respite period. Any other claims by the Buyer are excluded Quality and measurements are exclusively determined by the contractual speci-
except in the case of malicious intent or gross negligence. cations and not by any public comments made by the Seller or a third party.
3.4. The Seller is not liable for any default in delivery or service due to force ma-
jeur or any other unforeseen events occurring through no fault of the Seller (for 9. Software
example but not limited to disruptions, strike, lack of transportation, ofcial in- 9.1. The Buyer obtains only the non-exclusive, non-transferable usage rights to
terferences, problems obtaining materials or power supply problems), that may the software. Without the previous, written consent of the Seller, the Buyer may
also occur within the sphere of suppliers of the Seller, even if a binding delivery not reproduce, alter or make the software available to third parties. This clause
date was agreed upon. The Seller has the right under such circumstances to ex- also applies to altered or supplemented software. The Buyer is obligated to im-
tend the delivery date or date of service respectively by the duration of the inter- pose these obligations to the acquirer should a resale or transfer occur.
ference or to withdraw from the contract, even if the interference occurs during a 9.2. All rights, especially copyrights to the software, stay with the Seller.
period of default. Any claims for damages are precluded in cases of force majeur 9.3. The Seller is not liable in any case of software defects to provide unreason-
or any other unforeseen events or events occurring through no fault of the Seller. able troubleshooting. Furthermore the General Business Conditions remain in
effect, particularly with regards to any limitation of liability pursuant to section 14.
4. Prices, Terms of Payment
4.1. All prices are calculated ex factory or storage facility plus packing and ship- 10. Reservation of Title
ping expenses. The list prices at the time of the close of contract are applicable. 10.1 Business Relationship Clause/Checking Account Reservation
In the case of call-off orders and any other agreements with recurring obliga- The Seller reserves the right of title to all goods delivered by him until the Buyer
tions, the price is determined on the date of delivery/service by the respective has satised all claims arising out of the business relationship. This also applies to
list price on that date. individual or total claims the Seller has, that were factored into a current account
4.2. The Seller may adjust the price according to the extent of the changes if a and an account balance was stricken.
change in the price calculation occurs between close of contract and delivery/ 10.2.Extended Reservation of Title
performance (for example salary increases, increased price of commodities). 10.2.1. Manufacturers and Processing Clause
4.3. All prices are net prices plus value added tax (VAT), if applicable. Un- Any processing, manufacturing or transformation of the delivered goods is done
less otherwise stipulated, the costs for any recycling, re-use or disposal un- by the Buyer on behalf of the Seller. No obligations for the Seller are created
der EC-Guideline 2002/95/EG (WEEE) and the Gesetz ber das Inverkeh- thereby. The Seller is the owner of the processed, manufactured or transformed
rbringen, die Rcknahme und die umweltvertrgliche Entsorgung von good(s). If the new product is the result of a combination of various goods sub-
Elektro- und Elektronikgerten (ElektroG)* are not included in the price. ject to reservation of title by different owners, the Seller retains the right to co-
*(German law regarding the placing and disposal of electric appliances and ownership of the product. The Sellers ownership rights correspond proportion-
electronic devices) ally to the value of the goods delivered subject to reservation of title.
4.4. Offsetting is only permitted in the case of the Buyers uncontested counter- 10.2.2. Assignment in Advance
claims or counterclaims that were determined in a legally binding fashion. The 10.2.2.1. If it is part of the Buyers ordinary course of business to install or sell
Buyer only has a right of retention if it is based on the same contractual relation- goods to a purchaser, then any and all of the Buyers claims arising from such
ship and it is acknowledged or established in a legally binding way. transactions against the purchaser are assigned to the Seller at the time the sales
4.5. Checks will only be accepted on account of performance if previously contract between the Seller and Buyer is concluded. The same applies to goods
agreed upon. subject to reservation of title that are sold after being processed or combined with
General / AGB EN-XXX_AGB-Wagner-D_KO-101104-1128D900 517

goods in the sole ownership of the Buyer. The Buyer assigns the claims arising from 12.7. The Seller assumes no liability based on public statements in his advertise-
such sales in their total amount to the Seller. The same applies also to those situa- ments or the advertisements by third parties as long as the Buyer cannot show,
tions where the goods subject to reservation of title are installed or sold together that the decision to buy was inuenced by the advertisement, that the Seller
with other goods subject to reservation of title that do not belong to the Seller. knew or should have known the statements or if the statements were already
In these cases the Buyer assigns the claims emerging from the sale or installation corrected at the time the decision to buy was made.
in the amount of the value of the goods subject to reservation of title with all 12.8. Any liability for defects is excluded if the merchandise was not used in ac-
ancillary rights and ranking higher that the balance of the claim, to the Seller. The cordance with the instruction manual or instructions given by the Seller or other-
assignment occurs in advance at this time. The Seller accepts the assignment. wise is improperly installed, used or stored or is used in a manner contrary to the
Upon the Buyers demand the Seller will release the assigned claims, so long stipulated manner in the contract or when the maintenance required as per the
as the value of the assigned claims is more than 20% higher than the claims to instruction manual is not conducted, or if the Buyer or a third party makes any
be secured. alterations or modications to the product or parts of the product without the
10.2.2.2. At this time the Buyer assigns to the Seller any arising claims based on oth- permission of the Seller, unless the Buyer can show, that those circumstances are
er legal grounds (Insurance, Torts) regarding the goods subject to reservation of not the cause for the reported defect.
title for security purposes in their full amount. The Seller accepts such assignment. 12.9. The Buyers claims regarding the reimbursement of expenses are limited
Upon the Buyers demand the Seller will release the assigned claims, so long
to a at rate for costs of transportation and travel, labor and material. The same
as the value of the assigned claims is more than 20% higher than the claims to
is the case for claims based on a right of recourse. The Buyer may request the
be secured.
applicable at rates from the Seller.
10.2.2.3. The Buyer is authorized to collect the assigned claim after the assign-
12.10. In a case of corporate liability regarding newly manufactured goods, the
ment has taken place. The Sellers authority to collect the claims remains unaf-
Buyer has a claim against the Seller after successful reduction or return by the
fected. The Seller pledges not to collect the claims for as long as the Buyer is not
consumer. 478 BGB is applicable with the stipulation, that the Seller in case of
in delay of payment and in compliance with any and all other obligations.
such reduction by the consumer is only liable for the amount of the reduction
10.2.2.4. The Buyer is obligated upon request of the Seller to inform the Seller of
that was applied between the Buyer or distributor and the consumer. In the case
the assigned claims and their debtors, to give the Seller all necessary information
of a return only the purchase price the Buyer was charged with will be reim-
for collection, to deliver all records in connection with the claims and to inform
bursed.
the debtors of the assignment.
12.11. There is no liability for material defects in the sale of used products, sec-
10.3.For as long as the reservation of title exists, the Buyer is not entitled to
pledge or assign the delivered goods as security, or otherwise surrender the ond quality products, products sold as is or outclassed goods. The same ap-
goods to third parties except within the ordinary course of business. plies to the sale of prototypes.
10.4. The Buyer is not entitled to offset counterclaims while the reservation of
title exists and until the counterclaim is acknowledged or found to be legally 13. Returns
binding. 13.1. The return of appliances or goods of any kind i.e. returns for credit, repairs
10.5. The Seller has the right to repossess the goods subject to reservation of and claims have to be agreed to by issuing a return number. Without a return
title and for this purpose enter on to the premises of the Buyer should the Buyer number it may not be accepted or the goods may be sent back at the Buyers
be in delayed payment, or if insolvency proceedings have been commenced expense. In case of an agreed upon return of goods the Buyer bears the costs of
regarding the Buyers assets or should the Buyers business be transferred to a packing and shipping as well as any other expenses the Seller may have in order
third party. The repossession shall only constitute a withdrawal from the contract to process the return and to make the item available for re-sale.
if the Seller declares the same in writing. The Seller is authorized to dispose of 13.2. A return of appliances or goods of any kind is generally excluded, if such
the goods. However, the Seller must offset any proceeds minus any deductions items were already installed or used or if they no longer are included in the Sell-
for reasonable expenses for the disposal to the liabilities of the Buyer. ers current sales line according to the current pricelist, or if the manufacturing
or delivery were completed more than 12 months ago. The value of the goods
11. Disposal of Old Appliances returned must be at least 200 net. There is an administrative fee in the amount
The following applies with regards to the obligations under the EC directive of 25% of the value with a minimum of 50. The return of electric appliances is
2002/95/EG (WEEE) and the ElektroG: excluded.
11.1.The Buyer assumes the obligation to dispose of the delivered goods at his 13.3. Goods returned at no cost for repair will be inspected and repaired as the
own expense after the end of usage in compliance with the legal mandates. The case may be. By returning the items the Buyer agrees to bear the repair costs.
Buyer releases the Seller from the obligations pursuant to 10 Abs. 2 ElektroG An estimate is provided only after prior request. The return shipping expenses of
(Sellers obligation to take back) and any claims of third parties in connection repaired or unrepaired goods will be charged.
with these obligations.
11.2. The Seller may in his own discretion at the expense of the Buyer accept any 14. Limitations of Liability
returned goods and dispose of them in accordance with any legal obligations. 14.1. Liability claims and indemnity claims (following: Liability Claims) are ex-
11.3. The Buyer is obligated to make it a contractual obligation with commercial cluded except in cases of intentional or grossly negligent conduct independent
parties to whom he transfers the goods to dispose of the devices in accordance of the nature of the breach of duty.
with the legal obligations after the end of usage and to make these commercial 14.2. The Seller is liable for any negligent conduct in case of a material breach of
parties pledge to do the same should they also transfer the goods. Should the contractual obligations, however only up to the amount of contract typical and
Buyer neglect to transfer said obligation, then the Buyer remains obligated to foreseeable damages. Damages based on lost prots as well as any other col-
take the goods back after usage and dispose of them in accordance with the
lateral or secondary damage cannot be claimed.
legal requirements at his own expense.
14.3. The limitations and exclusions of liability under subsection 14.1. and 14.2.
11.4. The Sellers right of release through the Buyer does not become time-
do not apply to loss or injury to life, limb or health, to claims based on fraudulent
barred under the statute of limitations until after the passage of two years after
conduct by the Seller or claims because of liability for guaranteed characteristics
the nal usage of the device.
and for claims pursuant to the ProdHaftG (German Product Liability Act).
12. Notice of Defects, Buyers Rights Regarding Defects

15. Final Clause
12.1. The Buyer must inspect goods received immediately after receipt regard-
15.1. As long as there are no written agreements to the contrary these terms
ing defects, condition and guaranteed features. The Buyer must report apparent
constitute the complete stipulation between the Seller and the Buyer.
defects within 10 business days from delivery, hidden defects must be reported
15.2. The Buyer must keep secret and not share any information regarding prod-
within 10 days from discovery by written notice to the Seller. Otherwise the ship-
ucts, technical specics and procedure he receives from the Seller in the context
ment will be considered to have been approved.
of their business relationship unless they are common knowledge or the Seller
12.2. The Buyer can only assert the following claims, if he notied the Seller in
writing within the proper time period and made the goods available to the Seller has given permission to share that knowledge. If this condentiality requirement
immediately and freight paid upon request. If the defect reported is justied, the is breached the Buyer must indemnify the Seller for any damages. Additionally
Seller will bear the costs of the cheapest method to return the shipment. the Buyer must pay liquidated damages in the amount of 10 000.
12.3. In the case of justied and timely reported defects the Seller has the choice 15.3. The legal relations between the Buyer and the Seller shall be governed
of type of supplementary performance between curing the defect or replace- by German law excluding the UN-Convention on Contracts for the International
ment delivery. If the Seller opts to cure the defect it is in the Sellers discretion to Sale of Goods, including the signing and execution of the contract.
do so by repair or exchange of defective parts. 15.4. Place of performance under this agreement is the Sellers respective fac-
12.4. The Seller is entitled to carry out a supplemental performance twice. The tory or storage facility. The venue for all claims arising from this contract is the
Buyer can at his discretion withdraw from the contract or can reasonably reduce location of the registered ofce of the Seller. The Seller reserves the right to take
the purchase price should the second supplemental performance fail. legal action before the court having general jurisdiction over the location of the
12.5. If the defect reported is unjustied and caused an extensive investigation registered ofce of the Buyer.
the Buyer may be charged with the costs of the investigation. 15.5. If at any time any provision of the General Business Clauses is or becomes
12.6. The statute of limitations for the report of defects is two years from the time invalid, the validity of the remaining provisions shall not in any way be affected
of the passage of risk. or impaired.

+49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 Fax 80 07-596
For Your Notes
For Your Notes
Printed on 100 % recycled paper Wagner & Co, 2010 Part No. 816 101 71 EN-XXX_Technical-Handbook_TI-101123-1100A500
Wagner & Co Wagner Solar UK Ltd.

Solartechnik GmbH Unit 2, Keynor Farm
Zimmermannstrae 12 Chalk Lane
D-35091 Clbe/Marburg Sidlesham, Chichester
Tel. +49 (0) 64 21 80 07-0 West Sussex, PO20 7NQ UK
Fax +49 (0) 64 21 80 07-596 Phone: +44 (0) 1243 649 035
info_int@wagner-solar.com info@wagner-solaruk.com
Power. Heat. Future www.wagner-solar.com www.wagner-solaruk.com

Wagner Solar Technical Handbook 2009 en XXX Technical Handbook TI 101208 1100A500 Web 1

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Wagner Solar Technical Handbook 2009 en XXX Technical Handbook TI 101208 1100A500 Web 1

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Technical Handbook 2011/2012

Solar Heating. Solar Electricity.

Name / Email Telephone / Fax Function Languages

Alexander.Storek Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-745 Sales Manager

Emanuelefed.Ostiani Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-787 Technical Support

Max.Werlein Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-714 Technical Support

Julia.Kuhn Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-685 Sales Assistant

Susanne.Boecker Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-759 Sales Assistant,

Maren.Thielemann Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-648 Sales Assistant,

Nina.Mueller Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-977 Marketing Coordinator

Stefan.Thiesen Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-680 Technical Editor

Name / Email Telephone / Fax Function Languages

Inga.Paetsch Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-392 Sales PV Off-Grid Systems

Peter.Hoenen Phone: +49 (0) 6421 8007-336 Product Manager and

How to use this handbook

We wish you sunny times!

Your team at Wagner & Co, in Fall 2010

Solar Collectors 9 1.1

Solar Storage Cylinders 133 1.2

Freshwater Units 201 1.3

Solar Circuit Components 247 1.4

Compact Solar Hot Water Systems 353 1.5

Planning, Start-up, Maintenance 415 1.6

Solar Electricity 469 2

General Business Conditions 517

1.1 Solar Collectors and Racking Systems

EURO Solar Collector Type C20/C22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Flat Plate Solar Collector EURO L42 HTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

LBM Solar Collector 6 AR / 10 AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

EURO Solar Collector L20 MQ AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

EURO TRIC A On-Roof Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

EURO TRIC F Free Standing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

EURO L20 MQ TRIC A and TRIC F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

EURO C20/L20 In-Roof Installation for Pantile Roong. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Roof Bracket Kits (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Roof Bracket Kit BS/SF (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Roof Bracket Kit K A2 Hv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Roof Bracket Kit P (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Roof Bracket Kit PM A2 Hv (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

1.2 Solar Storage Cylinders and Components

ECOplus Solar Cylinder Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

ECOplus Solar Cylinder Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

TERMO Combi Cylinder Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

TERMO Combi Cylinder Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

RATIO Buffer Cylinder Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

RATIO Buffer Cylinder Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Convection Brake CONVECTROL III. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Thermostatic Mixing Valve BM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Electrical Immersion Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

1.3 Freshwater Units

RATIOfresh 250/400 Freshwater Unit

RATIOfresh 200 Fresh Water Station

SUNGOmini Solar Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Solar Controller SUNGO S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Solar Controller SUNGO SXL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Expansion Vessel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 1.5

2/3 Way Electronic Diverter Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Twinex TVA Rapid Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Solar Heat Transfer Liquid DC20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

External Heat Exchangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

1.5 Compact Solar Hot Water Systems 2

SECUterm 200 P / 300 P (Free Standing Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

SECUterm 160 I / 200 I / 300 I (On-Roof Installation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403